SL
Operator's Manual
Mercedes-Benz
Your Operator's Manual
Digital form inside the vehicle
Familiarize yourself with the contents of the Operator's Manual directly via your
vehicle's multimedia system (Menu item "Vehicle").
Booklet inside the vehicle
In addition to the vehicle's Operator's Manual, you can obtain the complete multi-
media system Supplement from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Digital form via the Internet
You can find the Operator's Manual on the Mercedes-Benz homepage.
Digital form as an App
The Mercedes-Benz Guides App is available for free on the Apple
®
App store or
Google Play.
Apple® iOS Android™
Order no. P231 0181 13 Part no. 231 584 61 02 Edition B2019
É23158461020ËÍ
2315846102
SL Operator's Manual
Publication details
Internet
Further information about Mercedes-Benz
vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found
on the following websites:
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)
Editorial office
©
Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or
otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,
without written permission from Daimler AG.
Vehicle manufacturer
Daimler AG
Mercedesstraße 137
70327 Stuttgart
Germany
Symbols
Registered trademarks:
R
Bluetooth
®
is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG Inc.
R
DTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.
R
Dolby
®
and MLP™ are registered trade-
marks of DOLBY Laboratories.
R
BabySmart™, ESP
®
and PRE-SAFE
®
are reg-
istered trademarks of Daimler AG.
R
HomeLink
®
is a registered trademark of
Johnson Controls.
R
iPod
®
and iTunes
®
are registered trade-
marks of Apple Inc.
R
Logic 7
®
is a registered trademark of Har-
man International Industries.
R
Microsoft
®
and Windows media
®
are regis-
tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
R
SIRIUS
®
is a registered trademark of Sirius
XM Radio Inc.
R
HD Radio™ is a registered trademark of
iBiquity Digital Corporation.
R
Gracenote
®
is a registered trademark of
Gracenote, Inc.
R
ZAGAT Survey
®
and related brands are reg-
istered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.
In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-
lowing symbols:
G
WARNING
Warning notes make you aware of dangers
which could pose a threat to your health or
life, or to the health and life of others.
H
Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with infor-
mation on environmentally aware actions or
disposal.
!
Notes on material damage alert you to
dangers that could lead to damage to your
vehicle.
i
Practical tips or further information that
could be helpful to you.
X
This symbol indicates an instruction
that must be followed.
X
Several of these symbols in succes-
sion indicate an instruction with sev-
eral steps.
(Y
page)
This symbol tells you where you can
find more information about a topic.
YY
This symbol indicates a warning or an
instruction that is continued on the
next page.
Dis‐
Dis‐
playplay
This text indicates a message on the
multifunction display/multimedia dis-
play.
Example
G
WARNING
If the front passenger air bag has been acti-
vated, a child on the front passenger seat
may be hit by the front passenger air bag in
the event of an accident. There is a risk of
injury or fatal injury.
NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint
system on a seat protected by an ACTIVE
FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY
to the CHILD can occur.
Read the chapter "Children in the vehicle" .
As at 19.03.2018
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
We urge you to read this Operator's Manual
carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehi-
cle before driving. For your own safety and a
longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and
warning notices in this manual. Ignoring them
could result in damage to the vehicle or per-
sonal injury to you or others.
Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow
instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-
Benz Limited Warranty.
The equipment or product designation of your
vehicle may vary depending on:
R
Model
R
Order
R
Country specification
R
Availability
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to
introduce changes in the following areas:
R
Design
R
Equipment
R
Technical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore
differ from that shown in the descriptions and
illustrations.
The following are integral components of the
vehicle:
R
Digital Operator's Manual
R
Printed Operator's Manual
R
Maintenance Booklet
R
Equipment-dependent supplements
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all
times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all
documents on to the new owner.
Your Operator's Manual:
Digital form inside the vehicle
The Digital Operator's Manual provides
comprehensive and specifically adapted
information on your vehicle's equipment
and multimedia system. It contains infor-
mative animations, individual language
settings and an intuitive search function.
Booklet inside the vehicle
In addition to this manual and the afore-
mentioned digital media, you also have
the option to obtain a comprehensive
printed version of the Supplement for
your multimedia system from your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Digital form via the Internet
The Operator's Manual on the Internet
provides easy access to all information
regarding your vehicle and multimedia
system. It also provides helpful anima-
tions, interesting background information
and a wide array of search options.
Digital form as an App
Using the Mercedes-Benz Guides App,
you can view all the information on your
vehicle and multimedia system via mobile
Internet or download it independently of
network access. Available for smart-
phones or tablets.
Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guides
App may not yet be available in your country.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
A Daimler Company
2315846102
É23158461020ËÍ
Index ....................................................... 4
Digital Operator's Manual .................. 23
Introduction ...........................................23
Operation ............................................... 23
Introduction ......................................... 24
Protecting the environment ...................24
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ...............24
Operator's Manual ................................. 25
Service and vehicle operation ................25
Operating safety .................................... 27
QR code for rescue card ........................ 29
Data storage .......................................... 29
Information on copyright ....................... 31
At a glance ........................................... 32
Cockpit .................................................. 32
Instrument cluster ................................. 33
Multifunction steering wheel ................. 34
Center console ...................................... 35
Overhead control panel .........................38
Door control panel ................................. 39
Safety ................................................... 40
Panic alarm ............................................ 40
Occupant safety .................................... 40
Children in the vehicle ........................... 57
Pets in the vehicle ................................. 59
Driving safety systems ........................... 60
Protection against theft .........................72
Opening and closing ........................... 74
SmartKey ............................................... 74
Doors ..................................................... 79
Trunk ..................................................... 81
Side windows ......................................... 87
Roof .......................................................90
Seats, steering wheel and mir-
rors ....................................................... 97
Correct driver's seat position ................97
Seats ..................................................... 97
Steering wheel ..................................... 103
Mirrors ................................................. 105
Memory function ................................. 107
Lights and windshield wipers .......... 109
Exterior lighting ................................... 109
Interior lighting .................................... 112
Replacing bulbs ................................... 113
Windshield wipers ................................ 113
Climate control ................................. 116
Overview of climate control systems ... 116
Operating the climate control sys-
tems .................................................... 118
Setting the air vents ............................ 122
Driving and parking .......................... 125
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ..... 125
Driving ................................................. 125
DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehi-
cles except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles) ..................................................... 132
DYNAMIC SELECT controller
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................... 133
Automatic transmission ....................... 134
Refueling ............................................. 144
Parking ................................................ 146
Driving tips .......................................... 149
Driving systems ................................... 154
On-board computer and displays .... 190
Important safety notes ........................ 190
Displays and operation ........................ 190
Menus and submenus ......................... 193
Display messages ................................ 205
Warning and indicator lamps ............... 233
Multimedia system ........................... 243
General notes ...................................... 243
Important safety notes ........................ 243
Function restrictions ............................ 243
Operating system ................................ 244
Stowage and features ...................... 249
Stowage areas ..................................... 249
Features .............................................. 252
2
Contents
Maintenance and care ...................... 265
Engine compartment ........................... 265
Overview of the engine compart-
ment .................................................... 269
ASSYST PLUS ...................................... 269
Care ..................................................... 270
Breakdown assistance ..................... 276
Where will I find...? .............................. 276
Flat tire ................................................ 278
Battery (vehicle) .................................. 282
Jump-starting ....................................... 285
Towing and tow-starting ...................... 288
Fuses ...................................................290
Wheels and tires ............................... 293
Important safety notes ........................ 293
Operation ............................................ 293
Winter operation .................................. 295
Tire pressure ....................................... 296
Loading the vehicle .............................. 303
All about wheels and tires ................... 306
Changing a wheel ................................ 313
Wheel and tire combinations ...............318
Technical data ................................... 319
Information regarding technical data
............................................................. 319
Vehicle electronics .............................. 319
Identification plates .............................320
Service products and filling capaci-
ties ...................................................... 321
Vehicle data ......................................... 326
Contents
3
1, 2, 3 ...
12 V socket
see Sockets
A
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Display message ............................ 206
Function/notes ................................ 60
Important safety notes .................... 60
Warning lamp .................................236
Accident
Automatic measures after an
accident ...........................................56
Activating media mode
General notes ................................ 248
Activating/deactivating cooling
with air dehumidification .................118
Active Blind Spot Assist
Activating/deactivating (on-
board computer) ............................ 199
Display message ............................ 223
Function/information .................... 184
Active Body Control (ABC)
CURVE ........................................... 170
Vehicle level .................................. 168
Active Body Control (ABC) (except
Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Comfort ......................................... 169
Driving dynamics display ............... 170
Normal level .................................. 169
Operation/notes ............................ 168
Raised level ................................... 169
Sport .............................................. 169
Sport Plus ...................................... 169
Vehicle level .................................. 168
Active Body Control (ABC)
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Comfort ......................................... 172
Driving dynamics display ............... 172
Normal level .................................. 171
Operation/notes ............................ 170
Raised level ................................... 171
Sport .............................................. 172
Vehicle level .................................. 170
Active Body Control (except
Mercedes-AMG Vehicles)
Display message ............................ 221
Active Body Control (Mercedes-
AMG Vehicles)
Display message ............................ 221
Active Brake Assist
Activating or deactivating .............. 198
Display message ............................ 211
Function/notes ................................ 63
Active Brake Assist with cross-
traffic function
Activating or deactivating .............. 198
Display message ............................ 212
Function/notes ................................ 70
Important safety notes .................... 70
Warning lamp ................................. 241
Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC
Calling up a speed ......................... 158
Cruise control lever ....................... 158
Deactivating ................................... 161
Display message ............................ 224
Displays in the multifunction dis-
play ................................................ 160
Driving tips .................................... 162
Function/notes ............................. 156
Important safety notes .................. 156
Indicator and warning lamp ........... 241
Setting the specified minimum
distance ......................................... 160
Stopping ........................................ 159
Storing a speed .............................. 158
Warning lamp ................................. 241
Active Driving Assistance pack-
age ...................................................... 184
Active Lane Keeping Assist
Activating/deactivating (on-
board computer) ............................ 199
Display message ............................ 223
Function/information .................... 187
Active light function ......................... 111
Active Parking Assist
Canceling ....................................... 179
Detecting parking spaces .............. 176
Display message ............................ 224
Exiting a parking space .................. 178
General notes ................................ 175
4
Index
Important safety notes .................. 175
Parking .......................................... 177
Active Steering Assist
Activating/deactivating .................198
Display message ............................ 226
Adaptive adjustable damping
Driving dynamics display ............... 168
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 70
Adaptive Brake Assist
Function/notes ................................ 64
Adaptive brake lights .......................... 65
Adaptive Damping System
Function/notes ............................. 167
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Display message ............................ 218
Function/notes ............................. 111
Switching on/off ........................... 112
Additives (engine oil) ........................ 324
Address book
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 243
Adjusting the volume
Multimedia system ........................ 244
Air bags
Deployment ..................................... 53
Display message ............................ 215
Front air bag (driver, front
passenger) ....................................... 46
Head bag ......................................... 47
Important safety notes .................... 45
Introduction ..................................... 45
Knee bag .......................................... 46
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) ............................................... 48
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator
lamps ............................................... 41
Side impact air bag .......................... 47
AIR FLOW ........................................... 119
Air vents
Glove box ....................................... 123
Important safety notes .................. 122
Setting ........................................... 122
Setting the blower output of the
AIRSCARF vents ............................. 124
Setting the center air vents ........... 123
Setting the side air vents ............... 123
Switching AIRSCARF on/off .......... 102
Air-conditioning system
see Climate control
AIRSCARF
Switching on/off ........................... 102
AIRSCARF vents
Setting the blower output .............. 124
Alarm
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 72
Switching off (ATA) .......................... 72
Switching the function on/off
(ATA) ................................................ 72
Alarm system
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Ambient lighting
Setting the brightness (on-board
computer) ...................................... 200
Setting the color (on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 200
AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 202
Anti-lock braking system
see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Anti-skid chains
see Snow chains
Anti-theft alarm system
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Ashtray ............................................... 254
Assistance display (on-board
computer) .......................................... 198
Assistance menu (on-board com-
puter) .................................................. 197
ASSYST PLUS
Displaying a service message ........ 270
Hiding a service message .............. 270
Resetting the service interval dis-
play ................................................ 270
Service message ............................ 269
Special service requirements ......... 270
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Activating/deactivating ................... 72
Function ........................................... 72
Switching off the alarm .................... 72
ATTENTION ASSIST
Activating/deactivating ................. 198
Display message ............................ 222
Function/notes ............................. 183
Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 195
Index
5
Audio system
see Digital Operator's Manual
Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
see Qualified specialist workshop
Authorized workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop
AUTO lights
Display message ............................ 217
see Lights
Automatic car wash (care) ...............271
Automatic engine start (ECO
start/stop function) .......................... 130
Automatic engine switch-off (ECO
start/stop function) .......................... 129
Automatic headlamp mode .............. 109
Automatic transmission
Accelerator pedal position ............. 138
Changing gear ............................... 138
Display message ............................ 228
Drive program ................................ 138
Drive program display .................... 135
Driving tips .................................... 138
DYNAMIC SELECT button (all
vehicles except Mercedes-AMG
vehicles) ........................................ 132
DYNAMIC SELECT controller
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .............. 133
Emergency running mode .............. 144
Engaging drive position .................. 137
Engaging neutral ............................ 136
Engaging park position automati-
cally ............................................... 136
Engaging reverse gear ................... 136
Engaging the park position ............ 136
Gearshift recommendation ............ 143
Kickdown ....................................... 138
Manual shifting .............................. 141
Oil temperature (on-board com-
puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 202
Overview ........................................ 134
Problem (malfunction) ................... 144
Pulling away ................................... 128
Selector lever ................................ 134
Starting the engine ........................ 128
Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 141
Transmission position display ........ 135
Transmission positions .................. 137
Automatic transmission emer-
gency mode ....................................... 144
B
Back button ....................................... 244
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 61
Battery (SmartKey)
Checking .......................................... 77
Important safety notes .................... 76
Replacing ......................................... 77
Battery (vehicle)
Charging ........................................ 284
Display message ............................ 219
Important safety notes .................. 282
Jump starting ................................. 285
Overview ........................................ 282
Replacing ....................................... 285
Belt
see Seat belts
Belt warning ......................................... 44
Blind Spot Assist
see Active Blind Spot Assist
Bluetooth
®
Searching for a mobile phone ........ 247
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 243
Telephony ...................................... 246
Brake Assist System
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Brake Assist with cross-traffic
function
Function/notes ................................ 61
Important safety notes .................... 61
Brake fluid
Display message ............................ 211
Notes ............................................. 324
Brake force distribution
see EBD (electronic brake force
distribution)
Brake lamps
Adaptive ........................................... 65
Display message ............................ 217
Brakes
ABS .................................................. 60
Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 64
BAS .................................................. 61
6
Index
Brake Assist with cross-traffic
function ........................................... 61
Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 324
Display message ............................ 206
EBD .................................................. 69
High-performance brake system .... 152
Important safety notes .................. 151
Maintenance .................................. 152
Parking brake ................................ 147
Riding tips ...................................... 151
Warning lamp ................................. 235
Breakdown assistance
Reflective safety jacket .................. 276
Where will I find...? ........................ 276
see Flat tire
see Towing away
Brightness control (instrument
cluster lighting) ................................... 33
C
California
Important notice for retail cus-
tomers and lessees .......................... 25
Calling up a malfunction
see Display messages
Car
see Vehicle
Care
Car wash ........................................ 271
Exhaust pipe .................................. 275
Exterior lights ................................ 275
Matte finish ................................... 273
Notes ............................................. 270
Paint .............................................. 272
Power washer ................................ 272
Rear view camera .......................... 275
Sensors ......................................... 275
Washing by hand ........................... 271
Wheels ........................................... 274
Windows ........................................ 274
Wiper blades .................................. 274
CD
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 243
CD player (on-board computer) ........ 196
Center console
Lower section .................................. 36
Lower section (AMG vehicles) .......... 37
Upper section .................................. 35
Central locking
Automatic locking (on-board
computer) ...................................... 201
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 74
Child
Restraint system .............................. 58
Child seat
Forward-facing restraint system ...... 59
On the front-passenger seat ............ 59
Rearward-facing restraint system .... 59
Children
Special seat belt retractor ............... 57
Children in the vehicle
Important safety notes .................... 57
Cigarette lighter ................................ 254
Cleaning
Mirror turn signal ........................... 275
Climate control
Automatic climate control (dual-
zone) .............................................. 116
Controlling automatically ............... 119
Cooling with air dehumidification .. 118
Defrosting the windows ................. 121
Defrosting the windshield .............. 120
General notes ................................ 116
Indicator lamp ................................ 119
Information about using auto-
matic climate control ..................... 117
Maximum cooling .......................... 121
Overview of systems ...................... 116
Problem with the rear window
defroster ........................................ 121
Problems with cooling with air
dehumidification ............................ 119
Refrigerant ..................................... 326
Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 326
Setting the air distribution ............. 120
Setting the air vents ...................... 122
Setting the airflow ......................... 120
Setting the climate mode (AIR
FLOW) ............................................ 119
Setting the temperature ................ 119
Switching air-recirculation mode
on/off ............................................ 122
Switching on/off ........................... 118
Switching residual heat on/off ...... 122
Index
7
Switching the rear window
defroster on/off ............................ 121
Switching the ZONE function
on/off ............................................ 120
Cockpit
Overview .......................................... 32
see Instrument cluster
COMAND
Driving dynamics display (except
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 168, 170
Driving dynamics display
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .............. 172
Combination switch .......................... 110
Compass
Calibrating ..................................... 263
Calling up ....................................... 262
Setting ........................................... 263
Connecting a USB device
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 243
Consumption statistics (on-board
computer) .......................................... 193
Controller ........................................... 244
Convenience closing feature .............. 89
Coolant (engine)
Checking the level ......................... 267
Display message ............................ 218
Filling capacity ............................... 325
Important safety notes .................. 324
Temperature (on-board com-
puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 202
Temperature gauge ........................ 191
Warning lamp ................................. 239
Cooling
see Climate control
Copyright ............................................. 31
Cornering light function
Display message ............................ 217
Function/notes ............................. 111
Cruise control
Cruise control lever ....................... 154
Deactivating ................................... 155
Display message ............................ 226
Driving system ............................... 154
Function/notes ............................. 154
Important safety notes .................. 154
Setting a speed .............................. 155
Storing and maintaining current
speed ............................................. 154
Cup holder
Center console .............................. 253
Important safety notes .................. 252
Customer Assistance Center
(CAC) ..................................................... 29
Customer Relations Department ....... 29
D
Data
see Technical data
Data carrier
Selecting ........................................ 196
Daytime running lamps
Display message ............................ 217
Function/notes ............................. 109
Switching on/off (on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 200
Declarations of conformity ................. 27
Decorative film
Cleaning instructions ..................... 273
Delayed switch-off
Exterior lighting (on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 200
Interior lighting .............................. 201
Diagnostics connection ...................... 28
Digital Operator's Manual
Help ................................................. 23
Introduction ..................................... 23
Digital speedometer ......................... 194
Display messages
ASSYST PLUS ................................ 269
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 205
Driving systems ............................. 221
Engine ............................................ 218
General notes ................................ 205
Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 205
KEYLESS-GO .................................. 232
Lights ............................................. 217
Safety systems .............................. 206
SmartKey ....................................... 231
Tires ............................................... 227
Vehicle ........................................... 228
Distance recorder
see Odometer
see Trip odometer
8
Index
Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 241
Distance warning function
Function/notes ................................ 63
Doors
Automatic locking (on-board
computer) ...................................... 201
Automatic locking (switch) ...............81
Central locking/unlocking
(SmartKey) .......................................74
Control panel ...................................39
Display message ............................ 230
Emergency locking ........................... 81
Emergency unlocking ....................... 81
Important safety notes .................... 79
Opening (from inside) ...................... 80
Overview .......................................... 79
Power closing .................................. 81
Drinking and driving ......................... 149
Drive program
Automatic transmission ................. 138
Display ........................................... 135
SETUP (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 203
Driver's door
see Doors
Driving
Towing vehicles ............................. 132
Driving abroad
Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 270
Driving on flooded roads .................. 153
Driving safety system
Active Brake Assist .......................... 63
Driving safety systems
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 60
Active Brake Assist with cross-
traffic function ................................. 70
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 70
Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 64
Adaptive brake lights ....................... 65
BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 61
Brake Assist with cross-traffic
function ........................................... 61
Distance warning function ............... 63
EBD (electronic brake force dis-
tribution) .......................................... 69
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Pro-
gram) ............................................... 65
Important safety information ........... 60
Overview .......................................... 60
STEER CONTROL ............................. 72
Driving system
Active Body Control (ABC)
(except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .. 168
Active Body Control (ABC)
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .............. 170
RACE START (Mercedes-AMG
vehicles) ........................................ 166
Driving systems
Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 184
Active Driving Assistance pack-
age ................................................. 184
Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 187
Active Parking Assist ..................... 175
Adaptive Damping System ............. 167
ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 183
Cruise control ................................ 154
Display message ............................ 221
DISTRONIC PLUS ................... 156, 163
HOLD function ............................... 165
PARKTRONIC ................................. 172
Rear view camera .......................... 179
Driving tips
Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC .................................... 162
AMG ceramic brakes ..................... 152
Automatic transmission ................. 138
Brakes ........................................... 151
Break-in period .............................. 125
Downhill gradient ........................... 151
Drinking and driving ....................... 149
Driving in winter ............................. 153
Driving on flooded roads ................ 153
Driving on wet roads ...................... 153
Exhaust check ............................... 150
Fuel ................................................ 149
General .......................................... 149
Hydroplaning ................................. 153
Icy road surfaces ........................... 153
Limited braking efficiency on sal-
ted roads ....................................... 152
Snow chains .................................. 295
Subjecting brakes to a load ........... 151
Wet road surface ........................... 151
DVD video
Operating (on-board computer) ..... 196
Index
9
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 243
DYNAMIC SELECT button (all
vehicles except Mercedes-AMG
vehicles) ............................................. 132
DYNAMIC SELECT controller
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ................. 133
E
EASY-ENTRY feature
Activating/deactivating ................. 201
Function/notes ............................. 103
EASY-EXIT feature
Crash-responsive ........................... 104
Function/notes ............................. 103
Switching on/off ........................... 201
EBD (electronic brake force distri-
bution)
Display message ............................208
Function/notes ................................ 69
ECO display
Function/notes .............................150
On-board computer ....................... 193
ECO start/stop function
Automatic engine start .................. 130
Automatic engine switch-off .......... 129
Deactivating/activating ................. 130
General information ....................... 129
Important safety notes .................. 129
Introduction ................................... 129
Electronic Stability Program
see ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program)
Emergency
Automatic measures after an
accident ...........................................56
Emergency release
Driver's door .................................... 81
Trunk ...............................................86
Vehicle .............................................81
Emergency Tensioning Devices
Activation .........................................53
Emissions control
Service and warranty information .... 25
Engine
Check Engine warning lamp ...........239
Display message ............................ 218
ECO start/stop function ................ 129
Engine number ............................... 321
Irregular running ............................ 131
Jump-starting ................................. 285
Overview ........................................ 269
Starting problems .......................... 131
Starting the engine with the
SmartKey ....................................... 128
Starting with KEYLESS-GO ............. 128
Switching off .................................. 147
Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 290
Engine electronics
Notes ............................................. 319
Problem (malfunction) ................... 131
Engine oil
Adding ...........................................266
Additives ........................................ 324
Checking the oil level ..................... 266
Checking the oil level using the
dipstick .......................................... 266
Display message ............................ 220
Filling capacity ............................... 324
General notes ................................ 323
Notes about oil grades ................... 323
Notes on oil level/consumption .... 266
Temperature (on-board com-
puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 202
Entering an address
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual ..................................................243
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Pro-
gram)
AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 203
Characteristics ................................. 66
Deactivating/activating (button
in Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............. 68
Deactivating/activating (except
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles) ................. 67
Display message ............................ 206
Function/notes ................................ 65
General notes .................................. 65
Important safety information ........... 66
Warning lamp ................................. 236
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction
System) ................................................ 66
Exhaust check ................................... 150
Exhaust pipe (cleaning instruc-
tions) ..................................................275
10
Index
Exterior lighting
Setting options .............................. 109
see Lights
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting .......................................105
Dipping (automatic) ....................... 106
Folding in when locking (on-
board computer) ............................ 202
Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 105
Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 105
Storing settings (memory func-
tion) ............................................... 107
Storing the parking position .......... 106
Eyeglasses compartment ................. 250
F
Favorites
Overview ........................................ 245
Filler cap
see Refueling
Filling capacities (Technical data) ... 321
First-aid kit ......................................... 276
Flat tire
MOExtended tires .......................... 278
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 278
TIREFIT kit ...................................... 279
Floormats ........................................... 263
Frequencies
Mobile phone ................................. 319
Two-way radio ................................ 319
Front-passenger seat
Adjusting from the driver's seat ....... 99
Fuel
Additives ........................................ 323
Consumption statistics .................. 193
Displaying the current consump-
tion ................................................ 193
Displaying the range ...................... 193
Driving tips .................................... 149
Fuel gauge ....................................... 33
Grade (gasoline) ............................ 322
Important safety notes .................. 322
Problem (malfunction) ................... 146
Refueling ........................................ 144
Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 322
Fuel filler flap
Opening ......................................... 145
Fuel level
Calling up the range (on-board
computer) ...................................... 193
Fuel tank
Capacity ........................................ 322
Problem (malfunction) ................... 146
Fuse allocation chart (vehicle tool
kit) ...................................................... 277
Fuses
Allocation chart ............................. 290
Before changing ............................. 291
Dashboard fuse box ....................... 291
Fuse box in the engine compart-
ment .............................................. 291
Fuse box in the rear compart-
ment .............................................. 292
Important safety notes .................. 290
G
Garage door opener
Clearing the memory ..................... 262
General notes ................................ 259
Important safety notes .................. 260
Opening/closing the garage door .. 262
Problems when programming ........ 261
Programming (button in the rear-
view mirror) ................................... 260
Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 261
Gear indicator (on-board com-
puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 202
Genuine parts ...................................... 24
Glove box ........................................... 249
Google™ Local Search
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 243
H
HANDS-FREE ACCESS .......................... 84
Hazard warning lamps
Display message ............................ 231
Switching on/off ........................... 111
Head bags
Display message ............................ 214
Operation ......................................... 47
Head level heating (AIRSCARF) ........ 102
Index
11
Head restraints
Adjusting ....................................... 100
see NECK-PRO head restraints
Headlamps
see Automatic headlamp mode
Heating
see Climate control
High beam flasher ............................. 110
High-beam headlamps
Display message ............................ 217
Switching on/off ........................... 110
Hill start assist .................................. 129
HOLD function
Activating ....................................... 165
Activation conditions .....................165
Deactivating ................................... 165
Display message ............................ 222
General notes ................................ 165
Home address
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual ..................................................243
Hood
Closing ...........................................266
Display message ............................ 230
Important safety notes .................. 265
Opening ......................................... 265
Horn ...................................................... 32
Hydroplaning ..................................... 153
I
Ignition lock
see Key positions
Immobilizer .......................................... 72
Indicator lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps
Indicators
see Turn signals
Instrument cluster
Overview .......................................... 33
Instrument cluster lighting .............. 190
Interior lighting
Automatic control .......................... 113
Delayed switch-off (on-board
computer) ...................................... 201
Reading lamp ................................. 112
Setting the brightness of the
ambient lighting (on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 200
iPod
®
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual ..................................................243
J
Jack
Storage location ............................ 278
Using ............................................. 314
Jump starting (engine) ......................285
K
Key positions
KEYLESS-GO .................................. 126
SmartKey ....................................... 126
KEYLESS-GO
Activating ......................................... 74
Convenience closing feature ............ 89
Deactivation ..................................... 74
Display message ............................ 232
Locking ............................................ 74
Removing the Start/Stop button ... 127
Start/Stop button .......................... 126
Starting the engine ........................ 128
Unlocking ......................................... 74
Kickdown
Driving tips ....................................138
Manual gearshifting ....................... 143
Knee bag .............................................. 46
L
Lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps
Lane Keeping Assist
see Active Lane Keeping Assist
Lap time (RACETIMER) ......................203
License plate lamp (display mes-
sage) ................................................... 217
Light function, active
Display message ............................ 217
Light sensor (display message) ....... 217
Lights
Activating/deactivating the inte-
rior lighting delayed switch-off ....... 201
12
Index
Active light function ....................... 111
Automatic headlamp mode ............ 109
Cornering light function ................. 111
Hazard warning lamps ................... 111
High beam flasher .......................... 110
High-beam headlamps ................... 110
Light switch ................................... 109
Low-beam headlamps .................... 110
Parking lamps ................................ 110
Setting the brightness of the
ambient lighting (on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 200
Standing lamps .............................. 110
Switching the daytime running
lamps on/off (on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 200
Switching the exterior lighting
delayed switch-off on/off (on-
board computer) ............................ 200
Switching the surround lighting
on/off (on-board computer) .......... 200
Turn signals ................................... 110
see Interior lighting
see Replacing the bulbs
Loading aid (trunk)
Raising/lowering the roof .............. 251
Locking
see Central locking
Locking (doors)
Automatic ........................................ 81
Emergency locking ........................... 81
From inside (central locking but-
ton) .................................................. 80
Locking centrally
see Central locking
Locking verification signal (on-
board computer) ............................... 201
Low-beam headlamps
Display message ............................ 217
Switching on/off ........................... 110
Luggage cover
see Trunk partition
M
M+S tires ............................................ 295
MAGIC SKY CONTROL ......................... 94
Malfunction message
see Display messages
Matte finish (cleaning instruc-
tions) .................................................. 273
Mechanical key
Function/notes ................................ 76
General notes .................................. 76
Inserting .......................................... 76
Locking vehicle ................................ 81
Removing ......................................... 76
Unlocking the driver's door .............. 81
Media Interface
see Digital Operator's Manual
Memory card (audio) ......................... 196
Memory function ............................... 107
Mercedes me connect
Call priority .................................... 258
General notes ................................ 255
Info call button .............................. 258
Mercedes-Benz emergency call ..... 256
Remote Vehicle Health Check ....... 259
Roadside Assistance call button .... 257
Self-diagnosis ................................ 255
System .......................................... 255
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive
Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 184
Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC with Active Steering
Assist ............................................. 163
Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 187
ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 183
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS (anticipatory
occupant protection PLUS) .............. 56
Rear view camera .......................... 179
Message memory (on-board com-
puter) .................................................. 205
Messages
see Display messages
Mirrors
see Exterior mirrors
Mobile phone
Connecting (Bluetooth
®
inter-
face) .............................................. 246
Frequencies ................................... 319
Installation ..................................... 319
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 196
Transmission output (maximum) .... 319
Index
13
Modifying the programming
(SmartKey) ........................................... 75
MOExtended tires .............................. 278
Mounting wheels
Lowering the vehicle ...................... 317
Mounting a new wheel ................... 316
Preparing the vehicle .....................313
Raising the vehicle ......................... 314
Removing a wheel .......................... 316
Securing the vehicle against roll-
ing away ........................................ 314
MP3
Operation ....................................... 196
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual ..................................................243
Multifunction display
Function/notes .............................192
Permanent display ......................... 199
Multifunction steering wheel
Operating the on-board com-
puter .............................................. 191
Overview .......................................... 34
Multimedia system
Switching on and off ......................244
Music files
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual ..................................................243
N
Navigation
Entering a destination .................... 245
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 194
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual ..................................................243
Navigation menu
Important safety notes .................. 194
NECK-PRO head restraints
Important safety notes .................... 55
Operation ......................................... 55
Resetting triggered .......................... 55
Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-
cle ....................................................... 125
O
Occupant Classification System
(OCS)
Conditions ....................................... 48
Faults ............................................... 51
Operation ......................................... 48
Self-test ...........................................50
Occupant safety
Air bags ...........................................45
Automatic measures after an
accident ........................................... 56
Belt warning ..................................... 44
Children in the vehicle ..................... 57
Important safety notes .................... 40
Introduction to the restraint sys-
tem .................................................. 40
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) ............................................... 48
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator
lamps ............................................... 41
Pets in the vehicle ........................... 59
PRE-SAFE
®
(anticipatory occu-
pant protection) ............................... 55
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS (anticipatory
occupant protection PLUS) .............. 56
Restraint system warning lamp ........ 41
Seat belt .......................................... 41
OCS
Faults ............................................... 51
Operation ......................................... 48
Self-test ........................................... 50
Odometer ........................................... 193
Oil
see Engine oil
On-board computer
AMG menu ..................................... 202
Assistance menu ........................... 197
Audio menu ................................... 195
Convenience submenu .................. 201
Display messages .......................... 205
Displaying a service message ........ 270
Factory settings submenu ............. 202
Important safety notes .................. 190
Instrument cluster submenu .......... 199
Lighting submenu .......................... 200
Menu overview .............................. 193
Message memory .......................... 205
14
Index
Navigation menu ............................ 194
Operation ....................................... 191
RACETIMER ................................... 203
Service menu .................................199
Settings menu ............................... 199
Standard display ............................ 193
Telephone menu ............................ 196
Trip menu ...................................... 193
Vehicle submenu ........................... 201
Video DVD operation ..................... 196
Operating safety
Declaration of conformity ................ 27
Important safety notes .................... 27
Operating system
see On-board computer
Operation
Digital Operator's Manual ................ 23
Operator's Manual
Vehicle equipment ........................... 25
Outside temperature display ........... 190
Overhead control panel ...................... 38
P
Paddle shifters
see Steering wheel paddle shifters
Paint code number ............................ 320
Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 272
Panic alarm .......................................... 40
Panoramic roof
Operating the roller sunblind ........... 94
Parking
Important safety notes .................. 146
Parking brake ................................ 147
Position of exterior mirror, front-
passenger side ............................... 106
Rear view camera .......................... 179
see PARKTRONIC
Parking aid
see Active Parking Assist
see Exterior mirrors
see PARKTRONIC
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Deactivating/activating ................. 174
Important safety notes .................. 172
Problems (malfunctions) ................ 175
Sensor range ................................. 173
Warning display ............................. 174
Parking brake
Applying automatically ................... 148
Applying or releasing manually ...... 148
Display message ............................ 208
Electric parking brake .................... 147
Emergency braking ........................ 148
General notes ................................ 147
Releasing automatically ................. 148
Warning lamp ................................. 238
Parking lamps
Switching on/off ........................... 110
PARKTRONIC
Driving system ............................... 172
Function/notes ............................. 172
PASSENGER AIR BAG
Display message ............................ 215
Indicator lamps ................................ 41
Problems (malfunction) .................. 215
Pets in the vehicle ............................... 59
Phone book
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 243
Power locks ......................................... 81
Power washers .................................. 272
Power windows
see Side windows
PRE-SAFE
®
(anticipatory occu-
pant protection)
Display message ............................ 211
Operation ......................................... 55
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS (anticipatory
occupant protection PLUS)
Operation ......................................... 56
Protection against theft
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 72
Immobilizer ...................................... 72
Protection of the environment
General notes .................................. 24
Pulling away
General notes ................................ 128
Pulling away (automatic trans-
mission) ............................................. 128
Q
QR code
Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1
Rescue card ..................................... 29
Index
15
Qualified specialist workshop ........... 28
R
RACE START
Important safety notes .................. 166
RACE START (Mercedes-AMG
vehicles) ............................................. 166
RACE TIMER (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 203
Radio
Selecting a station .........................195
see Digital Operator's Manual
Radio mode
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual ..................................................243
Radio-wave reception/transmis-
sion in the vehicle
Declaration of conformity ................ 27
REACH Regulation ............................... 28
Reading lamp ..................................... 112
Rear fog lamp
Display message ............................ 217
Rear lamps
see Lights
Rear view camera
Cleaning instructions ..................... 275
Display in the multimedia system .. 180
Function/notes .............................179
Switching on/off ........................... 180
Rear window defroster
General notes ................................ 121
Problem (malfunction) ................... 121
Switching on/off ........................... 121
Rear-view mirror
Dipping (automatic) ....................... 106
Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-
tem)
Important safety notes .................. 326
Refueling
Fuel gauge ....................................... 33
Important safety notes .................. 144
Refueling process .......................... 145
see Fuel
Remote control
Programming (garage door
opener) .......................................... 260
Replacing bulbs
General notes ................................ 113
Reporting safety defects .................... 29
Rescue card ......................................... 29
Reserve (fuel tank)
see Fuel
Reserve fuel
Display message ............................ 221
Warning lamp ................................. 239
Residual heat (climate control) ........122
Restraint system
Display message ............................ 214
Introduction ..................................... 40
Warning lamp ................................. 238
Warning lamp (function) ................... 41
Reverse gear (selector lever) ........... 136
Reversing feature
Side windows ................................... 87
Trunk lid ...........................................82
Reversing lamps (display mes-
sage) ................................................... 217
Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 26
Roll bar
Display message ............................ 213
Operation ......................................... 52
Roller sunblind .................................... 94
Roof
Display message ............................ 230
Important safety notes .................... 90
Opening/closing (with roof
switch) ............................................. 91
Opening/closing (with SmartKey) .... 92
Overview .......................................... 90
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 95
Relocking ......................................... 92
Roof switch .......................................... 91
Route guidance
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 243
Route guidance active ...................... 194
S
Safety
Children in the vehicle ..................... 57
see Occupant safety
Safety system
see Driving safety systems
16
Index
SD card
Inserting ........................................248
Inserting/removing ........................ 248
Removing ....................................... 248
SD memory card
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual ..................................................243
Selecting ........................................ 196
Search & Send
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual ..................................................243
Seat
Correct driver's seat position ........... 97
Seat belts
Adjusting the driver's and front-
passenger seat belt ......................... 44
Correct usage .................................. 43
Fastening ......................................... 44
Important safety guidelines ............. 42
Introduction ..................................... 41
Releasing ......................................... 44
Seat belt guide ................................. 99
Switching belt adjustment on/off
(on-board computer) ...................... 202
Warning lamp ................................. 233
Warning lamp (function) ................... 44
Seats
Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 99
Adjusting the head restraint .......... 100
Belt guide ......................................... 99
Important safety notes .................... 97
Overview .......................................... 97
Seat heating problem .................... 101
Seat ventilation problem ................ 102
Sliding forward/back ..................... 100
Storing settings (memory func-
tion) ............................................... 107
Switching AIRSCARF on/off .......... 102
Switching seat heating on/off ....... 101
Switching seat ventilation on/off .. 102
Selector lever
Positions ........................................ 134
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 275
Service menu (on-board com-
puter) .................................................. 199
Service message
see ASSYST PLUS
Service products
Brake fluid ..................................... 324
Coolant (engine) ............................ 324
Engine oil ....................................... 323
Fuel ................................................ 322
Important safety notes .................. 321
Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-
tem) ............................................... 326
Washer fluid ................................... 325
Setting the air distribution ............... 120
Setting the airflow ............................ 120
Setting the date/time format
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 243
Setting the language
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 243
Setting the time
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 243
Settings
Factory (on-board computer) ......... 202
On-board computer ....................... 199
SETUP (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 203
Side impact air bag ............................. 47
Side marker lamp (display mes-
sage) ................................................... 217
Side windows
Cleaning ......................................... 274
Convenience closing feature ............ 89
Important safety information ........... 87
Opening/closing (all) ....................... 88
Opening/closing (front) ................... 88
Opening/closing (rear) .................... 88
Overview .......................................... 87
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 90
Resetting ......................................... 89
Reversing feature ............................. 87
SIRIUS services
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 243
SmartKey
Changing the battery ....................... 77
Changing the programming ............. 75
Checking the battery ....................... 77
Display message ............................ 231
Index
17
Door central locking/unlocking ....... 74
Important safety notes .................... 74
Loss ................................................. 78
Mechanical key ................................ 76
Opening/closing the roof ................ 92
Overview .......................................... 74
Positions (ignition lock) ................. 126
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 78
Starting the engine ........................ 128
SMS
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 243
Snow chains ...................................... 295
Sockets
Front-passenger footwell ............... 255
General notes ................................ 254
Trunk ............................................. 255
Sound
Switching on/off ........................... 244
Special seat belt retractor .................. 57
Specialist workshop ............................ 28
Speed, controlling
see Cruise control
Speedometer
Digital ............................................ 194
In the Instrument cluster ................. 33
Segments ...................................... 190
Selecting the display unit ............... 199
SPORT handling mode
Deactivating/activating
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ................ 68
Warning lamp ................................. 238
Standing lamps
Display message ............................ 217
Switching on/off ........................... 110
Start/stop function
see ECO start/stop function
Starting (engine) ................................ 127
STEER CONTROL .................................. 72
Steering
Display message ............................ 230
Steering assistant STEER CON-
TROL
see STEER CONTROL
Steering wheel
Adjusting (electrically) ................... 103
Button overview ............................... 34
Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 191
Important safety notes .................. 103
Storing settings (memory func-
tion) ............................................... 107
Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 141
Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 203
Stowage areas ................................... 249
Stowage compartments
Armrest (under) ............................. 249
Center console .............................. 250
Center console (rear) ..................... 250
Cup holders ................................... 252
Eyeglasses compartment ............... 250
Glove box ....................................... 249
Important safety information ......... 249
Rear ............................................... 251
Stowage net ................................... 251
Stowage net ....................................... 251
Stowage space
Umbrella holder ............................. 250
Stowage well beneath the trunk
floor .................................................... 252
Summer tires ..................................... 295
Sun visor ............................................ 253
Surround lighting (on-board com-
puter) .................................................. 200
Suspension settings
Active Body Control (ABC)
(except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .. 169
Active Body Control (ABC)
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .............. 171
Suspension tuning
SETUP (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 203
SVHC (Substances of Very High
Concern) ............................................... 28
Switching air-recirculation mode
on/off ................................................. 122
Switching on media mode
Via the device list .......................... 248
T
Tachometer ........................................ 190
Tail lamps
Display message ............................ 217
see Lights
18
Index
Tank content
Fuel gauge ....................................... 33
Technical data
Capacities ...................................... 321
Information .................................... 319
Tires/wheels ................................. 318
Vehicle data ................................... 326
TELEAID
Call priority .................................... 258
Emergency call .............................. 256
General notes ................................ 255
MB info call button ........................ 258
Roadside Assistance button .......... 257
Self-test ......................................... 255
System .......................................... 255
Vehicle Health Check .................... 259
Telephone
Accepting a call (multifunction
steering wheel) .............................. 197
Authorizing a mobile phone (con-
necting) ......................................... 247
Connecting a mobile phone (gen-
eral information) ............................ 246
Display message ............................ 230
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 196
Number from the phone book ........ 197
Redialing ........................................ 197
Rejecting/ending a call ................. 197
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 243
Temperature
Coolant .......................................... 191
Coolant (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 202
Engine oil (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 202
Outside temperature ...................... 190
Setting (climate control) ................ 119
Transmission oil (on-board com-
puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 202
Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 203
Tire pressure
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 299
Checking manually ........................ 299
Display message ............................ 227
Maximum ....................................... 299
Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 281
Notes ............................................. 298
Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 281
Recommended ............................... 296
Tire pressure monitor
Checking the tire pressure elec-
tronically ........................................ 301
Function/notes ............................. 299
General notes ................................ 299
Important safety notes .................. 300
Radio type approval for the tire
pressure monitor ........................... 302
Restarting ...................................... 301
Warning lamp ................................. 242
Warning message .......................... 301
Tire-change tool kit ........................... 278
TIREFIT kit .......................................... 279
Important safety notes .................. 279
Storage location ............................ 277
Tire pressure not reached .............. 281
Tire pressure reached .................... 281
Tires
Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 312
Average weight of the vehicle
occupants (definition) .................... 311
Bar (definition) ............................... 311
Changing a wheel .......................... 313
Characteristics .............................. 311
Checking ........................................ 293
Curb weight (definition) ................. 312
Definition of terms ......................... 311
Direction of rotation ...................... 313
Display message ............................ 227
Distribution of the vehicle occu-
pants (definition) ............................ 313
DOT (Department of Transporta-
tion) (definition) ............................. 311
DOT, Tire Identification Number
(TIN) ............................................... 310
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rat-
ing) (definition) .............................. 311
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def-
inition) ........................................... 311
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) (definition) ......................... 311
Important safety notes .................. 293
Increased vehicle weight due to
optional equipment (definition) ...... 311
Information on driving .................... 293
Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 312
Index
19
Labeling (overview) ........................ 307
Load bearing index (definition) ...... 312
Load index .....................................309
Load index (definition) ................... 312
M+S tires ....................................... 295
Maximum load on a tire (defini-
tion) ............................................... 312
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
(definition) ..................................... 312
Maximum permissible tire pres-
sure (definition) .............................312
Maximum tire load ......................... 310
Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 312
MOExtended tires .......................... 295
Optional equipment weight (defi-
nition) ............................................ 312
Overview ........................................ 293
PSI (pounds per square inch)
(definition) ..................................... 312
Replacing ....................................... 313
Service life ..................................... 294
Sidewall (definition) ....................... 312
Speed rating (definition) ................ 311
Storing ...........................................313
Structure and characteristics
(definition) ..................................... 311
Summer tires ................................. 295
Temperature .................................. 307
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
(definition) ..................................... 312
Tire bead (definition) ......................312
Tire pressure (definition) ................ 312
Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 311
Tire size (data) ............................... 318
Tire size designation, load-bear-
ing capacity, speed rating .............. 307
Tire tread ....................................... 294
Tire tread (definition) ..................... 312
Total load limit (definition) ............. 313
Traction ......................................... 306
Traction (definition) ....................... 312
Tread wear ..................................... 306
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards ...................................... 306
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards (definition) .................... 311
Wear indicator (definition) ............. 313
Wheel and tire combination ........... 318
Wheel rim (definition) .................... 311
see Flat tire
Tow-starting
Emergency engine starting ............ 290
Important safety notes .................. 288
Towing
Permitted towing methods ............ 289
Towing away
Important safety guidelines ........... 288
Installing the towing eye ................ 288
Removing the towing eye ............... 289
Transporting the vehicle ................ 290
With both axles on the ground ....... 289
With the rear axle raised ................ 290
Traffic reports
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 243
Traffic Sign Assist
Display message ............................ 222
Transmission
Overview of transmission posi-
tions .............................................. 134
Selector lever ................................ 134
see Automatic transmission
Transmission position display ......... 135
Transporting the vehicle .................. 290
Trip computer (on-board com-
puter) .................................................. 193
Trip odometer
Calling up ....................................... 193
Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 194
Trunk
Emergency release .......................... 86
Important safety notes .................... 81
Locking separately ........................... 86
Opening/closing (automatically
from inside) ...................................... 85
Opening/closing (automatically
from outside) ................................... 83
Opening/closing (from outside,
HANDS-FREE ACCESS) .................... 84
Opening/closing (manually from
outside) ............................................ 82
Overview .......................................... 81
Power closing .................................. 81
Trunk lid
Display message ............................ 230
Opening dimensions ...................... 326
20
Index
Trunk partition
Display message ............................ 230
General notes .................................. 92
Installing .......................................... 93
Opening/closing .............................. 93
Removing ......................................... 93
Turn signals
Display message ............................ 217
Switching on/off ........................... 110
Two-way radio
Frequencies ................................... 319
Installation ..................................... 319
Transmission output (maximum) .... 319
Type identification plate
see Vehicle identification plate
U
Umbrella holder ................................. 250
Unlocking
Emergency unlocking ....................... 81
From inside the vehicle (central
unlocking button) ............................. 80
Upshift indicator (on-board com-
puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 202
USB devices
Connecting to the Media Inter-
face ...............................................248
V
Vehicle
Correct use ...................................... 28
Data acquisition ............................... 29
Display message ............................ 228
Electronics ..................................... 319
Equipment ....................................... 25
Individual settings .......................... 199
Limited Warranty .............................29
Loading .......................................... 303
Locking (in an emergency) ............... 81
Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 74
Lowering ........................................ 317
Maintenance .................................... 26
Parking for a long period ................ 149
Pulling away ................................... 128
Raising ........................................... 314
REACH Regulation ........................... 28
Reporting problems ......................... 29
Securing from rolling away ............ 314
Tow-starting ................................... 288
Towing away .................................. 288
Transporting .................................. 290
Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 81
Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 74
Vehicle data ................................... 326
Vehicle battery
see Battery (vehicle)
Vehicle data ....................................... 326
Vehicle dimensions ........................... 326
Vehicle emergency locking ................ 81
Vehicle identification number
see VIN
Vehicle identification plate .............. 320
Vehicle level
Active Body Control (ABC)
(except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .. 168
Active Body Control (ABC)
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .............. 170
Display message ............................ 221
Vehicle tool kit .................................. 277
Video
Operating the DVD ......................... 196
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 243
VIN
Seat ............................................... 321
Type plate ...................................... 320
W
Warning and indicator lamps
ABS ................................................ 236
Active Brake Assist ........................ 241
Brake Assist ................................... 241
Brakes ........................................... 235
Check Engine ................................. 239
Coolant .......................................... 239
Distance warning ........................... 241
ESP
®
.............................................. 236
ESP
®
OFF ....................................... 237
Fuel tank ........................................ 239
General notes ................................ 233
Parking brake ................................ 238
PASSENGER AIR BAG ...................... 41
Reserve fuel ................................... 239
Restraint system ............................ 238
Index
21
Seat belt ........................................ 233
SPORT handling mode ................... 238
Tire pressure monitor .................... 242
Warning triangle ................................ 276
Warranty .............................................. 25
Washer fluid
Display message ............................ 231
Weather display (COMAND)
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 243
Wheel and tire combinations
Tires ............................................... 318
Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 317
Wheel chock ...................................... 314
Wheels
Changing a wheel .......................... 313
Checking ........................................ 293
Cleaning ......................................... 274
Important safety notes .................. 293
Information on driving .................... 293
Interchanging/changing ................ 313
Mounting a new wheel ................... 316
Mounting a wheel .......................... 313
Overview ........................................ 293
Removing a wheel .......................... 316
Storing ........................................... 313
Tightening torque ........................... 317
Wheel size/tire size ....................... 318
Wind screen
Electrical wind screen ...................... 94
Windows
see Side windows
Windshield
Defrosting ...................................... 120
Windshield washer fluid
see Windshield washer system
Windshield washer system
Adding washer fluid ....................... 268
Important safety notes .................. 325
Windshield wipers
Display message ............................ 231
Problem (malfunction) ................... 115
Replacing the wiper blades ............ 114
Switching on/off ........................... 113
Winter driving
Important safety notes .................. 295
Slippery road surfaces ................... 153
Snow chains .................................. 295
Winter operation
Overview ........................................ 295
Winter tires
M+S tires ....................................... 295
Wiper blades
Cleaning ......................................... 274
Important safety notes .................. 114
Replacing ....................................... 114
Workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop
Z
ZONE function
Switching on/off ........................... 120
22
Index
Introduction
The printed Operator's Manual provides infor-
mation about the safe operation of your vehi-
cle. The Digital Operator's Manual provides
comprehensive and specifically adapted infor-
mation on your vehicle's equipment and multi-
media system. You can call up the Digital
Operator's Manual via the multimedia system.
i
You will not incur any costs when calling
up the Digital Operator's Manual. The Digital
Operator's Manual works without connect-
ing to the Internet.
There are three ways to access the topics of
the Digital Operator's Manual:
R
Visual search
The visual search allows you to explore your
vehicle "virtually". Starting from either the
vehicle exterior view or interior view, you
can access many of the different topics cov-
ered by the Digital Operator's Manual. To
access the vehicle interior section, select
the "Vehicle interior" view.
R
Keyword search
The keyword search allows you to search for
a keyword by entering characters.
R
Contents
You can select individual sections in the
contents.
i
The Digital Operator's Manual is deactiva-
ted for safety reasons while driving.
Operation
Calling up the Digital Operator's
Manual
X
Press the Ø button in the center con-
sole.
The overview relating to the vehicle appears.
X
Select the "Operator's Manual" menu item
by turning 3 or pressing 7 the control-
ler.
X
Confirm 7 the message about the warning
and safety notes.
The basic menu for the Digital Operator's
Manual appears.
Operating the Digital Operator's
Manual
General notes
Please observe the information about the
operation of the controller (Y page 244).
Content pages
The content pages can be accessed by means
of a visual search, a keyword search or using
the contents.
X
To scroll forwards/backwards: turn 3
the controller.
X
To display in full-screen or animation:
slide 8 the controller to the left :.
X
To select information texts or save book-
marks: slide 9 the controller to the
right ;.
X
To select a link: slide 6 the controller
downwards =.
X
To exit a content page: select % sym-
bol ?.
X
To call up the basic menu of the Digital
Operator's Manual: select Þ symbol
A.
X
To switch functions to the multimedia
system using the buttons on the center
console: press the $, %, Õ or
Ø button.
The selected menu appears. The Digital
Operator's Manual remains open in the
background.
Digital Operator's Manual
23
Protecting the environment
General notes
H
Environmental note
Daimler's declared policy is one of compre-
hensive environmental protection.
The objectives are for the natural resources
that form the basis of our existence on this
planet to be used sparingly and in a manner
that takes the requirements of both nature
and humanity into account.
You too can help to protect the environment
by operating your vehicle in an environmen-
tally responsible manner.
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,
transmission, brake and tire wear are affec-
ted by these factors:
R
operating conditions of your vehicle
R
your personal driving style
You can influence both factors. You should
bear the following in mind:
Operating conditions:
R
avoid short trips as these increase fuel
consumption.
R
always make sure that the tire pressures
are correct.
R
do not carry any unnecessary weight.
R
remove roof racks once you no longer
need them.
R
a regularly serviced vehicle will contribute
to environmental protection. You should
therefore adhere to the service intervals.
R
always have service work carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Personal driving style:
R
do not depress the accelerator pedal
when starting the engine.
R
do not warm up the engine when the vehi-
cle is stationary.
R
drive carefully and maintain a safe dis-
tance from the vehicle in front.
R
avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and
braking.
R
change gear in good time and use each
gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine
speed.
R
switch off the engine in stationary traffic.
R
keep an eye on the vehicle's fuel con-
sumption.
Environmental concerns and recom-
mendations
Wherever the operating instructions require
you to dispose of materials, first try to regen-
erate or re-use them. Observe the relevant
environmental rules and regulations when dis-
posing of materials. In this way you will help to
protect the environment.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
H
Environmental note
Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned
major assemblies and parts which are of the
same quality as new parts. They are covered
by the same Limited Warranty entitlements
as new parts.
!
Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-
ces, as well as control units and sensors for
these restraint systems, may be installed in
the following areas of your vehicle:
R
doors
R
door pillars
R
door sills
R
seats
R
cockpit
R
instrument cluster
R
center console
Do not install accessories such as audio sys-
tems in these areas. Do not carry out
repairs or welding. You could impair the
operating efficiency of the restraint sys-
tems.
Have aftermarket accessories installed at a
qualified specialist workshop.
You could jeopardize the operating safety of
your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels
as well as accessories relevant to safety which
24
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
Introduction
have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
This could lead to malfunctions in safety-rele-
vant systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only
genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal
quality. Only use tires, wheels and accessories
that have been specifically approved for your
vehicle.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to
strict quality control. Every part has been spe-
cifically developed, manufactured or selected
for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
should be used.
More than 300,000 different genuine
Mercedes-Benz parts are available for
Mercedes-Benz models.
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers main-
tain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
for necessary service and repair work. In addi-
tion, strategically located parts delivery cen-
ters provide quick and reliable parts service.
Always specify the vehicle identification num-
ber (VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-
Benz parts (Y page 320).
Operator's Manual
Vehicle equipment
i
This Operator's Manual describes all mod-
els and all standard and optional equipment
of your vehicle available at the time of going
to print. Country-specific differences are
possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may
not feature all functions described here.
This also applies to safety-relevant systems
and functions. The equipment in your vehi-
cle may therefore differ from that shown in
the descriptions and illustrations.
The original purchase agreement lists all sys-
tems installed in your vehicle.
Should you have any questions concerning
equipment and operation, please consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The Operator's Manual and Maintenance
Booklet are important documents and should
be kept in the vehicle.
Service and vehicle operation
Warranty
The implied warranty for your vehicle applies
in accordance with the warranty terms and
conditions in the Service and Warranty Infor-
mation booklet.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
replace and repair all factory-installed parts in
accordance with the following warranty terms
and conditions:
R
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
R
Emission System Warranty
R
Emission Performance Warranty
R
California, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-
setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island
and Vermont Emission Control System War-
ranty
R
State warranty enforcement laws (lemon
laws)
Replacement parts and accessories are cov-
ered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Acces-
sories warranties. These are available at any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i
Should you lose your Service and Warranty
Information booklet, have an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a
replacement. The new Service and Warranty
Information booklet will be posted to you.
Information for customers in Califor-
nia
Under California law you may be entitled to a
replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the
purchase price or lease price, if after a reason-
able number of repair attempts Mercedes-
Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or
service facilities fail to fix one or more sub-
stantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle
that are covered by its express warranty.
During the period of 18 months from original
delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of
29,000 km (approximately 18,000 miles) on
the odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs
first, a reasonable number of repair attempts
is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one
or more of the following occurs:
(1) the same substantial defect or malfunc-
tion results in a condition that is likely to
Service and vehicle operation
25
Introduction
Z
cause death or serious bodily injury if the
vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunc-
tion has been subject to repair two or
more times, and you have directly notified
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writing of the
need for its repair.
(2) the same substantial defect or malfunc-
tion of a less serious nature than category
(1) has been subject to repair four or more
times and you have directly notified
Mercedes-Benz in writing of the need for
its repair.
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of
repair of the same or different substantial
defects or malfunctions for a cumulative
total of more than 30 calendar days.
Please send your written notice to:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Customer Assistance Center
One Mercedes-Benz Drive
Sandy Springs, GA 30328
Maintenance
The Service and Warranty Booklet describes all
the necessary maintenance work which should
be done at regular intervals.
Always have the Service and Warranty Booklet
with you when you bring the vehicle to an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The service
advisor will record every service for you in the
Service and Warranty Booklet.
Roadside Assistance
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-
gram offers technical help in the event of a
breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside
Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents
24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)
(USA)
1-800-387-0100 (Canada)
For additional information, refer to the
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program
brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance"
section in the Service and Warranty booklet
(Canada). You will find both in your vehicle lit-
erature portfolio.
Change of address or change of own-
ership
In the event of a change of address, please
send us the "Notification of Address Change"
in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply
call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (USA) at the hotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or
Customer Service Center (Canada) at
1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contact-
ing you in a timely manner should the need
arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave the
entire literature in the vehicle so that it is
available to the next owner.
If you have purchased a used car, please send
us the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in
the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply
call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (USA) at the hotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or
Customer Service (Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
Vehicle operation outside the USA
and Canada
When you are abroad with your vehicle,
observe the following points:
R
Service facilities or replacement parts may
not be readily available.
R
Lead-free fuel for vehicles with a catalytic
converter may not be available. Leaded fuel
can cause damage to the catalytic con-
verter.
R
The fuel may have a considerably lower
octane number. Unsuitable fuel can cause
engine damage.
Some Mercedes-Benz models are available for
delivery in Europe through our European Deliv-
ery Program. For details, consult an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or write to one of the
following addresses.
In the USA
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes-Benz Drive
Sandy Springs, GA 30328
In Canada
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
26
Service and vehicle operation
Introduction
European Delivery Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Operating safety
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you do not have the prescribed service/
maintenance work or any required repairs
carried out, this can result in malfunctions
or system failures. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
Always have the prescribed service/mainte-
nance work as well as any required repairs
carried out at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
G
WARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite if they come into contact
with hot parts of the exhaust system. There
is a risk of fire.
When driving on an unpaved road or off-
road, check the vehicle underside regularly.
In particular, remove trapped plant parts or
other flammable material. Contact a quali-
fied specialist workshop immediately if dam-
age is detected.
G
WARNING
Modifications to electronic components,
their software as well as wiring can impair
their function and/or the function of other
networked components. In particular, sys-
tems relevant to safety could also be affec-
ted. As a result, these may no longer func-
tion as intended and/or jeopardize the oper-
ating safety of the vehicle. There is an
increased risk of an accident and injury.
Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-
tronic components or their software. You
should have all work to electrical and elec-
tronic equipment carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.
!
There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:
R
the vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high
curb or an unpaved road
R
you drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a
curb, a speed bump or a pothole in the
road
R
a heavy object strikes the underbody or
parts of the chassis
In situations like this, the body, the under-
body, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be
damaged without the damage being visible.
Components damaged in this way can unex-
pectedly fail or, in the case of an accident,
no longer withstand the loads they are
designed to.
If the underbody paneling is damaged, com-
bustible materials such as leaves, grass or
twigs can gather between the underbody
and the underbody paneling. If these materi-
als come in contact with hot parts of the
exhaust system, they can catch fire.
In such situations, have the vehicle checked
and repaired immediately at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop. If on continuing your jour-
ney you notice that driving safety is
impaired, pull over and stop the vehicle
immediately, paying attention to road and
traffic conditions. In such cases, consult a
qualified specialist workshop.
Declarations of conformity
Vehicle components which receive
and/or transmit radio waves
USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Opera-
tion is subject to the two following two condi-
tions: 1) These devices may not cause harmful
interference, and 2) These devices must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion. Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment."
Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
comply with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) These devices
may not cause interference, and (2) These
devices must accept any interference, includ-
Operating safety
27
Introduction
Z
ing interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device."
Diagnostics connection
The diagnostics connection is used for con-
necting diagnostic equipment at a qualified
specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
If you connect equipment to a diagnostics
connection in the vehicle, it may affect the
operation of vehicle systems. As a result,
the operating safety of the vehicle could be
affected. There is a risk of an accident.
Only connect equipment to a diagnostics
connection in the vehicle, which is approved
for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
G
WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict
the clearance around the pedals or block a
depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the oper-
ating and road safety of the vehicle. There is
a risk of an accident.
Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so
that they do not get into the driver's foot-
well. When using floormats or carpets, make
sure that they are properly secured so that
they do not slip or obstruct the pedals. Do
not place several floormats or carpets on
top of one another.
!
If the engine is switched off and equip-
ment on the diagnostics connection is used,
the starter battery may discharge.
Connecting equipment to the diagnostics con-
nection can lead to emissions monitoring
information being reset, for example. This may
lead to the vehicle failing to meet the require-
ments of the next emissions test during the
main inspection.
Qualified specialist workshop
An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a
qualified specialist workshop. It has the neces-
sary specialist knowledge, tools and qualifica-
tions to correctly carry out the work required
on your vehicle. This is especially the case for
work relevant to safety.
Observe the notes in the Maintenance Book-
let.
Always have the following work carried out at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:
R
work relevant to safety
R
service and maintenance work
R
repair work
R
alterations, installation work and modifica-
tions
R
work on electronic components
Correct use
If you remove any warning stickers, you or oth-
ers could fail to recognize certain dangers.
Leave warning stickers in position.
Observe the following information when driv-
ing your vehicle:
R
the safety notes in this manual
R
technical data for the vehicle
R
traffic rules and regulations
R
laws and safety standards pertaining to
motor vehicles
Information about the REACH decree
The REACH regulation (Regulation (EC) no.
1907/2006, Article 33) lays down an informa-
tion obligation for substances of very high con-
cern (SVHC).
Daimler AG acts in good faith to avoid using
these SVHCs and to allow the customer to
handle these substances safely. In accordance
with supplier information and internal product
information from Daimler AG, SVHCs that
account for more than 0.1 percent by weight
of individual products in this vehicle are
known.
More detailed information can be found at the
following addresses:
R
http://www.daimler.com/reach (German
version)
R
http://www.daimler.com/reach/en
(English version)
28
Operating safety
Introduction
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your
vehicle, particularly one that you believe may
affect its safe operation, we urge you to con-
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately to have the problem diagnosed
and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to
your satisfaction, please discuss the problem
again with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter or, if necessary, contact us at one of the
following addresses.
In the USA
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Customer Assistance Center
One Mercedes-Benz Drive
Sandy Springs, GA 30328
In Canada
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
Customer Relations Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Reporting safety defects
USA only:
The following text is published as required of
manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.
Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
"National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act
of 1966".
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,
SW., Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov
Limited Warranty
!
Observe the notes in this Operator's Man-
ual regarding the correct operation of your
vehicle and possible damage to the vehicle.
Damage to the vehicle which is caused by
violation of these notes is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or the
new or used-vehicle warranty.
QR code for rescue card
The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flap
and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the
event of an accident, rescue services can use
the QR code to quickly find the appropriate
rescue card for your vehicle. The current res-
cue card contains the most important informa-
tion about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g.
the routing of the electric cables.
You can find more information at http://
www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.
Data storage
Data storage
A wide range of electronic components in your
vehicle contain data memories.
These data memories temporarily or perma-
nently store technical information about:
R
the vehicle's operating state
R
incidents
R
malfunctions
In general, this technical information docu-
ments the state of a component, a module, a
system or the surroundings.
These include, for example:
R
operating conditions of system components.
For example, fluid levels
R
the vehicle's status messages and those of
its individual components, e.g. number of
wheel revolutions/speed, deceleration in
movement, lateral acceleration, accelerator
pedal position
Data storage
29
Introduction
Z
R
malfunctions and defects in important sys-
tem components, e.g. lights, brakes
R
vehicle reactions and operating conditions
in special driving situations, e.g. air bag
deployment, intervention of stability control
systems
R
ambient conditions, e.g. outside tempera-
ture
This data is of an exclusively technical nature
and can be used to:
R
assist in recognizing and rectifying malfunc-
tions and defects
R
analyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci-
dent
R
optimize vehicle functions
The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's
movements.
When your vehicle is serviced, technical infor-
mation can be read from the event data mem-
ory and malfunction data memory.
Services include, for example:
R
repair services
R
service processes
R
warranties
R
quality assurance
The vehicle is read out by employees of the
service network (including the manufacturer)
using special diagnostic testers. More detailed
information is obtained from it, if required.
After a malfunction has been rectified, the
information is deleted from the malfunction
memory or is continually overwritten.
When operating the vehicle, situations are
conceivable in which this technical data, in
connection with other information (if neces-
sary, under consultation with an authorized
expert), could be traced to a person.
Examples include:
R
accident reports
R
damage to the vehicle
R
witness statements
Further additional functions that have been
contractually agreed upon with the customer
allow certain vehicle data to be conveyed by
the vehicle as well. The additional functions
include, for example, vehicle location in case
of an emergency.
COMAND/Mercedes me connect
(Canada: TELEAID)
If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or
Mercedes me connect, additional data about
the vehicle's operation, the use of the vehicle
in certain situations, and the location of the
vehicle is compiled through COMAND or the
Mercedes me connect system.
For additional information, please refer to the
COMAND User Manual or Digital Operator's
Manual and/or the Mercedes me connect
Terms and Conditions.
Event data recorders
USA only:
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). This vehicle is equipped with
an event data recorder (EDR). The main pur-
pose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or
near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data
that will assist in understanding how a vehi-
cle's systems performed. The EDR is designed
to record data related to vehicle dynamics and
safety systems for a short period of time, typi-
cally 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
R
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating
R
Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened
R
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
R
How fast the vehicle was traveling
These data can help provide a better under-
standing of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-triv-
ial crash situation occurs; no data are recor-
ded by the EDR under normal driving condi-
tions and no personal data (e.g. name, gender,
age and crash location) are recorded. How-
ever, other parties, such as law enforcement
could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is nee-
ded to read data that is recorded by an EDR,
and special equipment is required. In addition
30
Data storage
Introduction
to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties that
have the special equipment, such as law
enforcement, can read the information by
accessing the vehicle or the EDR.
EDR data may be used in civil and criminal
matters as a tool in accident reconstruction,
accident claims and vehicle safety. Since the
Crash Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to
extract data from the EDR is commercially
available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA")
expressly disclaims any and all liability arising
from the extraction of this information by
unauthorized Mercedes-Benz personnel.
MBUSA will not share EDR data with others
without the consent of the vehicle owners or,
if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of
the lessee. Exceptions to this representation
include responses to subpoenas by law
enforcement; by federal, state or local govern-
ment; in connection with or arising out of liti-
gation involving MBUSA or its subsidiaries and
affiliates; or, as required by law.
Warning: The EDR is a component of the
Restraint System Module. Tampering with,
altering, modifying or removing the EDR com-
ponent may result in a malfunction of the
Restraint System Module and other systems.
State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that
conflict with federal regulation are pre-emp-
ted. This means that in the event of such con-
flict, the federal regulation governs. As of
December 2016, 17 states have enacted laws
relating to EDRs.
Information on copyright
General information
Information on license for free and open-
source software used in your vehicle and its
electronic components is available on the fol-
lowing website:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource
Information on copyright
31
Introduction
Z
Cockpit
Function Page
:
Steering wheel paddle shift-
ers 141
;
Combination switch 110
=
Adjusts the steering wheel
electrically 103
?
Horn
A
Instrument cluster 33
B
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
warning display 172
C
Overhead control panel 38
Function Page
D
Climate control systems 116
E
Ignition lock 126
Start/Stop button 126
F
Cruise control lever 154
G
Electric parking brake 147
H
Light switch 109
I
Diagnostics connection 28
J
Opens the hood 265
32
Cockpit
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Function Page
:
Speedometer with seg-
ments 190
Warning and indicator
lamps:
Electric parking brake (red) 238
F USA only
! Canada only
! Electric parking brake
(yellow) 238
· Distance warning
241
å ESP
®
OFF
236
! ABS
236
Brakes (red) 235
$ USA only
J Canada only
L Low-beam headlamps
110
T Parking lamps
110
K High-beam headlamps
110
÷ ESP
®
236
;
#! Turn signals
110
=
Multifunction display 192
?
Tachometer 190
Function Page
Warning and indicator
lamps:
M SPORT handling mode
in Mercedes-AMG vehicles 238
R This indicator lamp
has no function
N This indicator lamp
has no function
; Check Engine
239
h Tire pressure monitor
242
6 Restraint system
41
ü Seat belts
233
A
Coolant temperature gage 191
Warning and indicator
lamps:
? Coolant
239
B
Fuel level indicator
Warning and indicator
lamps:
8 Reserve fuel level with
fuel filler flap location indi-
cator (right) 239
C
Instrument cluster lighting 190
Information on displaying the outside tempera-
ture in the multifunction display can be found
under "Outside temperature display"
(Y page 190).
Instrument cluster
33
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel
Function Page
:
Multifunction display 192
;
Multimedia system display
= ?
Switches on the Voice Con-
trol System
8
Mute
WX
Adjusts the volume
~
Rejects or ends a call 196
Exits the telephone book/
redial memory
6
Makes or accepts a call
Switches to the redial mem-
ory
Function Page
?
=;
Selects a menu 191
9:
Selects a submenu or
scrolls through lists 191
a
Confirms a selection 191
Hides display messages 205
%
Back 191
Switches off the Voice Con-
trol System
i In vehicles with multimedia system
COMAND you can find further information:
R
on the multimedia system in the Digital
Operator's Manual
R
on the Voice Control System in the sepa-
rate operating instructions
34
Multifunction steering wheel
At a glance
Center console
Center console, upper section
Function Page
:
COMAND
;
c Seat heating
101
=
s Seat ventilation
102
?
Ò AIRSCARF
102
A
c Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC 172
Function Page
B
£ Hazard warning lamps
111
C
45Indicator lamp
48
D
å ESP
®
(except
Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
66
è ECO start/stop button
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 129
i In vehicles with the COMAND multimedia
system, you can find further information:
R
on the multimedia system in the Digital
Operator's Manual
R
on the Voice Control System in the sepa-
rate Operator's Manual
Center console
35
At a glance
Center console, lower section (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Function Page
:
Stowage compartment 250
Cup holder 252
Ashtray 254
;
COMAND controller
=
Seat adjustment
?
Favorites button
A
Roof switch 91
B
Opens/closes the side win-
dows 88
C
Extends/retracts the wind
screen 94
D
Stowage compartment with
Media Interface
Cigarette lighter 249
E
Selects park position 136
Function Page
F
è ECO start/stop button
129
G
Activates the driving dynam-
ics display 168
H
É Adjusts the vehicle
level (vehicles with Active
Body Control) 168
I
Adjusts the suspension set-
tings
Sets the suspension tuning
(vehicles with Active Body
Control) 169
J
p Manual drive program
for the automatic transmis-
sion 141
K
Transmission positions 137
L
Selector lever 134
36
Center console
At a glance
Center console, lower section (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Function Page
:
Stowage compartment 250
Cup holder 252
Ashtray 254
;
COMAND controller
=
Seat adjustment
?
Favorites button
A
Roof switch 91
B
Opens/closes the side win-
dows 88
C
Extends/retracts the wind
screen 94
D
Stowage compartment with
Media Interface
Cigarette lighter 249
Function Page
E
Selects park position 136
F
DYNAMIC SELECT controller 133
G
p Manual drive program
for the automatic transmis-
sion 141
H
à Adjusts the suspen-
sion settings 171
I
å ESP
®
66
J
Transmission positions 137
K
Selector lever 134
Center console
37
At a glance
Overhead control panel
Function Page
:
p Switches the left-hand
reading lamp on/off 112
;
c Switches the interior
lighting on/off 112
=
µ Operates MAGIC SKY
CONTROL 94
?
| Switches the auto-
matic interior lighting con-
trol on/off 112
A
p Switches the right-
hand reading lamp on/off 112
Function Page
B
ï MB Info call button
258
C
G Emergency call/SOS
button 256
D
Rear-view mirror 106
E
Buttons for the garage door
opener 262
F
F Breakdown assistance
call button 257
G
Eyeglasses compartment 250
38
Overhead control panel
At a glance
Door control panel
Function Page
:
Opens the door 80
;
%&Unlocks/locks
the vehicle 80
=
Adjusts the seats 97
?
r 45=
Stores seat, exterior mirror
and steering column adjust-
ment settings 107
w Adjusts the front-
passenger seat from the
driver’s seat 99
Function Page
A
o Opens/closes the
trunk lid 85
B
7Z\ Adjusts the
exterior mirrors electrically 105
C
W Opens/closes the side
windows 87
Door control panel
39
At a glance
Panic alarm
X
To activate: press ! button : for at
least one second.
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the
alarm system is armed.
X
To deactivate: press ! button : again.
or
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
or
X
Press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button.
The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the vehicle.
Occupant safety
Introduction to the restraint system
The restraint system can reduce the risk of
vehicle occupants coming into contact with
parts of the vehicle's interior in the event of an
accident. The restraint system can also reduce
the forces to which vehicle occupants are sub-
jected during an accident.
The restraint system includes the following
components:
R
seat belt system
R
air bags
The components of the restraint system work
in conjunction with each other. They can only
deploy their protective function if, at all times,
all vehicle occupants:
R
have fastened their seat belts correctly
(Y page 43)
R
have the seat and head restraint adjusted
properly (Y page 97)
As the driver, you also have to make sure that
the steering wheel is adjusted correctly.
Observe the information relating to the correct
driver's seat position (Y page 97).
You also have to make sure that an air bag can
inflate properly if deployed (Y page 45).
An air bag supplements a correctly worn seat
belt. As an additional safety device, the air bag
increases the level of protection for vehicle
occupants in the event of an accident. For
example, if, in the event of an accident, the
protection offered by the seat belt is sufficient,
the air bags are not deployed. When an acci-
dent occurs, only the air bags that increase
protection in that particular accident situation
are deployed. However, seat belts and air bags
generally do not protect against objects pene-
trating the vehicle from the outside.
Information on restraint system operation can
be found under "Triggering of the Emergency
Tensioning Devices and air bags"
(Y page 53).
See "Children in the vehicle" for information
on children traveling with you in the vehicle as
well as on child restraint systems
(Y page 57).
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Modifications to the restraint system may
cause it to no longer work as intended. The
restraint system may then not perform its
intended protective function and may fail in
an accident or trigger unexpectedly, for
example. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
Never modify parts of the restraint system.
Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic
components or their software.
If it is necessary to modify components of the
restraint system to accommodate a person
with disabilities, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only:
for further information contact our Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800 FOR-MERCEDES
(1‑800‑367‑6372).
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use
driving aids which have been approved specifi-
cally for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
40
Occupant safety
Safety
Restraint system warning lamp
The functions of the restraint system are
checked after the ignition is switched on and
at regular intervals while the engine is running.
Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in
good time.
The 6 restraint system warning lamp on
the instrument cluster lights up when the igni-
tion is switched on. It goes out no later than a
few seconds after the vehicle is started. The
components of the restraint system are in
operational readiness.
A malfunction has occurred if the 6
restraint system warning lamp:
R
does not light up after the ignition is
switched on
R
does not go out after a few seconds with the
engine running
R
lights up again while the engine is running
G
WARNING
If the restraint system is malfunctioning,
restraint system components may be trig-
gered unintentionally or may not deploy as
intended during an accident. This can affect
for example the Emergency Tensioning
Device or the air bag. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Have the restraint system checked and
repaired in a qualified specialist workshop
as soon as possible.
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp :
and PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp ; are part of the Occupant Classifica-
tion System (OCS).
The indicator lamps display the status of the
front-passenger front air bag.
R
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60
seconds, subsequently both indicator lamps
are off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF):
the front-passenger front air bag is able to
deploy in the event of an accident.
R
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the
front-passenger front air bag is deactivated.
It will then not be deployed in the event of
an accident.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp
is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-
cator lamp shows the status of the front-
passenger front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continu-
ously or be off.
Depending on the person in the front-
passenger seat, the front-passenger front air
bag must either be deactivated or enabled;
see the following points. You must make sure
of this both before and during a journey.
R
Children in a child restraint system:
whether the front-passenger front air bag is
enabled or deactivated depends on the
installed child restraint system, and the age
and size of the child. Therefore, be sure to
observe the notes on the "Occupant Classifi-
cation System (OCS)" (Y page 48) and on
"Children in the vehicle" (Y page 57).
There you will also find instructions on rear-
ward and forward-facing child restraint sys-
tems on the front-passenger seat.
R
All other persons: depending on the classi-
fication of the person in the front-passenger
seat, the front-passenger front air bag is
enabled or deactivated (Y page 48). Be
sure to observe the notes on "Seat
belts“ (Y page 41) and "Air bags"
(Y page 45). There you can also find infor-
mation on the correct seat position.
Seat belts
Introduction
Seat belts are the most effective means of
restricting the movement of vehicle occupants
in the event of an accident or the vehicle roll-
ing over. This reduces the risk of vehicle occu-
Occupant safety
41
Safety
Z
pants coming into contact with parts of the
vehicle interior or being ejected from the vehi-
cle. Furthermore, the seat belt helps to keep
the vehicle occupant in the best position in
relation to the air bag.
The seat belt system comprises:
R
Seat belts
R
Emergency Tensioning Devices and seat belt
force limiters
If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply by
the seat belt guide, the inertia reel locks. The
belt strap cannot be extracted any further.
The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens the
seat belt in an accident, pulling the belt close
against the body. However it does not pull the
vehicle occupant back in the direction of the
backrest.
The Emergency Tensioning Device does not
correct an incorrect seat position or the rout-
ing of an incorrectly fastened seat belt.
When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helps
to reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on
the vehicle occupant.
The seat belt force limiters are synchronized
with the front air bags which absorb part of
the deceleration force. This can reduce the
force exerted on the vehicle occupants during
an accident.
!
If the front-passenger seat is not occupied,
do not engage the seat belt tongue in the
buckle on the front-passenger seat. Other-
wise, in the event of an accident the Emer-
gency Tensioning Device and the side
impact air bag, in addition to other systems,
may be triggered and have to be replaced.
Important safety notes
The use of seat belts and child restraint sys-
tems is required by law in:
R
all 50 states
R
the U.S. territories
R
the District of Columbia
R
all Canadian provinces
Even where this is not required by law, all vehi-
cle occupants should correctly fasten their
seat belts before starting the journey.
G
WARNING
If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it can-
not perform its intended protective function.
An incorrectly fastened seat belt can also
cause injuries, for example, in the event of
an accident or when braking or changing
direction abruptly. This poses an increased
risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Always ensure that all vehicle occupants
have their seat belts fastened correctly and
are sitting properly.
The components of the restraint system work
in conjunction with each other. They can only
deploy their protective function if, at all times,
all vehicle occupants:
R
have fastened their seat belts correctly
(Y page 43)
R
have the seat and head restraint adjusted
properly (Y page 97)
G
WARNING
The seat belt does not offer the intended
level of protection if you have not moved the
backrest to an almost vertical position.
When braking or in the event of an accident,
you could slide underneath the seat belt and
sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for exam-
ple. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
Adjust the seat properly before beginning
your journey. Always ensure that the back-
rest is in an almost vertical position and that
the shoulder section of your seat belt is
routed across the center of your shoulder.
G
WARNING
Persons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall cannot
wear the seat belt correctly without an addi-
tional and suitable restraint system. If the
seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot per-
form its intended protective function. An
incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause
injuries, for example, in the event of an acci-
dent or when braking or changing direction
abruptly. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
For this reason, always secure persons
under 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable additional
restraint systems.
42
Occupant safety
Safety
If a child younger than twelve years old and
under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the
vehicle:
R
always secure the child in a child restraint
system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz
vehicle. The child restraint system must be
appropriate to the age, weight and size of
the child.
R
always observe the instructions and safety
notes on "Children in the vehicle"
(Y page 57) in addition to the child
restraint system manufacturer's installation
and operating instructions
R
always observe the instructions and safety
notes on the "Occupant Classification Sys-
tem (OCS)" (Y page 48)
G
WARNING
The seat belts may not perform their inten-
ded protective function if:
R
they are damaged, modified, extremely
dirty, bleached or dyed
R
the seat belt buckle is damaged or
extremely dirty
R
the Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt
anchorages or inertia reels have been
modified.
Seat belts may be damaged in an accident,
although the damage may not be visible, e.g.
due to splinters of glass. Modified or dam-
aged seat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an
accident. Modified Emergency Tensioning
Devices could accidentally trigger or fail to
deploy when necessary. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten-
sioning Devices, belt anchorages and inertia
reels. Make sure that the seat belts are
undamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow-
ing an accident, have the seat belts checked
immediately at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Only use seat belts that have been approved
for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
Proper use of the seat belts
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
(Y page 42).
Every vehicle occupant must observe the fol-
lowing notes to ensure a properly worn seat
belt can provide full protection. Also make
sure that all vehicle occupants are always
wearing the seat belt correctly while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
When fastening the seat belt, always make
sure that:
R
the seat belt buckle tongue is inserted only
into the belt buckle belonging to that seat
R
the seat belt is pulled tight across your body
Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter
coat.
R
the seat belt is not twisted
Only then can the forces which occur be dis-
tributed over the area of the belt.
R
the shoulder section of the belt is routed
across the center of your shoulder
The shoulder section of the seat belt should
not touch your neck or be routed under your
arm or behind your back.
R
the lap belt is taut and passes across your
lap as low down as possible
The lap belt must always be routed across
your hip joints and not across your abdo-
men. This applies particularly to pregnant
women. If necessary, push the lap belt down
to your hip joint and pull it tight using the
shoulder section of the belt.
R
the seat belt is not routed across sharp,
pointed or fragile objects
If you have such items located on or in your
clothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses,
store these in a suitable place.
R
only one person is using a seat belt
Infants and children must never travel sit-
ting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the
event of an accident, they could be crushed
between the vehicle occupant and seat belt.
R
objects are never secured with a seat belt if
the seat belt is also being used by one of
the vehicle's occupants
Also ensure that there are never objects
between a person and the seat, e.g. cush-
ions.
Seat belts are only intended to secure and
restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the
notes in the "Stowage options/compartments"
Occupant safety
43
Safety
Z
section for securing objects, luggage or loads
(Y page 249).
Fastening seat belts
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
(Y page 42) and the notes on correct use of
seat belts (Y page 43).
Basic illustration
X
Adjust the seat (Y page 97).
The seat backrest must be in an almost
upright position.
X
Pull the seat belt smoothly out of seat belt
guide = and engage belt tongue ; into
belt buckle :.
The seat belt on the driver’s seat and the
front-passenger seat may be tightened auto-
matically, see "Belt adjustment"
(Y page 44).
X
If necessary, pull up on the shoulder section
of the seat belt to tighten the belt across
your body.
In order to attach the child restraint system
securely in the vehicle, the seat belt on the
front-passenger seat is equipped with a spe-
cial seat belt retractor. Further information on
the "Special seat belt retractor" (Y page 57).
Releasing seat belts
!
Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled
up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue
will be trapped in the door or in the seat
mechanism. This could damage the door,
the door trim panel and the seat belt. Dam-
aged seat belts can no longer fulfill their
protective function and must be replaced.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
X
Press the release button in the belt buckle,
hold the belt tongue firmly and guide the
belt back.
Seat belt adjustment
The belt adjustment is a convenience function
integrated into PRE-SAFE
®
. With this function,
the driver's and front-passenger seat belts are
adjusted to the upper body of the vehicle
occupant.
The seat belt strap will slightly tighten if:
R
the belt tongue is inserted into the buckle
and
R
the ignition is switched on
The seat belt adjustment will apply a certain
tightening force if any slack is detected
between the vehicle occupant and the seat
belt. Do not grab hold of the seat belt.
The belt adjustment can be switched on and
off using the on-board computer
(Y page 202).
Belt warning for the driver and front
passenger
The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-
ment cluster is a reminder that all vehicle
occupants must wear their seat belts. It may
light up continuously or flash. In addition,
there may be a warning tone.
Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt
has already been fastened, the 7 seat belt
warning lamp lights up for six seconds each
time the engine is started. If the doors are
closed and the driver's or front-passenger seat
belt has not been fastened, the 7 seat belt
warning lamp lights up again after the six sec-
onds. As soon as the driver's and front-
passenger seat belts are fastened or a front
door is opened again, the 7 seat belt warn-
ing lamp goes out.
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after
the engine is started, an additional warning
tone will sound. The warning tone switches off
after six seconds or once the driver's seat belt
is fastened.
If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph
(25 km/h) once and the driver's and front-
44
Occupant safety
Safety
passenger seat belts are not fastened, a warn-
ing tone sounds. A warning tone also sounds
with increasing intensity for 60 seconds or
until the driver or front passenger have fas-
tened their seat belts.
If the driver or front passenger unfasten their
seat belts during the journey, the seat belt
warning is activated again.
Air bags
Introduction
The installation point of an airbag can be rec-
ognized by the AIRBAG marking.
An airbag complements the correctly fastened
seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat belt.
When deployed, an airbag can increase the
protection provided for the respective vehicle
occupant.
Not all airbags are deployed in an accident.
The various airbags work independently of
each other (Y page 53).
However, no system available today can com-
pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.
It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury
caused by an airbag due to the high speed at
which the airbag must be deployed.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you do not sit in the correct seat position,
the air bag cannot protect as intended and
could even cause additional injury when
deployed. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
To avoid hazardous situations, always make
sure that all of the vehicle's occupants:
R
have fastened their seat belts correctly,
including pregnant women
R
are sitting correctly and maintain the
greatest possible distance to the air bags
R
follow the following instructions
Always make sure that there are no objects
between the air bag and the vehicle's occu-
pants.
All vehicle occupants must observe the follow-
ing notes to avoid risks posed by the airbag
when it deploys.
R
Adjust the seats properly before beginning
your journey. Always make sure that the
seat is in an almost upright position. The
center of the head restraint must support
the head at about eye level.
R
Move the driver's and front-passenger seats
as far back as possible. The driver's seat
position must allow the vehicle to be driven
safely.
R
Only hold the steering wheel on the outside.
This allows the airbag to be fully deployed.
R
Always lean against the backrest while driv-
ing. Do not lean forward or lean against the
door or side window. You may otherwise be
in the deployment area of the airbags.
R
Always keep your feet in the footwell in
front of the seat. Do not put your feet on the
dashboard, for example. Your feet may oth-
erwise be in the deployment area of the air-
bag.
R
For this reason, always secure persons less
than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint
systems. Up to this height, the seat belt
cannot be worn correctly.
If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also
observe the following notes:
R
Always secure children under twelve years
of age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suit-
able child restraint systems.
R
Secure a child to the front-passenger seat
only when the front-passenger front airbag
is deactivated, and then only in a rearward-
facing child restraint system. The front-
passenger front airbag is deactivated when
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit continuously (Y page 41).
R
Always observe the instructions and safety
notes on the "Occupant Classification Sys-
tem (OCS)" (Y page 48) and on "Children
in the vehicle" (Y page 57) in addition to
the child restraint system manufacturer's
installation and operating instructions.
Objects in the vehicle interior may restrict
the airbag from functioning correctly. To
avoid risks resulting from the speed of the air-
bag as it deploys, vehicle occupants must
ensure the following points.
Occupant safety
45
Safety
Z
Before commencing your journey, ensure that:
R
there are no people, animals or objects
between the vehicle occupants and an air-
bag
R
there are no objects between the seat, door
and B-pillar
R
there are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers,
hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks
R
no accessories, such as cup holders, are
attached to the vehicle within the deploy-
ment area of an airbag, e.g. to doors or side
windows
R
no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are
in the pockets of your clothing. Store such
objects in a suitable place
G
WARNING
If you modify the cover of an air bag or affix
objects such as stickers to it, the air bag
can no longer perform its intended function.
There is an increased risk of injury.
Never modify the cover of an air bag or affix
objects to it.
G
WARNING
Sensors to control the air bags are located
in the doors. Modifications or work not per-
formed correctly to the doors or door panel-
ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to
the function of the sensors being impaired.
The air bags might therefore not function
properly anymore. Consequently, the air
bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as
they are designed to do. There is an
increased risk of injury.
Never modify the doors or parts of the
doors. Always have work on the doors or
door paneling carried out at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Front air bags
!
Do not place heavy objects on the front-
passenger seat. This could cause the sys-
tem to identify the seat as being occupied.
In the event of an accident, the restraint
systems on the front-passenger side may be
triggered and have to be replaced.
Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the
steering wheel. Front-passenger front air
bag ; deploys in front of and above the glove
box.
When deployed, the front air bags offer addi-
tional head and thorax protection for the occu-
pants in the driver's and front-passenger
seats.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
informs you about the status of the front-
passenger front air bag (Y page 41).
The front-passenger front air bag will only
deploy if:
R
the system, based on the OCS weight sen-
sor readings, detects that the front-
passenger seat is occupied (Y page 48).
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is not lit (Y page 48)
R
the restraint system control unit predicts a
high accident severity
Knee bags
Driver's knee bag : deploys under the steer-
ing column and front-passenger knee bag ;
under the glove box. The driver's and front-
passenger knee bags are triggered together
with the front air bags.
46
Occupant safety
Safety
The driver's and front-passenger knee bags
offer additional thigh, knee and lower leg pro-
tection.
Side impact air bags
G
WARNING
Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or pre-
vent deployment of the air bags integrated
into the seats. Consequently, the air bags
cannot protect vehicle occupants as they
are designed to do. In addition, the opera-
tion of the occupant classification system
(OCS) could be adversely affected. This
poses an increased risk of injury or even
fatal injury.
You should only use seat covers that have
been approved for the respective seat by
Mercedes-Benz.
Side impact air bags : deploy next to the
outer bolster of the seat backrest.
When deployed, the side impact air bag offers
additional thorax protection. However, it does
not protect the:
R
head
R
neck
R
arms
If the restraint system control unit detects a
side impact, the side impact air bag is
deployed on the side on which the impact
occurs.
The side impact air bag on the front passenger
side deploys under the following conditions:
R
the OCS system detects that the front
passenger seat is occupied or
R
the seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in
the belt buckle of the front passenger seat
If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt
buckle, the side impact air bag on the front
passenger side deploys if an appropriate acci-
dent situation occurs. In this case, deployment
is independent of whether the front passenger
seat is occupied or not.
Head air bags
Head bags : deploy in the area of the side
windows at the front.
When deployed, the head bag enhances the
level of protection for the head. However, it
does not protect the:
R
chest
R
arms
If the restraint system control unit detects a
side impact, the head bag is deployed on the
side on which the impact occurs.
If the system determines that they can offer
additional protection to that provided by the
seat belt, a head bag may be deployed in other
accident situations (Y page 53).
The head bag on the front-passenger side
deploys under the following conditions:
R
the OCS system detects that the front-
passenger seat is occupied or
R
the seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in
the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat
If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt
buckle, the head bag on the front-passenger
side deploys if an appropriate accident situa-
tion occurs. In this case, deployment is inde-
pendent of whether the front-passenger seat is
occupied or not.
Occupant safety
47
Safety
Z
Occupant Classification System
(OCS)
Introduction
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) cat-
egorizes the person in the front-passenger
seat. Depending on that result, the front-
passenger front air bag and front-passenger
knee bag are either enabled or deactivated.
The system does not deactivate:
R
the side impact air bag
R
the headbag
R
the Emergency Tensioning Devices
Requirements
To be classified correctly, the front passenger
must sit:
R
with the seat belt fastened correctly
R
in an almost upright position with their back
against the seat backrest
R
with their feet resting on the floor, if possi-
ble
If the front passenger does not observe these
conditions, OCS may produce a false classifi-
cation, e.g. because the front passenger:
R
transfers their weight by supporting them-
selves on a vehicle armrest
R
sits in such a way that their weight is raised
from the seat cushion
If you install a child restraint system on the
front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the
correct positioning of the child restraint sys-
tem. Never place objects under or behind the
child restraint system, e.g. a cushion. Fully
retract the seat cushion length. The entire
base of the child restraint system must always
rest on the seat cushion of the front-
passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-
facing child restraint system must lie as flat as
possible against the backrest of the front-
passenger seat.
The child restraint system must not touch the
roof or be subjected to a load by the head
restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest
and the head restraint position accordingly.
Only then can OCS be guaranteed to function
correctly. Always observe the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation and operat-
ing instructions.
Occupant Classification System opera-
tion (OCS)
:
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp
;
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
The indicator lamps inform you whether the
front-passenger front air bag is deactivated or
enabled.
X
Press the Start/Stop button once or twice,
or turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in
the ignition lock.
The system carries out self-diagnostics.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must
light up simultaneously for approximately six
seconds.
The indicator lamps display the status of the
front-passenger front air bag.
R
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for
60 seconds, subsequently both indicator
lamps are off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and
OFF): the front-passenger front air bag is
able to deploy in the event of an accident.
R
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the
front-passenger front air bag is deactivated.
It will then not be deployed in the event of
an accident.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp
is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-
cator lamp shows the status of the front-
passenger front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continu-
ously or be off.
If the status of the front-passenger front air
bag changes while the vehicle is in motion, an
air bag display message appears in the instru-
ment cluster (Y page 215). When the front-
passenger seat is occupied, always pay atten-
tion to the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp. Be aware of the status of the front-
48
Occupant safety
Safety
passenger front air bag both before and during
the journey.
G
WARNING
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag
is disabled. It will not be deployed in the
event of an accident and cannot perform its
intended protective function. A person in the
front-passenger seat could then, for exam-
ple, come into contact with the vehicle's
interior, especially if the person is sitting too
close to the dashboard. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
When the front-passenger seat is occupied,
always ensure that:
R
the classification of the person in the
front-passenger seat is correct and the
front-passenger front air bag is enabled or
disabled in accordance with the person in
the front-passenger seat
R
the front-passenger seat has been moved
back as far back as possible.
R
the person is seated correctly.
Make sure, both before and during the jour-
ney, that the status of the front-passenger
front air bag is correct.
G
WARNING
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing
child restraint system on the front-
passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the front-
passenger front air bag can deploy in the
event of an accident. The child could be
struck by the air bag. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Make sure that the front-passenger front air
bag has been deactivated. The PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint
on a seat protected by an ACTIVE FRONT
AIRBAG in front of it; DEATH or SERIOUS
INJURY to the child can occur.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
stays off, do not install a rearward-facing child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat.
You can find more information on OCS under
"Problems with the Occupant Classification
System" (Y page 51).
G
WARNING
If you secure a child in a forward-facing child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat
and you position the front-passenger seat
too close to the dashboard, in the event of
an accident, the child could:
R
come into contact with the vehicle's inte-
rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-
cator lamp is lit, for example
R
be struck by the air bag if the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
is off
This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
Always move the front-passenger seat as far
back as possible and fully retract the seat
cushion length. Always make sure that the
shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from
the vehicle seat belt guide to the shoulder
belt guide on the child restraint system. The
shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards
and downwards from the seat belt guide.
Always observe the child restraint system
manufacturer's installation instructions.
If OCS determines that:
R
The front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
lights up after the self-test and remains lit.
This indicates that the front-passenger front
air bag is deactivated.
R
The front-passenger seat is occupied by a
child of up to twelve months old, in a stand-
ard child restraint system, the PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after
the self-test and remains lit. This indicates
that the front-passenger front air bag is
deactivated.
But even in the case of a twelve-month-old
child, in a standard child restraint system,
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp can go out after the self-test. This indi-
cates that the front-passenger front air bag
is activated. The result of the classification
is dependent on, among other factors, the
Occupant safety
49
Safety
Z
child restraint system and the child's stat-
ure. Make sure that the conditions for a cor-
rect classification are met. If the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
remains off, do not install a child restraint
system on the front-passenger seat.
R
The front-passenger seat is occupied by a
person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or
small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp either lights up and remains
lit after the self-test depending on the result
of the classification or, alternatively, goes
out.
-
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is off, move the front-passenger seat
as far back as possible.
-
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit, a person of smaller stature
should not use the front-passenger seat.
R
The front-passenger seat is occupied by an
adult or a person of corresponding stature,
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp goes out after the self-test. This indi-
cates that the front-passenger front air bag
is activated.
If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure
to observe the notes on "Children in the vehi-
cle" (Y page 57).
When the Occupant Classification System
(OCS) is malfunctioning, the red 6 restraint
system warning lamp on the instrument clus-
ter and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica-
tor lamp light up simultaneously. The front-
passenger front air bag is deactivated in this
case and does not deploy during an accident.
Have the Occupant Classification System
(OCS) checked and repaired immediately at a
qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you use an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose.
If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or
the seat cushion are damaged, have the nec-
essary repair work carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you use an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center for this purpose.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use seat accessories that
have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Deployment of the driver's air bag does not
mean that the front-passenger front air bag
deploys as well. The Occupant Classification
System (OCS) categorizes the occupant on the
front-passenger seat. Depending on that
result, the front-passenger front air bag is
either enabled or deactivated.
Self-check of the occupant classifica-
tion system (OCS)
G
DANGER
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps do
not both light up during the self-test, the
system is malfunctioning. The front-
passenger front air bag might be triggered
unintentionally or might not be triggered at
all in the event of an accident with high
deceleration. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
In this case the front-passenger seat may
not be used. Do not install a child restraint
system on the front-passenger seat. Have
the Occupant Classification System (OCS)
checked and repaired immediately at a
qualified specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit after the self-test, the front-
passenger front air bag is deactivated. It will
not be deployed in the event of an accident.
In this case, the front-passenger front air
bag cannot perform its intended protective
function, e.g. when a person is seated in the
front-passenger seat.
That person could, for example, come into
contact with the vehicle's interior, especially
if the person is sitting too close to the dash-
board. This poses an increased risk of injury
or even fatal injury.
When the front-passenger seat is occupied,
always ensure that:
R
the classification of the person in the
front-passenger seat is correct and the
front-passenger front air bag is enabled or
50
Occupant safety
Safety
deactivated in accordance with the per-
son in the front-passenger seat
R
the person is seated properly with a cor-
rectly fastened seatbelt
R
the front-passenger seat has been moved
as far back as possible
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit when it should not, the
front-passenger seat must not be used. Do
not install a child restraint system on the
front-passenger seat. Have the Occupant
Classification System (OCS) checked and
repaired immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop.
G
WARNING
Objects between the seat surface and the
child restraint system could affect OCS
operation. This could result in the front-
passenger air bag not functioning as inten-
ded during an accident. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Do not place any objects between the seat
surface and the child restraint system. The
entire base of the child restraint system
must always rest on the seat cushion of the
front-passenger seat. The backrest of the
forward-facing child restraint system must,
as far as possible, be resting on the back-
rest of the front-passenger seat. Always
comply with the child restraint system man-
ufacturer's installation instructions.
After the self-test, the PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator
lamp displays the status of the front-
passenger front airbag (Y page 48). If the
front-passenger front airbag is enabled, the
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights
up for 60 seconds and then goes out.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp
is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-
cator lamp shows the status of the front-
passenger front airbag. The PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continu-
ously or be off.
For more information about the OCS, see
"Problems with the Occupant Classification
System" (Y page 51).
Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)
Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 50).
Occupant safety
51
Safety
Z
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp
lights up and remains
lit, even though the
front-passenger seat is
occupied by an adult or
a person of a stature
corresponding to that of
an adult.
The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is incor-
rect.
X
Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the per-
son on the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 48).
X
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the
front-passenger seat may not be used.
X
Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
The PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp
does not light up
and/or does not stay
on.
The front-passenger
seat is:
R
unoccupied
R
occupied by the
weight of a child up
to twelve months old
in a child restraint
system
OCS is malfunctioning.
X
Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the
child seat.
X
Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests
on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of
the forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possi-
ble against the backrest of the front passenger seat. If necessary,
adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.
X
Make sure that the seat cushion length is fully retracted.
X
When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the
seat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-
passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and
the child restraint system being pulled too tightly.
X
Check for correct installation of the child restraint system.
Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the
child restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint
accordingly.
X
Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto the
seat.
X
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off
and/or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do
not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat.
X
Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Roll bar
G
DANGER
If the roll bar has developed a malfunction, it
may not function, e.g. in the event of an
accident. The roll bars may then not protect
the vehicle occupants as intended. This
poses an increased risk of injury or even
fatal injury.
Have roll bars checked immediately at a
qualified specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
If you place objects or clothing on the roll
bar covers, these could impair roll bar exten-
sion. The roll bars may then not protect the
vehicle occupants as intended. In addition,
objects could endanger the vehicle occu-
pants when the roll bar is extending. This
poses an increased risk of injury or even
fatal injury.
Ensure that the movement area of the roll
bar covers is kept clear. Always stow all
objects in the vehicle correctly.
52
Occupant safety
Safety
The roll bars are located in the rear area of the
vehicle under the two outer rear compartment
trim covers.
They extend if systems detect that the vehicle
is in danger of rollover. The two outer rear
compartment trim covers are opened and the
roll bars are extended within fractions of a
second.
Once the roll bars are extended, you can no
longer lower them. An open roof can no longer
be closed. In this case, visit the nearest quali-
fied specialist workshop.
Deployment of Emergency Tension-
ing Devices and air bags
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has
been deployed. There is a risk of injury.
Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a
deployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop as soon as possible.
G
WARNING
A deployed air bag no longer offers any pro-
tection and cannot provide the intended pro-
tection in an accident. There is an increased
risk of injury.
Have the vehicle towed to a qualified spe-
cialist workshop in order to have a deployed
air bag replaced.
For your own safety and that of your front
passenger, it is important that you have
deployed air bags replaced and defective air
bags repaired. This will help to make sure the
air bags continue to perform their protective
function for the vehicle occupants in the event
of a crash.
G
WARNING
Emergency Tensioning Devices that have
deployed pyrotechnically are no longer
operational and are unable to perform their
intended protective function. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Have pyrotechnically triggered Emergency
Tensioning Devices replaced immediately at
a qualified specialist workshop.
An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE
®
to
trigger the tightening of the seat belt in haz-
ardous situations. This procedure is reversible.
If Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered
or air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang,
and some powder may also be released. The
6 restraint system warning lamp lights up.
Only in rare cases will the bang affect your
hearing. The powder that is released generally
does not constitute a health hazard, but it may
cause short-term breathing difficulties in peo-
ple with asthma or other respiratory problems.
Provided it is safe to do so, you should leave
the vehicle immediately or open the window in
order to prevent breathing difficulties.
Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tension-
ing Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate mate-
rial, which may require special handling and
regard for the environment. National guide-
lines must be observed during disposal. In Cal-
ifornia, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.
Method of operation
During the first stage of a collision, the
restraint system control unit evaluates impor-
tant physical data relating to vehicle decelera-
tion or acceleration, such as:
R
duration
R
direction
R
intensity
Based on the evaluation of this data, the
restraint system control unit triggers the Emer-
gency Tensioning Devices during a head-on or
rear-end collision.
Occupant safety
53
Safety
Z
An Emergency Tensioning Device can only be
triggered, if:
R
the ignition is switched on
R
the components of the restraint system are
operational. You can find further information
under "Restraint system warning lamp"
(Y page 41)
R
the seat belt buckle tongue has engaged in
the belt buckle of the respective seat
If the restraint system control unit detects a
more severe accident, further components of
the restraint system are activated independ-
ently of each other in certain frontal collision
situations:
R
Front air bags as well as driver's and front-
passenger knee bags
Depending on the person in the front-
passenger seat, the front-passenger front air
bag is either enabled or disabled. The front-
passenger front air bag can be deployed in an
accident only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp is off. Observe the information
on the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps
(Y page 41).
Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags.
The activation threshold of the Emergency
Tensioning Devices and the air bags is deter-
mined by evaluating the rate of vehicle decel-
eration or acceleration which occurs at various
points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emp-
tive in nature. Deployment should take place
in good time at the start of the collision.
The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelera-
tion and the direction of the force are essen-
tially determined by:
R
the distribution of forces during the collision
R
the collision angle
R
the deformation characteristics of the vehi-
cle
R
the characteristics of the object with which
the vehicle has collided
Factors which can only be seen and measured
after a collision has occurred do not play a
decisive role in the deployment of an air bag.
Nor do they provide an indication of air bag
deployment.
The vehicle can be deformed considerably,
without an air bag being deployed. This is the
case if only parts which are relatively easily
deformed are affected and the rate of deceler-
ation is not high. Conversely, air bags may be
deployed even though the vehicle suffers only
minor deformation. This is the case if, for
example, very rigid vehicle parts such as longi-
tudinal body members are hit, and sufficient
deceleration occurs as a result.
If the restraint system control unit detects a
side impact or if the vehicle rolls over, the
applicable components of the restraint system
are deployed independently of each other
depending on the apparent type of accident.
R
Side impact air bag on the side of impact,
independently of the Emergency Tensioning
Device and the use of the seat belt on the
driver's seat
The side impact air bag on the front
passenger side deploys under the following
conditions:
-
the OCS system detects that the front
passenger seat is occupied or
-
the seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in
the belt buckle of the front passenger
seat
R
Head bag on the side of impact, independ-
ently of the use of the seat belt and inde-
pendently of whether the front-passenger
seat is occupied
R
Emergency Tensioning Devices, if the sys-
tem determines that deployment can offer
additional protection in this situation
R
Head bags on the driver's and front-
passenger side in certain situations when
the vehicle rolls over, if the system deter-
mines that deployment can offer additional
protection to that provided by the seat belt
i
Not all air bags are deployed in an acci-
dent. The different air bag systems work
independently of each other.
How the air bag system works is determined
by the severity of the accident detected,
especially the vehicle deceleration or accel-
eration and the apparent type of accident:
R
Head-on collision
R
Side impact
R
Rollover
54
Occupant safety
Safety
NECK-PRO head restraints
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
The function of the head restraint may be
impaired if you:
R
attach objects such as coat hangers to
the head restraints, for example
R
use head restraint covers
If you do so, the head restraints cannot fulfill
their intended protective function in the
event of an accident. In addition, objects
attached to the head restraints could endan-
ger other vehicle occupants. There is an
increased risk of injury.
Do not attach any objects to the head
restraints and do not use head restraint cov-
ers.
Method of operation
NECK-PRO head restraints reduce the likeli-
hood of head and chest injuries. The NECK-
PRO head restraints on the driver's and front-
passenger seats are moved forwards and
upwards in the event of a rear-end collision of
a certain severity. This provides better head
support.
If the NECK-PRO head restraints have been
triggered in an accident, you must reset the
NECK-PRO head restraints on the driver’s and
front-passenger seat (Y page 55). Other-
wise, the additional protection will not be
available in the event of another rear-end colli-
sion. You can recognize when NECK-PRO head
restraints have been triggered by the fact that
they have moved forwards and can no longer
be adjusted.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
the NECK-PRO head restraints checked for
functionality at a qualified specialist workshop
after a rear-end collision.
Resetting triggered NECK-PRO head
restraints
Do not insert your finger between the uphols-
tery of the head restraint and the seat. Pay
particular attention while resetting the NECK-
PRO head restraints.
X
Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraint
cushion forwards in the direction of
arrow :.
X
Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion
down as far as it will go in the direction of
arrow ;.
X
Firmly push the NECK-PRO head restraint
cushion back in the direction of arrow =
until the cushion engages.
X
Repeat this procedure for the second NECK-
PRO head restraint.
i
Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints
requires a lot of strength. If you have diffi-
culty resetting the NECK-PRO head
restraints, have this work carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.
PRE-SAFE
®
(anticipatory occupant
protection system)
PRE-SAFE
®
informs you of certain critical driv-
ing situations and takes pre-emptive measures
to protect the vehicle occupants.
PRE-SAFE
®
can take the following measures
independently of each other:
R
pre-tensioning the driver's and front-
passenger seatbelt.
R
closing the side windows.
Occupant safety
55
Safety
Z
R
setting a more favorable seat position for
the front-passenger seat.
R
vehicles with a multicontour seat: increasing
the air pressure in the side bolsters of the
seat backrest.
!
Make sure that there are no objects in the
footwell or behind the seats. There is a dan-
ger that the seats and/or objects could be
damaged when PRE-SAFE
®
is activated.
Should an accident not occur, the preventative
measures taken are reversed. Certain settings
must be made yourself.
X
If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not
reduced, move the seat backrest back
slightly.
Seat belt pre-tensioning is released.
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS (anticipatory occu-
pant protection system PLUS)
Introduction
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS is only available in vehicles
with the Driving Assistance package.
Using the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS is able to detect that a head-on or rear-
end collision is imminent. In certain hazardous
situations, PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS takes pre-emptive
measures to protect the vehicle occupants.
Important safety notes
The intervention of PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS cannot
prevent an imminent collision.
The driver is not warned about the intervention
of PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS.
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS does not intervene if the
vehicle is backing up.
When driving, or when parking or exiting a
parking space using Active Parking Assist,
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS will not apply the brakes.
Function
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS intervenes in certain situa-
tions if the radar sensor system detects an
imminent head-on or rear-end collision.
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS takes the following meas-
ures depending on the hazardous situation
detected:
R
if the radar sensor system detects that a
head-on collision is imminent, the seat belts
are pre-tensioned.
R
if the radar sensor system detects that a
rear-end collision is imminent:
-
the brake pressure is increased if the
driver applies the brakes when the vehicle
is stationary.
-
the seat belts are pre-tensioned.
The PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS braking application is
canceled:
R
if the accelerator pedal is depressed when a
gear is engaged
R
if the risk of a collision passes or is no lon-
ger detected
R
if Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC indi-
cates an intention to intervene
If the hazardous situation passes without
resulting in an accident, the original settings
are restored.
Automatic measures after an acci-
dent
Immediately after an accident, the following
measures are implemented, depending on the
type and severity of the impact:
R
the hazard warning lamps are switched on
R
the emergency lighting is activated
R
the vehicle doors are unlocked
R
the front side windows are lowered
R
the electrically adjustable steering wheel is
raised when the driver's door is opened
R
the engine is switched off and the fuel sup-
ply is cut off
R
vehicles with Mercedes me connect: auto-
matic emergency call
56
Occupant safety
Safety
Children in the vehicle
Important safety notes
If a child younger than twelve years old and
under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the
vehicle:
R
always secure the child in a child restraint
system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
The child restraint system must be appropri-
ate to the age, weight and size of the child.
R
be sure to observe the instructions and
safety notes in this section in addition to the
child restraint system manufacturer's instal-
lation instructions.
R
always observe the instructions and safety
notes on the "Occupant classification sys-
tem (OCS)". (Y page 48)
G
WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for
example:
R
release the parking brake.
R
shift the automatic transmission out of
the parking position P.
R
start the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle.
G
WARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjec-
ted to prolonged exposure to extreme heat
or cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly
even fatal. Never leave children unattended
in the vehicle.
G
WARNING
If the child restraint system is subjected to
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-
dren may burn themselves on these parts,
particularly on the metal parts of the child
restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
you, always ensure that the child restraint
system is not exposed to direct sunlight.
Protect it with a blanket, for example. If the
child restraint system has been exposed to
direct sunlight, let it cool down before secur-
ing the child in it. Never leave children unat-
tended in the vehicle.
Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have
their seat belts fastened correctly and are sit-
ting properly. Particular attention must be paid
to children.
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
(Y page 42) and the notes on correct use of
seat belts (Y page 43).
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
proper seat belt positioning for children over
40 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where
a three-point seat belt can be properly fas-
tened without a booster seat.
Special seatbelt retractor
G
WARNING
If the seat belt is released while driving, the
child restraint system will no longer be
secured properly. The special seat belt
retractor is disabled and the inertia real
draws in a portion of the seat belt. The seat
belt cannot be immediately refastened.
There is an increased risk of injury, possibly
even fatal.
Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-
tion to road and traffic conditions. Reacti-
vate the special seat belt retractor and
secure the child restraint system properly.
The seat belt on the front-passenger's side is
equipped with a special seat belt retractor.
When activated, the special seat belt retractor
ensures that the seat belt cannot slacken once
the child seat is secured.
Children in the vehicle
57
Safety
Z
Installing a child restraint system:
X
Make sure you observe the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation instruc-
tions.
X
Pull the seat belt smoothly out of the seat
belt guide.
X
Engage seat belt tongue in belt buckle.
Activating the special seat belt retractor:
X
Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia
reel retract it again.
While the seat belt is retracting, you should
hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat
belt retractor is enabled.
X
Push the child restraint system down so that
the seat belt is tight and does not loosen.
Removing the child restraint system and deac-
tivating the special seat belt retractor:
X
Make sure you observe the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation instruc-
tions.
X
Press the release button of the seat belt
buckle and route the seat belt tongue back
towards the seat belt guide.
The special seat belt retractor is deactiva-
ted.
child restraint system
The use of seat belts and child restraint sys-
tems is required by law in:
R
all 50 states
R
the U.S. territories
R
the District of Columbia
R
all Canadian provinces
You can obtain further information about the
correct child restraint system from any author-
ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
G
WARNING
If the child restraint system is installed
incorrectly on a suitable seat, it cannot pro-
tect as intended. The child cannot then be
restrained in the event of an accident, heavy
braking or sudden changes of direction.
There is an increased risk of injury, possibly
even fatal.
Make sure that you observe the child
restraint system manufacturer's installation
instructions and the notes on use. Please
ensure, that the base of the child restraint
system is always resting completely on the
seat cushion. Never place objects, e.g. cush-
ions, under or behind the child restraint sys-
tem. Only use child restraint systems with
the original cover designed for them. Only
replace damaged covers with genuine cov-
ers.
G
WARNING
If the child restraint system is installed
incorrectly or is not secured, it can come
loose in the event of an accident, heavy
braking or a sudden change in direction. The
child restraint system could be thrown
about, striking vehicle occupants. There is
an increased risk of injury, possibly even
fatal.
Always install child restraint systems prop-
erly, even if they are not being used. Make
sure that you observe the child restraint sys-
tem manufacturer's installation instructions.
Further information on stowing objects, lug-
gage and loads securely can be found under
“Stowing options/stowage compartments”
(Y page 249).
G
WARNING
Child restraint systems or their securing sys-
tems which have been damaged or subjec-
ted to a load in an accident can no longer
protect as intended. The child cannot then
be restrained in the event of an accident,
heavy braking or sudden changes of direc-
tion. There is an increased risk of injury,
possibly even fatal.
Replace child restraint systems which have
been damaged or subjected to a load in an
accident as soon as possible. Have the
securing systems on the child restraint sys-
tem checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop, before you install a child restraint sys-
tem again.
The securing system of child restraint systems
is the seat belt system.
58
Children in the vehicle
Safety
If you install a child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, be sure to observe the
instructions and safety notes on the "Occu-
pant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 48).
There you will also find information on disa-
bling the front passenger front air bag.
All child restraint systems must meet the fol-
lowing standards:
R
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 225
R
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 210.2
Confirmation that the child restraint system
corresponds to the standards can be found on
an instruction label on the child restraint sys-
tem. This confirmation can also be found in
the installation instructions that are included
with the child restraint system.
Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte-
rior and on the child restraint system.
Child restraint system on the front-
passenger seat
General notes
If you install a child restraint system on the
front-passenger seat, always observe the
instructions and safety notes on the "Occu-
pant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 48).
You can thus avoid the risks that could arise
as a result of:
R
an incorrectly categorized person in the
front-passenger seat
R
deactivating the front passenger front air
bag unintentionally
R
the unsuitable positioning of the child
restraint system, e.g. too close to the dash-
board
Rearward-facing child restraint system
If circumstances require you to secure a child
in a rearward-facing child restraint system on
the front-passenger seat, always make sure
that the front passenger front air bag is deacti-
vated. Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp is lit continuously (Y page 41),
is the front passenger front air bag deactiva-
ted.
Always observe the child restraint system
manufacturer's installation and operating
instructions.
Forward-facing child restraint system
If you secure a child in a forward-facing child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat,
always move the front-passenger seat as far
back as possible. Fully retract the seat cushion
length. The entire base of the child restraint
system must always rest on the seat cushion
of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of
the child restraint system must lie as flat as
possible against the backrest of the front-
passenger seat. The child restraint system
must not touch the roof or be subjected to a
load by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of
the seat backrest and the head restraint posi-
tion accordingly. Always make sure that the
shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the
front-passenger seat belt guide to the shoulder
belt guide on the child restraint system. The
shoulder belt strap must be routed forward
and down from the front-passenger seat belt
guide. If necessary, adjust the front-passenger
seat accordingly.
Always observe the child restraint system
manufacturer's installation and operating
instructions.
Pets in the vehicle
G
WARNING
If you leave animals unsupervised or unse-
cured in the vehicle, they may press buttons
or switches, for instance.
In this way, animals may:
R
activate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example
R
switch systems on or off and thereby
endanger other road users
Furthermore, unsecured animals may be
flung around inside the vehicle in the event
of an accident or abrupt steering or braking
maneuver, and thereby injure vehicle occu-
pants. There is a risk of accident and injury.
Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-
cle.
Pets in the vehicle
59
Safety
Z
Always secure animals properly when driv-
ing, for instance with a suitable pet carrier.
Driving safety systems
Overview of driving safety systems
In this section, you will find information about
the following driving safety systems:
R
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
(Y page 60)
R
BAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 61)
R
Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
(Y page 61)
R
Active Brake Assist (Y page 63)
R
Adaptive brake lights (Y page 65)
R
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program)
(Y page 65)
R
EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)
(Y page 69)
R
ADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 70)
R
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-
tion (Y page 70)
R
STEER CONTROL (Y page 72)
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you
are inattentive, the driving safety systems can
neither reduce the risk of an accident nor
override the laws of physics. Driving safety
systems are merely aids designed to assist
driving.
You are responsible for maintaining the dis-
tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed,
for braking in good time, and for staying in
lane. Always adapt your driving style to suit
the prevailing road and weather conditions and
maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in
front. Drive carefully.
The driving safety systems described only
work as effectively as possible when there is
adequate contact between the tires and the
road surface. Pay particular attention to the
information regarding tires, recommended
minimum tire tread depths etc. in the "Wheels
and tires" section (Y page 293).
In wintry driving conditions, always use winter
tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow
chains. Only in this way will the driving safety
systems described in this section work as
effectively as possible.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
General information
ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way
that the wheels do not lock when you brake.
This allows you to continue steering the vehi-
cle when braking.
The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when the ignition is switched
on. It goes out when the engine is running.
ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph
(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface condi-
tions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even
when you only brake gently.
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 60).
G
WARNING
If ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels could
lock when braking. The steerability and
braking characteristics would be severely
affected. There is an increased danger of
skidding and accidents.
Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-
diately at a qualified specialist workshop.
When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,
including driving safety systems, will also
become inoperative. Observe the information
on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 236) and
display messages which may be shown in the
instrument cluster (Y page 206).
Brakes
X
If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the
brake pedal vigorously until the braking sit-
uation is over.
X
To make a full brake application: depress
the brake pedal with full force.
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a
pulsing in the brake pedal.
60
Driving safety systems
Safety
The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication
of hazardous road conditions, and functions as
a reminder to take extra care while driving.
BAS (Brake Assist System)
General information
BAS operates in emergency braking situations.
If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS
automatically boosts the braking force, thus
shortening the stopping distance.
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 60).
G
WARNING
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking dis-
tance in an emergency braking situation is
increased. There is a risk of an accident.
In an emergency braking situation, depress
the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents
the wheels from locking.
Braking
X
Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until
the emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes will function as usual once you
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-
tion
General information
Brake Assist with cross-traffic function can
help you to minimize the risk of a collision with
a vehicle or a pedestrian and reduce the
effects of such a collision. If Brake Assist with
cross-traffic function detects a danger of colli-
sion, you are assisted when braking.
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 60).
Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is only
available in vehicles with the Driving Assis-
tance package.
For Brake Assist with cross-traffic function to
assist you when driving, the radar sensor sys-
tem and the camera system must be opera-
tional.
The sensor system and camera system help
Brake Assist with cross-traffic function detect
obstacles:
R
that are in the path of your vehicle for an
extended period of time
R
that cross the path of your vehicle
In addition, pedestrians in the path of your
vehicle can be detected.
Brake Assist with cross-traffic function detects
pedestrians using typical characteristics such
as body contours and the posture of a person
standing upright.
If the radar sensor system or the camera sys-
tem is malfunctioning, Brake Assist with cross-
traffic function is restricted or no longer availa-
ble. The brake system is still available with
complete brake boosting effect and BAS.
i
Observe the restrictions described in the
"Important safety notes" section
(Y page 61).
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-
tion cannot always clearly identify objects
and complex traffic situations.
In such cases, Active Brake Assist with
cross-traffic function might:
R
issue an unnecessary warning or brake
R
issue no warning or not brake
Always pay careful attention to the traffic
situation; do not rely on the Active Brake
Assist with cross-traffic function alone.
Always be ready to brake and possibly take
evasive action.
G
WARNING
Brake Assist with cross-traffic function can-
not always clearly identify people, particu-
larly if they are moving. Brake Assist with
cross-traffic function cannot intervene in
these cases. There is a risk of an accident.
Driving safety systems
61
Safety
Z
Always pay careful attention to the traffic
situation and be ready to brake.
G
WARNING
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-
tion does not react:
R
to small people, e.g. children
R
to animals
R
to oncoming vehicles
R
when cornering
As a result, Active Brake Assist with cross-
traffic function may not warn you or engage
in all critical situations. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic
situation and be ready to brake.
In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-
ognition can be impaired.
Recognition by the radar sensor system is also
impaired if:
R
there is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
R
there is interference by other radar sources
R
there are strong radar reflections, for exam-
ple in parking garages
R
a narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a
motorbike
R
a vehicle is traveling in front on a different
line
R
vehicles quickly move into the radar sensor
system detection range
Recognition by the camera system is also
impaired in the event of:
R
dirt on the camera or if the camera is cov-
ered
R
glare on the camera system, e.g. from the
sun being low in the sky
R
darkness
R
or if:
-
pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the
path of the vehicle
-
the camera system no longer recognizes a
pedestrian as a person due to special
clothing or other objects
-
a pedestrian is concealed by other
objects
-
the typical outline of a person is not dis-
tinguishable from the background
Following damage to the front end of the vehi-
cle, have the configuration and operation of
the radar sensors checked at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop. This also applies to collisions
at slow speeds where there is no visible dam-
age to the front of the vehicle.
Following damage to the windshield, have the
configuration and operation of the camera sys-
tem checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Function
To avoid a collision, Brake Assist with cross-
traffic function calculates the brake force nec-
essary if:
R
you approach an obstacle, and
R
Brake Assist with cross-traffic function has
detected a risk of collision
When driving at a speed under 20 mph
(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal,
Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is acti-
vated. The increase in brake pressure will be
carried out at the last possible moment.
When driving at a speed above 20 mph
(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal
sharply, Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-
tion automatically increases the brake pres-
sure to a degree suited to the traffic situation.
Brake Assist with cross-traffic function pro-
vides braking assistance in hazardous situa-
tions with vehicles in front within a speed
range between 4 mph (7 km/h) and 155 mph
(250 km/h).
62
Driving safety systems
Safety
Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph
(70 km/h), Brake Assist with cross-traffic
function may react to:
R
stationary objects in the path of your vehi-
cle, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles
R
pedestrians in the path of your vehicle
R
obstacles crossing your path which move in
the detection range of the sensors and are
detected
i
If Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
requires a particularly high braking force,
preventative passenger protection measures
(PRE-SAFE
®
) are activated at the same time
(Y page 55).
X
Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is
deactivated and the brakes function as usual
again if:
R
you release the brake pedal
R
there is no longer a risk of collision
R
no obstacle is detected in front of your vehi-
cle
R
you depress the accelerator pedal
R
you activate kickdown
Active Brake Assist
General information
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 60).
Active Brake Assist consists of a distance
warning function with an autonomous braking
function and Adaptive Brake Assist.
Active Brake Assist can help you to minimize
the risk of a collision with the vehicle in front
or reduce the effects of such a collision.
If Active Brake Assist detects that there is a
risk of collision, you will be warned visually
and acoustically. If you do not react to the vis-
ual collision warning or the warning tone,
autonomous braking can be initiated in critical
situations. If you apply the brake yourself in a
critical situation, Adaptive Brake Assist of the
Active Brake Assist system supports you.
Important safety notes
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
impaired if:
R
there is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
R
there is snow or heavy rain
R
there is interference by other radar sources
R
there are strong radar reflections, for exam-
ple in parking garages
R
a narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a
motorbike
R
a vehicle is traveling in front on a different
line
R
you are driving a new vehicle or servicing on
the Active Brake Assist system has just
been carried out
Observe the important safety notes in the
"Breaking-in notes" section (Y page 125).
Following damage to the front end of the vehi-
cle, have the configuration and operation of
the radar sensor checked at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop. This also applies to collisions
at slow speeds where there is no visible dam-
age to the front of the vehicle.
Activating/deactivating
Active Brake Assist is automatically active
after switching on the ignition.
You can activate or deactivate Active Brake
Assist using the on-board computer
(Y page 198). When deactivated, the distance
warning function and the autonomous braking
function are also deactivated.
If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ
symbol appears in the assistance graphic dis-
play.
Distance warning function
General information
The distance warning function can help you to
minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a
vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a
collision. If the distance warning function
detects that there is a risk of a collision, you
will be warned visually and acoustically.
Driving safety systems
63
Safety
Z
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion for driving safety systems (Y page 60).
G
WARNING
The distance warning function does not
react:
R
to people or animals
R
to oncoming vehicles
R
to crossing traffic
R
when cornering
The distance warning function may not give
warnings in all critical situations. There is a
risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic
situation and be ready to brake.
Always adapt your speed to suit the prevail-
ing road and traffic conditions.
G
WARNING
The distance warning function cannot
always clearly identify objects and complex
traffic situations.
In such cases, the distance warning function
may:
R
give an unnecessary warning
R
not give a warning
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic
situation and do not rely solely on the dis-
tance warning function.
Function
Starting at a speed of approximately 4 mph
(7 km/h), the distance warning function warns
you if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front.
An intermittent warning tone will then sound,
and the · distance warning lamp will light
up in the instrument cluster.
X
Brake immediately in order to increase the
distance from the vehicle in front.
or
X
Take evasive action, provided it is safe to do
so.
Due to the nature of the system, particularly
complicated but non-critical driving conditions
may also cause the system to display a warn-
ing.
With the help of the radar sensor system, the
distance warning function can detect obsta-
cles that are in the path of your vehicle for an
extended period of time.
Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph
(70 km/h), the distance warning function can
also react to stationary obstacles, such as
stopped or parked vehicles.
Autonomous braking function
If the driver does not react to the distance
warning signal in a critical situation, Active
Brake Assist can assist with the autonomous
braking function.
If the autonomous braking function requires a
particularly high braking force, preventative
passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE
®
)
are activated simultaneously.
The autonomous braking function is available
in the following speed ranges:
R
4 - 65 mph (7 - 105 km/h) for moving
objects
R
4 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationary
objects
Due to the nature of the system, particularly
complicated but non-critical driving conditions
may also cause the autonomous braking func-
tion to intervene.
If the autonomous braking function requires a
particularly high braking force, preventative
passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE
®
)
are activated simultaneously (Y page 55).
Adaptive Brake Assist
General information
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 60).
With the help of Adaptive Brake Assist, the dis-
tance warning signal can detect obstacles that
are in the path of your vehicle for an extended
period of time.
If Adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of colli-
sion with the vehicle in front, it calculates the
braking force necessary to avoid a collision. If
you apply the brakes forcefully, Adaptive
Brake Assist will automatically increase the
braking force to a level suitable for the traffic
conditions.
64
Driving safety systems
Safety
Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assis-
tance in hazardous situations at speeds above
4 mph (7 km/h). It uses radar sensor technol-
ogy to assess the traffic situation.
Up to a speed of approximately 155 mph
(250 km/h), Adaptive Brake Assist is capable
of reacting to moving objects that have
already been detected as such at least once
over the period of observation.
Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph
(70 km/h), Adaptive Brake Assist reacts to
stationary obstacles.
If Adaptive Brake Assist demands particularly
high braking force, preventative passenger
protection measures (PRE-SAFE
®
) are activa-
ted simultaneously (Y page 55).
X
Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes will work normally again if:
R
you release the brake pedal
R
there is no longer any danger of a collision
R
no obstacle is detected in front of your vehi-
cle
Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly
identify objects and complex traffic situa-
tions.
In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can:
R
intervene unnecessarily
R
not intervene
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic
situation and be ready to brake. Terminate
the intervention in a non-critical driving sit-
uation.
G
WARNING
Adaptive Brake Assist does not react:
R
to people or animals
R
to oncoming vehicles
R
to crossing traffic
R
when cornering
As a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may
not intervene in all critical conditions. There
is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic
situation and be ready to brake.
Always adapt your speed to suit the prevail-
ing road and traffic conditions.
Due to the nature of the system, particularly
complicated but non-critical driving conditions
may also cause Adaptive Brake Assist to inter-
vene.
If Adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to
a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the
brake system remains available with full brake
boosting effect and BAS.
Adaptive brake lights
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 60).
If you brake sharply from a speed of more than
50 km/h or if braking is assisted by BAS or
Brake Assist with Cross-Traffic Assist, the
brake lamps flash rapidly. In this way, traffic
traveling behind you is warned in an even
more noticeable manner.
If you brake sharply from a speed of more than
70 km/h to a standstill, the hazard warning
lamps are activated automatically. If the
brakes are applied again, the brake lamps light
up continuously. The hazard warning lamps
switch off automatically if you travel faster
than 10 km/h. You can also switch off the
hazard warning lamps using the hazard warn-
ing button (Y page 111).
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program)
General notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 60).
ESP
®
monitors driving stability and traction,
i.e. power transmission between the tires and
the road surface.
If ESP
®
detects that the vehicle is deviating
from the direction desired by the driver, one or
more wheels are braked to stabilize the vehi-
cle. The engine output is also modified to keep
Driving safety systems
65
Safety
Z
the vehicle on the desired course within physi-
cal limits. ESP
®
assists the driver when pulling
away on wet or slippery roads. ESP
®
can also
stabilize the vehicle during braking.
ETS (Electronic Traction System)
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 60).
ETS traction control is part of ESP
®
.
ETS brakes the drive wheels individually if they
spin. This enables you to pull away and accel-
erate on slippery surfaces, for example if the
road surface is slippery on one side. In addi-
tion, more drive torque is transferred to the
wheel or wheels with traction.
ETS remains active when you deactivate ESP
®
.
i
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: your vehicle
may be equipped with 20-inch tires on the
rear axle. After changing to 19 inch wheels,
ETS may intervene noticeably earlier during
the first few kilometers. After approximately
10 km ETS will function as usual again.
Information on the dimensions and types of
wheels and tires for your vehicle can be
found in the "Wheel/tire combinations" sec-
tion (Y page 318).
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If ESP
®
is malfunctioning it will not provide
any vehicle stabilization. There is an
increased risk of skidding or of an accident.
Exercise caution when continuing to drive.
Have ESP
®
checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
When towing the vehicle with the rear axle
raised, observe the notes on ESP
®
(Y page 290).
If the å ESP
®
OFF warning lamp lights up
continuously, then ESP
®
is deactivated.
If the ÷ ESP
®
warning lamp and the å
ESP
®
OFF warning lamp are lit continuously,
ESP
®
is not available due to a malfunction.
Observe the information on warning lamps
(Y page 236) and display messages which
may be shown in the instrument cluster
(Y page 206).
i
Only use wheels with the recommended
tire sizes. Only then will ESP
®
function prop-
erly.
Characteristics of ESP
®
General information
If the ÷ ESP
®
warning lamp goes out
before beginning the journey, ESP
®
is auto-
matically active.
If ESP
®
intervenes, the ÷ ESP
®
warning
lamp flashes in the instrument cluster.
If ESP
®
intervenes:
X
Do not deactivate ESP
®
under any circum-
stances.
X
Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
necessary when pulling away.
X
Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing
road and weather conditions.
The influence of drive programs on ESP
®
The drive programs allow ESP
®
to adapt to different weather conditions, road conditions and the
desired driving style. You can set the drive programs using the DYNAMIC SELECT button
(Y page 132) or on AMG vehicles using the DYNAMIC SELECT controller (Y page 133).
66
Driving safety systems
Safety
Drive program
ESP
®
mode
Characteristics
C Comfort
E Economy
ESP
®
on
This drive program offers the best compromise
between traction and stability.
Select drive program E or C in difficult road
conditions such as snow and ice or on wet
roads.
S Sport
ESP
®
on
This drive program offers the best compromise
between traction and stability.
S+ Sport Plus
ESP
®
Sport
The vehicle's own oversteering and understeer-
ing characteristics are emphasized. This ena-
bles a more active driving style.
This drive program requires increased driver
interaction.
Select this drive program only when road con-
ditions are good, e.g. the roads are dry and the
route is clear.
Always adapt your driving style and drive program to the prevailing road and weather conditions.
Additional information for drive programs (Y page 138).
ECO start/stop function
The ECO start/stop function switches the
engine off automatically when the vehicle
stops moving. The engine starts automatically
when the driver wants to pull away again.
ESP
®
remains in its previously selected status,
e.g. if ESP
®
was deactivated before the engine
was automatically switched off.
Deactivating/activating ESP
®
(except
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles)
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 60).
You can select between the following states of
ESP
®
:
R
ESP
®
is activated
R
ESP
®
is deactivated
G
WARNING
If you deactivate ESP
®
, ESP
®
no longer sta-
bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk
of skidding and an accident.
Only deactivate ESP
®
in the situations
described in the following.
It may be best to deactivate ESP
®
in the fol-
lowing situations:
R
when using snow chains
R
in deep snow
R
on sand or gravel
Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action
which provides better grip.
i
Activate ESP
®
as soon as the situations
described above no longer apply. ESP
®
will
otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle
if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts
to spin.
!
Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an
extended period with ESP
®
deactivated. You
could otherwise damage the drivetrain.
Driving safety systems
67
Safety
Z
Deactivating/activating ESP
®
X
To deactivate: press button :.
The å ESP
®
OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up.
X
To activate: press button :.
The å ESP
®
OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out.
Characteristics when ESP
®
is deactiva-
ted
If ESP
®
is deactivated and one or more wheels
start to spin, the ÷ ESP
®
warning lamp in
the instrument cluster flashes. In such situa-
tions, ESP
®
will not stabilize the vehicle.
If you deactivate ESP
®
:
R
ESP
®
no longer improves driving stability
R
engine torque is no longer limited and the
drive wheels are able to spin
R
traction control is still activated
R
Active Brake Assist is no longer available;
nor is it activated if you brake firmly with
assistance from ESP
®
R
PRE-SAFE
®
is no longer available, nor is it
activated if you brake firmly and ESP
®
inter-
venes
R
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-
tion is no longer available; nor is it activated
if you brake firmly with assistance from
ESP
®
R
ESP
®
still provides support when you brake
firmly
Deactivating/activating ESP
®
(Mercedes‑AMG vehicles)
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 60).
You can select between the following states of
ESP
®
:
R
ESP
®
is activated
R
SPORT handling mode is activated
R
ESP
®
is deactivated.
G
WARNING
When SPORT handling mode is activated,
there is a greater risk of skidding and acci-
dents.
Only activate SPORT handling mode in the
situations described in the following.
G
WARNING
If you deactivate ESP
®
, ESP
®
no longer sta-
bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk
of skidding and an accident.
Only deactivate ESP
®
in the situations
described in the following.
In the following situations, it may be better to
activate SPORT handling mode or deactivate
ESP
®
:
R
when using snow chains
R
in deep snow
R
on sand or gravel
R
on specially designated roads when the
vehicle's own oversteering and understeer-
ing characteristics are desired
Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action
which provides better grip.
Driving in SPORT handling mode or without
ESP
®
requires an extremely qualified and
experienced driver.
i
Activate ESP
®
as soon as the situations
described above no longer apply. ESP
®
will
otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle
if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts
to spin.
68
Driving safety systems
Safety
!
Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an
extended period with ESP
®
deactivated. You
could otherwise damage the drivetrain.
Deactivating/activating ESP
®
X
To activate SPORT handling mode: briefly
press button :.
The M SPORT handling mode warning
lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The
SPORT Handling ModeSPORT Handling Mode message appears in
the multifunction display.
X
To deactivate SPORT handling mode:
briefly press button :.
The M SPORT handling mode warning
lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
X
To deactivate ESP
®
: press button : until
the å ESP
®
OFF warning lamp lights up
in the instrument cluster.
The ÷ OFFOFF message appears in the multi-
function display.
X
To activate ESP
®
: briefly press button :.
The å ESP
®
OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out. The ÷ ESP
®
ON
ON message appears in the multifunction
display.
Characteristics of activated SPORT han-
dling mode
If SPORT handling mode is activated and one
or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP
®
warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes.
ESP
®
only stabilizes the vehicle to a limited
degree.
When SPORT handling mode is activated:
R
ESP
®
only improves driving stability to a
limited degree
R
traction control is still activated
R
engine torque is no longer limited and the
drive wheels are able to spin
R
ESP
®
still provides support when you brake
firmly
Characteristics when ESP
®
is deactiva-
ted
If ESP
®
is deactivated and one or more wheels
start to spin, the ÷ ESP
®
warning lamp in
the instrument cluster flashes. In such situa-
tions, ESP
®
will not stabilize the vehicle.
If you deactivate ESP
®
:
R
ESP
®
no longer improves driving stability
R
engine torque is no longer limited and the
drive wheels are able to spin
R
traction control is still activated
R
Active Brake Assist is no longer available;
nor is it activated if you brake firmly with
assistance from ESP
®
R
PRE-SAFE
®
is no longer available, nor is it
activated if you brake firmly and ESP
®
inter-
venes
R
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-
tion is no longer available; nor is it activated
if you brake firmly with assistance from
ESP
®
R
ESP
®
still provides support when you brake
firmly
EBD (electronic brake force distribu-
tion)
General information
EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure
on the rear wheels to improve driving stability
while braking.
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion for driving safety systems (Y page 60).
G
WARNING
If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can
lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases
the risk of skidding and an accident.
You should therefore adapt your driving
style to the different handling characteris-
Driving safety systems
69
Safety
Z
tics. Have the brake system checked at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Observe information regarding indicator and
warning lamps (Y page 236) as well as display
messages (Y page 208).
ADAPTIVE BRAKE
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 60).
ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and
offers increased braking comfort. In addition
to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also
has the HOLD function (Y page 165) and hill
start assist (Y page 129).
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic
function
General information
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
can help you to minimize the risk of a collision
with the vehicle in front or a pedestrian. Active
Brake Assist with cross-traffic function can
also reduce the effects of such a collision. If
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
has detected a risk of collision, you will be
warned visually and acoustically as well as by
automatic braking.
i
Pay attention to the important safety notes
in the "Driving safety systems" section
(Y page 60).
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
is only available in vehicles with the Driving
Assistance Plus package.
For Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-
tion to assist you when driving, the radar sen-
sor system and the camera system must be
operational.
The radar sensor system and camera system
help Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic
function to detect obstacles that are in the
path of your vehicle for an extended period of
time.
In addition, pedestrians in the path of your
vehicle can be detected.
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
detects pedestrians using typical characteris-
tics such as body contours and the posture of
a person standing upright.
i
Observe the restrictions described in the
"Important safety notes" section
(Y page 70).
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-
tion will initially brake your vehicle by a par-
tial application of the brakes if a danger of
collision is detected. There may be a colli-
sion unless you brake yourself. Even after
subsequent full application of the brakes a
collision cannot always be avoided, particu-
larly when approaching at too high a speed.
There is a risk of an accident.
Always apply the brakes yourself and try to
take evasive action, provided it is safe to do
so.
If you partially apply the brakes, the vehicle is
braked with up to 50% of the full braking force.
G
WARNING
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-
tion cannot always clearly identify objects
and complex traffic situations.
In such cases, Active Brake Assist with
cross-traffic function might:
R
give an unnecessary warning and then
brake the vehicle
R
neither give a warning nor intervene
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and be prepared to brake, espe-
cially if Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic
function alerts you. Terminate the interven-
tion in a non-critical driving situation.
G
WARNING
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-
tion cannot always clearly identify people,
particularly if they are moving. Active Brake
Assist with cross-traffic function cannot
70
Driving safety systems
Safety
intervene in these cases. There is a risk of
an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and be prepared to brake, espe-
cially if Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic
function alerts you.
In order to maintain the appropriate distance
to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a colli-
sion, you must apply the brakes yourself.
G
WARNING
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-
tion does not react:
R
to small people, e.g. children
R
to animals
R
to oncoming vehicles
R
when cornering
As a result, Active Brake Assist with cross-
traffic function may not warn you or engage
in all critical situations. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic
situation and be ready to brake.
In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-
ognition can be impaired.
Recognition by the radar sensor system is also
impaired if:
R
there is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
R
there is interference by other radar sources
R
there are strong radar reflections, for exam-
ple in parking garages
R
a narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a
motorbike
R
a vehicle is traveling in front on a different
line
Recognition by the camera system is also
impaired in the event of:
R
dirt on the camera or if the camera is cov-
ered
R
glare on the camera system, e.g. from the
sun being low in the sky
R
darkness
R
or if:
-
pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the
path of the vehicle
-
the camera system no longer recognizes a
pedestrian as a person due to special
clothing or other objects
-
a pedestrian is concealed by other
objects
-
the typical outline of a pedestrian is not
distinguishable from the background
Following damage to the front end of the vehi-
cle, have the configuration and operation of
the radar sensors checked at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop. This also applies to collisions
at slow speeds where there is no visible dam-
age to the front of the vehicle.
Following damage to the windshield, have the
configuration and operation of the camera sys-
tem checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Function
X
To activate or deactivate: activate or
deactivate Active Brake Assist with cross-
traffic function using the on-board computer
(Y page 198).
When Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic
function is deactivated, the æ symbol
appears in the assistance graphic display of
the multifunction display.
Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h),
this function warns you if you rapidly approach
a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone
will then sound and the · distance warning
lamp will light up in the instrument cluster.
X
Brake immediately to defuse the situation.
or
X
Take evasive action provided it is safe to do
so.
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
can also brake the vehicle automatically under
the following conditions:
R
the driver and front passenger have their
seat belts fastened
and
R
the vehicle speed is between approximately
4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h)
Driving safety systems
71
Safety
Z
Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph
(70 km/h), Active Brake Assist with cross-traf-
fic function may react to:
R
stationary objects in the path of your vehi-
cle, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles
R
pedestrians in the path of your vehicle
i
If there is an increased risk of a collision,
preventive passenger protection measures
(PRE-SAFE
®
) are triggered (Y page 55).
If the risk of collision with the vehicle in front
remains and you do not brake, take evasive
action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle
may perform automatic emergency braking, up
to the point of full brake application. Auto-
matic emergency braking is not performed
until immediately prior to an imminent acci-
dent.
You can prevent the intervention of Active
Brake Assist with cross-traffic function at any
time by:
R
depressing the accelerator pedal further
R
activating kickdown
R
releasing the brake pedal
The braking application of Active Brake Assist
with cross-traffic function is ended automati-
cally if:
R
you maneuver to avoid the obstacle
R
there is no longer a risk of collision
R
an obstacle is no longer detected in front of
your vehicle
STEER CONTROL
General information
STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a
noticeable steering force to the steering wheel
in the direction required for vehicle stabiliza-
tion.
This steering assistance is provided in particu-
lar if:
R
both right wheels or both left wheels are on
a wet or slippery road surface when you
brake
R
the vehicle starts to skid
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 60).
No steering support is provided from STEER
CONTROL, if:
R
ESP
®
is deactivated
R
ESP
®
is malfunctioning
R
the steering is faulty
If ESP
®
is malfunctioning, you will be assisted
further by the electrical power steering.
Protection against theft
Immobilizer
X
To activate with the SmartKey: remove
the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X
To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the
ignition off and open the driver's door.
X
To deactivate: switch on the ignition.
The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from
being started without the correct SmartKey.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. The
engine can be started by anyone with a valid
SmartKey that is left inside the vehicle.
i
The immobilizer is always deactivated
when you start the engine.
In the event that the engine cannot be star-
ted (yet the vehicle's battery is charged),
the system is not operational. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
72
Protection against theft
Safety
X
To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey
or KEYLESS-GO.
Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system
is armed after approximately 15 seconds.
X
To switch off: unlock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the
alarm system is armed and you open:
R
a door
R
the vehicle with the mechanical key
R
the trunk lid
R
the hood
R
the glove compartment
R
the stowage space under the armrest
R
a stowage compartment in the rear
passenger compartment
X
To stop the alarm with the SmartKey:
press the % or & button on the
SmartKey.
The alarm is stopped.
or
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
The alarm is stopped.
X
To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:
grasp the outside door handle. The Smart-
Key must be outside the vehicle.
The alarm is stopped.
or
X
Press the Start/Stop button on the dash-
board. The SmartKey must be inside the
vehicle.
The alarm is stopped.
The alarm is not stopped, even if you close the
open door that triggered it, for example.
If the alarm stays on for more than
30 seconds, the Mercedes me connect
emergency call system automatically sends
a message to the Customer Center.
This is done either by text message or data
connection. The emergency call system
sends the message or data provided that:
R
you have subscribed to Mercedes me
connect
R
the Mercedes me connect service has
been activated properly
R
the necessary mobile phone network is
available
Protection against theft
73
Safety
Z
SmartKey
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could:
R
operate the vehicle's equipment
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
R
release the parking brake
R
shift the automatic transmission out of
park position j
R
start the engine
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Never leave children or animals unattended
in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This
also applies for the Digital Vehicle Key if the
"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via
Mercedes me connect.
G
WARNING
If you attach heavy or large objects to the
SmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-
tionally turned in the ignition lock. This
could cause the engine to be switched off.
There is a risk of an accident.
Do not attach any heavy or large objects to
the SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings
before inserting the SmartKey into the igni-
tion lock.
!
Keep the SmartKey away from strong mag-
netic fields. Otherwise, the remote control
function could be affected.
Strong magnetic fields can occur in the
vicinity of powerful electrical installations.
Do not keep the SmartKey:
R
with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone
or another SmartKey
R
with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil
R
inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case
This can affect the functionality of the
SmartKey.
SmartKey functions
:
& Locks the vehicle
;
F Opens/closes the trunk lid
=
% Unlocks the vehicle
X
To unlock centrally: press the % but-
ton.
If you do not open the vehicle within approx-
imately 40 seconds of unlocking:
R
the vehicle is locked again.
R
anti-theft protection is reactivated
X
To lock centrally: press the & button.
The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:
R
the doors
R
the trunk lid
R
the glove compartment
R
the stowage compartment under the arm-
rest
R
the stowage compartment in the rear
R
the fuel filler flap
The turn signals flash once when unlocking
and three times when locking.
You can also set an audible signal to confirm
that the vehicle has been locked. The audible
signal can be activated and deactivated using
the on-board computer (Y page 201).
When it is dark, the surround lighting also
comes on if it is activated in the on-board
computer (Y page 200).
KEYLESS-GO
General notes
Bear in mind that the engine can be started by
any of the vehicle occupants if there is a KEY-
LESS-GO key in the vehicle (Y page 128).
74
SmartKey
Opening and closing
Locking/unlocking centrally
You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using
KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry
the SmartKey with you. You can combine the
functions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a con-
ventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by
using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it
using the & button on the SmartKey.
The driver's door and the door at which the
handle is used, must both be closed. The
SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. When
locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the
distance between the key and the correspond-
ing door handle must not be greater than 3 ft
(1 m).
A check which periodically establishes a radio
connection between the vehicle and the
SmartKey determines whether a valid Smart-
Key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example:
R
when starting the engine
R
while driving
R
when using HANDS-FREE ACCESS
R
when the external door handles are touched
X
To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur-
face of the door handle.
X
To lock the vehicle: touch sensor sur-
face : or ;.
Make sure that you do not touch the inner
surface of the door handle.
X
Convenience closing feature: touch
recessed sensor surface ; for an extended
period.
Further information on the convenience
closing feature (Y page 89).
Deactivating and activating
If you do not intend to use a SmartKey for an
extended period of time, you can deactivate
the KEYLESS-GO function of the key. The
SmartKey will then use very little power,
thereby conserving battery power. For the pur-
poses of activation/deactivation, the vehicle
must not be nearby.
X
To deactivate: press the & button on
the SmartKey twice in rapid succession.
The battery check lamp (Y page 77) of the
SmartKey flashes twice briefly and lights up
once, then KEYLESS-GO is deactivated.
X
To activate: press any button on the Smart-
Key.
or
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated fea-
tures are available again.
Changing the settings of the locking
system
You can change the settings of the locking
system. This means only the driver's door, the
lockable stowage compartments in the vehicle
interior and the fuel filler flap are unlocked
when the vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if
you frequently travel alone.
X
To change the setting: press and hold
down the % and & buttons simultane-
ously for about six seconds until the battery
indicator lamp (Y page 77) flashes twice.
If the setting of the locking system is changed
within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing
the & or % button:
R
locks or
R
unlocks the vehicle
The SmartKey now functions as follows:
X
To unlock: press the % button once.
X
To unlock centrally: press the % button
twice.
X
To lock centrally: press the & button.
SmartKey
75
Opening and closing
Z
The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as fol-
lows:
X
To unlock the driver's door: touch the
inner surface of the door handle on the driv-
er's door.
X
To unlock centrally: touch the inner sur-
face of the driver or front-passenger door
handle.
X
To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor
surface on one of the door handles.
X
To restore the factory settings: press and
hold down the % and & buttons
simultaneously for approximately six sec-
onds until the battery check lamp
(Y page 77) flashes twice.
Mechanical key
General notes
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or
unlocked with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-
GO, use the mechanical key.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door or the trunk lid, the
anti-theft alarm system will be triggered.
Switch off the alarm (Y page 72).
Removing the mechanical key
X
Push release catch : in the direction of the
arrow and at the same time remove
mechanical key ; from the SmartKey.
For further information about:
R
unlocking the driver's door (Y page 81)
R
unlocking the trunk (Y page 86)
R
locking the vehicle (Y page 81)
Inserting the mechanical key
X
Push mechanical key ; completely into the
SmartKey until it engages and release
catch : is back in its basic position.
SmartKey battery
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive sub-
stances. If batteries are swallowed, it can
result in severe health problems. There is a
risk of fatal injury.
Keep batteries out of the reach of children.
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical
attention immediately.
H
Environmental note
Batteries contain pollutants.
It is illegal to dispose of
them with the household
rubbish. They must be col-
lected separately and dis-
posed of in an environmen-
tally responsible recycling
system.
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally responsible
manner. Take discharged
batteries to a qualified spe-
cialist workshop or to a col-
lection point for used bat-
teries.
The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate
material, which may require special handling
and regard for the environment. National
guidelines must be observed during disposal.
In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist
workshop.
76
SmartKey
Opening and closing
Checking the battery
X
Press the & or % button.
The battery is working properly if battery
check lamp : lights up briefly.
The battery is discharged if battery check
lamp : does not light up briefly.
X
Change the battery (Y page 77).
If the SmartKey battery is checked within the
signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing
the & or % button:
R
locks or
R
unlocks the vehicle
i
You can get a battery at any qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Replacing the battery
You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.
X
Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-
Key (Y page 76).
X
Press mechanical key ; into the SmartKey
opening in the direction of the arrow until
battery compartment cover : opens. Do
not hold battery compartment cover :
closed while doing so.
X
Remove battery compartment cover :.
X
Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your
palm until battery = falls out.
X
Insert the new battery with the positive ter-
minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth
to do so.
X
Make sure that the surface of the battery is
free of lint, grease and other contaminants.
X
Insert the front tabs of battery compartment
cover : into the housing and then press to
close it.
X
Insert mechanical key ; into the SmartKey
(Y page 76).
X
Check the function of all SmartKey buttons
on the vehicle.
SmartKey
77
Opening and closing
Z
Problems with the SmartKey
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
You can no longer lock
or unlock the vehicle
using the SmartKey.
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X
Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 77) and replace it if neces-
sary (Y page 77).
If this does not work:
X
Unlock (Y page 81) or lock (Y page 81) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
X
Unlock (Y page 81) or lock (Y page 81) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
The SmartKey is faulty.
X
Unlock (Y page 81) or lock (Y page 81) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
X
Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You can no longer lock
or unlock the vehicle
using KEYLESS-GO.
KEYLESS-GO was deactivated.
X
Reactivate KEYLESS-GO (Y page 74).
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X
Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 77) and replace it if neces-
sary (Y page 77).
If this does not work:
X
Unlock (Y page 81) or lock (Y page 81) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
X
Unlock (Y page 81) or lock (Y page 81) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning.
X
Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the
SmartKey.
X
Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote
control function:
X
Unlock (Y page 81) or lock (Y page 81) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
X
Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
78
SmartKey
Opening and closing
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The engine cannot be
started using the Smart-
Key.
The on-board voltage is too low.
X
Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior
lighting, and try to start the engine again.
If this does not work:
X
Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary
(Y page 284).
or
X
Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 285).
or
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine cannot be
started using KEYLESS-
GO. The SmartKey is in
the vehicle.
The vehicle is locked.
X
Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X
Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 77) and replace it if neces-
sary (Y page 77).
If this does not work:
X
Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
X
Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
You have lost a Smart-
Key.
X
Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
X
Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X
If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
You have lost the
mechanical key.
X
Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X
If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
The side windows can-
not be opened or closed
using the convenience
opening/closing fea-
ture.
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X
Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 77) and replace it if neces-
sary (Y page 77).
Doors
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could:
R
operate the vehicle's equipment
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
R
release the parking brake
R
shift the automatic transmission out of
park position j
R
start the engine
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Doors
79
Opening and closing
Z
Never leave children or animals unattended
in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This
also applies for the Digital Vehicle Key if the
"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via
Mercedes me connect.
Unlocking and opening doors from
the inside
!
The side windows will not open/close if
the battery is discharged or if the side win-
dows have iced up. It will then not be possi-
ble to close the door. Do not attempt to
force the door closed. You could otherwise
damage the door or the side window.
You can open a door from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked.
If the vehicle has previously been locked from
the outside, opening a door from the inside
will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch
off the alarm (Y page 72).
X
Pull door handle ;.
If the door is locked, locking knob : pops
up. The door is unlocked and can be
opened.
When a door is opened, the side window on
that side opens slightly. When the door is
closed, the side window closes again.
Centrally locking and unlocking the
vehicle from the inside
You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle
from the inside. For example, you can unlock
the front-passenger door from the inside or
lock the vehicle before you pull away.
X
To unlock: press button :.
X
To lock: press button ;.
If the front-passenger door is closed, the
vehicle locks.
The central locking button does not lock or
unlock the fuel filler flap or the stowage com-
partments, such as the glove box.
You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from
the inside if the vehicle has been locked with
the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.
You can open a door from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked.
If a locked door is opened from the inside, the
previous unlock status of the vehicle will be
taken into consideration if:
R
the vehicle was locked using the locking
button for the central locking, or
R
if the vehicle was locked automatically
The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had pre-
viously been fully unlocked. If only the driver's
door had been previously unlocked, only the
door which has been opened from the inside is
unlocked.
80
Doors
Opening and closing
Automatic locking feature
X
To deactivate: press and hold button : for
about five seconds until a tone sounds.
X
To activate: press and hold button ; for
about five seconds until a tone sounds.
If you press one of the two buttons and do not
hear a tone, the relevant setting has already
been selected.
The vehicle is locked automatically when the
ignition is switched on and the wheels are
turning.
You could therefore lock yourself out if:
R
the vehicle is being pushed.
R
the vehicle is being towed.
R
the vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.
You can also switch the automatic locking
function on and off using the on-board com-
puter (Y page 201).
Power closing
Power closing pulls the doors and trunk lid
into their locks automatically even if they are
only partly closed.
X
Power closing feature (doors): push the
door past the first detent position into the
lock.
Power closing will pull the door fully closed.
X
To power close the trunk lid: lightly push
the trunk lid closed.
The power closing function pulls the trunk
lid closed.
Unlocking/locking the driver's door
using the mechanical key
i
If you want to centrally lock the vehicle
using the mechanical key, begin by pressing
the locking button for the interior locking
mechanism while the driver's door is open.
Then lock the driver's door using the
mechanical key.
X
To unlock: turn the mechanical key coun-
ter-clockwise as far as it will go to position
1.
X
To lock: turn the mechanical key clockwise
as far as it will go to position 1.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm
system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm
(Y page 72).
Trunk
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured
or not secured sufficiently, they could slip,
tip over or be flung around and thereby hit
vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury,
particularly in the event of sudden braking
or a sudden change in direction.
Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
loads against slipping or tipping before the
journey.
!
The trunk lid swings upwards when
opened. Therefore, make sure that there is
sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.
Trunk
81
Opening and closing
Z
!
Only close the trunk once the roof is low-
ered completely. Otherwise, you could dam-
age the roof.
If you close the trunk lid before the roof is
lowered completely, the loading aid switch
lights up and a warning tone sounds.
The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be
found in the "Vehicle data" section
(Y page 326).
With the roof open, you can use the loading
aid to raise the folded roof in the trunk to
make loading easier (Y page 251). The trunk
partition opens automatically.
You can unlock the trunk lid if the vehicle is
stationary and the roof is completely open or
closed.
Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. You
could otherwise lock yourself out.
The trunk lid can be:
R
opened/closed from outside
R
opened and closed automatically from out-
side (vehicles with trunk lid remote closing
feature)
R
opened and closed automatically from
inside (vehicles with trunk lid remote closing
feature)
R
opened, closed or stopped during operation
without the use of your hands (vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO and HANDS-FREE ACCESS)
R
locked separately
R
opened with the emergency release button
R
unlocked with the mechanical key
You should preferably place luggage or loads
in the trunk.
Trunk lid reversing feature
The trunk lid is equipped with an automatic
reversing feature. It reacts if a solid object
obstructs or restricts the trunk lid during the
closing procedure. The trunk lid opens again
automatically. The automatic reversing func-
tion is only an aid and is not a substitute for
your attentiveness to the trunk lid while it is
closing.
G
WARNING
The reversing feature does not respond:
R
to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers
R
over the last 1/3 in (8 mm) of the closing
movement
The reversing feature cannot prevent some-
one being trapped in these situations in par-
ticular. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure.
If somebody becomes trapped:
R
press the F button on the SmartKey,
or
R
pull or press the remote operating switch
on the driver's door or
R
press the closing or locking button on the
trunk lid, or
R
pull on the trunk lid handle
Opening/closing from outside
Opening
X
Press the % button on the SmartKey.
X
Pull handle :.
X
Lift the trunk lid.
If the trunk partition was closed, it opens
automatically and remains open.
With the roof open, you can use the loading
aid to raise the folded roof in the trunk to
make loading easier (Y page 251). The trunk
partition opens automatically.
82
Trunk
Opening and closing
Closing
X
Pull the trunk lid down using recess :.
X
Lock the vehicle if necessary with the &
button on the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-
GO.
It does not lock if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-
GO is detected in the trunk.
Opening/closing automatically from
the outside
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped
during automatic closing of the trunk lid.
Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be
standing in the closing area or may enter the
closing area during the closing process.
There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of
the closing area during the closing process.
Use one of the following options to stop the
closing process:
R
press the F button on the SmartKey.
R
pull or press the remote operating switch
on the driver's door.
R
press the closing or locking button on the
trunk lid.
R
pull the trunk lid handle
!
The trunk lid swings upwards when
opened. Therefore, make sure that there is
sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.
The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be
found in the "Vehicle data" section
(Y page 326).
Opening automatically
You can automatically open the trunk lid using
the trunk lid handle.
X
If the trunk lid is unlocked, pull the trunk lid
handle and let it go again immediately.
When the roof is open, the trunk partition
closes automatically.
If the trunk partition was closed, it opens
automatically and remains open.
Vehicles with the trunk lid remote closing
feature: the trunk lid can also be opened
automatically with the SmartKey.
X
Press and hold the F button on the
SmartKey until the trunk lid opens.
Closing automatically
X
Press and release closing button : on the
trunk lid.
Vehicles with trunk lid remote closing fea-
ture and KEYLESS-GO:
X
If the driver's door is closed, you can simul-
taneously close the trunk lid and lock the
vehicle. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the
rear detection range of the vehicle.
X
Press locking button ; in the trunk lid.
The trunk partition, the loading aid and the
trunk lid are closed.
If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected outside the
vehicle, the trunk lid closes and the vehicle
locks.
If a KEYLESS-GO key s detected in the trunk,
the trunk lid opens again after it is closed. It
does not lock.
Trunk
83
Opening and closing
Z
HANDS-FREE ACCESS
General notes
With KEYLESS-GO and HANDS-FREE ACCESS,
you can open or close the trunk lid or stop the
procedure without using your hands. This is
useful if you have your hands full. To do this,
make a kicking movement under the bumper
with your foot.
Observe the following points:
R
Carry your KEYLESS-GO key about your per-
son. The SmartKey must be at the rear of
the vehicle in the detection range of KEY-
LESS-GO.
R
When making the kicking movement, make
sure that you are standing firmly on the
ground and that there is sufficient clearance
to the rear of the vehicle. You could other-
wise lose your balance, for example on ice.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
The vehicle exhaust system can become
very hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS,
you could burn yourself by touching the
exhaust system. There is a risk of injury.
Always ensure that you make the kicking
movement only within the detection range of
the sensors.
!
If the SmartKey is within the rear detection
range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situa-
tions, for example, could lead to the unin-
tentional opening of the trunk lid:
R
when using an automatic car wash
R
when using a power washer
Make sure that the SmartKey is at least
10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle.
R
Always ensure that you make the kicking
movement only within the detection range
of sensors :.
R
Stand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the
rear area while doing so.
R
Do not come into contact with the bumper
while making the kicking movement. Other-
wise, the sensors may not function cor-
rectly.
R
HANDS-FREE ACCESS does not function
during engine start.
R
Dirt caused by road salt and snow build-up
around sensors : may restrict functional-
ity.
R
Using the HANDS-FREE ACCESS with a
prosthetic leg may restrict functionality.
R
If a KEYLESS-GO key is at the rear of the
vehicle in the detection range of KEYLESS-
GO, HANDS-FREE ACCESS could be trig-
gered. The trunk lid could thus be opened or
closed unintentionally, for example, if you:
-
sit on the edge of the trunk.
-
set something down or lift something up
behind the vehicle.
-
polish the rear of the vehicle.
Do not carry the KEYLESS-GO key about
your person in these situations or in situa-
tions similar to these. This will prevent the
unintentional opening/closing of the trunk
lid.
84
Trunk
Opening and closing
Operation
X
To open/close: kick your foot into sensor
detection zone : below the bumper.
A warning tone will sound while the trunk lid
is opening or closing.
X
If the trunk lid does not open after sev-
eral attempts: wait at least ten seconds
then move your leg under the bumper once
again.
If you hold your foot under the bumper for too
long, the trunk lid does not open or close.
Repeat the leg movement more quickly if this
occurs.
To stop the opening or closing procedure, you
have the following options:
R
kick with your foot into sensor detection
range : under the bumper
R
Pull the handle on the outside of the trunk
lid.
R
Press the closing button on the trunk lid.
R
Pull or press the remote operating switch on
the driver's door.
R
Press the F button on the SmartKey.
If the trunk lid closing procedure has been
stopped:
R
Move your foot under the bumper again and
the trunk lid will open.
If the trunk lid opening procedure has been
stopped:
R
Move your foot under the bumper again and
the trunk lid will close.
Opening/closing automatically from
inside
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped
during automatic closing of the trunk lid. In
addition, people may be standing in the clos-
ing area or may enter the closing area, e.g.
children, during the closing procedure.
There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of
the closing area during the closing process.
Release the remote operating switch imme-
diately if somebody becomes trapped. To re-
open the trunk lid, pull on the remote oper-
ating switch.
G
WARNING
The trunk lid can be automatically opened or
closed even if the SmartKey is not in the
vehicle. If children are left unsupervised in
the vehicle, they could activate the func-
tions. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle.
!
The trunk lid swings upwards when
opened. Therefore, make sure that there is
sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.
The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be
found in the "Vehicle data" section
(Y page 326).
Trunk
85
Opening and closing
Z
Opening and closing
X
To open: pull remote operating switch :
for the trunk lid until the trunk lid opens.
If the trunk partition was closed, it opens
automatically and remains open.
X
To close: press remote operating switch :
for the trunk lid until the trunk lid is closed.
When the roof is open, the trunk partition
closes automatically.
You can open and close the trunk lid from the
driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary and
unlocked.
Locking the trunk separately
You can lock the trunk separately. If you then
unlock the vehicle centrally, the trunk remains
locked and cannot be opened.
X
Close the trunk lid.
X
Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-
Key (Y page 76).
X
Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid
lock as far as it will go.
X
Turn the mechanical key clockwise from
position 1 to position 2.
X
Remove the mechanical key.
X
Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-
Key.
Unlocking the trunk (mechanical
key)
!
The trunk lid swings upwards when
opened. Therefore, make sure that there is
sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.
If the trunk cannot be unlocked with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical
key.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm system
will be triggered. Switch off the alarm
(Y page 72).
X
Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-
Key (Y page 76).
X
Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid
lock as far as it will go.
X
Turn the mechanical key from position 1
counter-clockwise as far as it will go to posi-
tion 2. Simultaneously pull the trunk lid
handle.
The trunk is unlocked.
X
Turn the mechanical key back to position
1 and remove it.
X
Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-
Key.
Emergency release for the trunk
You can unlock the trunk lid from the inside
with the emergency release button.
86
Trunk
Opening and closing
X
Press emergency release button : briefly.
The trunk lid unlocks and opens.
The trunk lid can be unlocked and opened with
the trunk lid emergency release when the vehi-
cle is stationary or while driving.
The trunk lid emergency release does not
unlock the trunk lid if the battery is disconnec-
ted or discharged.
Trunk lid emergency release light:
R
Emergency release button : flashes for
30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened
R
Emergency release button : flashes for
60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed
Side windows
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
While opening the side windows, body parts
could become trapped between the side
window and the door frame as the side win-
dow moves. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody touches the side
window during the opening procedure. If
somebody becomes trapped, release the
switch or pull the switch to close the side
window again.
G
WARNING
While closing the side windows, body parts
in the closing area could become trapped.
There is a risk of injury.
When closing make sure that no parts of the
body are in the closing area. If somebody
becomes trapped, release the switch or
press the switch to open the side window
again.
G
WARNING
If children operate the side windows they
could become trapped, particularly if they
are left unsupervised. There is a risk of
injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle.
Side window reversing feature
The front side windows are equipped with an
automatic reversing feature. If a solid object
blocks or restricts the upward movement of
one of the front side windows during the clos-
ing process, the side window opens again
automatically. During the manual closing proc-
ess, the side window only opens again auto-
matically after the corresponding switch is
released. However, the automatic reversing
feature is only an aid and does not relieve you
of the responsibility of paying attention when
closing a side window.
G
WARNING
The reversing feature does not respond:
R
to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers
R
over the last 1/6 in (4 mm) of the closing
movement
R
while adjusting
R
when closing the side window again man-
ually immediately after automatic revers-
ing
This means that the reversing feature can-
not prevent someone being trapped in these
situations. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure. If
someone becomes trapped, press the
switch to open the side window again.
Side windows
87
Opening and closing
Z
Opening and closing the side win-
dows
Opening and closing the side windows
in the front
The switches for the side windows are located
on the driver's door. There is also a switch for
the front-passenger side window on the front-
passenger door.
The switches on the driver's door take prece-
dence.
:
Left
;
Right
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in
the ignition lock.
X
To open manually: press and hold the cor-
responding switch.
X
To open fully: press the switch beyond the
pressure point and release it.
Automatic operation is started.
X
To close manually: pull the corresponding
switch and hold it.
X
To close fully: pull the switch beyond the
pressure point and release it.
Automatic operation is started.
X
To interrupt automatic operation: press
or pull the corresponding switch again.
You can continue to operate the side windows
after you switch off the engine. This function is
available for up to five minutes or until the
driver's or front-passenger door is opened.
Opening/closing the rear side win-
dows
X
To open: open the front side window on the
corresponding side (Y page 88).
X
Press the corresponding switch again and
release.
The corresponding rear side window opens
fully.
X
To stop the rear side windows: briefly pull
the corresponding switch up and release.
X
To close: close the front side window on the
corresponding side (Y page 88).
X
Pull the respective switch and hold it.
The corresponding rear side window will
continue to close until you release the
switch.
Opening and closing all side win-
dows
Using the switch on the center con-
sole
G
WARNING
While opening the side windows, body parts
in the closing area could become trapped.
There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure. If
somebody becomes trapped, release the
switch or press the switch down to open the
side window again.
You can use the switch on the center console
to close all side windows simultaneously.
X
Open the cover in the lower center console.
The switch for all side windows is under the
cover.
88
Side windows
Opening and closing
X
To open all side windows: press button :
to the point of resistance.
X
To open all side windows fully: press
switch : beyond the point of resistance.
X
To close all side windows: pull switch :.
All side windows begin the closing proce-
dure simultaneously. The rear side windows
close after the front side windows.
If, after opening the windows, you close one
side window using the switch in the door con-
trol panel:
R
the front side window closes first and
R
then the corresponding rear side window
closes.
Convenience closing with KEYLESS-GO
G
WARNING
When using the convenience closing feature,
parts of the body could be trapped in the
closing area when a side window is being
closed. There is a risk of injury.
Observe the complete closing procedure
when the convenience closing feature is
operating. Make sure that no body parts are
in close proximity during the closing proce-
dure.
Proceed as follows if someone is trapped:
X
Release the recessed sensor surface on the
door handle.
X
Immediately pull and hold the door handle
and keep the door handle pulled.
The side windows open.
With KEYLESS-GO you can close all side win-
dows simultaneously. The KEYLESS-GO key
must be outside the vehicle. All the doors
must be closed.
X
Touch recessed sensor surface : on the
door handle until the side windows are fully
closed.
i
Make sure you only touch recessed sensor
surface :.
X
To interrupt convenience closing: release
recessed sensor surface : on the door
handle.
Resetting the side windows
If a side window can no longer be closed fully,
you must reset it.
X
Close all the doors.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in
the ignition lock.
X
Pull the corresponding switch on the door
control panel until the side window is com-
pletely closed (Y page 88).
X
Hold the switch for an additional second.
If the side window opens again slightly:
X
Immediately pull the corresponding switch
on the door control panel until the side win-
dow is completely closed (Y page 88).
X
Hold the switch for an additional second.
If the respective side window remains
closed after the button is released, then it
has been set correctly. If this is not the
case, repeat the steps above.
Side windows
89
Opening and closing
Z
Problems with the side windows
G
WARNING
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side win-
dow closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of
the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process,
release the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
A side window cannot
be closed because it is
blocked by objects, e.g.
leaves in the window
guide.
X
Remove the objects.
X
Close the side window.
A side window cannot
be closed and you can-
not see the cause.
If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again
slightly:
X
Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding
switch again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed with increased force.
If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens
again slightly:
X
Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding
switch again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed without the automatic reversing fea-
ture.
The side windows can-
not be opened or closed
using the convenience
opening/closing fea-
ture.
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X
Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 77) and replace it if neces-
sary (Y page 77).
Roof
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you do not fully open/close the soft top,
the soft-top hydraulics depressurize after a
short time. This causes the soft top to lower
unexpectedly and may cause you or others
to be trapped. There is a risk of injury.
Always open or close the soft top com-
pletely.
G
WARNING
Closing the roof manually is a complicated
and technically demanding procedure, which
requires a lot of strength. You or others can
become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
Only have the soft top closed manually at a
qualified specialist workshop.
!
Never sit on the rear compartment trim or
stow heavy objects there. You will otherwise
damage the roof and rear compartment trim
of the vehicle.
90
Roof
Opening and closing
!
Do not forget that the weather can change
abruptly. Make certain that the roof is
closed when you leave the vehicle. The vehi-
cle electronics can be damaged if water
enters the vehicle interior.
!
When opening and closing the roof, make
sure that:
R
there is sufficient clearance, as the roof
swings upwards.
R
there is sufficient clearance behind the
vehicle, as the trunk lid swings backwards
beyond the bumper.
R
the trunk is only loaded to below the
trunk partition.
R
the trunk partition is not pushed up by the
load.
R
the trunk partition is closed.
R
the trunk lid is closed.
R
the outside temperature is above 5 ‡
(Ò15 †).
You could otherwise damage the roof, trunk
and other parts of the vehicle.
The vehicle dimensions for opening/closing
the roof can be found in the "Vehicle data"
section (Y page 326).
Make sure that the roof and rear window are
clean and dry before opening the roof. Other-
wise, water or dirt could enter the vehicle inte-
rior or trunk.
Opening and closing using the roof
switch
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When opening or closing the roof, body
parts could be trapped by, for example, the
roof mechanism, trunk lid or side windows.
There is a risk of injury.
When raising or lowering the roof, make
sure that no body parts are in the vicinity of
moving components. If someone becomes
trapped, release the button.
For safety reasons, you can only open or close
the roof when the vehicle is stationary.
!
Operating the roof while pulling away:
R
Observe the following traffic carefully.
R
Do not drive faster than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
R
Avoid abrupt braking and swerving
maneuvers.
Do not operate the roof when cornering,
driving on uneven surfaces or during strong
winds. The vehicle may otherwise be dam-
aged.
i
If the traffic conditions mean that you have
to drive off while opening/closing the roof,
the procedure which was started while sta-
tionary can be continued at speeds of up to
approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
Opening and closing
X
Close the trunk lid (Y page 81).
If the trunk is loaded correctly, the trunk
partition closes automatically.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock.
X
Open the cover in the lower center console.
Roof switch : is located under the cover.
X
To open: pull roof switch : until the entire
roof is stowed away in the trunk.
The Vario-Roof in Operation
Vario-Roof in Operation message
appears in the multifunction display. Once
the opening procedure is complete, the
message disappears and a tone sounds.
All of the side windows open.
X
To close: press and hold soft-top switch :
until the soft top is fully closed.
The Vario-Roof in OperationVario-Roof in Operation message
appears in the multifunction display. Once
the opening procedure is complete, the
message disappears and a tone sounds.
Roof
91
Opening and closing
Z
All of the side windows open.
X
To close all side windows, pull the switch
under the cover of the center console
(Y page 88).
Opening/closing using the SmartKey
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When opening or closing the roof, body
parts could be trapped by, for example, the
roof mechanism, trunk lid or side windows.
There is a risk of injury.
When raising or lowering the roof, make
sure that no body parts are in the vicinity of
moving components. If someone becomes
trapped, release the button.
Opening and closing
This function is only available on vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO or with roof comfort operation.
X
Close the trunk lid (Y page 81).
If the trunk has been correctly loaded, the
trunk partition is automatically closed.
X
Vehicles with comfort operation: point
the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door
handle.
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: the SmartKey
must be within 6 ft (2 m) of the vehicle.
X
To open: press and hold the % button on
the SmartKey until the roof is fully opened.
The roof and the rear side windows open.
The front side windows close.
X
To interrupt the opening procedure:
release the % button.
X
To open the front side windows: press the
% button on the SmartKey again.
X
To close: press and hold the & button
on the SmartKey until the roof is fully
closed.
The roof and the side windows close.
X
To interrupt the closing procedure:
release the & button.
Locking the roof again
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you do not fully open/close the soft top,
the soft-top hydraulics depressurize after a
short time. This causes the soft top to lower
unexpectedly and may cause you or others
to be trapped. There is a risk of injury.
Always open or close the soft top com-
pletely.
The roof is not locked if:
R
the K symbol and the Vario-Roof inVario-Roof in
OperationOperation message appear in the multi-
function display
R
the K symbol and the Open/CloseOpen/Close
Vario-Roof Completely
Vario-Roof Completely message appear
in the multifunction display and you hear a
warning tone
R
you hear a warning tone for up to ten sec-
onds when pulling away or while driving
Locking
You can lock the roof again if it is not locked
fully.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon
as possible, paying attention to road and
traffic conditions.
X
Ensure that the SmartKey is in position 2
in the ignition lock.
X
Press the roof switch (Y page 91).
Trunk partition
General notes
!
To avoid damaging the roof or luggage
when folding back the roof, you should:
R
only load the trunk to below the trunk par-
tition
R
not place any objects on or in front of the
trunk partition
R
not place any objects on the cover behind
the roll bars
R
not allow the cargo to push the trunk par-
tition upwards
92
Roof
Opening and closing
!
Make sure the trunk separator is com-
pletely closed. Otherwise, the roof can be
blocked when it is opened or closed.
The trunk partition can be used to cover lug-
gage and loads in the trunk.
Opening and closing
Trunk partition : can be opened and closed
using button ;, e.g. to check correct loading.
X
To open: press button ;.
X
To close: press button ;.
If the trunk is loaded correctly, trunk parti-
tion : is automatically closed to the full
extent.
When the trunk lid is opened, trunk parti-
tion : opens automatically.
Removing and installing
X
To remove: close trunk partition :
(Y page 93).
X
To disconnect the electric plug connector,
press the release catch on connector ;
and remove connector ;.
X
Unhook net = from holders ? on both
sides and guide it to the rear until it is com-
pletely rolled up.
X
Turn catch lever A down in the direction of
the arrow on both sides.
Trunk partition : is unlocked.
X
Slide trunk partition cover : forwards.
X
Pull trunk partition : out of the two guides
in the direction of arrow B.
X
To install: insert trunk partition : into the
two guides in the direction of arrow C to
the stop.
X
Turn catch lever A up in the direction of
the arrow on both sides.
Trunk partition : is unlocked.
Roof
93
Opening and closing
Z
X
Pull the net forwards and hook into the
retainers on both sides.
X
Push trunk partition cover : back against
the spring pressure and insert to the stop
on both sides.
X
Reconnect connector ; of the electric plug
connector.
Wind screen
Electric wind screen
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you use the wind screen in darkness or in
other conditions offering poor visibility, your
view to the rear is further impaired. There is
a risk of an accident.
Only use the wind screen when visibility con-
ditions are good.
!
When extending or retracting the wind
screen, make sure there are no objects on
the rear compartment trim. Otherwise, the
objects could damage the wind screen.
The wind screen offers protection from the
wind when driving with the roof down. The roof
must be fully open before the wind screen can
be extended.
Extending and retracting
X
Open the roof (Y page 90).
X
Open the cover in the lower center console.
The switch for the electrical wind screen is
under the cover.
X
To extend: press button :.
X
To retract: press button : again.
Roller sunblind for the panorama
roof
The roller sunblind protects you from exces-
sive glare and heat caused by the sun shining
through the panorama glass roof.
X
To close: pull the roller sunblind in the
direction of the arrow using handle :.
X
To open: slide the roller sunblind in the
opposite direction to the arrow using han-
dle :.
MAGIC SKY CONTROL
General notes
MAGIC SKY CONTROL is a panorama roof, the
transparency of which can be changed by
applying electrical voltage.
MAGIC SKY CONTROL can be switched
between darkened and transparent states.
MAGIC SKY CONTROL darkens automatically
after a short period when you turn the Smart-
94
Roof
Opening and closing
Key to position u in the ignition lock or
remove the SmartKey.
Risk of electric shock
G
DANGER
MAGIC SKY CONTROL operates using high
voltage. If the trim behind the overhead con-
trol panel is damaged or removed, electrical
components will be exposed. If you touch
these components, you could get an electric
shock. There is a risk of fatal injury.
R
Never remove the trim behind the over-
head control panel.
R
If the trim is damaged, never touch the
electrical components behind it.
R
Always have work on the MAGIC SKY
CONTROL carried out at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
The electrical components of MAGIC SKY
CONTROL are protected by a paneling behind
the overhead control panel.
The MAGIC SKY CONTROL control unit is
marked with a yellow warning sticker that
warns you of high voltage. The electric cables
of the high-voltage section are color orange.
Operating MAGIC SKY CONTROL
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in
the ignition lock.
MAGIC SKY CONTROL switches to the sta-
tus it was set to before the engine was
switched off.
X
To change the degree of transparency:
press button :.
At temperatures below freezing, the change is
slower and uneven. The entire process may
take some time.
Problems with the roof
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The roof will not open or
close.
The trunk partition is not closed.
X
Close the trunk partition (Y page 92).
The net on the trunk partition is not attached.
X
Attach the net (Y page 92).
The electrical plug connector on the trunk partition is disconnected.
X
Connect the electrical plug connector to the trunk partition
(Y page 92).
The trunk is incorrectly loaded.
X
Only load the trunk to below the trunk partition
The trunk lid is open.
X
Close the trunk lid (Y page 82).
The on-board voltage is too low.
X
Leave the engine running.
Roof
95
Opening and closing
Z
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The roof has been opened and closed several times in a row. The
roof drive has switched off automatically.
You can open and close the roof again after approximately ten
minutes.
X
Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X
Repeat the opening or closing procedure.
The automatic roof system is faulty.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
96
Roof
Opening and closing
Correct driver's seat position
G
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you
do the following while driving:
R
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
R
fasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror and fasten your
seat belt before starting the engine.
X
Observe the safety guidelines on seat
adjustment (Y page 97).
X
Make sure that seat = is adjusted properly.
Electrical seat adjustment. (Y page 99)
When adjusting the seat, make sure that:
R
you are as far away from the driver's air bag
as possible
R
you are sitting in a normal upright position
R
you can fasten the seat belt properly
R
you have moved the backrest to an almost
vertical position
R
you have set the seat cushion angle so that
your thighs are gently supported
R
you can depress the pedals properly
X
Check whether the head restraint is adjus-
ted properly.
When doing so, make sure that you have
adjusted the head restraint so that the back
of your head is supported at eye level by the
center of the head restraint.
X
Observe the safety notes on steering col-
umn adjustment (Y page 103).
X
Make sure that steering wheel : is adjus-
ted properly.
Adjusting the steering wheel electrically
(Y page 103)
When adjusting the steering wheel column,
make sure that:
R
you can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent
R
you can move your legs freely
R
you can see all the displays in the instru-
ment cluster clearly
X
Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts
(Y page 42).
X
Check whether you have fastened seat
belt ; properly (Y page 44).
The seat belt should:
R
fit snugly across your body
R
be routed across the middle of your shoul-
der
R
be routed in your pelvic area across the hip
joints
X
Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mir-
ror and the exterior mirrors (Y page 105) in
such a way that you have a good view of
road and traffic conditions.
X
Store the seat, steering wheel and exterior
mirror settings using the memory function
(Y page 107).
Seats
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Children could become trapped if they
adjust the seats, particularly when unatten-
ded. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This
also applies for the Digital Vehicle Key if the
"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via
Mercedes me connect. Never leave children
unsupervised in the vehicle.
Seats
97
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
The seats can still be adjusted when there is
no SmartKey in the ignition lock.
G
WARNING
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on
the seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.
When adjusting a seat, make sure that no
one has any body parts in the sweep of the
seat.
G
WARNING
If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could
move forwards as far as the next catch dur-
ing movement such as braking or abrupt
changes of direction. As a result, you would
be pushed against your seat belt by the
unsecured driver's seat.
This could cause you to lose control of the
vehicle. The seat belt cannot protect as
intended and could result in additional
injury.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Before every journey, make sure that the
driver's seat is fully engaged.
Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"
(Y page 45) and "Children in the vehicle"
(Y page 57).
G
WARNING
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you
or other vehicle occupants could be trapped
and thereby injured. Children in particular
could accidentally press the electrical seat
adjustment buttons and become trapped.
There is a risk of injury.
While moving the seats, make sure that your
hands or other body parts do not get under
the lever assembly of the seat adjustment
system.
G
WARNING
If the head restraints are not installed or not
adjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-
tection as intended. There is an increased
risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g.
in the event of an accident or when braking.
Always drive with the head restraints instal-
led. Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the head
restraint supports the back of the head at
about eye level.
G
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you
do the following while driving:
R
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
R
fasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror and fasten your
seat belt before starting the engine.
!
To prevent damage to the seats and the
seat heating, observe the following notes:
R
Do not spill liquids onto the seats. Dry the
seats as soon as possible if liquid does
get spilled on the seats.
R
If the seat covers are damp or wet, do not
switch on the seat heating. Also, do not
use the seat heating to dry the seats.
R
Clean the seat covers as recommended;
see the "Interior care" section.
R
Do not transport heavy loads on the
seats. Do not place pointed objects on
the seat cushions such as knives, nails or
tools. Where possible, use the seats only
for carrying passengers.
R
When operating the seat heating, do not
cover the seats with insulating materials,
e.g. blankets, coats, bags, protective cov-
ers, child seats or booster seats.
R
When the seat heating is switched on, the
seat surface can be damaged as a result
of objects being placed on the seats, for
example, seat cushions, child seats and
protective covers not approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
!
Make sure that there are no objects in the
footwell under or behind the seats when
moving the seats back. There is a risk that
the seats and/or the objects could be dam-
aged.
i
The head restraints cannot be removed.
98
Seats
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
For more information, contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
Adjusting the seats electrically
:
Head restraint height
;
Seat height
=
Seat cushion angle
?
Seat cushion length
A
Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
B
Backrest angle
i Further related subjects:
R
You can store the seat settings using the
memory function (Y page 107).
R
If PRE-SAFE
®
is triggered, the front-
passenger seat will be moved to a better
position if it was previously in an unfavor-
able position (Y page 55).
Adjusting the front-passenger seat
from the driver’s seat
G
WARNING
The front-air bags for could also injure the
vehicle occupants in the front If the front
seats are positioned too close to the dash-
board or steering wheel. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Always adjust the front seats so that they
are as far from the front air bags as possi-
ble. Also observe the notes on the correct
adjustment of the seats.
!
Do not move the front-passenger seat fully
forwards if there are objects in the parcel
net in the front-passenger footwell. The
objects could otherwise be damaged.
You can use the seat switches on the driver's
side to adjust the front-passenger seat.
X
To activate/deactivate: press button :.
When the indicator lamp in button : lights
up, for the front-passenger seat you can:
R
seat adjustment
R
call up the memory function
Removing the seat belt from the belt
guide
G
WARNING
When driving off-road, your body is subject
to forces from all directions, due to the
uneven surface. You could be thrown from
your seat, for instance. There is a risk of
injury.
Always wear a seat belt, even when driving
off-road.
Both the driver's seat belt and the front-
passenger seat belt can be removed from the
Seats
99
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
seat belt guide. This makes it easier to move
the seats forward.
Before you drive off, the seat belt must be
inserted into the seat belt guide.
Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts
(Y page 42).
X
To remove: open up magnetic head ; and
fold the tab up in the direction of the arrow.
X
Take the seat belt out of seat belt guide :.
X
To insert: fold the tab up in the direction of
the arrow.
X
Insert the seat belt back into the seat belt
guide and fold the tab back down.
Adjusting the head restraints
G
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you
do the following while driving:
R
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
R
fasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror and fasten your
seat belt before starting the engine.
X
To adjust the head restraint height: slide
the switch for the head restraint adjust-
ment : up or down in the direction of the
arrow.
Moving the seats forward/back
G
WARNING
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on
the seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.
When adjusting a seat, make sure that no
one has any body parts in the sweep of the
seat.
!
Make sure that there are no containers in
the cup holder and no objects in the foot-
well or behind the seats when adjusting the
seats. Otherwise, you could damage the
seats and the objects.
You can move the seat forwards in order to
gain better access to the rear compartment,
e.g. to reach the stowage compartment in the
rear passenger compartment .
X
Remove the seat belt from the seat belt
guide (Y page 99).
X
To move the seat forwards: press : on
switch :.
The seat moves automatically to the fore-
most position.
X
To move the seat backwards: press 9
on switch :.
The seat moves back to the previous posi-
tion.
X
To stop seat movement: press : or
9 in the opposite direction.
Adjusting the multicontour seat
You can adjust the multicontour seat using
COMAND (see Digital Operator's Manual).
Adjusting the active multicontour
seat
The active multicontour seat can be adjusted
using COMAND (see the Digital Operator's
Manual).
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support
You can adjust the 4-way lumbar support
using COMAND (see the Digital Operator's
Manual).
100
Seats
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Switching the seat heating on/off
Switching on/off
G
WARNING
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating
can cause the seat cushion and backrest
pads to become very hot. The health of per-
sons with limited temperature sensitivity or
a limited ability to react to high tempera-
tures may be affected or they may even suf-
fer burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.
Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on
repeatedly.
!
When the seat heating is switched on, the
seat surface can be damaged as a result of
objects being placed on the seats, for exam-
ple, seat cushions, child seats and protec-
tive covers not approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Ensure that there are no objects on the seat
surface when the seat heating is switched
on.
Driver's and front-passenger seat
The three red indicator lamps in the button
indicate the heating level you have selected.
The system automatically switches down from
level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight
minutes.
The system automatically switches down from
level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten
minutes.
The system automatically switches off approx-
imately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1.
X
Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
X
To switch on: press button : repeatedly
until the desired heating level is set.
X
To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all the indicator lamps go out.
i
If the battery voltage is too low, the seat
heating may switch off.
Problems with the seat heating
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The seat heating has
switched off prema-
turely or cannot be
switched on. The vehi-
cle's electrical system
voltage is too low
because too many elec-
trical consumers are
switched on.
Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the
rear window defroster or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, switch on the seat heating
again.
Seats
101
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
Switching the seat ventilation on/off
Switching on/off
The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons
indicate the blower setting you have selected.
X
Ensure that the SmartKey is in position 2
in the ignition lock.
X
To switch on: press button : repeatedly
until the desired blower setting is set.
X
To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all the indicator lamps go out.
i
If the battery voltage is too low, the seat
ventilation may switch off.
i
If you open the roof using the SmartKey
(Y page 92), the driver's seat ventilation is
automatically switched on and the side win-
dows open.
Problems with the seat ventilation
The seat ventilation has switched off prema-
turely or cannot be switched on. The vehicle's
electrical system voltage is too low because
too many electrical consumers are switched
on.
X
Switch off electrical consumers that you do
not need, such as the rear window defroster
or interior lighting.
X
Once the battery is sufficiently charged,
switch on the seat heating again.
AIRSCARF
Setting head level heating (AIRSCARF)
G
WARNING
When AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot air
can flow from the vents in the head
restraints. This could result in burns in the
immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a
risk of injury.
Reduce the heater output before it becomes
too hot.
The AIRSCARF function warms the head and
neck area of vehicle occupants with warm air.
The warm air flows out of the holes in the head
restraints.
The three red indicator lamps in the button
indicate the heating level you have selected.
X
Ensure that the SmartKey is in position 2
in the ignition lock.
X
To switch on: press button :.
Three red indicator lamps in the button light
up. The blower starts up after a preheating
phase of seven seconds.
X
Press button : repeatedly until the desired
heating level is set.
X
To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all the indicator lamps go out.
i
The blower continues running for seven
seconds to cool down the heating elements.
i
If the battery voltage is too low, AIRSCARF
may switch off.
102
Seats
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Steering wheel
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you
do the following while driving:
R
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
R
fasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror and fasten your
seat belt before starting the engine.
G
WARNING
Children could injure themselves if they
adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of
injury.
Never leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This
also applies for the Digital Vehicle Key if the
"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via
Mercedes me connect.
The electrically adjustable steering wheel can
still be adjusted when there is no SmartKey in
the ignition lock.
Adjusting the steering wheel electri-
cally
:
Adjusts the steering wheel height
;
Adjusts the steering wheel position (fore-
and-aft adjustment)
i Further related subjects:
R
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 103)
R
Storing settings (Y page 107)
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT
feature is making adjustments, you could
lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of
an accident.
Always wait until the adjustment process is
complete before driving off.
G
WARNING
When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts
the steering wheel, you and other vehicle
occupants – particularly children – could
become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-
ing adjustments, make sure that no one has
any body parts in the sweep of the steering
wheel.
Steering wheel
103
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
If somebody becomes trapped:
R
press one of the memory function posi-
tion buttons, or
R
move the switch for steering wheel
adjustment in the opposite direction to
that in which the steering wheel is mov-
ing.
The adjustment process is stopped.
G
WARNING
When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts
the steering wheel and the driver's seat, you
and other vehicle occupants – particularly
children – could become trapped. There is a
risk of injury.
While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-
ing adjustments, make sure that no one has
any body parts in the sweep of the seat and
the steering wheel.
If somebody becomes trapped:
R
press one of the memory function posi-
tion buttons, or
R
press one of the memory function mem-
ory buttons, or
R
move the switch for steering wheel
adjustment in the opposite direction to
that in which the steering wheel is moving
The adjustment process is stopped.
G
WARNING
If you use openings in the bodywork or
detachable parts as steps, you could:
R
slip and/or fall
R
damage the vehicle and cause yourself to
fall.
There is a risk of injury.
Always use secure climbing aids, e.g. a suit-
able ladder.
The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting
in and out of your vehicle easier.
You can activate and deactivate the EASY-
ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board computer
(Y page 201).
Position of the steering wheel when
the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active
The steering wheel swings up when you:
R
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
R
open the driver's door with KEYLESS-GO in
position 1
R
open the driver's door and the SmartKey is
in position u or 1
i
The steering wheel moves upwards only if
it has not already reached the upper steer-
ing limiter.
Position of the steering wheel for driv-
ing
The steering wheel is moved to the last selec-
ted position when:
R
the driver's door is closed
R
you insert the SmartKey into the ignition
lock
or
R
you press the Start/Stop button once on
vehicles with KEYLESS-GO
When you close the driver's door with the igni-
tion switched on, the steering wheel is also
automatically moved to the previously set
position.
The last position of the steering column is
stored when you switch off the ignition or
when you store the setting with the memory
function (Y page 107).
Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature
If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is
triggered in an accident, the steering column
will move upwards when the driver's door is
opened. This occurs irrespective of the posi-
tion of the SmartKey in the ignition lock. This
makes it easier to exit the vehicle and rescue
the occupants.
The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is only
operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature is
activated in the on-board computer
(Y page 201).
104
Steering wheel
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
G
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you
do the following while driving:
R
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
R
fasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror and fasten your
seat belt before starting the engine.
G
WARNING
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side reduces the size of the image. Visible
objects are actually closer than they appear.
This means that you could misjudge the dis-
tance from road users traveling behind, e.g.
when changing lane. There is a risk of an
accident.
For this reason, always make sure of the
actual distance from the road users traveling
behind by glancing over your shoulder.
X
Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
X
Press button : for the left exterior mirror
or button ; for the right exterior mirror.
The indicator lamp in the corresponding but-
ton lights up in red.
The indicator lamp goes out again after
some time. You can adjust the selected
exterior mirror using button = as long as
the indicator lamp is lit.
X
Press button = up, down, to the right or to
the left.
The exterior mirror must be set to a position
that provides you with a good overview of
traffic conditions.
The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger
field of vision.
The exterior mirrors are automatically heated
after starting the vehicle if the rear window
defroster is switched on and the outside tem-
perature is low. Mirror heating lasts up to 10
minutes.
i
You can also heat up the exterior mirrors
manually by switching on the rear window
defroster.
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
electrically
X
Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
X
Briefly press button :.
Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.
i
Make sure that the exterior mirrors are
always folded out fully while driving. They
could otherwise vibrate.
Exterior mirror pushed out of position
If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of
position, proceed as follows:
X
Move the exterior mirror into the correct
position manually.
The mirror housing is engaged again and
you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual
(Y page 105).
Mirrors
105
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
Automatic anti-glare mirrors
G
WARNING
Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an
automatic anti-glare mirror breaks. The elec-
trolyte is harmful and causes irritation. It
must not come into contact with your skin,
eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be
swallowed. There is a risk of injury.
If you come into contact with the electro-
lyte, observe the following:
R
Rinse off the electrolyte from your skin
immediately with water.
R
Immediately rinse the electrolyte out of
your eyes thoroughly with clean water.
R
If the electrolyte is swallowed, immedi-
ately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do
not induce vomiting.
R
If electrolyte comes into contact with your
skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medical
attention immediately.
R
Immediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with electrolyte.
R
If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medi-
cal attention immediately.
The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on
the driver's side automatically go into anti-
glare mode if the following conditions are met
simultaneously:
R
the ignition is switched on and
R
incident light from headlamps strikes the
sensor in the rear-view mirror
The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if
reverse gear is engaged or if the interior light-
ing is switched on.
Parking position for the exterior mir-
ror on the front-passenger side
Setting and storing the parking posi-
tion
Using the memory button
You can store the parking position of the front-
passenger-side exterior mirror using memory
button M ?. The reverse gear must not be
engaged during the process.
X
Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and
that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the
ignition lock.
X
Press button ; for the exterior mirror on
the front-passenger side.
X
Engage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves to the preset parking position.
X
Use button = to adjust the exterior mirror
to a position that allows you to see the rear
wheel and the curb.
The parking position is stored.
i
If you shift the transmission to another
position, the exterior mirror on the front-
passenger side returns to the driving posi-
tion.
106
Mirrors
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Using reverse gear
You can adjust the exterior mirror on the front-
passenger side to a position that allows you to
see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you
engage reverse gear. This setting can be
stored using memory button M ?.
X
Ensure that the SmartKey is in position 2
in the ignition lock.
X
With the exterior mirror on the front-
passenger side activated, use button = to
adjust the exterior mirror. The rear wheel
and the curb should be visible in the exterior
mirror.
X
Press memory button M ? and one of the
arrows on button = within three seconds.
The parking position is stored if the exterior
mirror does not move.
X
If the mirror moves out of position, repeat
the steps.
Calling up a stored parking position
setting
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock.
X
Select the exterior mirror on the front-
passenger side using button ;.
X
Engage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves to the stored parking position.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side
moves back to its original position:
R
as soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph
(15 km/h)
R
if you press button : for the exterior mirror
on the driver's side
Memory function
Storing settings
G
WARNING
If you use the memory function on the driv-
er's side while driving, you could lose con-
trol of the vehicle as a result of the adjust-
ments being made. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
Only use the memory function on the driv-
er's side when the vehicle is stationary.
G
WARNING
When the memory function adjusts the seat,
you and other vehicle occupants – particu-
larly children – could become trapped. There
is a risk of injury.
While the memory function is making adjust-
ments, make sure that no one has any body
parts in the sweep of the seat.
If someone becomes trapped, press a mem-
ory position switch or seat adjustment
switch immediately.
G
WARNING
Children could become trapped if they acti-
vate the memory function, particularly when
unattended. There is a risk of injury.
Never leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle.
Memory function
107
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This
also applies for the Digital Vehicle Key if the
"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via
Mercedes me connect.
The memory function can be activated at any
time, e.g. even when the SmartKey is not in
the ignition lock.
With the memory function, you can store up to
three different settings, e.g. for three different
people.
The following settings are stored as a single
memory preset:
R
Position of the seat, backrest and head
restraint
R
Driver's side: steering wheel position
R
Driver's side: position of the exterior mirrors
on the driver's and front-passenger sides
X
Adjust the seat electrically (Y page 99).
X
On the driver's side, adjust the steering
wheel (Y page 103) and the exterior mirrors
(Y page 105).
X
Press memory button M and one of the stor-
age position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within three
seconds.
The settings are stored in the selected pre-
set position. A tone sounds when the set-
tings have been completed.
Calling up a stored setting
X
Press and hold the relevant storage position
button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering
wheel and exterior mirrors are in the stored
position.
i
The setting procedure is interrupted as
soon as you release the storage position
button.
108
Memory function
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Exterior lighting
General notes
For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you drive with the lights switched
on even during the daytime. In some coun-
tries, operation of the headlamps varies due to
legal requirements and self-imposed obliga-
tions.
Setting the exterior lighting
Setting options
Exterior lighting can be set using:
R
the light switch
R
the combination switch (Y page 110)
R
the on-board computer (Y page 200)
Light switch
Operation
1 W
Left-hand standing lamps
2 X
Right-hand standing lamps
3 T
Parking lamps, license plate and
instrument cluster lighting
4 Ã
Automatic headlamp mode, control-
led by the light sensor
5 L
Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
B R
Rear fog lamp
B R
Rear fog lamp
If you hear a warning tone when you leave the
vehicle, the lights may still be switched on.
X
Turn the light switch to Ã.
The exterior lighting (except the parking/
standing lamps) switches off automatically if
you:
R
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
R
open the driver's door while the SmartKey is
in position u in the ignition lock
Automatic headlamp mode
G
WARNING
When the light switch is set to Ã, the
low-beam headlamps may not be switched
on automatically if there is fog, snow or
other causes of poor visibility due to the
weather conditions such as spray. There is a
risk of an accident.
In such situations, turn the light switch to
L.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid.
The driver is responsible for the vehicle's light-
ing at all times.
à is the preferred light switch position:
R
The light setting is automatically selected
according to the brightness of the ambient
light (exception: poor visibility due to
weather conditions such as fog, snow or
spray).
R
With the SmartKey in position 1 in the igni-
tion lock: the parking lamps are switched on
or off automatically depending on the bright-
ness of the ambient light.
R
With the engine running: if you have activa-
ted the daytime running lamps function via
the on-board computer, the daytime running
lamps or the parking lamps and the low-
beam headlamps are switched on or off
automatically depending on the brightness
of the ambient light.
X
To switch on automatic headlamp mode:
turn the light switch to Ã.
Canada only:
The daytime running lamps improve the visibil-
ity of your vehicle during the day. The daytime
running lamps function is required by law in
Canada. It cannot therefore be deactivated.
When the engine is running and the vehicle is
stationary: if you shift the automatic transmis-
sion from a driving position to position j the
daytime running lamps or low-beam head-
lamps go out after 3 minutes.
Exterior lighting
109
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
When the engine is running, the vehicle is sta-
tionary and in bright ambient light: if you turn
the light switch to the T position, the day-
time running lamps and parking lamps switch
on.
If the engine is running and you turn the light
switch to L, the manual settings take prec-
edence over the daytime running lamps.
USA only:
The daytime running lamps improve the visibil-
ity of your vehicle during the day. To do this,
the daytime running lamps function must be
switched on using the on-board computer
(Y page 200).
If the engine is running and you turn the light
switch to T or L, the manual settings
take precedence over the daytime running
lamps.
Low-beam headlamps
G
WARNING
When the light switch is set to Ã, the
low-beam headlamps may not be switched
on automatically if there is fog, snow or
other causes of poor visibility due to the
weather conditions such as spray. There is a
risk of an accident.
In such situations, turn the light switch to
L.
Even if the light sensor does not detect that it
is dark, the parking lamps and low-beam head-
lamps switch on when the ignition is switched
on and the light switch is set to the L posi-
tion. This is a particularly useful function in the
event of rain and fog.
X
To switch on the low-beam headlamps:
turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock or start the engine.
X
Turn the light switch to L.
The green L indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up.
Parking lamps
!
If the battery charge is very low, the park-
ing lamps or standing lamps are automati-
cally switched off to enable the next engine
start. Always park your vehicle safely and in
a well lit area, in accordance with the rele-
vant legal stipulations. Avoid using the T
parking lamps over a period of several
hours. If possible, switch on the right-hand
X or left-hand W standing lamps.
X
To switch on: turn the light switch to T.
The green T indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up.
Standing lamps
Switching on the standing lamps ensures the
corresponding side of the vehicle is illumina-
ted.
X
To switch on the standing lamps: the
SmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is in
position u in the ignition lock.
X
Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side
of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of
the vehicle).
Combination switch
:
High-beam headlamps
;
Turn signal, right
=
High-beam flasher
?
Turn signal, left
X
To indicate briefly: press the combination
switch briefly to the pressure point in the
direction of arrow ; or ?.
The corresponding turn signal flashes three
times.
X
To indicate: press the combination switch
beyond the pressure point in the direction of
arrow ; or ?.
X
To switch on the high-beam headlamps:
turn the light switch to L or Ã.
X
Press the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of arrow :.
In the à position, the high-beam head-
lamps are only switched on when it is dark
and the engine is running.
110
Exterior lighting
Lights and windshield wipers
The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up when the high-beam
headlamps are switched on.
X
To switch off the high-beam headlamps:
move the combination switch back to its
normal position.
The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster goes out.
Hazard warning lamps
X
To switch on the hazard warning lamps:
press button :.
All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a
turn signal using the combination switch,
only the turn signal lamp on the correspond-
ing side of the vehicle will flash.
X
To switch off the hazard warning lamps:
press button :.
The hazard warning lamps automatically
switch on if:
R
an air bag is deployed or
R
the vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speed
of above 45 mph (70 km/h) and comes to a
standstill
The hazard warning lamps switch off automati-
cally if the vehicle reaches a speed of above
6 mph (10 km/h) again after a full brake appli-
cation.
i
The hazard warning lamps still operate if
the ignition is switched off.
Cornering light function
The cornering light function improves the illu-
mination of the road over a wide angle in the
direction you are turning, enabling better visi-
bility in tight bends, for example. The corner-
ing light function can only be activated when
the low-beam headlamps are switched on.
Active:
R
if you are driving at speeds below 25 mph
(40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or
turn the steering wheel
R
if you are driving at speeds between 25 mph
(40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) and turn
the steering wheel
The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short
time, but is automatically switched off after no
more than three minutes.
Cornering light function with traffic circle
function:
The cornering light function is activated on
both sides before entering a traffic circle
through an evaluation of the current GPS posi-
tion of the vehicle. It remains active until after
the vehicle has left the traffic circle. In this
way, pedestrians crossing the road, for exam-
ple, are illuminated by your vehicle in good
time.
Active light function
The active light function is a system that
moves the headlamps according to the steer-
ing movements of the front wheels. In this
way, relevant areas remain illuminated while
driving. This allows you to recognize pedes-
trians, cyclists and animals sooner.
Active: when the lights are switched on.
Vehicles with Lane Keeping Assist: the active
light function evaluates the course of the lane
in which you are driving and pre-emptively
controls the active light function.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
General notes
You can use this function to set the headlamps
to change between low beam and high beam
automatically. The system recognizes vehicles
with their lights on, either approaching from
the opposite direction or traveling in front of
your vehicle, and consequently switches the
headlamps from high beam to low beam.
The system automatically adapts the low-beam
headlamp range depending on the distance to
the other vehicle. Once the system no longer
Exterior lighting
111
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
detects any other vehicles, it reactivates the
high-beam headlamps.
The system's optical sensor is located behind
the windshield near the overhead control
panel.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recog-
nize road users:
R
who have no lights, e.g. pedestrians
R
who have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
R
whose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier
On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam
Assist may fail to recognize other road users
that have lights, or may recognize them too
late. In this, or in similar situations, the auto-
matic high-beam headlamps will not be
deactivated or will be activated regardless.
There is a risk of an accident.
Always carefully observe the traffic condi-
tions and switch off the high-beam head-
lamps in good time.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into
account road, weather or traffic conditions.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You
are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's
lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and
traffic conditions.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
restricted if there is:
R
poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
snow
R
dirt on the sensors or the sensors are
obscured
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist
on/off
X
To switch on: turn the light switch to Ã.
X
Press the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of arrow :.
The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction
display lights up when it is dark and the light
sensor activates the low-beam headlamps.
If you are driving at speeds above approx-
imately 16 mph (25 km/h):
The headlamp range is set automatically
depending on the distance between the
vehicle and other road users.
If you are driving at speeds above approx-
imately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other
road users have been detected:
The high-beam headlamps are switched on
automatically. The K indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster also lights up.
If you are driving at speeds below approx-
imately 16 mph (25 km/h) or other road
users have been detected or the roads are
adequately lit:
The high-beam headlamps are switched off
automatically. The K indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster goes out. The _
indicator lamp in the multifunction display
remains lit.
X
To switch off: move the combination
switch back to its normal position or move
the light switch to another position.
The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction
display goes out.
Interior lighting
Overview of interior lighting
Overhead control panel
:
p Switches the left-hand reading lamp
on/off
;
c Switches the interior lighting on
=
| Switches the interior lighting/auto-
matic interior lighting control off
?
p Switches the right-hand reading lamp
on/off
A
Switches the automatic interior lighting
control on
112
Interior lighting
Lights and windshield wipers
Interior lighting control
General notes
In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from
discharging, the interior lighting functions are
automatically deactivated after some time,
unless the SmartKey is in position 2 in the
ignition lock.
The color and brightness of the ambient light-
ing are set via the multimedia system
(Y page 200).
Automatic interior lighting control
X
To switch on: set the switch to center posi-
tion 5.
X
To switch off: set the switch to the |
position.
The interior lighting automatically switches on
if you:
R
unlock the vehicle
R
open a door
R
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
The interior lighting is switched on for a set
time when the SmartKey is removed from the
ignition lock. You can activate this delayed
switch-off using the on-board computer
(Y page 201).
Replacing bulbs
The front and rear lamps of your vehicle are
equipped with LED bulbs. Do not replace the
bulbs yourself. Contact a qualified specialist
workshop which has the necessary specialist
knowledge and tools to carry out the work
required.
Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of
vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
that these function correctly at all times. Have
the headlamp setting checked regularly.
Windshield wipers
Switching the windshield wipers
on/off
!
Do not operate the windshield wipers
when the windshield is dry, as this could
damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust
that has collected on the windshield can
scratch the glass if wiping takes place when
the windshield is dry.
If it is necessary to switch on the windshield
wipers in dry weather conditions, always use
washer fluid when operating the windshield
wipers.
!
If the windshield wipers leave smears on
the windshield after the vehicle has been
washed in an automatic car wash, wax or
other residues may be the reason for this.
Clean the windshield using washer fluid
after washing the vehicle in an automatic
car wash.
!
Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due
to optical influences and the windshield
becoming dirty in dry weather conditions,
the windshield wipers may be activated
inadvertently. This could then damage the
windshield wiper blades or scratch the wind-
shield.
For this reason, you should always switch
off the windshield wipers in dry weather.
Combination switch
1
$ Windshield wiper off
2
Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor
set to low sensitivity)
3
Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor
set to high sensitivity)
4
° Continuous wipe, slow
5
¯ Continuous wipe, fast
B
í Single wipe/î Wipes the wind-
shield using washer fluid
If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield
will no longer be wiped properly. This could
prevent you from observing the traffic condi-
tions.
Windshield wipers
113
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
Replacing the wiper blades
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If the windshield wipers begin to move while
you are changing the wiper blades, you
could be trapped by the wiper arm. There is
a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
ignition before changing the wiper blades.
!
To avoid damaging the wiper blades, make
sure that you touch only the wiper arm of
the wiper.
!
Never open the hood if a windshield wiper
arm has been folded away from the wind-
shield.
Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a
wiper blade back onto the windshield.
Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when
you change the wiper blade. If you release
the windshield wiper arm without a wiper
blade and it falls onto the windshield, the
windshield may be damaged by the force of
the impact.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
the wiper blades changed at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
!
Always position the windshield wiper arms
vertically before folding them away from the
windshield. By doing so, you will avoid dam-
age to the hood.
Replacing the windshield wiper blades
Moving the wiper arm to a vertical posi-
tion
On vehicles without KEYLESS-GO:
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in
the ignition lock.
X
Set the windshield wiper to position °.
X
When the wiper arms are vertical to the
hood, turn the SmartKey to position u in
the ignition lock and remove it.
X
Fold the wiper arm away from the wind-
shield until you feel it engage.
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Remove your foot from the brake pedal.
X
Set the windshield wiper to the ° posi-
tion.
X
Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until
the windshield wiper starts.
X
When the wiper arms are in a vertical posi-
tion to the hood, press the Start/Stop but-
ton.
X
Fold the wiper arm away from the wind-
shield until you feel it engage.
Removing a wiper blade
X
To bring the wiper blade into position to
be removed: hold the wiper arm firmly with
one hand. With the other hand, turn the
wiper blade in the direction of arrow =
beyond the point of resistance.
The wiper blade engages in the removal
position with an audible click.
X
To remove a wiper blade: firmly press
release knob ; and pull the wiper blade
upwards :.
Installing the wiper blades
114
Windshield wipers
Lights and windshield wipers
X
Push the new wiper blade in the direction of
arrow : onto the wiper arm until lug ;
engages.
X
Push the wiper blade out of the removal
position in the direction of arrow = beyond
the point of resistance.
The wiper blade disengages with an audible
click and is freely movable again.
X
Make sure that the wiper blade is seated
correctly.
X
Fold the wiper arm back onto the wind-
shield.
Problems with the windshield wipers
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The windshield wipers
are jammed.
Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield
wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.
X
For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the
ignition lock.
or
X
Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the
driver's door.
X
Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X
Switch the windshield wipers back on.
The windshield wipers
fail completely.
The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.
X
Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.
X
Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Windshield wipers
115
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
Overview of climate control systems
General notes
Observe the settings recommended on the fol-
lowing pages. The windows could otherwise
fog up.
To prevent the windows from fogging up:
R
switch off climate control only briefly
R
switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly
R
switch on the cooling with air dehumidifica-
tion function
R
switch on the defrost windshield function
briefly, if required
Climate control regulates the temperature and
the humidity in the vehicle interior and filters
undesirable substances out of the air.
Climate control can only be operated when the
engine is running. Optimum operation is only
achieved with the side windows and roof
closed.
i
When the weather is warm, ventilate the
vehicle for a brief period. This will speed up
the cooling process and the desired vehicle
interior temperature will be reached more
quickly.
i
It is possible that the dehumidification
function of the climate control system may
be activated automatically an hour after the
SmartKey has been removed. The vehicle is
then ventilated for 30 minutes to dry the air-
conditioning system.
Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control
Canada only
:
Sets the temperature, left (Y page 119)
;
Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 119)
=
Defrosts the windshield (Y page 120)
?
Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 122)
A
Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 118)
B
Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 121)
C
Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 120)
D
Sets the temperature, right (Y page 119)
E
Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 118)
F
Sets the air distribution (Y page 120)
G
Sets the airflow (Y page 120)
116
Overview of climate control systems
Climate control
H
Adjusts the climate mode settings (Y page 119)
I
Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 122)
USA only
:
Sets the temperature, left (Y page 119)
;
Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 119)
=
Defrosts the windshield (Y page 120)
?
Switches the maximum cooling MAX COOL on or off (Y page 121)
A
Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 118)
B
Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 121)
C
Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 120)
D
Sets the temperature, right (Y page 119)
E
Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 118)
F
Sets the air distribution (Y page 120)
G
Sets the airflow (Y page 120)
H
Adjusts the climate mode settings (Y page 119)
I
Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 122)
Optimum use of dual-zone automatic
climate control
Climate control system
The following contains instructions and recom-
mendations to enable you to get the most out
of your 3-zone automatic climate control.
R
Activate climate control using the à and
¿ buttons on the control panel of the cli-
mate control. The indicator lamps in
the à and ¿ buttons light up.
R
In automatic mode, the ñ button on the
climate control panel may be used to addi-
tionally adjust the airflow (FOCUS/
MEDIUM/DIFFUSE). The MEDIUM level is
recommended.
R
Set the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).
R
Only use the "Windshield defrosting" func-
tion briefly until the windshield is clear
again.
R
Only use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.
if there are unpleasant outside odors or
when in a tunnel. The windows could other-
wise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn into
the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.
R
Use the ZONE function to adopt the temper-
ature settings on the driver's side for the
front-passenger side as well. The indicator
lamp in the á button goes out.
Overview of climate control systems
117
Climate control
R
Use the residual heat function if you want to
heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when
the ignition is switched off. The residual
heat function can only be activated or deac-
tivated with the ignition switched off.
R
Vehicles with COMAND: if you change the
settings of the climate control system, the
climate status display appears for three sec-
onds at the bottom of the screen in the
COMAND display. You will see the current
settings of the various climate control func-
tions.
ECO start/stop function
During automatic engine switch-off, the cli-
mate control system only operates at a
reduced capacity. If you require full climate
control capacity, the ECO start/stop function
can be deactivated by pressing the ECO but-
ton (Y page 130).
Operating the climate control sys-
tems
Activating/deactivating climate con-
trol
General notes
When the climate control is switched off, the
air supply and air circulation are also switched
off. The windows could fog up. Therefore,
switch off climate control only briefly
i
Activate climate control primarily using the
à button (Y page 119).
Activating/deactivating
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 126).
X
To activate: press the à button.
The indicator lamp in the à button lights
up. Airflow and air distribution are set to
automatic mode.
or
X
Press the ^ button.
The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes
out. The previously selected settings are
restored.
X
To deactivate: press the ^ button.
The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights
up.
Switching cooling with air dehumidi-
fication on/off
General notes
If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu-
midification" function, the air inside the vehicle
will not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle
will also not be dehumidified. The windows can
fog up more quickly. Therefore, deactivate the
cooling with air-dehumidification function only
briefly.
The "Cooling with air dehumidification" func-
tion is only available when the engine is run-
ning. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and
dehumidified according to the temperature
selected.
Condensation may drip from the underside of
the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is
normal and not a sign that there is a malfunc-
tion.
Activating/deactivating
X
To activate: press the ¿ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lights
up.
X
To deactivate: press the ¿ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¿ or Á but-
ton goes out. The "Cooling with air dehumid-
ification" function has a delayed switch-off
feature.
The indicator lamp in the ¿ button goes
out. The "Cooling with air dehumidification"
function has a delayed switch-off feature.
118
Operating the climate control systems
Climate control
Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The indicator lamp in
the ¿ button flashes
three times or remains
off. The "Cooling with
air dehumidification"
function cannot be
switched on.
Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a
malfunction.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Setting climate control to automatic
General notes
In automatic mode, the set temperature is
maintained automatically at a constant level.
The system automatically regulates the tem-
perature of the dispensed air, the airflow and
the air distribution.
The automatic mode functions optimally when
the "Cooling with air dehumidification" func-
tion is activated. If necessary, cooling with air
dehumidification can be deactivated.
If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu-
midification" function, the air inside the vehicle
will not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle
will also not be dehumidified. The windows can
fog up more quickly. Therefore, deactivate the
cooling with air-dehumidification function only
briefly.
Automatic control
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 126).
X
Set the desired temperature.
X
To activate: press the à button.
The indicator lamp in the à button lights
up. Automatic air distribution and airflow are
activated.
i
When automatic mode is enabled, the cli-
mate mode can be selected (Y page 119).
X
To switch to manual mode: press the
_ button.
or
X
Press the I or K button.
The indicator lamp in the à button goes
out.
Adjusting the climate mode settings
You can select the following climate mode set-
tings in automatic mode:
FOCUS high airflow, slightly cooler setting
MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting
DIFFUSE low airflow, slightly warmer and
draft-free setting
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 126).
X
Press the à button.
X
Press the ñ button repeatedly until the
desired climate mode appears in the dis-
play.
Setting the temperature
Setting the temperature
Different temperatures can be set for the driv-
er's and front-passenger sides.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 126).
X
Turn control : or ; counter-clockwise or
clockwise.
Only change the temperature setting in
small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
i
If you turn controls : and ; counter-
clockwise to the lowest temperature setting,
air-recirculation mode may switch on auto-
matically, depending on the outside temper-
ature.
Operating the climate control systems
119
Climate control
Setting the air distribution
Activating/deactivating
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 126).
X
Press the _ button repeatedly until the
desired symbol appears in the display.
Air distribution settings
The following air distribution settings can be
selected:
P
Directs air through the center and side
air vents
O
Directs air through the footwell air
vents
S
Directs air through the center, side and
footwell vents
¯
Directs air through the defroster vents
b
Directs the airflow through the
defroster, center and side air vents
(Canada only)
a
Directs air through the defroster and
footwell vents
_
Directs the airflow through the
defroster vents, the center and side air
vents as well as the footwell air vents
(Canada only)
i
Regardless of the air distribution setting,
airflow is always directed through the side
air vents. The side air vents can only be
closed when the adjuster in the side air vent
is turned clockwise.
Setting the airflow
Setting the airflow
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 126).
X
To increase: press the K button.
X
To reduce: press the I button.
Switching the ZONE function on/off
X
To switch on: press the á button.
The indicator lamp in the á button lights
up. The temperature setting for the driver's
side is not adopted for the front-passenger
side.
X
To switch off: press the á button.
The indicator lamp in the á button goes
out. The temperature setting for the driver's
side is adopted for the front-passenger side.
Defrosting the windshield
General notes
You can use this function to defrost the wind-
shield or to defrost the inside of the wind-
shield and the side windows.
Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" function
as soon as the windshield is clear again.
Switching the "windshield defrosting"
function on or off
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 126).
X
To switch on: press the ¬ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights
up.
The climate control system switches to the
following functions:
R
high airflow
R
high temperature
R
air distribution to the windshield and front
side windows
R
air-recirculation mode off
X
To switch off: press the ¬ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes
out. The previously selected settings are
restored. Air-recirculation mode remains
deactivated.
or
X
Press the à button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes
out. Airflow and air distribution are set to
automatic mode.
or
X
Turn temperature control : or D counter-
clockwise or clockwise (Y page 116).
or
X
Press the K or I button.
120
Operating the climate control systems
Climate control
MAX COOL maximum cooling
The MAX COOL function is only available in
vehicles for the USA.
MAX COOL is only operational when the
engine is running.
X
To activate: press the Ù button.
The indicator lamp in the button lights up.
X
To deactivate: press the Ù button.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
The previously selected settings are
restored.
When you activate MAX COOL, climate control
switches to the following functions:
R
maximum cooling
R
maximum airflow
R
air-recirculation mode on
Removing condensation from the
windows
Windows fogged up on the inside
X
Activate the ¿ cooling with air dehumidi-
fication function.
X
Activate the à mode button.
X
If the windows continue to fog up, activate
the ¬ "Windshield defrosting" function.
i
You should only select this setting until the
windshield is clear again.
Windows fogged up on the outside
X
Activate the windshield wipers.
X
Press the _ button repeatedly until the
P or O symbol appears in the display.
i
You should only select this setting until the
windshield is clear again.
Rear window defroster
General notes
The rear window defroster has a high current
draw. You should therefore switch it off as
soon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise,
the rear window defroster switches off auto-
matically after several minutes.
If the battery voltage is too low, the rear win-
dow defroster may switch off.
Activating/deactivating
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 126).
X
Press the ¤ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights
up or goes out.
Problems with the rear window defroster
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The rear window
defroster has deactiva-
ted prematurely or can-
not be activated.
The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con-
sumers are switched on.
X
Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading
lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating.
When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window
defroster can be activated again.
Operating the climate control systems
121
Climate control
Switching air-recirculation mode
on/off
General notes
If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the
windows can fog up more quickly, in particular
at low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation
mode briefly to prevent the windows from fog-
ging up.
Activating/deactivating
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 126).
X
To activate: press the g button.
The indicator lamp in the g button lights
up.
i
Air-recirculation mode is automatically
activated at high levels of pollution or at
high outside temperatures. When air-recir-
culation mode is activated automatically,
the indicator lamp in the g button is not
lit. Outside air is added after about
30 minutes.
X
To deactivate: press the g button.
The indicator lamp in the g button goes
out.
i Air-recirculation mode deactivates auto-
matically:
R
after approximately five minutes at out-
side temperatures below approximately
41 ‡ (5 †)
R
after approximately five minutes if cooling
with air dehumidification is deactivated
R
after approximately 30 minutes at outside
temperatures above approximately 41 ‡
(5 †) if the "Cooling with air dehumidifi-
cation" function is activated
Switching the residual heat on or off
General notes
The residual heat function is only available on
vehicles for Canada.
It is possible to make use of the residual heat
of the engine to continue heating the station-
ary vehicle for up to 30 minutes after the
engine has been switched off. The heating
time depends on the set interior temperature.
Activating/deactivating
X
Turn the SmartKey to position u in the igni-
tion lock or remove it (Y page 126).
X
To activate: press the Ì button.
The indicator lamp in the Ì button lights
up.
i
The blower will run at a low speed regard-
less of the airflow setting.
i
If you activate the residual heat function at
high temperatures, only the ventilation will
be activated. The blower runs at medium
speed.
X
To deactivate: press the Ì button.
The indicator lamp in the Ì button goes
out.
Residual heat is deactivated automatically:
R
after approximately 30 minutes
R
when the ignition is switched on
R
if the battery voltage drops
Setting the air vents
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the
air vents. This could result in burns or frost-
bite in the immediate vicinity of the air
vents. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that all vehicle occupants always
maintain a sufficient distance to the air out-
lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to
another area of the vehicle interior.
G
WARNING
When AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot air
can flow from the vents in the head
restraints. This could result in burns in the
immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a
risk of injury.
Reduce the heater output before it becomes
too hot.
122
Setting the air vents
Climate control
In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air
through the air vents into the vehicle interior,
please observe the following notes:
R
keep the air inlet grille on the hood and in
the engine compartment on the front-
passenger side free of blockages, such as
ice, snow or leaves.
R
never cover the air vents or air intake grilles
in the vehicle interior.
i
You can move the adjusters for the air
vents vertically or horizontally to set the
direction of the airflow.
i
For optimal climate control in the vehicle,
open the air vents completely and set the
adjusters to the central position.
Setting the center air vents
X
To open the center air vents: turn the
adjuster in one of center air vents : coun-
ter-clockwise.
X
To close the center air vents: turn the
adjuster in one of center air vents : clock-
wise until it engages.
Setting the side air vents
:
Side window defroster vent
;
Side air vent
X
To open a side air vent: turn the adjuster
in the side air vent ; to the left.
X
To close a side air vent: turn the adjuster
in the side air vent ; to the right until it
engages.
Setting the glove compartment air
vent
!
Close the air vent when heating the vehi-
cle.
At high outside temperatures, open the air
vent and activate the "cooling with air dehu-
midification" function. Otherwise, tempera-
ture-sensitive items stored in the glove box
could be damaged.
:
Air vent control
;
Air vent
When the climate control system is activated,
the glove box can be ventilated, for instance to
cool its contents. The level of airflow depends
on the airflow and air distribution settings.
Setting the air vents
123
Climate control
Z
X
To open or close: turn thumbwheel : to
the right or left.
Setting the blower output of the AIR-
SCARF vents
G
WARNING
When AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot air
can flow from the vents in the head
restraints. This could result in burns in the
immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a
risk of injury.
Reduce the heater output before it becomes
too hot.
You can adjust the blower output of AIRSCARF
vents : using the AIRSCARF button
(Y page 102).
124
Setting the air vents
Climate control
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle
Important safety notes
The sensor system of some driving and driving
safety systems adjusts automatically while a
certain distance is being driven after the vehi-
cle has been delivered or after repairs. Full
system effectiveness is not reached until the
end of this teach-in procedure.
New and replaced brake pads and discs only
reach their optimum braking effect after sev-
eral hundred kilometers of driving. Compen-
sate for this by applying greater force to the
brake pedal.
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
The more you look after the engine when it is
new, the more satisfied you will be with its
performance in the future.
R
You should therefore drive at varying vehicle
and engine speeds for the first 1,000 miles
(1,500 km).
R
Avoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throt-
tle, during this period.
R
Change gear in good time, before the tach-
ometer needle is Ô of the way to the red
area of the tachometer.
R
Do not manually shift to a lower gear to
brake the vehicle.
R
Try to avoid depressing the accelerator
pedal beyond the point of resistance (kick-
down).
Additional breaking-in notes for Mercedes-
AMG vehicles:
R
Do not drive faster than 85 mph (140 km/h)
for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km).
R
Only allow the engine to reach a maximum
engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.
R
Ideally, for the first 1000 miles (1500 km),
drive in program C.
R
Change gear in good time.
After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increase
the engine speed gradually and accelerate the
vehicle to full speed.
You should also observe these notes on break-
ing in if the engine or parts of the drive train
on your vehicle have been replaced.
Always observe the maximum permissible
speed.
Self-locking rear axle differential
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Your vehicle is equipped with a self-locking dif-
ferential on the rear axle.
Change the oil to improve protection of the
rear axle differential:
R
after a breaking-in period of 2000 miles
(USA)
R
after a breaking-in period of 3000 km (Can-
ada)
R
every 30,000 miles or 3 years(USA)
R
every 60,000 km or 4 years (Canada)
These oil changes prolong the service life of
the differential. Have the oil change carried
out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Driving
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict
the clearance around the pedals or block a
depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the oper-
ating and road safety of the vehicle. There is
a risk of an accident.
Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so
that they do not get into the driver's foot-
well. When using floormats or carpets, make
sure that they are properly secured so that
they do not slip or obstruct the pedals. Do
not place several floormats or carpets on
top of one another.
G
WARNING
Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct
usage of the pedals, e.g.:
R
shoes with thick soles
R
shoes with high heels
R
slippers
There is a risk of an accident.
Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct
usage of the pedals.
Driving
125
Driving and parking
Z
G
WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could
affect, for example, the power steering and
the brake boosting effect. You will require
considerably more effort to steer and brake.
There is a risk of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
G
WARNING
If the parking brake has not been fully
released when driving, the parking brake
can:
R
overheat and cause a fire
R
lose its hold function.
There is a risk of fire and an accident.
Release the parking brake fully before driv-
ing off.
!
Do not warm up the engine while station-
ary. Pull away immediately. Avoid high
engine speeds and full throttle until the
engine has reached its operating tempera-
ture.
In vehicles with automatic transmission,
engage positions P and R only when the
vehicle is stationary.
Where possible, avoid spinning the drive
wheels when pulling away on slippery roads.
You could otherwise damage the drive train.
!
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: at low engine
oil temperatures below 68 ‡ (+20 †), the
maximum engine speed is restricted in
order to protect the engine. To protect the
engine and maintain smooth engine opera-
tion, avoid driving at full throttle when the
engine is cold.
Key positions
SmartKey
g
To remove the SmartKey
1
Power supply for some consumers, such
as the windshield wipers
2
Ignition (power supply for all consumers)
and drive position
3
To start the engine
i
The SmartKey can be turned in the ignition
lock even if it is not the correct SmartKey
for the vehicle. The ignition is not switched
on. The engine cannot be started.
KEYLESS-GO
General notes
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with
a SmartKey featuring an integrated KEYLESS-
GO start function and a detachable Start/Stop
button.
The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the
ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in the
vehicle.
When you insert the Start/Stop button into
the ignition lock, the system needs approx-
imately two seconds recognition time. You can
then use the Start/Stop button.
Pressing the Start/Stop button several times
in succession corresponds to the different key
positions in the ignition lock. This is only the
case if you are not depressing the brake pedal.
If you depress the brake pedal and press the
Start/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-
ately.
A check which periodically establishes a radio
connection between the vehicle and the
SmartKey determines whether a valid Smart-
126
Driving
Driving and parking
Key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example,
when starting the engine.
To start the vehicle without actively using the
SmartKey:
R
the Start/Stop button must be inserted in
the ignition lock.
R
the SmartKey must be in the vehicle.
R
the vehicle must not be locked with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 74).
Do not keep the SmartKey:
R
with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone
or another SmartKey.
R
with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal
foil.
R
inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.
This can impair the functionality of the KEY-
LESS-GO key.
If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey's
remote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a
short time:
R
you will not be able to switch on the ignition
with the Start/Stop button.
R
you will not be able to start the engine with
the Start/Stop button until the vehicle is
unlocked again.
The engine can be switched off while the vehi-
cle is in motion by pressing and holding the
Start/Stop button for three seconds. This
function operates independently of the ECO
start/stop automatic engine switch-off func-
tion.
Key positions with KEYLESS-GO
:
Start/Stop button
;
Ignition lock
As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light
up. Further information on situations where an
indicator lamp either fails to go out after start-
ing the engine or lights up while driving
(Y page 235).
If Start/Stop button : has not yet been
pressed, this corresponds to the key being
removed from the ignition.
X
To switch on the power supply: press
Start/Stop button : once.
The power supply is switched on. You can
now activate the windshield wipers, for
example.
The power supply is switched off again if:
R
the driver's door is opened and
R
you press Start/Stop button : twice
when in this position
X
To switch on the ignition: press Start/
Stop button : twice.
The ignition is switched on.
If you press Start/Stop button : once
when in this position, the ignition is
switched off again.
Removing the Start/Stop button
You can remove the Start/Stop button from
the ignition lock and start the vehicle as nor-
mal using the SmartKey.
X
Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition
lock ;.
You do not have to remove the Start/Stop but-
ton from the ignition lock when you leave the
vehicle. You should, however, always take the
SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle.
As long as the SmartKey is in the vehicle:
R
the vehicle can be started using the Start/
Stop button
R
the electrically powered equipment can be
operated
Starting the engine
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could:
R
operate the vehicle's equipment
Driving
127
Driving and parking
Z
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
R
release the parking brake
R
shift the automatic transmission out of
park position j
R
start the engine
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Never leave children or animals unattended
in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This
also applies for the Digital Vehicle Key if the
"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via
Mercedes me connect.
G
DANGER
Combustion engines emit poisonous
exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide.
Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to
health and can result in poisoning. There is a
risk of fatal injury. Therefore, never leave the
engine running an enclosed space without
adequate ventilation.
G
WARNING
Flammable materials introduced through
environmental influence or by animals can
ignite if in contact with the exhaust system
or parts of the engine that heat up. There is
a risk of fire.
Carry out regular checks to make sure that
there are no flammable foreign materials in
the engine compartment or in the exhaust
system.
The catalytic converter is preheated for up to
30 seconds after a cold start. The sound of the
engine may change during this time.
Automatic transmission
X
Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
Transmission position display j is shown
in the multifunction display.
i
You can start the engine in transmission
position j and i.
Starting procedure with the SmartKey
To start the engine using the SmartKey instead
of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/Stop button out
of the ignition lock.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 3
(Y page 126) in the ignition lock and release
it as soon as the engine is running.
Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine
The Start/Stop button can be used to start the
vehicle manually without inserting the Smart-
Key into the ignition lock. The Start/Stop but-
ton must be inserted in the ignition lock and
the SmartKey must be in the vehicle. This
mode for starting the engine operates inde-
pendently of the ECO start/stop automatic
engine start function.
X
Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
X
Press the Start/Stop button once
(Y page 126).
The engine starts.
Pulling away
General notes
G
WARNING
If the engine speed is above the idling speed
and you engage transmission position 7
or C, the vehicle could pull away sud-
denly. There is a risk of an accident.
When engaging transmission position 7
or C, always firmly depress the brake
pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate.
Depress the accelerator carefully when pulling
away.
The vehicle locks centrally once you have
pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors
drop down.
You can open the doors from the inside at any
time.
You can also deactivate the automatic locking
feature (Y page 201).
128
Driving
Driving and parking
It is only possible to shift the transmission
from position j to the desired position if you
depress the brake pedal. Only then is the shift
lock released.
i
Upshifts take place at higher engine
speeds after a cold start. This helps the cat-
alytic converter to reach its operating tem-
perature more quickly.
Information on the automatic release of the
electric parking brake (Y page 148).
Hill start assist
Hill start assist helps you when pulling away
forward or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It
holds the vehicle for a short time after you
have removed your foot from the brake pedal.
This gives you enough time to move your foot
from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal
and to depress it before the vehicle begins to
roll.
G
WARNING
After a short time, hill start assist will no lon-
ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Therefore, quickly move your foot from the
brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never
leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start
assist.
Hill start assist is not active if:
R
you are pulling away on a level road or on a
downhill gradient
R
the transmission is in position i
R
the electric parking brake is applied
R
ESP
®
is malfunctioning
ECO start/stop function
Introduction
The ECO start/stop function switches the
engine off automatically if the vehicle is stop-
ped under certain conditions.
The engine starts automatically when the
driver wants to pull away again. The ECO
start/stop function thereby helps you to
reduce the fuel consumption and emissions of
your vehicle.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If the engine is switched off automatically
and you exit the vehicle, the engine is
restarted automatically. The vehicle may
begin moving. There is a risk of accident and
injury.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn
off the ignition and secure the vehicle
against rolling away.
General notes
:
ECO start/stop display
The ECO start/stop function is activated
whenever you switch on the engine using the
SmartKey or the Start/Stop button.
If the engine has been switched off automati-
cally by the ECO start/stop function, the è
ECO symbol is shown in the multifunction dis-
play.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop
function is only available in drive program C.
Automatic engine switch-off
If the vehicle is braked to a standstill with the
transmission in h or i, the ECO start/stop
function switches off the engine automatically.
The ECO start/stop function is operational
when:
R
the indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit
green
R
the outside temperature is within the range
that is suitable for the system
R
the engine is at normal operating tempera-
ture
R
the set temperature for the vehicle interior
has been reached
R
the battery is sufficiently charged
Driving
129
Driving and parking
Z
R
the system detects that the windshield is
not fogged up when the air-conditioning sys-
tem is switched on
R
the hood is closed
R
the driver's door is closed and the driver's
seat belt is fastened
All of the vehicle's systems remain active
when the engine is stopped automatically.
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles): automatic engine switch-off can take
place a maximum of four times in a row (initial
stop, then three subsequent stops).
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the number of con-
secutive automatic engine switch-offs is
unlimited.
The HOLD function can be activated if the
engine has been switched off automatically. It
is then not necessary to continue applying the
brakes during the automatic stop phase. When
you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine
starts automatically and the braking effect of
the HOLD function is deactivated.
Automatic engine start
The engine starts automatically if:
R
you switch off the ECO start/stop function
by pressing the ECO button
R
in transmission position h or i, the brake
pedal is released and the HOLD function is
not active
R
you depress the accelerator pedal
R
you engage reverse gear k
R
you move the transmission out of position
j
R
you switch to drive program S+
R
you switch to drive program S or M
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
R
you unfasten your seat belt or open the driv-
er's door
R
the vehicle starts to roll
R
the brake system requires this
R
the temperature in the vehicle interior devi-
ates from the set range
R
the system detects moisture on the wind-
shield when the air-conditioning system is
switched on
R
the battery's condition of charge is too low
Shifting the transmission to position j does
not start the engine.
Deactivating or activating the ECO
start/stop function
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles)
X
To deactivate: press ECO button :.
Indicator lamp ; goes out.
X
To activate: press ECO button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop
function has been deactivated manually or as
the result of a malfunction. The engine will
then not be switched off automatically when
the vehicle stops.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
X
To deactivate: in drive program C, press
ECO button :.
or
X
Switch to drive program S, S+ or M
(Y page 133).
Indicator lamp ; goes out.
X
To activate: press ECO button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
130
Driving
Driving and parking
If drive program S, S+ or M is active, the
automatic transmission switches to drive
program C.
If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop
function has been deactivated manually or as
the result of a malfunction. The engine will
then not be switched off automatically when
the vehicle stops.
Problems with the engine
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The engine does not
start.
The HOLD function or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa-
ted.
X
Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 165) or Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC (Y page 161).
X
Try to start the engine again.
The engine does not
start. The starter motor
can be heard.
R
There is a malfunction in the engine electronics.
R
There is a malfunction in the fuel supply.
Before attempting to start the engine again:
X
Turn the SmartKey back to position u in the ignition lock.
or
X
Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in
the instrument cluster go out.
X
Try to start the engine again (Y page 127). Avoid excessively long
and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain the
battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine does not
start. You cannot hear
the starter motor.
The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or
discharged.
X
Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 285).
If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.
X
Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two
minutes.
X
Try to start the engine again.
If the engine still does not start:
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Driving
131
Driving and parking
Z
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The engine is not run-
ning smoothly and is
misfiring.
There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical
component of the engine management system.
X
Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic con-
verter and damage it.
X
Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop.
The coolant tempera-
ture display shows a
value above 248 ‡
(120 †). The coolant
warning lamp may also
be on and a warning
tone may sound.
The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is
no longer being cooled sufficiently.
X
Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to
cool down.
X
Check the coolant level (Y page 267). Observe the warning notes
as you do so and add coolant if necessary.
If the coolant level is correct, the engine radiator fan may be faulty.
The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled suf-
ficiently.
X
At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the near-
est qualified specialist workshop.
X
Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in
mountainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic.
Notes on towing vehicles
The vehicle is not suitable for attaching tow
bar systems, such as those used for flat tow-
ing or dinghy towing.
Attaching or using tow bar systems may result
in damage to the vehicle.
When towing a vehicle with tow bar systems,
safe driving characteristics cannot be guaran-
teed for the towing vehicle or the towed vehi-
cle.
The vehicle/vehicle combination may swerve.
Observe the permissible towing methods
(Y page 289) and the notes on towing with
both axles on the ground (Y page 289).
DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehi-
cles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to change
the drive program. Depending on the drive pro-
gram selected the following vehicle character-
istics will change:
R
the drive (engine and transmission manage-
ment)
R
the suspension
R
the steering
R
the curve tilting function (vehicles with
Active Body Control)
R
the control thresholds of ESP
®
Each time you start the engine with the Smart-
Key or the Start/Stop button, drive program C
is activated. Further information about starting
the engine (Y page 127).
Each time you start the engine with the Smart-
Key, drive program C is activated. Further
information about starting the engine
(Y page 127).
132
DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Driving and parking
X
Press DYNAMIC SELECT button : as many
times as necessary until the desired drive
program is selected.
The selected drive program appears in the
multifunction display. After a short period of
time, the display goes out and the symbol
for the selected drive program appears.
In addition, the current drive program set-
tings are displayed briefly in the multimedia
system display.
i
In a few countries, the ECO start/stop
function is deactivated at the factory due to
the available fuel grade. In this case, the
ECO start/stop function is not available in
any drive program, regardless of the display
in the multimedia system display.
Available drive programs:
C Comfort Comfortable and economi-
cal driving characteristics
S Sport Sporty driving characteris-
tics
S+ Sport Plus Particularly sporty driving
characteristics
I Individual Individual settings
E Economy
(vehicles with
adjustable
damping)
Particularly economical
driving characteristics
CV CURVE
(vehicles with
Active Body
Control)
Particularly economical
driving characteristics with
cornering function
Additional information for drive programs
(Y page 138).
DYNAMIC SELECT controller
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
General information
Select the drive program using the DYNAMIC
SELECT controller.
Available drive programs:
I Individual Individual settings
C Comfort Comfort-oriented, opti-
mum-economy engine and
transmission settings
S Sport Sporty engine and trans-
mission settings
S+ Sport Plus Particularly sporty trans-
mission settings
Race
Maximum sportiness and
engine and transmission
settings suitable for the
racetrack
Depending on the drive program selected the
following vehicle characteristics will change:
R
the drive (engine management)
R
the transmission management
R
ESP
®
R
the suspension
R
the steering
R
the availability of the ECO start/stop func-
tion
R
the driver assistance systems
R
the availability of gliding mode
Further information for automatic drive pro-
gram characteristics (Y page 138).
Additionally, in drive program I you can config-
ure the respective vehicle characteristics
using the multimedia system. You can find
information about this in the Digital Operator's
Manual.
Each time you start the engine with the Smart-
Key or the Start/Stop button, drive program C
is activated. For further information about
starting the engine, see (Y page 127).
DYNAMIC SELECT controller (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
133
Driving and parking
Z
Selecting the drive program
X
Turn DYNAMIC SELECT controller : as
many times as necessary until the desired
drive program is selected.
The symbol of the selected drive program is
shown in the multifunction display.
In addition, the current drive program set-
tings are displayed briefly in the multimedia
system display.
The drive program indicator on DYNAMIC
SELECT controller : lights up in red.
Additional information for drive programs
(Y page 138).
Additional settings
:
ECO start/stop function (Y page 129)
;
ESP
®
(Y page 65)
=
Suspension (Y page 171)
?
Permanent activation of manual gearshift-
ing (Y page 141)
When you press buttons : - ? the corre-
sponding setting is selected. The DYNAMIC
SELECT controller setting is overwritten.
These settings will also be maintained if you
switch to drive program RACE, S+, S or C with
the DYNAMIC SELECT controller.
If you switch to drive program I, all stored
characteristics will be accepted. This is also
the case if you have previously pressed but-
tons : - ?.
Automatic transmission
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If the engine speed is above the idling speed
and you engage transmission position 7
or C, the vehicle could pull away sud-
denly. There is a risk of an accident.
When engaging transmission position 7
or C, always firmly depress the brake
pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate.
G
WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to neu-
tral position N when you switch off the
engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a
risk of an accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch
to parking position P. Prevent the parked
vehicle from rolling away by applying the
parking brake.
Selector lever
Overview of transmission positions
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles)
!
If the engine speed is too high or the vehi-
cle is in motion, do not shift the automatic
transmission directly from h to k, from
k to h or directly to j.
Do not open the driver's door while the vehi-
cle is in motion. At low speeds in transmis-
sion position h or k, otherwise park posi-
tion j is engaged automatically.
The transmission could be damaged.
134
Automatic transmission
Driving and parking
j
Park position
k
Reverse gear
i
Neutral
h
Drive
The selector lever always returns to its original
position. The current transmission position j,
k, i or h is shown in the transmission
position display in the multifunction display.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
!
If the engine speed is too high or the vehi-
cle is in motion, do not shift the automatic
transmission directly from h to k, from
k to h or directly to j.
Do not open the driver's door while the vehi-
cle is in motion. At low speeds in transmis-
sion position h or k, otherwise park posi-
tion j is engaged automatically.
The transmission could be damaged.
j
Park position
k
Reverse gear
i
Neutral
h
Drive
The selector lever always returns to its original
position. The current transmission position j,
k, i or h is shown in the transmission
position display in the multifunction display.
Transmission position and drive pro-
gram display
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles)
:
Transmission position
;
Gear
=
Drive program
The current transmission position and drive
program appear in the multifunction display.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
:
Transmission position
;
Drive program
The current transmission position and drive
program appear in the multifunction display.
In addition to drive program ; being shown in
the multifunction display, the currently selec-
ted drive program is indicated in red on the
DYNAMIC SELECT controller (Y page 133).
Automatic transmission
135
Driving and parking
Z
Engaging park position P
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles)
X
When the vehicle is stationary, depress the
brake pedal.
X
Press button :.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
X
When the vehicle is stationary, depress the
brake pedal.
X
Press button :.
Engaging park position P automati-
cally
Park position j is automatically engaged if:
R
you switch off the engine using the Smart-
Key and remove the SmartKey
R
you switch off the engine using the Smart-
Key or using the Start/Stop button and
open the driver's door or front-passenger
door
R
you open the driver's door when the vehicle
is stationary or when driving at a very low
speed and the transmission is in position h
or k
Under certain conditions, the automatic trans-
mission shifts automatically to transmission
position j if the HOLD function or Active Dis-
tance Assist DISTRONIC is activated. Observe
the information on the HOLD function
(Y page 165) and on Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC (Y page 159).
Engaging reverse gear R
!
Only move the automatic transmission to
k when the vehicle is stationary.
X
Depress the brake and keep it pressed.
X
Push the selector lever forwards past the
first point of resistance.
The ECO start/stop function is not available
when reverse gear is engaged. Further infor-
mation on the ECO start/stop function
(Y page 129).
Shifting to neutral N
G
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could:
R
operate the vehicle's equipment
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
R
release the parking brake
R
shift the automatic transmission out of
park position j
R
start the engine
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Never leave children or animals unattended
in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This
also applies for the Digital Vehicle Key if the
"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via
Mercedes me connect.
X
When the vehicle is stationary, depress the
brake pedal.
X
Push the selector lever forwards or back to
the first point of resistance.
If you switch the engine off with the transmis-
sion in position k or h, the automatic trans-
mission shifts to i automatically.
136
Automatic transmission
Driving and parking
With the SmartKey: if you then open the driv-
er's door or the front-passenger door or
remove the SmartKey from the ignition, the
automatic transmission shifts to j automati-
cally.
With KEYLESS-GO: if you then open the driv-
er's or front-passenger door, the automatic
transmission shifts to j automatically.
If you want the automatic transmission to
remain in neutral i, e.g. when having the
vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with
a towing system:
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the
Start/Stop button from the ignition lock.
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
X
All vehicles: switch the ignition on.
X
Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
X
Shift to neutral i.
X
Release the brake pedal.
X
Release the electric parking brake.
X
Switch off the ignition and leave the Smart-
Key in the ignition lock.
Engaging drive position D
X
When the vehicle is stationary, depress the
brake pedal.
X
Push the selector lever back past the first
point of resistance.
Transmission positions
B
Park position
This prevents the vehicle from roll-
ing away when stopped.
Only shift the transmission into
position B (Y page 134) when
the vehicle is stationary. The park-
ing lock should not be used as a
brake when parking. Always apply
the electronic parking brake in addi-
tion to the parking lock in order to
secure the vehicle.
If the SmartKey is removed from the
ignition lock, the transmission is
locked.
The automatic transmission shifts
to B automatically:
R
when the SmartKey is removed
from the ignition lock
R
when the engine is switched off
with the transmission in position
C or 7 and one of the
doors is opened
In the event of a malfunction of the
vehicle's electronics, the transmis-
sion may lock in position B.
Have the vehicle electronics
checked immediately at a qualified
specialist workshop.
C
Reverse gear
Only shift the transmission into
position C when the vehicle is
stationary.
Automatic transmission
137
Driving and parking
Z
A
Neutral
Do not shift the transmission to
A while driving. The automatic
transmission could otherwise be
damaged.
No power is transmitted from the
engine to the drive wheels.
Releasing the brake pedal will allow
you to move the vehicle freely, e.g.
to push it or tow it.
If ESP
®
is deactivated or faulty: shift
the transmission to position A if
the vehicle is in danger of skidding,
e.g. on icy roads.
!
Coasting in neutral i may
cause damage to the drive train.
7
Drive
The automatic transmission
changes gear automatically. All
forward gears are available.
Driving tips
Changing gear
The automatic transmission shifts through the
individual gears automatically when it is in
transmission position h. This automatic gear
shifting behavior is determined by:
R
the selected drive program
R
the position of the accelerator pedal
R
the road speed
Accelerator pedal position
Your style of driving influences how the auto-
matic transmission shifts gear:
R
little throttle: early upshifts
R
more throttle: late upshifts
Kickdown
Use kickdown for maximum acceleration.
X
Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts to a lower
gear depending on the engine speed.
X
Ease off the accelerator pedal once the
desired speed is reached.
The automatic transmission shifts back up.
Drive programs
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG
vehicles)
Drive program C (Comfort)
Drive program C is characterized by the follow-
ing:
R
the vehicle pulls away more gently in
forward and reverse gears, unless the accel-
erator pedal is depressed fully.
R
low fuel consumption resulting from the
automatic transmission shifting up sooner.
The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed
range and the wheels are less likely to spin.
R
the suspension exhibits comfortable damp-
ing settings.
R
the steering exhibits comfortable steering
characteristics.
R
ESP
®
provides the optimum compromise
between traction and stability. Further infor-
mation about ESP
®
(Y page 66).
i
Select this drive program for difficult road
conditions, e. g. snow and ice or wet road
surfaces.
Drive program S (Sport)
Drive program S is characterized by the follow-
ing:
R
the vehicle exhibits sporty driving character-
istics.
R
the vehicle pulls away in first gear.
R
the automatic transmission shifts up later.
The fuel consumption possibly being higher
as a result of the later automatic transmis-
sion shift points.
R
the suspension exhibits firm damping set-
tings.
138
Automatic transmission
Driving and parking
R
the steering exhibits sporty steering charac-
teristics.
R
ESP
®
provides the optimum compromise
between traction and stability. Further infor-
mation about ESP
®
(Y page 66).
Drive program S+ (Sport Plus)
Drive program S+ is characterized by the fol-
lowing:
R
the vehicle exhibits particularly sporty driv-
ing characteristics.
R
the vehicle pulls away in first gear.
R
the automatic transmission shifts up later.
The fuel consumption possibly being higher
as a result of the later automatic transmis-
sion shift points.
R
the suspension exhibits particularly firm
damping settings (vehicles with adaptive
damping system).
R
the suspension exhibits firm damping set-
tings (vehicles with Active Body Control).
R
the steering exhibits sporty steering charac-
teristics.
R
ESP
®
emphasizes the vehicle's own over-
steering and understeering characteristics.
This enables a more active driving style. This
drive program requires increased driver
interaction. Further information about ESP
®
(Y page 66).
i
Only select this drive program if the road
conditions are good, e.g. the road is dry and
the route ahead is clearly visible.
Drive program I (Individual)
In drive program I the following properties of
the drive program can be selected:
R
the drive (engine and transmission manage-
ment)
R
the suspension
R
the steering
R
the control thresholds of ESP
®
Information about configuring drive program I
with the multimedia system can be found in
the Digital Operator's Manual.
Vehicles with adaptive damping system:
drive program E (Economy)
Drive program E is characterized by the follow-
ing:
R
the vehicle exhibits comfortable, economical
handling characteristics.
R
the vehicle pulls away more gently in
forward and reverse gears, unless the accel-
erator pedal is depressed fully.
R
optimal fuel consumption resulting from the
automatic transmission shifting up sooner.
The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed
range and the wheels are less likely to spin.
R
the suspension exhibits comfortable damp-
ing settings.
R
the steering exhibits comfortable steering
characteristics.
R
during deceleration, the engine is discon-
nected from the drive train. The vehicle uses
kinetic energy and consumes less fuel
(coasting mode).
R
ESP
®
provides the optimum compromise
between traction and stability. Further infor-
mation about ESP
®
(Y page 66).
Vehicles with Active Body Control:
CURVE drive program
The CURVE drive program is characterized by
the following:
R
increased driving comfort on bends.
R
the vehicle tilts actively into the bend. Fur-
ther information on the curve tilting function
(Y page 169).
R
the vehicle exhibits comfortable, economical
handling characteristics.
R
the vehicle pulls away more gently in
forward and reverse gears, unless the accel-
erator pedal is depressed fully.
R
comfortable suspension setting.
R
the steering exhibits comfortable steering
characteristics.
R
optimal fuel consumption resulting from the
automatic transmission shifting up sooner.
R
the automatic transmission shifting up
sooner. This results in the vehicle being
driven at lower engine speeds and the
wheels being less likely to spin.
R
during deceleration, the engine is discon-
nected from the drive train. The vehicle uses
Automatic transmission
139
Driving and parking
Z
kinetic energy and consumes less fuel
(coasting mode).
R
ESP
®
provides the optimum compromise
between traction and stability. Further infor-
mation about ESP
®
(Y page 66).
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
RACE drive program
i
The RACE drive program may not be used
on normal roads. RACE must only be activa-
ted and used on dedicated race circuits, not
on public roads.
The RACE drive program is characterized by
the following:
R
the vehicle exhibits driving characteristics
suitable for the racetrack.
R
all vehicle systems are set for maximum
sportiness.
R
the gearshift recommendation gives you
information for slowly warming up the drive
assemblies and for adopting a fuel-efficient
driving style (Y page 141). You can follow
the gearshift recommendations at all times
and shift gear accordingly using the steering
wheel paddle shifters. On the basis of the
gearshift recommendation, using the steer-
ing wheel paddle shifters, you can optimize
the drive train and engine operating mode at
any time.
R
if you have selected a gear manually, this
will be maintained until the vehicle speed
increases or decreases dramatically.
R
the vehicle pulls away in first gear.
R
the automatic transmission shifts up later.
The fuel consumption possibly being higher
as a result of the later automatic transmis-
sion shift points.
R
the suspension exhibits particularly firm
damping settings.
R
gliding mode is not available.
R
the ECO start/stop function is not available.
R
ESP
®
switches to SPORT handling mode.
The M SPORT handling mode warning
lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The
SPORT Handling Mode
SPORT Handling Mode message appears in
the multifunction display. Observe the
important safety notes for the SPORT han-
dling mode (Y page 68).
R
ESP
®
only improves driving stability to a
limited degree. The engine's torque is only
restricted to a limited degree and the drive
wheels can spin. Further information about
ESP
®
(Y page 68).
Drive program S+ (Sport Plus)
Drive program S+ is characterized by the fol-
lowing:
R
the vehicle exhibits particularly sporty driv-
ing characteristics.
R
the vehicle pulls away in first gear.
R
the automatic transmission shifts up later.
The fuel consumption possibly being higher
as a result of the later automatic transmis-
sion shift points.
R
the suspension exhibits particularly firm
damping settings.
R
gliding mode is not available.
R
the ECO start/stop function is not available.
R
ESP
®
provides the optimum compromise
between traction and stability. Further infor-
mation about ESP
®
(Y page 66).
Drive program S (Sport)
Drive program S is characterized by the follow-
ing:
R
the vehicle exhibits sporty driving character-
istics.
R
the vehicle pulls away in first gear.
R
the automatic transmission shifts up later.
The fuel consumption possibly being higher
as a result of the later automatic transmis-
sion shift points.
R
the suspension exhibits particularly firm
damping settings.
R
gliding mode is not available.
R
the ECO start/stop function is not available.
R
ESP
®
provides the optimum compromise
between traction and stability. Further infor-
mation about ESP
®
(Y page 66).
Drive program C (Comfort)
Drive program C is characterized by the follow-
ing:
R
the vehicle delivers comfortable, economical
handling characteristics.
R
the vehicle pulls away more gently in
forward and reverse gears, unless the accel-
erator pedal is depressed fully.
R
the vehicle has improved driving stability,
for example on slippery road surfaces.
140
Automatic transmission
Driving and parking
R
optimal fuel consumption resulting from the
automatic transmission shifting up sooner.
The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed
range and the wheels are less likely to spin.
R
gliding mode is available.
R
the ECO start/stop function is available.
R
ESP
®
provides the optimum compromise
between traction and stability. Further infor-
mation about ESP
®
(Y page 66).
Drive program I (Individual)
In drive program I the following properties of
the drive program can be selected:
R
the drive (engine management)
R
the transmission management
R
ESP
®
R
the suspension
Information about configuring drive program I
with the multimedia system can be found in
the Digital Operator's Manual.
i
To permanently select the gears in drive
program I using the steering wheel paddle
shifters, select the M (manual) setting for
the transmission.
Manual gear shifting
General notes
You can change gear yourself using the steer-
ing wheel paddle shifters. The transmission
must be in position h to do this.
Depending on which steering wheel paddle
shifter is pulled, the automatic transmission
immediately shifts into the next gear down or
up, if permitted.
To use manual shifting, you have two options:
R
temporary setting
R
permanent setting
If you activate manual gearshifting, the multi-
function display will show the current gear
instead of transmission position h.
If manual gearshifting is deactivated, the gears
will be selected automatically.
Temporary setting
X
To activate: shift the selector lever to h.
X
Pull steering wheel paddle shifter : or ;.
The temporary setting is active for a certain
amount of time. Under certain conditions, the
minimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in
the case of lateral acceleration, during overrun
mode or when driving on steep terrain.
X
To deactivate: pull steering wheel paddle
shifter ; and hold it in place.
or
X
Use the lever to switch the transmission
position.
or
X
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles): use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to
change the drive program.
X
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: use the
DYNAMIC SELECT controller to change the
drive program.
Permanent setting
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles)
Automatic transmission
141
Driving and parking
Z
X
To activate: shift the selector lever to h.
X
Press button :.
X
To deactivate: press button :.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
X
To activate: shift the selector lever to h.
X
Press button :.
X
To deactivate: press button :.
or
X
If position D (automatic transmission) is
selected for the transmission in drive pro-
gram I: shift to drive program I with the
DYNAMIC SELECT controller.
Shifting gears
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles)
X
To shift up: pull steering wheel paddle
shifter ;.
The automatic transmission shifts up to the
next gear.
If the maximum engine speed in the cur-
rently engaged gear is reached and you con-
tinue to accelerate, the automatic transmis-
sion automatically shifts up in order to pre-
vent engine damage.
X
To shift down: pull steering wheel paddle
shifter :.
The automatic transmission shifts down to
the next gear.
Automatic down shifting occurs when coast-
ing.
If the engine were to exceed the maximum
engine speed when shifting down, the auto-
matic transmission protects against engine
damage by not shifting down.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
!
If manual gearshifting is permanently acti-
vated, the automatic transmission does not
shift up automatically even when the engine
limiting speed for the current gear is
reached. When the engine limiting speed is
reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent
the engine from overrevving. Always make
sure that the engine speed does not reach
the red area of the tachometer. There is oth-
erwise a risk of engine damage.
X
To shift up: pull steering wheel paddle
shifter ;.
The automatic transmission shifts up to the
next gear.
X
To shift down: pull steering wheel paddle
shifter :.
The automatic transmission shifts down to
the next gear.
Automatic down shifting occurs when coast-
ing.
If the engine were to exceed the maximum
engine speed when shifting down, the auto-
matic transmission protects against engine
damage by not shifting down.
142
Automatic transmission
Driving and parking
Shift recommendation
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles)
The gearshift recommendations assist you in
adopting an economical driving style. The rec-
ommended gear is shown in the multifunction
display.
X
Shift to recommended gear ; according to
gearshift recommendation : when shown
in the multifunction display of the instru-
ment cluster.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
The gearshift recommendations assist you in
adopting an economical driving style. The rec-
ommended gear is shown in the multifunction
display.
X
Shift to recommended gear ; according to
gearshift recommendation : when shown
in the multifunction display of the instru-
ment cluster.
Upshifting (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
!
If manual gearshifting is permanently acti-
vated, the automatic transmission does not
shift up automatically even when the engine
limiting speed for the current gear is
reached. When the engine limiting speed is
reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent
the engine from overrevving. Always make
sure that the engine speed does not reach
the red area of the tachometer. There is oth-
erwise a risk of engine damage.
:
Gear indicator
;
Upshift indicator
Before the engine speed reaches the red area,
an upshift indicator will be shown in the multi-
function display.
X
When the UPUP message appears in the multi-
function display, pull on the right-hand
steering wheel paddle shifter.
Kickdown
X
For maximum acceleration, depress the
accelerator pedal beyond the pressure
point.
The automatic transmission shifts to a lower
gear depending on the engine speed.
X
Shift back up once the desired speed is
reached.
During kickdown, you cannot shift gears using
the steering wheel paddle shifters.
If you apply full throttle, the automatic trans-
mission shifts up to the next gear when the
maximum engine speed is reached. This pre-
vents the engine from overrevving.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: kickdown is only
possible in the temporary setting.
Automatic transmission
143
Driving and parking
Z
Problems with the transmission
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The transmission has
problems shifting gear.
The transmission is losing oil.
X
Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
The acceleration ability
is deteriorating.
The transmission no
longer changes gear.
The transmission is in emergency mode.
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): it is only partly
possible to engage the gears, or the transmission is in position i.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: it is only possible to shift into second
gear and reverse gear.
X
Stop the vehicle.
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.
X
Shift the transmission to position h or k.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: if h is selected, the transmission
shifts to second gear if k is selected, the transmission shifts
into reverse gear.
X
Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
Refueling
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. Risk of fire and
explosion by improper handling of fuel.
You must avoid fire, open flames, smoking
and creating sparks. Switch off the ignition
before refueling and, if present, switch off
the auxiliary heating.
G
WARNING
Fuels are toxic and harmful to health. There
is a risk of injury.
You must avoid fuels coming into contact
with skin, eyes and clothes or being swal-
lowed.
Do not inhale the fuel vapors. Keep children
away from fuels.
Keep doors and windows closed during the
refueling process.
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
observe the following points:
R
Immediately rinse the fuel off your skin
with soap and water.
R
If you get fuel into your eyes, immediately
rinse your eyes throughly with clean
water. Seek medical attention immedi-
ately.
R
Seek medical attention immediately if fuel
has been swallowed. Do not induce vomit-
ing.
R
Immediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with fuel.
G
WARNING
Electrostatic charging can lead to the crea-
tion of sparks and ignite fuel vapor. There is
a risk of fire and explosion.
Touch the metallic body of the vehicle
before you open the fuel filler cap or handle
the pump nozzle. Any possible electrostatic
charge present will in this way be depleted.
144
Refueling
Driving and parking
Do not get into the vehicle again during the
refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic
charge could build up again.
Do not get into the vehicle again during the
refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic
charge could build up again.
!
Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
gasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni-
tion if you accidentally refuel with the wrong
fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel
system. Even small amounts of the wrong
fuel could result in damage to the fuel sys-
tem and the engine. Notify a qualified spe-
cialist workshop and have the fuel tank and
fuel lines drained completely.
!
Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the
fuel system.
!
Take care not to spill any fuel on painted
surfaces. You could otherwise damage the
paintwork.
!
Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel
can. The fuel lines and/or the fuel injection
system could otherwise be blocked by parti-
cles from the fuel can.
If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray
out when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.
For further information on fuel and fuel quality
(Y page 322).
Refueling
General information
The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked auto-
matically when you unlock or lock the vehicle
with the SmartKey or using KEYLESS-GO.
The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed
8 in the instrument cluster. The arrow next
to the filling pump indicates the side of the
vehicle.
On the inside of the fuel filler cap, you will find
information on the recommended fuel.
Opening the fuel filler flap
:
To open the fuel filler flap
;
To insert the fuel filler cap
=
Tire pressure table
?
Instruction label for fuel type to be refu-
eled
X
Switch the engine off.
X
Remove the SmartKey from the ignition
lock.
X
Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of
arrow :.
The fuel filler flap swings up.
X
Turn the fuel filler cap counter-clockwise
and remove it.
X
Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder
bracket on the inside of fuel filler flap ;.
X
Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel
pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place
and refuel.
X
Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle
switches off.
i
Do not add any more fuel after the pump
stops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel
may leak out.
Refueling
145
Driving and parking
Z
Closing the fuel filler flap
X
Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn
clockwise until it engages audibly.
X
Close the fuel filler flap.
i
Close the fuel filler flap before locking the
vehicle.
i
If you are driving with the fuel filler cap
open, the 8 reserve fuel warning lamp
flashes. The ; Check Engine warning
lamp may also light up. A message appears
in the multifunction display (Y page 221).
For further information on warning and indi-
cator lamps in the instrument cluster, see
(Y page 239).
Problems with fuel and the fuel tank
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Fuel is leaking from the
vehicle.
The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.
G
WARNING
Risk of explosion or fire.
X
Turn the SmartKey immediately to position u in the ignition lock
(Y page 126) and remove it.
X
Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The fuel filler flap can-
not be opened.
The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.
X
Unlock the vehicle (Y page 74).
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X
Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 76).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jam-
med.
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Parking
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite if they come into contact
with hot parts of the exhaust system or
exhaust gas flow. There is a risk of fire.
Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-
rials come into contact with parts of the
vehicle which are hot. Take particular care
not to park on dry grassland or harvested
grain fields.
G
WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for
example:
R
release the parking brake.
R
shift the automatic transmission out of
the parking position P.
R
start the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
146
Parking
Driving and parking
Never leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle.
!
Always secure the vehicle correctly against
rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its
drivetrain could be damaged.
To ensure that the vehicle is secured against
rolling away unintentionally:
R
the electric parking brake must be applied.
R
the transmission must be in position j.
R
the SmartKey must be removed from the
ignition lock.
R
the front wheels must be turned towards the
curb on steep uphill or downhill gradients.
Switching off the engine
G
WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to neu-
tral position N when you switch off the
engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a
risk of an accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch
to parking position P. Prevent the parked
vehicle from rolling away by applying the
parking brake.
X
Apply the electric parking brake.
X
Shift the transmission to position j
(Y page 136).
X
With the SmartKey : turn the SmartKey to
position u in the ignition lock and remove
it.
The immobilizer is activated.
X
With KEYLESS-GO: press the KEYLESS-GO
Start/Stop button (Y page 126).
The engine stops and all the indicator lamps
in the instrument cluster go out.
If the driver's door is closed, this is the
same as SmartKey position 1. If the driv-
er's door is open, this is the same as Smart-
Key position u (Y page 126).
The engine can be switched off while the vehi-
cle is in motion by pressing and holding the
Start/Stop button for about three seconds.
This function operates independently of the
ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-off
function.
Electric parking brake
General notes
G
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could:
R
open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users
R
get out and be struck by oncoming traffic
R
operate the vehicle's equipment
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
R
release the parking brake
R
shift the automatic transmission out of
park position j or shift the manual
transmission to neutral
R
start the engine
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This
also applies for the digital vehicle key if the
"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via
Mercedes me connect.
Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of
children. This also applies for the Digital
Vehicle Key if the "Digital Vehicle Key" func-
tion is activated via Mercedes me connect.
The function of the electric parking brake is
dependent on the on-board voltage. If the on-
board voltage is low or there is a malfunction
in the system, it may not be possible to apply
the released parking brake.
X
If this is the case, only park the vehicle on
level ground and secure it to prevent it roll-
ing away.
X
Shift the automatic transmission to position
j.
It may not be possible to release an applied
parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or
there is a malfunction in the system. Contact a
qualified specialist workshop.
The electric parking brake performs a function
test at regular intervals while the engine is
switched off. The sounds that can be heard
while this is occurring are normal.
Parking
147
Driving and parking
Z
Applying or releasing manually
X
To apply: push handle :.
When the electric parking brake is applied,
the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
only) indicator lamp lights up in the instru-
ment cluster.
The electric parking brake can also be
applied when the SmartKey is removed.
X
To release: pull handle :.
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
only) indicator lamp in the instrument clus-
ter goes out.
The electric parking brake can only be
released:
R
when the SmartKey is in position 1 in the
ignition lock (Y page 126) or
R
if the ignition was switched on using the
Start/Stop button
Applying automatically
The electric parking brake is automatically
applied when the transmission is in position
j and:
R
the engine is switched off or
R
the driver is not wearing a seat belt and the
driver's door is opened
To prevent the electric parking brake from
being automatically applied, pull handle :.
The electric parking brake is also applied auto-
matically if:
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brings
the vehicle to a standstill or
R
the HOLD function is keeping the vehicle
stationary
In addition, at least one of the following condi-
tions must be fulfilled:
R
the engine is switched off
R
the driver is not wearing a seat belt and the
driver's door is opened
R
there is a system malfunction
R
the power supply is insufficient
R
the vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
lights up.
The electric parking brake is not automatically
applied if the engine is switched off by the
ECO start/stop function.
Releasing automatically
The electric parking brake is released auto-
matically when all of the following conditions
are fulfilled:
R
the engine is running
R
The seat belt tongue is engaged in the belt
buckle
R
the transmission is in position h or k and
you depress the accelerator pedal or shift
from position j to h or k
R
if the transmission is in position k, the
trunk lid must be closed
If the seat belt tongue is not engaged in the
seat belt buckle, the following conditions must
be fulfilled:
R
the driver's door is closed
R
you move the transmission out of position
j or you have previously driven at a speed
above 2 mph (3 km/h)
R
if the transmission is in position k, the
trunk lid must be closed
When the electric parking brake is released,
the ! indicator lamp goes out in the instru-
ment cluster.
Emergency braking
The vehicle can also be braked during an
emergency by using the electric parking brake.
X
While driving, push handle : of the electric
parking brake.
The vehicle is braked for as long as the han-
dle of the electric parking brake is pressed.
The longer the electric parking brake handle
is depressed, the greater the braking force.
148
Parking
Driving and parking
During braking:
R
a warning tone sounds
R
the Release Parking BrakeRelease Parking Brake message
appears
R
the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
only) indicator lamp in the instrument clus-
ter flashes
When the vehicle has been braked to a stand-
still, the electric parking brake is applied.
Parking the vehicle for a long period
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than
four weeks, the battery may be damaged by
exhaustive discharging.
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than
six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a
result of lack of use.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop and
seek advice.
i
You can obtain information about trickle
chargers from a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Driving tips
General notes
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could
affect, for example, the power steering and
the brake boosting effect. You will require
considerably more effort to steer and brake.
There is a risk of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
G
WARNING
If you operate mobile communication equip-
ment when driving, you may be distracted
from the traffic situation. You could also
lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of
an accident.
Only operate this equipment when the vehi-
cle is stationary.
Observe the legal requirements for the country
in which you are driving. Some jurisdictions
prohibit the driver from using a mobile phone
while driving a vehicle.
If you make a call while driving, always use
hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone
when the traffic situation permits. If you are
unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop
before operating the telephone.
Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a
distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per
second.
Drive sensibly – save fuel
Observe the following tips to save fuel:
R
The tires should always be inflated to the
recommended tire pressure.
R
Remove unnecessary loads.
R
Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.
R
Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.
R
Observe the service intervals in the Mainte-
nance Booklet or in the service interval dis-
play. Have all the maintenance work carried
in accordance with Daimler AG regulations.
Fuel consumption also increases when driving
in cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly
terrain.
Drinking and driving
G
WARNING
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs
and driving are very dangerous combina-
tions. Even a small amount of alcohol or
drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions
and judgment.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal
accident is greatly increased when you drink
or take drugs and drive.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive who has been drinking or
taking drugs.
Driving tips
149
Driving and parking
Z
Emission control
G
DANGER
Combustion engines emit poisonous
exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide.
Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to
health and can result in poisoning. There is a
risk of fatal injury. Therefore, never leave the
engine running an enclosed space without
adequate ventilation.
Certain engine systems are designed to keep
the level of poisonous components in exhaust
fumes within legal limits.
These systems only work at peak efficiency if
they are serviced exactly in accordance with
the manufacturer's specifications. Always have
work on the engine carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you use an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center for this purpose. In particular,
work relevant to safety or on safety-related
systems must be carried out at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
The engine settings must not be changed
under any circumstances. Furthermore, all
specific service work must be carried out at
regular intervals and in accordance with the
Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details
can be found in the Maintenance Booklet.
ECO display
The ECO display shows you how economical
your driving style is. The ECO display assists
you in achieving the most economical driving
style for the selected settings and prevailing
conditions. Your driving style can significantly
influence the vehicle's consumption.
:
Acceleration
;
Coasting
=
Constant
?
Additional range achieved
Range ? is shown under Bonus fr. Start
Bonus fr. Start
and represents the additional range achieved
since the beginning of the journey as a result
of an adapted driving style.
If the fuel level has dropped into the reserve
range, the Fuel Low
Fuel Low message is shown in the
multifunction display instead of range ?. The
8 warning lamp in the instrument cluster
also lights up (Y page 239).
The ECO display consists of three sections,
with an inner and outer area. The sections cor-
respond to the following three categories:
:
Acceleration (evaluation of all
acceleration processes):
R
the outer area fills up and the
inner area lights up green: moder-
ate acceleration, especially at
higher speeds
R
the outer area empties and the
inner area is gray: sporty acceler-
ation
;
Coasting (evaluation of all deceler-
ation processes):
R
the outer area fills up and the
inner area lights up green: antici-
patory driving, keeping your dis-
tance and early release of the
accelerator. The vehicle can
coast without use of the brakes.
R
the outer area empties and the
inner area is gray: frequent heavy
braking
=
Constant (continuous evaluation
over the entire journey):
R
the outer area fills up and the
inner area lights up green: con-
stant speed and avoidance of
unnecessary acceleration and
deceleration
R
the outer area empties and the
inner area is gray: fluctuations in
speed
The three inner areas display the current driv-
ing style and light up green as a result of a par-
ticularly economical driving style. Depending
on the driving situation, up to two areas may
light up simultaneously.
At the beginning of the journey, the three
outer areas are empty and fill up as a result of
150
Driving tips
Driving and parking
economical driving. A higher level indicates a
more economical driving style. If the three
outer areas are completely filled at the same
time, the driver has adopted the most eco-
nomical driving style for the selected settings
and prevailing conditions. The ECO display
border lights up.
The ECO display does not indicate the actual
fuel consumption. The additionally achieved
range displayed under Bonus fr. startBonus fr. start does
not indicate a fixed consumption reduction.
In addition to driving style, the actual con-
sumption is affected by other factors, such as:
R
load
R
tire pressure
R
cold start
R
choice of route
R
active electrical consumers
These factors are not included in the ECO dis-
play.
An economical driving style specially requires
driving at moderate engine speeds.
Achieving a higher value in the categories
"Acceleration" and "Constant":
R
observe the gearshift recommendations.
R
drive the vehicle in drive program C or E.
In urban traffic and stop-start traffic, drive pro-
gram C is recommended.
On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on
the highway, only the outer area for "constant"
will change.
The ECO display summarizes the driving style
from the start of the journey to its completion.
Therefore, there are more marked changes in
the outer areas at the start of a journey. On
longer journeys, there are fewer changes. For
more marked changes, perform a manual rest
(Y page 194).
Further information on the ECO display
(Y page 193).
Braking
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you shift down on a slippery road surface
in an attempt to increase the engine's brak-
ing effect, the drive wheels could lose their
grip. There is an increased danger of skid-
ding and accidents.
Do not shift down for additional engine brak-
ing on a slippery road surface.
Downhill gradients
!
On long, steep gradients, you must reduce
the load on the brakes. To use engine brak-
ing, shift to a lower gear in good time. This
helps you to avoid overheating the brakes
and wearing them out excessively.
When making use of the engine braking
effect, it is possible that a drive wheel may
not turn for some time, e.g. in the case of
suddenly changing or slippery road surface
conditions. This could cause damage to the
drive train. This type of damage is not cov-
ered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty.
Change into a lower gear in good time on long
and steep downhill gradients. This is especially
important if the vehicle is laden.
This also applies if you have activated cruise
control or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC.
Heavy and light loads
G
WARNING
If you rest your foot on the brake pedal
while driving, the braking system can over-
heat. This increases the stopping distance
and can even cause the braking system to
fail. There is a risk of an accident.
Never use the brake pedal as a footrest.
Never depress the brake pedal and the
accelerator pedal at the same time.
!
Depressing the brake pedal constantly
results in excessive and premature wear to
the brake pads.
If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy
load, do not stop the vehicle immediately, but
drive on for a short while. This allows the air-
flow to cool the brakes more quickly.
Wet roads
If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain
without braking, there may be a delayed reac-
tion from the brakes when braking for the first
Driving tips
151
Driving and parking
Z
time. This may also occur after the vehicle has
been washed or driven through deep water.
You then have to depress the brake pedal
more firmly. Maintain a greater distance from
the vehicle in front.
After driving on a wet road or having the vehi-
cle washed, brake firmly while paying attention
to the traffic conditions. This will warm up the
brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly
and protecting them against corrosion.
Limited braking performance on salt-
treated roads
If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt resi-
due may form on the brake discs and brake
pads. This can result in a significantly longer
braking distance.
R
In order to prevent any salt build-up, apply
the brakes occasionally while paying atten-
tion to the traffic conditions.
R
Carefully depress the brake pedal and the
beginning and end of a journey.
R
Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle
ahead.
Servicing the brakes
!
The brake fluid level may be too low, if:
R
if the red brake warning lamp lights up in
the instrument cluster and
R
you hear a warning tone while the engine
is running
Observe additional warning messages in the
multifunction display.
The brake fluid level may be too low due to
brake pad wear or leaking brake lines.
Have the brake system checked immedi-
ately. Consult a qualified specialist work-
shop to arrange this.
!
As the ESP
®
system operates automati-
cally, the engine and the ignition must be
switched off (the SmartKey must be in posi-
tion u or 1 in the ignition lock or the
Start/Stop button must be in position u or
1), if:
R
the parking brake is tested using a brake
dynamometer.
R
the vehicle is towed with the front axle
raised.
Braking triggered automatically by ESP
®
may cause severe damage to the brake sys-
tem.
All checks and maintenance work on the brake
system must be carried out at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Have brake pads installed and brake fluid
replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
If the brake system has only been subject to
moderate loads, you should test the function-
ality of your brakes at regular intervals.
Information on BAS (Brake Assist) (Y page 61)
and on Brake Assist with Cross-Traffic Assist
(Y page 61).
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only
have brake pads/linings installed on your vehi-
cle which have been approved for Mercedes-
Benz vehicles or which correspond to an
equivalent quality standard. Brake pads/
linings which have not been approved for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are not of an
equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's
operating safety.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use
brake fluid that has been specially approved
for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which
corresponds to an equivalent quality standard.
Brake fluid which has not been approved for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which is not of an
equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's
operating safety.
High-performance and ceramic brake
system (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
The AMG brake systems are designed for
heavy loads. This may lead to noise when
braking. This will depend on:
R
Speed
R
Braking force
R
Ambient conditions, e.g. temperature and
humidity
The wear of individual components of the
brake system, such as the brake pads/linings
or brake discs, depends on the individual driv-
ing style and operating conditions.
For this reason, it is impossible to state a mile-
age that will be valid under all circumstances.
An aggressive driving style will lead to high
wear. You can obtain more information on this
from a qualified specialist workshop.
152
Driving tips
Driving and parking
New and replaced brake pads and discs only
reach their optimum braking effect after sev-
eral hundred kilometers of driving. Compen-
sate for this by applying greater force to the
brake pedal. Keep this in mind, and adapt your
driving and braking accordingly during this
break-in period.
Excessive heavy braking results in correspond-
ingly high brake wear. Observe the brake sys-
tem warning lamp in the instrument cluster
and note any brake status messages in the
multifunction display. Especially for high per-
formance driving, it is important to maintain
and have the brake system checked regularly.
Driving on wet roads
Hydroplaning
If water has accumulated to a certain depth on
the road surface, there is a danger of hydro-
planing occurring.
For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in
conditions in which hydroplaning may occur,
you must drive in the following manner:
R
lower your speed
R
avoid ruts
R
avoid sudden steering movements
R
brake carefully
Driving on flooded roads
!
Do not drive through flooded areas. Check
the depth of any water before driving
through it. Drive slowly through standing
water. Otherwise, water could enter the
vehicle interior or engine compartment. It
can then damage the engine's or automatic
transmission's electronic components. It
can also be sucked in by the engine's air
intake connection and cause engine dam-
age.
Winter driving
G
WARNING
If you shift down on a slippery road surface
in an attempt to increase the engine's brak-
ing effect, the drive wheels could lose their
grip. There is an increased danger of skid-
ding and accidents.
Do not shift down for additional engine brak-
ing on a slippery road surface.
G
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate
ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases
such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter
the vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehi-
cle becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk
of fatal injury.
If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heat-
ing running, make sure the exhaust pipe and
area around the vehicle are clear of snow.
To ensure an adequate supply of fresh air,
open a window on the side of the vehicle
that is not facing into the wind.
Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified
specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
Drive particularly carefully on slippery road
surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering
and braking maneuvers. Do not use cruise
control.
If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be
stopped when moving at low speed:
X
Shift the transmission to position i.
The outside temperature indicator is not
designed to serve as an ice-warning device
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Changes in the outside temperature are dis-
played after a short delay.
Indicated temperatures just above the freezing
point do not guarantee that the road surface is
free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially
in wooded areas or on bridges. The vehicle
could skid if you fail to adapt your driving
style. Always adapt your driving style and drive
at a speed to suit the prevailing weather condi-
tions.
You should pay special attention to road con-
ditions when temperatures are around freezing
point.
For more information on driving with snow
chains, see (Y page 295).
For more information on driving with summer
tires, see (Y page 295).
Driving tips
153
Driving and parking
Z
Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"
section (Y page 295).
Driving systems
Cruise control
General notes
Cruise control maintains a constant road
speed for you. It brakes automatically in order
to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and
steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehi-
cle is laden, you must select a lower gear in
good time. By doing so, you will make use of
the braking effect of the engine. This relieves
the load on the brake system and prevents the
brakes from overheating and wearing too
quickly.
Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-
ditions make it appropriate to maintain a
steady speed for a prolonged period. You can
store any road speed above 20 mph
(30 km/h).
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise
control can neither reduce the risk of an acci-
dent nor override the laws of physics. Cruise
control cannot take into account the road,
traffic and weather conditions. Cruise control
is only an aid. You are responsible for the dis-
tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed,
for braking in good time and for staying in
lane.
Do not use cruise control:
R
in road and traffic conditions which do not
allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.
in heavy traffic or on winding roads
R
on slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-
erating could cause the drive wheels to lose
traction and the vehicle could then skid
R
when there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
heavy rain or snow
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
driver of the speed stored.
Cruise control lever
:
To store the current speed or a higher
speed
;
To store the current speed or calls up the
last stored speed
=
To store the current speed or a lower
speed
?
To deactivate cruise control
When you activate cruise control, the stored
speed is shown in the multifunction display for
five seconds. The speed is then permanently
displayed in the status indicator together with
the ¯ symbol.
In vehicles with a segment circle in the speed-
ometer, the segments between the currently
stored speed and the end of the segment cir-
cle light up.
Storing, maintaining and calling up a
speed
Storing and maintaining a speed
X
Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.
X
Briefly press the cruise control lever up :
or down ?.
X
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Cruise control is activated. The vehicle auto-
matically maintains the stored speed.
You can store the current speed if you are
driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).
i
Cruise control may be unable to maintain
the stored speed on uphill gradients. The
stored speed is resumed when the gradient
evens out. Cruise control maintains the
stored speed on downhill gradients by auto-
matically applying the brakes.
154
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Storing or calling up a speed
G
WARNING
If you call up the stored speed and it differs
from the current speed, the vehicle acceler-
ates or decelerates. If you do not know the
stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate
or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an
accident.
Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-
tions before calling up the stored speed. If
you do not know the stored speed, store the
desired speed again.
X
Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you =.
X
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
The first time cruise control is activated, it
stores the current speed or regulates the
speed of the vehicle to the previously stored
speed.
Setting a speed
G
WARNING
Keep in mind that it may take a brief
moment until the vehicle has made the nec-
essary adjustments.
Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed
to a value that the prevailing road conditions
and legal speed limits permit. Otherwise,
sudden and unexpected acceleration or
deceleration of the vehicle could cause an
accident and/or serious injury to you and
others.
X
To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-
ments (1 km/h increments): briefly press
the cruise control lever up : to the pres-
sure point for a higher speed, or down ?
for a lower speed.
Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up or down, the last speed stored is
increased or reduced.
X
To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-
ments (10 km/h increments): briefly
press the cruise control lever up : past the
pressure point for a higher speed, or
down ? for a lower speed.
Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up or down, the last speed stored is
increased or reduced.
i
The speed indicated in the speedometer
may differ slightly from the speed stored.
i
Cruise control is not deactivated if you
depress the accelerator pedal. For example,
if you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise
control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the
last speed stored after you have finished
overtaking.
Deactivating cruise control
There are several ways to deactivate cruise
control:
X
Briefly press the cruise control lever for-
wards : .
or
X
Brake.
Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:
R
you engage the electric parking brake
R
you are driving at less than 20 mph
(30 km/h)
R
ESP
®
intervenes or you deactivate ESP
®
R
Brake Assist intervenes
R
you move out of transmission position h
If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a
warning tone. You will see the Cruise Con‐Cruise Con‐
trol Offtrol Off message in the multifunction dis-
play for approximately five seconds.
i
When you switch off the engine, the last
speed stored is cleared.
Driving systems
155
Driving and parking
Z
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
General notes
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC regulates
the speed and automatically helps you main-
tain the distance from the vehicle detected in
front. Vehicles are detected with the aid of the
radar sensor system. Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC brakes automatically to avoid
exceeding the set speed or to maintain the
designated distance from the vehicle in front.
You must select a lower gear in good time on
long and steep downhill gradients, especially if
the vehicle is laden. By doing so, you will make
use of the braking effect of the engine. This
relieves the load on the brake system and pre-
vents the brakes from overheating and wear-
ing too quickly.
If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC detects
that there is a risk of a collision with the vehi-
cle in front, you will be warned visually and
audibly. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
cannot prevent a collision without your inter-
vention. An intermittent warning tone will then
sound and the distance warning lamp will light
up in the instrument cluster. Brake immedi-
ately in order to increase the distance from
the vehicle in front, or take evasive action, pro-
vided it is safe to do so.
For Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC to
assist you when driving, the radar sensor sys-
tem must be operational.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC operates in
the speed range between 0 mph (0 km/h) and
120 mph (200 km/h).
Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
while driving on roads with steep gradients.
As Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC trans-
mits radar waves, it can resemble the radar
detectors of the responsible authorities. You
can refer to the relevant chapter in the Opera-
tor's Manual if questions are asked about this.
i
USA only:
This device has been approved by the FCC
as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar
sensor is intended for use in an automotive
radar system only. Removing, tampering
with, or altering the device will void any war-
ranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do
not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-
approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.
i
Canada only: This device complies with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Removal, tampering, or altering of the
device will void any warranties, and is not
permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use
in any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not
react to:
R
people or animals
R
stationary objects in the road, e.g. stop-
ped or parked vehicles
R
oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic
As a result, Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor
intervene in such situations. There is a risk
of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic
situation and be ready to brake.
G
WARNING
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not
react to:
R
people or animals
R
stationary objects in the road, e.g. stop-
ped or parked vehicles (vehicles without
the Driving Assistance package)
R
stationary objects in the road, e.g. stop-
ped or parked vehicles, if sufficient detec-
tion is not possible (vehicles with the Driv-
ing Assistance package)
R
oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic
156
Driving systems
Driving and parking
As a result, Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor
intervene in such situations. There is a risk
of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic
situation and be ready to brake.
G
WARNING
Distance keeping assistant cannot always
clearly identify other road users and com-
plex traffic situations.
In such cases, distance keeping assistant
can:
R
accelerate or brake the vehicle unexpect-
edly
R
intervene unexpectedly
There is a risk of an accident.
Continue to drive carefully and be ready to
brake, especially if distance keeping assis-
tant warns you.
G
WARNING
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes
your vehicle with up to 50% of the maximum
possible deceleration. If this deceleration is
not sufficient, Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and
acoustic warning. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
Adjust your speed in these cases and main-
tain sufficient distance.
Apply the brakes yourself and/or take eva-
sive action.
!
When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
or the HOLD function is activated, the vehi-
cle brakes automatically in certain situa-
tions.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and the
HOLD function in the following or similar sit-
uations:
R
when towing the vehicle
R
in the car wash
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC can neither
reduce the risk of an accident if you fail to
adapt your driving style, nor override the laws
of physics. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
cannot take into account road, weather or traf-
fic conditions. Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC is only an aid. You are responsible
for the distance to the vehicle in front, for
vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for
staying in your lane.
Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC:
R
In road and traffic conditions which do not
allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g.
in heavy traffic or on winding roads
R
on slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-
erating could cause the drive wheels to lose
traction and the vehicle could then skid
R
In poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain
or snow
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may not
detect narrow vehicles driving in front, e.g.
motorcycles, or vehicles driving in a staggered
formation.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
impaired if:
R
There is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
R
There is snow or heavy rain
R
There is interference by other radar sources
R
There are strong radar reflections, for exam-
ple in parking garages
If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no longer
detects a vehicle in front, Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC may unexpectedly accelerate to
the speed stored.
This speed may:
R
Be too high if you are driving in a turning
lane or an exit lane
R
Be so high when driving in the right-hand
lane that you overtake vehicles in the left-
hand lane
R
Be so high in the left lane that you pass
vehicles driving on the right
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
driver of the speed stored.
Driving systems
157
Driving and parking
Z
Cruise control lever
Cruise control lever
:
To store the current speed or a higher
speed
;
To set a specified minimum distance
=
To store the current speed or call up the
last stored speed
?
To store the current speed or a lower
speed
A
To deactivate Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC
Activating Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC and storing, maintaining
and calling up a speed
Important safety notes
!
When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
or the HOLD function is activated, the vehi-
cle brakes automatically in certain situa-
tions.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and the
HOLD function in the following or similar sit-
uations:
R
when towing the vehicle
R
in the car wash
To activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC,
the following conditions must be fulfilled:
R
the engine must be started. It may take up
to two minutes of driving before Active Dis-
tance Assist DISTRONIC is ready for use.
R
the electric parking brake must be released.
R
ESP
®
must be active, but not intervening.
R
Active Parking Assist must not be activated.
R
the transmission must be in position h.
R
the driver's door must be closed when you
shift from j to h or your seat belt must
be fastened.
R
the front-passenger door must be closed.
R
the vehicle must not skid.
Activating
X
Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ?, up : or down ; .
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa-
ted.
X
To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-
ments (1 km/h increments): briefly press
the cruise control lever up : to the pres-
sure point for a higher speed, or down ; to
the pressure point for a lower speed.
Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up or down, the last speed stored is
increased or reduced.
or
X
To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-
ments (10 km/h increments): briefly
press the cruise control lever up : past the
pressure point for a higher speed, or
down ; past the pressure point for a lower
speed.
Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up or down, the last speed stored is
increased or reduced.
X
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the
vehicle in front, but only up to the desired
stored speed.
i
If you do not fully release the accelerator
pedal, the Active Distance Assist pas‐
Active Distance Assist pas‐
sivesive message appears in the multifunction
display. The set distance to a slower-moving
vehicle in front will then not be maintained.
You will be driving at the speed you deter-
mine by the position of the accelerator
pedal.
You can also activate Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC when stationary. The lowest speed
that can be set is 20 mph (30 km/h).
Activating at the current speed/last
stored speed
G
WARNING
If you call up the stored speed and it differs
from the current speed, the vehicle acceler-
158
Driving systems
Driving and parking
ates or decelerates. If you do not know the
stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate
or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an
accident.
Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-
tions before calling up the stored speed. If
you do not know the stored speed, store the
desired speed again.
X
Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ?.
X
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
The first time Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC is activated, it stores the current
speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle
to the previously stored speed.
Pulling away and driving
X
If you want to pull away with Active Dis-
tance Assist DISTRONIC: remove your foot
from the brake pedal.
X
Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ?.
or
X
If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is acti-
vated: accelerate briefly.
Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed
to that of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle is
detected in front, your vehicle accelerates
to the set speed.
The vehicle can also pull away when it is facing
an unidentified obstacle or is driving on a dif-
ferent line from another vehicle. The vehicle
then brakes automatically. Be ready to brake
at all times.
If there is no vehicle in front, Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC operates in the same way
as cruise control.
If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC detects a
slower-moving vehicle in front, it brakes your
vehicle. In this way, the distance you have
selected is maintained.
If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC detects a
faster-moving vehicle in front, it increases the
driving speed. However, the vehicle is only
accelerated up to the speed you have stored.
Selecting the drive program
All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC supports a sporty
driving style when you have selected the S or
S+ drive program (Y page 132). Acceleration
behind the vehicle in front or to the set speed
is then noticeably more dynamic. If you have
selected the C or E driving program, the vehi-
cle accelerates more gently. This setting is
recommended in stop-and-start traffic.
AMG vehicles: Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC supports a sporty driving style
when you have selected the S or S+ or M drive
program (Y page 133). Acceleration behind
the vehicle in front or to the set speed is then
noticeably more dynamic. When you select the
C drive program, the vehicle accelerates more
gently. This setting is recommended in stop-
and-start traffic.
Changing lanes
If you want to change to the overtaking lane
on multi-lane roads, Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC supports you if:
R
you are driving faster than 45 mph
(70 km/h)
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is main-
taining the distance to a vehicle in front
R
you switch on the appropriate turn signal
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not
currently detect a danger of collision
If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is
accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if
changing lanes takes too long or if the dis-
tance between your vehicle and the vehicle in
front becomes too small.
i
When you change lanes, Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC monitors the left lane on
left-hand-drive vehicles or the right lane on
right-hand-drive vehicles.
Stopping
If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC detects
that the vehicle in front is stopping, it brakes
your vehicle until it is stationary.
Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains sta-
tionary and you do not need to depress the
brake. After a time, the electric parking brake
secures the vehicle and relieves the service
brake.
Depending on the specified minimum distance,
your vehicle will come to a standstill at a suffi-
Driving systems
159
Driving and parking
Z
cient distance behind the vehicle in front. The
specified minimum distance is set using the
control on the cruise control lever.
The electric parking brake secures the vehicle
automatically if Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC is activated and:
R
the driver's door is open and the driver's
seat belt is unfastened
R
the engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
matically switched off by the ECO start/
stop function
R
a system malfunction occurs
R
the power supply is not sufficient
If a malfunction in the electric parking brake
occurs, then the transmission may also be
shifted into position j automatically.
Setting a speed
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to
the speed set.
X
To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-
ments (1 km/h increments): briefly press
the cruise control lever up : to the pres-
sure point for a higher speed, or down ;
for a lower speed.
Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up or down, the last speed stored is
increased or reduced.
X
To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-
ments (10 km/h increments): briefly
press the cruise control lever up : past the
pressure point for a higher speed, or
down ; for a lower speed.
Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up or down, the last speed stored is
increased or reduced.
Setting a specified minimum distance
You can set the specified minimum distance
for Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC by vary-
ing the time span between one and two sec-
onds. This determines the distance that Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC is to maintain from
the vehicle in front, depending on the road
speed. You can see this distance in the multi-
function display (Y page 160).
The specified minimum distance can be
changed while Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC is switched on or off.
Make sure that you maintain a sufficiently safe
distance from the vehicle in front. Adjust the
distance to the vehicle in front if necessary.
Cruise control lever
X
To increase: turn control = toward ;.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC then
maintains a greater distance between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front.
X
To decrease: turn control = toward :.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC then
maintains a shorter distance between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC dis-
plays in the instrument cluster
Displays in the speedometer
When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is
activated, one or more segments ; in the set
speed range light up.
If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC detects a
vehicle in front, segments ; from speed of
the vehicle in front = to stored speed : light
up.
i
For design reasons, the speed displayed
on the speedometer may differ slightly from
160
Driving systems
Driving and parking
the speed set for Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC.
Display when Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC is deactivated
:
Vehicle in front, if detected
;
Distance indicator, current distance to the
vehicle in front
=
Specified minimum distance to the vehicle
in front; adjustable
?
Your vehicle
X
Select the Assistance GraphicAssistance Graphic function
using the on-board computer (Y page 198).
Display when Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC is activated
:
Vehicle in front, if detected
;
Specified minimum distance to the vehicle
in front; adjustable
=
Your vehicle
?
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
X
Select the Assistance Graphic
Assistance Graphic function
using the on-board computer (Y page 198).
You will initially see the stored speed for
approximately five seconds when you activate
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC.
Deactivating Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC
Cruise control lever
There are several ways to deactivate Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC:
X
Briefly press the cruise control lever for-
wards :.
or
X
Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary.
When you deactivate Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC, the Active Distance AssistActive Distance Assist
OffOff message appears on the multifunction dis-
play for approximately five seconds.
i
The last speed stored remains stored until
you switch off the engine.
i
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is not
deactivated if you depress the accelerator
pedal. If you accelerate to overtake, Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC adjusts the vehi-
cle's speed to the last speed stored after
you have finished overtaking.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is automati-
cally deactivated if:
R
you engage the electric parking brake or if
the vehicle is automatically secured with the
electric parking brake
R
ESP
®
intervenes or you deactivate ESP
®
R
the transmission is in position j, k or i
R
you pull the cruise control lever towards you
in order to pull away and the front-
passenger door is open
R
you activate Active Parking Assist
R
the vehicle is skidding
If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deacti-
vated automatically, you will hear a warning
tone. The Active Distance Assist OffActive Distance Assist Off
Driving systems
161
Driving and parking
Z
message will appear on the multifunction dis-
play for approximately five seconds.
Tips for driving with Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC
General notes
The following contains descriptions of certain
road and traffic conditions in which you must
be particularly attentive. In such situations,
brake if necessary. Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC will then be deactivated.
Cornering, going into and coming out of
a bend
The ability of Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC to detect vehicles when cornering
is limited. Your vehicle may brake unexpect-
edly or late.
Vehicles traveling on a different line
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may not
detect vehicles that are not driving in the mid-
dle of their lane. The distance to the vehicle in
front will be too short.
Other vehicles changing lanes
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has not
detected the vehicle cutting in yet. The dis-
tance to this vehicle will be too short.
Narrow vehicles
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has not yet
detected the vehicle in front on the edge of
the road because of its narrow width. The dis-
tance to the vehicle in front will be too short.
Obstructions and stationary vehicles
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not
brake for obstacles or stationary vehicles. If,
for example, the detected vehicle turns a cor-
ner and an obstacle or stationary vehicle is
162
Driving systems
Driving and parking
revealed, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
will not brake for them.
Crossing vehicles
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may mis-
takenly detect vehicles that are crossing your
lane.
If you activate Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC under the following conditions, the
vehicle could pull away unintentionally:
R
at traffic lights with crossing traffic, for
example
R
if there is a vehicle in front, after a crossing,
with the HOLD function activated
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC with
Active Steering Assist
General notes
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC with Active
Steering Assist aids you in keeping the vehicle
in the center of the driving lane by means of
moderate steering interventions in a speed
range from 0 - 125 mph (0 - 200 km/h).
It monitors lane markings and vehicles in front
of your vehicle by means of camera system :
at the top of the windshield.
In a speed range from 0 - 37 mph
(0 - 60 km/h), Active Steering Assist focuses
on the vehicle in front, taking into account
lane markings, e.g. when following vehicles in
a traffic jam.
At speeds of more than 37 mph (60 km/h),
Active Steering Assist focuses on clear lane
markings (left and right), only focusing on the
vehicle in front if detected lane markings are
not present at speeds of up to 80 mph
(130 km/h).
If these conditions are not present, Active
Steering Assist cannot provide assistance.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC must be
active in order for the function to be available.
Important safety notes
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC with Active
Steering Assist can neither reduce the risk of
an accident if you fail to adapt your driving
style, nor override the laws of physics. It can-
not take into account road, weather or traffic
conditions. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
with Active Steering Assist is only an aid. You
are responsible for the distance to the vehicle
in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good
time and for staying in your lane.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC with Active
Steering Assist does not detect road and traf-
fic conditions and does not detect all road
users. If you are following a vehicle which is
driving towards the edge of the road, your
vehicle could come into contact with the curb
or other road boundaries. Be particularly
aware of other road users, e.g. cyclists, that
are directly next to your vehicle.
Obstacles such as traffic pylons on the lane or
projecting into the lane are not detected.
An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g.
after intentionally driving over a lane marking,
can be corrected at any time if you steer
slightly in the opposite direction.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC with Active
Steering Assist cannot continuously keep your
vehicle in lane. In some cases, the steering
intervention is not sufficient to bring the vehi-
cle back to the lane. In such cases, you must
steer the vehicle yourself to ensure that it
does not leave the lane.
Driving systems
163
Driving and parking
Z
The support provided by the system can be
impaired if:
R
there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi-
cient illumination of the road, or due to
snow, rain, fog or heavy spray
R
there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
the sun or reflection from other vehicles
(e.g. if the road surface is wet)
R
the windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged
or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the
vicinity of the camera
R
there are no lane markings, or several
unclear lane markings are present, e.g.
around construction sites
R
the lane markings are worn away, dark or
covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
R
the distance to the vehicle in front is too
short and thus the lane markings cannot be
detected
R
the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
branch off, cross one another or merge
R
the road is narrow and winding
R
there are highly variable shade conditions
on the roadway
The system is switched to passive and no lon-
ger assists you by performing steering inter-
ventions if:
R
you actively change lanes
R
you switch on the turn signal
R
you take your hands off the steering wheel
or do not steer for a prolonged period of
time
i
After you have finished changing lanes,
Active Steering Assist is automatically active
once more.
Active Steering Assist cannot provide assis-
tance:
R
on very sharp corners
R
when a loss of tire pressure or a defective
tire has been detected and displayed
Observe the important safety notes on Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC (Y page 156).
The steering interventions are carried out with
a limited steering moment. The system
requires the driver to keep his hands on the
steering wheel and to steer himself.
If you do not steer yourself or if you take your
hands off the steering wheel for a prolonged
period of time, the system will first alert you
with a visual warning. A steering wheel symbol
appears in the multifunction display. If you
have still not started to steer and have not
taken hold of the steering wheel after five sec-
onds at the latest, a warning tone also sounds
to remind you to take control of the vehicle.
Active Steering Assist is then switched to pas-
sive. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
remains active.
Activating Active Steering Assist
X
Select the Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC with Active Steering Assist func-
tion using the on-board computer
(Y page 198).
The Active Steering Assist OnActive Steering Assist On mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
Active Steering Assist is activated.
Information in the multifunction display
If Active Steering Assist is activated but not
ready for a steering intervention, steering
wheel symbol : appears in gray. If the sys-
tem provides you with support by means of
steering interventions, symbol : is shown in
green.
Deactivating Active Steering Assist
X
Deactivate the Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC with Active Steering Assist func-
tion using the on-board computer
(Y page 198).
The Active Steering Assist Off
Active Steering Assist Off mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
Active Steering Assist is deactivated.
When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is
deactivated or not available, Active Steering
Assist is deactivated automatically.
164
Driving systems
Driving and parking
HOLD function
General notes
The HOLD function can assist the driver in the
following situations:
R
When pulling away, especially on steep
slopes
R
When maneuvering on steep slopes
R
When waiting in traffic
The vehicle is kept stationary without the
driver having to depress the brake pedal.
The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD
function deactivated when you depress the
accelerator pedal to pull away.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If the vehicle is only braked using the HOLD
function, the vehicle may roll away in the fol-
lowing situations when you leave the vehi-
cle:
R
if there is a malfunction in the system or
in the voltage supply
R
if the HOLD function is deactivated by
depressing the accelerator pedal or brake
pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant
There is a risk of an accident.
Always deactivate the HOLD function and
secure the vehicle against rolling away
before you leave it.
!
When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
or the HOLD function is activated, the vehi-
cle brakes automatically in certain situa-
tions.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and the
HOLD function in the following or similar sit-
uations:
R
when towing the vehicle
R
in the car wash
Deactivating the HOLD function (Y page 165).
Activation conditions
You can activate the HOLD function if all of the
following conditions are fulfilled:
R
the vehicle is stationary.
R
the engine is running or if it has been auto-
matically switched off by the ECO start/
stop function.
R
the driver's door is closed or your seat belt
is fastened.
R
the electric parking brake is released.
R
the transmission is in position h, k or i.
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deacti-
vated
Activating the HOLD function
X
Make sure that the activation conditions are
met.
X
Depress the brake pedal.
X
Quickly depress the brake pedal further
until : appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
The HOLD function is activated. You can
release the brake pedal.
i
If depressing the brake pedal the first time
does not activate the HOLD function, wait
briefly and then try again.
Deactivating the HOLD function
The HOLD function is deactivated automati-
cally if:
R
you depress the accelerator and the trans-
mission is in position h or k.
R
the transmission is in position j.
R
you depress the brake pedal again with a
certain amount of pressure until HOLDHOLD disap-
pears from the multifunction display.
R
you secure the vehicle using the electric
parking brake.
R
you activate Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC.
Driving systems
165
Driving and parking
Z
i
After a time, the electric parking brake
secures the vehicle and relieves the service
brake.
When the HOLD function is activated, the
transmission is shifted automatically to posi-
tion j if:
R
the driver's seat belt is not fastened and the
driver's door is open.
R
the engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
matically switched off by the ECO start/
stop function.
The electric parking brake secures the vehicle
automatically if the HOLD function is activated
when the vehicle is stationary and:
R
a system malfunction occurs
R
the power supply is not sufficient
If a malfunction in the electric parking brake
occurs, the transmission may also be shifted
into position j automatically.
RACE START
Important safety notes
i
RACE START must not be used on normal
roads. RACE START must only be activated
and used on dedicated road circuits, outside
of public road use.
i
RACE START is only available for
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles.
RACE START enables optimal acceleration
from a standing start. For this, a suitably high-
grip road surface is required and the vehicle
and tires must be in good working order.
G
WARNING
If you use RACE START, individual tires may
start to spin and the vehicle could skid.
Depending on the selected ESP
®
mode,
there is an increased risk of skidding and
having an accident. Make sure that no per-
sons, animals or obstacles are within range
of the vehicle.
i
Observe the safety notes on driving safety
systems (Y page 60).
Be sure to read the safety notes and infor-
mation on ESP
®
(Y page 65).
Activation conditions
You can activate RACE START if:
R
the doors are closed.
R
the engine is running and it has reached an
operating temperature of approximately
160 ‡ (71 †). This is the case when the oil
temperature gage in the multifunction dis-
play is shown in white.
R
the engine is running and the engine and
transmission are at operating temperature.
This is the case when the oil temperature
gage in the multifunction display is shown in
white (Y page 202).
R
ESP
®
is functioning correctly (Y page 66)
R
the drive program S, S+ or Race is selected
(Y page 133)
R
the steering wheel is in the straight-ahead
position
R
the vehicle is stationary and the brake pedal
is depressed (left foot)
R
the transmission is in position h
Activating RACE START
i
When manual mode (Y page 141) is active,
the transmission automatically shifts up in
the RACE START drive program. This func-
tion supports maximum acceleration with
RACE START. After going through an accel-
erating process once from a stationary posi-
tion, this function is automatically deactiva-
ted.
X
Depress the brake pedal with your left foot
and keep it depressed.
X
Pull and hold both steering wheel paddle
shifters.
X
The RACE START Confirm: Paddle UPRACE START Confirm: Paddle UP
Cancel: Paddle DOWNCancel: Paddle DOWN message appears in
the multifunction display.
X
Release both steering wheel paddle shifters.
i
If the activation conditions are no longer
fulfilled, RACE START is canceled. The
RACE START CanceledRACE START Canceled message appears in
the multifunction display.
166
Driving systems
Driving and parking
X
To cancel: pull the left-hand steering wheel
paddle shifter (Y page 141).
or
X
To confirm: pull the right-hand steering
wheel paddle shifter (Y page 141).
The RACE START Available Depress
RACE START Available Depress
gas pedal.gas pedal. message appears in the multi-
function display.
i
If you do not depress the accelerator pedal
within a few seconds, RACE START is can-
celed. The multifunction display shows the
RACE START CanceledRACE START Canceled message.
X
Depress the accelerator pedal completely,
until the engine speed stops increasing.
The RACE START Release brake toRACE START Release brake to
startstart message appears in the multifunction
display.
i
If you do not release the brake pedal
within five seconds, RACE START is can-
celed. The RACE START CanceledRACE START Canceled message
appears in the multifunction display.
X
Take your foot off the brake, but keep the
accelerator pedal depressed.
The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceler-
ation.
The RACE START ActiveRACE START Active message appears
in the multifunction display.
RACE START is deactivated when the vehicle
reaches a speed of approximately 30 mph
(Canada: 50 km/h).
RACE START is deactivated immediately if you
release the accelerator pedal during RACE
START or if any of the activation conditions are
no longer fulfilled. The RACE START Not Pos‐RACE START Not Pos‐
sible See Operator's Manualsible See Operator's Manual or RACERACE
START CanceledSTART Canceled message appears in the mul-
tifunction display.
i
If RACE START is used repeatedly within a
short period of time, it is only available
again after the vehicle has been driven a
certain distance.
Adaptive damping system
General notes
A suspension with the adaptive damping sys-
tem provides improved driving comfort and
continuously controls the calibration of the
dampers. The damping characteristics adapt
to the current operating and driving situation.
The damping is tuned individually to each
wheel and depends on:
R
your driving style, e.g. sporty
R
the road surface conditions
R
the selected drive program (Y page 132).
Selecting the Comfort or Economy
drive programs
In the Comfort and Economy drive programs,
the driving characteristics of your vehicle are
more comfortable. Select one of these drive
programs if you favor a more comfortable driv-
ing style. Also select these drive programs
when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. on
straight stretches of highway.
In urban traffic and stop-start traffic, drive pro-
gram C is recommended.
X
Press DYNAMIC SELECT button : repeat-
edly until the Comfort or Economy drive
program is selected.
Selecting Sport mode
The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in
the Sport drive program ensures even better
contact with the road. Select this drive pro-
gram when employing a sporty driving style,
e.g. on winding country roads.
X
Press DYNAMIC SELECT button : as many
times as necessary until the Sport drive
program is selected.
Selecting Sport Plus mode
The firmer suspension settings in the Sport
Plus drive program ensure even better contact
with the road. Select this mode when employ-
ing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding coun-
Driving systems
167
Driving and parking
Z
try roads or, ideally, when driving on closed
race circuits.
X
Press DYNAMIC SELECT button : repeat-
edly until the Sport Plus drive program is
selected.
Activating the driving dynamics dis-
play
Using the driving dynamics display in the mul-
timedia system display, you can see the drive
program you selected as well as additional
information on the vehicle's operating state.
X
Switch on the multimedia system. Further
information can be found in the Digital Oper-
ator's Manual.
X
Press button :.
The driving dynamics display appears in the
multimedia system display.
The following information on the vehicle's
operating status is displayed in the driving
dynamics display:
R
Drive program selected (Y page 132)
R
Accelerator pedal position shown in %
R
Brake pedal position shown in %
R
Steering angle
R
Damping setting selected
R
G-FORCE cross displaying longitudinal and
lateral acceleration (only available in Sport
or Sport Plus drive programs)
Active Body Control ABC (except
Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Setting the vehicle level
General notes
The vehicle level can be set using the
DYNAMIC SELECT button (Y page 132) or the
level button. The setting always corresponds
to the last selected function.
In order to reduce fuel consumption and
improve the driving dynamics, the vehicle is
lowered as its speed increases. In the Sport
and Sport Plus drive programs, it is lowered
by up to 0.5 in (13 mm) compared to the nor-
mal vehicle level. In the Comfort and CURVE
drive programs, it is lowered by up to 0.2 in
(5 mm) compared to the normal vehicle level.
As the speed is reduced, the vehicle is raised
up to the set vehicle height.
Select the normal level for normal road surfa-
ces and the raised level for driving with snow
chains or on particularly poor road surfaces.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
The vehicle is lowered slightly in the follow-
ing situations:
R
the SPORT suspension setting is selected
at the normal vehicle level
R
the engine is switched off
Persons in the vicinity of the wheel arch or
the underbody may thus become trapped.
There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of
the wheel arch or the underbody when you
switch off the engine.
168
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Setting raised level
X
Make sure that the engine is running or that
it has been switched off by the ECO start/
stop function.
X
Make sure that a speed of 75 mph
(120 km/h) is not exceeded.
X
If indicator lamp ;
; is not lit: press but-
ton :.
If the engine has been switched off by the
ECO start/stop function, it is now restarted.
Indicator lamp ; lights up. The vehicle is
raised by 1.2 in (31 mm).
Setting the normal level
X
Make sure that the engine is running or that
it has been switched off by the ECO start/
stop function.
X
If indicator lamp ;; is lit: press button :.
Indicator lamp ; goes out. The vehicle is
adjusted to normal level
The "Raised level" setting is canceled if you:
R
are driving faster than approximately
75 mph (120 km/h).
R
drive for approximately three minutes at a
speed over 50 mph (80 km/h).
R
or switch to the drive program while the
vehicle is in motion.
Suspension tuning
General notes
The electro-hydraulically controlled suspension
features improved driving dynamics, driving
safety and ride comfort. You can also choose
between a sporty, a particularly sporty, a com-
fortable and a comfortable mode with curve
tilting function (CURVE).
The suspension is continuously tuned to each
wheel individually and depends on:
R
the road surface condition, e.g. bumps
R
the vehicle load
R
the drive program selected
Each time you start the engine with the Smart-
Key or the Start/Stop button, the Comfort
drive program is activated. Further information
about starting the engine (Y page 127).
Selecting Comfort mode
In the Comfort drive program, the driving
characteristics of your vehicle are more com-
fortable. Select this mode if you favor a more
comfortable driving style.
X
Press DYNAMIC SELECT button : as many
times as necessary until the Comfort drive
program is selected.
Selecting Sport mode
The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in
the Sport drive program ensures even better
contact with the road. Select this mode if you
favor a firmer suspension setting.
X
Press DYNAMIC SELECT button : as many
times as necessary until the Sport drive
program is selected.
Selecting Sport Plus mode
The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in
the Sport Plus drive program ensures even
better contact with the road. Select this mode
if you favor a firmer suspension setting.
X
Press DYNAMIC SELECT button : as many
times as necessary until the Sport Plus
drive program is selected.
Driving systems
169
Driving and parking
Z
Selecting the CURVE setting
In the CURVE drive program, the curve tilting
function is activated. The vehicle tilts by up to
2.65 degrees into bends. The tilt function and
the comfort suspension tuning increase driving
comfort in corners. CURVE is available in the
speed range between 9 mph (15 km/h) and
112 mph (180 km/h). Select this mode on
winding roads in particular. Outside this speed
range, the CURVE drive program is the same
as the Comfort drive program.
The curve tilting function monitors the road in
front of your vehicle by means of a camera
attached at the top of the windshield. This
function is automatically active if you select
the CURVE drive program. The system is
operational at speeds of up to 112 mph
(180 km/h).
X
Press DYNAMIC SELECT button : as many
times as necessary until the CURVE drive
program is selected.
The system is deactivated if you select a differ-
ent drive program.
The system may be impaired or may not func-
tion if:
R
you are driving more slowly than 9 mph
(15 km/h) or faster than 112 mph
(180 km/h).
R
the vehicle is fully laden.
R
you drive with very high lateral acceleration.
Activating the driving dynamics dis-
play
Using the driving dynamics display in the mul-
timedia system display, you can see the drive
program you selected as well as additional
information on the vehicle's operating state.
X
Switch on the multimedia system. Further
information can be found in the Digital Oper-
ator's Manual.
X
Press button :.
The driving dynamics display appears in the
multimedia system display.
The following information on the vehicle's
operating status is displayed in the driving
dynamics display:
R
Drive program selected (Y page 132)
R
Accelerator pedal position shown in %
R
Brake pedal position shown in %
R
Steering angle
R
Activity of the ABC spring struts
R
Vehicle level display (Y page 168)
R
Level settings animation
R
G-FORCE cross displaying longitudinal and
lateral acceleration (only available in Sport
or Sport Plus drive programs)
Active Body Control (ABC)
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Setting the vehicle level
General notes
The vehicle level can be set using the
DYNAMIC SELECT controller (Y page 133) or
the on-board computer (Y page 171). The set-
ting always corresponds to the last selected
function.
In order to reduce fuel consumption and
improve the driving dynamics, the vehicle is
lowered as its speed increases. In the Sport
and Sport Plus drive programs it is lowered by
up to 0.5 in (13 mm), and in the Comfort drive
program by up to 0.2 in (5 mm) compared to
the normal vehicle level. As the speed is
reduced, the vehicle is raised up to the set
vehicle height.
Each time you start the engine with the Smart-
Key or the Start/Stop button, the Comfort
drive program is activated. For further informa-
tion about starting the engine, see
(Y page 127).
Select the normal level for normal road surfa-
ces and the raised level for driving with snow
chains or on particularly poor road surfaces.
170
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Important safety notes
The vehicle is slightly lowered when the engine
is switched off.
G
WARNING
When the vehicle is being lowered, people
could become trapped if their limbs are
between the vehicle body and the wheels or
underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of
injury.
Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle
or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel
arches when the vehicle is being lowered.
Setting raised level
X
Make sure that the engine is running or that
it has been switched off by the ECO start/
stop function.
X
Make sure that a speed of 75 mph
(120 km/h) is not exceeded.
X
If symbol ;; is not shown: press =
or ; on the steering wheel to select the
DriveAssistDriveAssist menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
Vehicle levelVehicle level.
X
Press the a button.
The following message appears: : Vehi‐Vehi‐
cle level Press 'OK' to Raisecle level Press 'OK' to Raise.
X
Press the a button.
If the engine has been switched off by the
ECO start/stop function, it is now restarted.
Symbol ; appears. The vehicle height is
adjusted to raised level.
Setting the normal level
X
Make sure that the engine is running or that
it has been switched off by the ECO start/
stop function.
X
If symbol ;
; is shown: press =
or ; on the steering wheel to select the
DriveAssistDriveAssist menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
Vehicle levelVehicle level.
X
Press the a button.
The following message appears: : Vehi‐Vehi‐
cle level Press 'OK' to Lowercle level Press 'OK' to Lower.
X
Press the a button.
Icon ; is faded out. The vehicle is adjusted
to normal level
The "Raised level" setting is canceled if you:
R
are driving faster than approximately
75 mph (120 km/h).
R
drive for approximately three minutes at a
speed over 50 mph (80 km/h).
R
or switch to the drive program while the
vehicle is in motion.
Suspension tuning
General notes
The electro-hydraulically controlled suspension
features improved driving dynamics, driving
safety and ride comfort. You can also choose
between a particularly sporty or a comfortable
tuning.
The suspension is continuously tuned to each
wheel individually and depends on:
R
the road surface condition, e.g. bumps
R
the vehicle load
R
the drive program selected
Your selection remains saved even if you
remove the key from the ignition lock.
Driving systems
171
Driving and parking
Z
Each time you start the engine with the Smart-
Key or the Start/Stop button, the comfortable
setting is activated. For further information
about starting the engine, see (Y page 127).
Selecting sports tuning
The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in
sports mode ensures even better contact with
the road. Select this mode if you favor a firmer
suspension setting.
X
Make sure that the engine is running or that
it has been switched off by the ECO start/
stop function.
X
If indicator lamp ;; is not lit: press but-
ton :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up. Sports suspen-
sion tuning is selected.
The AMG Suspension System SPORTAMG Suspension System SPORT mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
Selecting comfort tuning
In comfort mode, the driving characteristics of
your vehicle are more comfortable. Select this
mode if you favor a more comfortable driving
style.
X
Make sure that the engine is running or that
it has been switched off by the ECO start/
stop function.
X
If indicator lamp ;; is lit: press button :.
Indicator lamp ; goes out. Comfortable
suspension tuning is selected.
The AMG Suspension System COMFORTAMG Suspension System COMFORT
message appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
Activating the driving dynamics dis-
play in the COMAND display
Using the driving dynamics display in the mul-
timedia system display, you can see the drive
program you selected as well as additional
information on the vehicle's operating status.
X
Switch on COMAND. Further information
can be found in the Digital Operator's Man-
ual.
The following information on the vehicle's
operating status is displayed in the driving
dynamics display:
R
Drive program selected (Y page 133)
R
Accelerator pedal position shown in %
R
Brake pedal position shown in %
R
Steering angle
R
Vehicle level display (Y page 170)
R
Activity of the ABC spring struts
R
Level settings animation
R
G-FORCE cross to display longitudinal and
lateral acceleration (only available in Sport,
Sport Plus and RACE drive programs)
R
Overrun mode animation
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Important safety notes
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic
parking aid with ultrasound. It monitors the
area around your vehicle using six sensors in
the front bumper and six sensors in the rear
bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC visually
and audibly indicates the distance between
your vehicle and an object.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is
not a replacement for your attention to your
immediate surroundings. You are always
responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and
172
Driving systems
Driving and parking
exiting a parking space. Make sure that there
are no persons, animals or objects in the
maneuvering area when you are maneuvering
or parking.
!
When parking, pay particular attention to
objects above or below the sensors, such as
flower pots or trailer drawbars.
PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects
when they are in the immediate vicinity of
the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle
or the objects.
The sensors may not detect snow and other
objects that absorb ultrasonic waves.
Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car
wash, the compressed-air brakes on a truck
or a pneumatic drill could cause
PARKTRONIC to malfunction.
PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on
uneven terrain.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated auto-
matically when you:
R
switch on the ignition
R
shift the transmission to position h, k or
i
R
release the electric parking brake
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated at
speeds above 11 mph (18 km/h). It is reacti-
vated at lower speeds.
Range of the sensors
General notes
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not take into
account obstacles located:
R
below the detection range, such as persons,
animals or objects
R
above the detection range, e.g. overhanging
loads, tail sections or loading ramps of
trucks
:
Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side
(example)
The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or
slush. They can otherwise not function cor-
rectly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them (Y page 275).
Range
Front sensors
Center Approx. 40 in (approx.
100 cm)
Corners Approx. 24 in (approx.
60 cm)
Driving systems
173
Driving and parking
Z
Rear sensors
Center Approx. 48 in (approx.
120 cm)
Corners Approx. 32 in (approx.
80 cm)
Minimum distance
Center Approx. 8 in (approx.
20 cm)
Corners Approx. 6 in (approx.
15 cm)
If there is an obstacle within this range, the
relevant warning displays light up and a warn-
ing tone sounds. If the distance falls below the
minimum, the distance may no longer be
shown.
Warning displays
Warning display for the front area
:
Segments on the left-hand side of the vehi-
cle
;
Segments on the right-hand side of the
vehicle
=
Operational readiness segments
The warning displays show the distance
between the sensors and the obstacle. The
warning display for the front area is located on
the dashboard above the center air vents. The
warning display for the rear area is located on
the cover behind the seats in the rear
passenger compartment.
The warning display for each side of the vehi-
cle is divided into five yellow and two red seg-
ments. If yellow operational readiness seg-
ments = light up, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
is operational.
The selected transmission position and the
direction in which the vehicle is rolling deter-
mine which warning display is active when the
engine is running.
Transmission posi-
tion
Warning display
h
Front area active
k, i or the vehi-
cle is rolling back-
wards
Rear and front areas
active
j
No areas active
One or more segments light up as the vehicle
approaches an obstacle, depending on the
vehicle's distance from the obstacle. In addi-
tion, warning tones are issued.
When the distance to the obstacle is sufficient,
you will hear an intermittent warning tone. The
shorter the distance to the obstacle, the
shorter the frequency of the intermittent warn-
ing tones becomes. When the minimum dis-
tance is reached, you hear a continuous warn-
ing tone.
Deactivating/activating Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC
:
Deactivates/activates Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC
;
Indicator lamp
If indicator lamp ; lights up, Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC is deactivated. Active Parking
Assist is then also deactivated.
i
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automati-
cally activated when you turn the SmartKey
to position 2 in the ignition lock.
174
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Only the red segments
in the Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC warning
displays are lit. You also
hear a warning tone for
approximately two sec-
onds.
Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC is deacti-
vated after approx-
imately five seconds
and the indicator lamp
in the Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC button
lights up.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has been deac-
tivated.
X
If problems persist, have Parking Assist PARKTRONIC checked at
a qualified specialist workshop.
Only the red segments
in the Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC warning
displays are lit. Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC is
deactivated after
approximately five sec-
onds.
The Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is inter-
ference.
X
Clean the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 275).
X
Switch the ignition back on.
The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultra-
sound waves.
X
Check to see if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC works at a different
location.
Active Parking Assist
General notes
Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking
aid with ultrasound. It measures the road on
both sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol
indicates a suitable parking space. Active
steering intervention can assist you during
parking and when exiting a parking space. You
can also still use Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
(Y page 172).
Important safety notes
Active Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is not
a replacement for your attention to your imme-
diate surroundings. You are always responsi-
ble for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a
parking space. Make sure that no persons, ani-
mals or objects are in the path of your vehicle.
When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactiva-
ted, Active Parking Assist is also unavailable.
G
WARNING
While parking or pulling out of a parking
space, the vehicle swings out and can drive
onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could
cause you to collide with other road users or
objects. There is a risk of an accident.
Pay attention to other road users or objects.
Stop the vehicle if necessary or cancel the
Active Parking Assist parking procedure.
G
WARNING
While parking or pulling out of a parking
space, the vehicle swings out and can drive
onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could
cause you to collide with other road users or
objects. There is a risk of an accident.
Pay attention to other road users or objects.
Stop the vehicle if necessary or cancel the
Driving systems
175
Driving and parking
Z
parking procedure with the Parking Package
with rear view camera.
!
If they cannot be avoided, drive over
obstacles such as curbs slowly and at an
obtuse angle. Otherwise, you may damage
the wheels or tires.
Active Parking Assist may also show parking
spaces which are not suitable for parking, for
example:
R
where parking or stopping is prohibited
R
in front of driveways or entrances and exits
R
on unsuitable surfaces
Parking tips:
R
on narrow roads, drive as close to the park-
ing space as possible
R
parking spaces that are littered or over-
grown might be identified or measured
incorrectly
R
parking spaces that are partially occupied
by trailer drawbars might not be identified
as such or be measured incorrectly
R
snowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking
space being measured inaccurately
R
pay attention to the warning messages of
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC during the
parking procedure (Y page 174)
R
you can intervene in the steering procedure
to correct it at any time. Active Parking
Assist will then be canceled
R
when transporting a load which protrudes
from your vehicle, you should not use Active
Parking Assist
R
never use Active Parking Assist when snow
chains are installed
R
make sure that the tire pressures are always
correct. This has a direct influence on the
parking characteristics of the vehicle
Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces:
R
parallel or at right angles to the direction of
travel
R
on straight roads, not bends
R
on the same level as the road, e.g. not on
the pavement
Detecting parking spaces
Objects located above the detection range of
Active Parking Assist will not be detected
when the parking space is measured. These
are not taken into account when the parking
procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging
loads, tail sections or loading ramps of trucks.
Active Parking Assist may therefore guide you
into the parking space too early.
G
WARNING
If there are objects above the detection
range:
R
the Parking Package with rear view cam-
era may steer too early
R
the vehicle may not stop in front of these
objects
This could cause a collision. There is a risk
of an accident.
If objects are located above the detection
range, stop and deactivate the Parking Pack-
age with rear view camera.
Further information about the detection range
(Y page 173).
Active Parking Assist does not assist you park-
ing in spaces at right angles to the direction of
travel if:
X
two parking spaces are located directly next
to one another
X
the parking space is directly next to a low
obstacle such as a low curb
X
you park forwards
Active Parking Assist does not assist you park-
ing in spaces that are parallel or at right angles
to the direction of travel if:
R
the parking space is on a curb
R
the system reads the parking space as being
blocked, for example by foliage or grass
paving blocks
R
the area is too small for the vehicle to
maneuver into
R
the parking space is bordered by an obsta-
cle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer
G
WARNING
If there are objects above the detection
range:
R
Active Parking Assist may steer too early
R
the vehicle may not stop in front of these
objects
176
Driving systems
Driving and parking
This could cause a collision. There is a risk
of an accident.
If objects are located above the detection
range, stop and deactivate Active Parking
Assist.
:
Detected parking space on the left
;
Parking symbol
=
Detected parking space on the right
Active Parking Assist is switched on automati-
cally when driving forwards. The system is
operational at speeds of up to approximately
22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the
system independently locates and measures
parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.
Active Parking Assist will only detect parking
spaces:
R
parallel or at right angles to the direction of
travel
R
parallel to the direction of travel and at least
59 in (1.5 m) wide
R
parallel to the direction of travel and at least
39.5 in (1.0 m) longer than your vehicle
R
at right angles to the direction of travel and
at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) wider than your vehi-
cle
When driving at speeds below 19 mph
(30 km/h), you will see parking symbol ; as
a status indicator in the instrument cluster.
When a parking space has been detected, an
arrow towards the right or the left also
appears. By default, Active Parking Assist only
displays parking spaces on the front-
passenger side. Parking spaces on the driver's
side are displayed as soon as the turn signal
on the driver's side is activated. When parking
on the driver's side, this must remain activated
until you confirm the use of Active Parking
Assist by pressing the a button on the mul-
tifunction steering wheel. The system automat-
ically determines whether the parking space is
parallel or at right angles to the direction of
travel.
A parking space is displayed while you are
driving past it, and until you are approximately
50 ft (15 m) away from it.
Parking
G
WARNING
Active Parking Assist only supports you with
active steering intervention. If you do not
apply the brakes yourself, there is the risk of
an accident.
Always apply the brakes yourself while
maneuvering and parking.
G
WARNING
The Parking Package with rear view camera
only supports you with active steering inter-
vention. If you do not apply the brakes your-
self, there is the risk of an accident.
Always apply the brakes yourself while
maneuvering and parking.
X
Stop the vehicle when the parking space
symbol shows the desired parking space in
the instrument cluster.
X
Shift the transmission to position k.
The Start Parking Assist? Yes: OK
Start Parking Assist? Yes: OK
No:No: % message appears in the multifunc-
tion display.
X
To cancel the procedure: press the %
button on the multifunction steering wheel
or pull away.
or
X
To park using Active Parking Assist:
press the a button on the multifunction
steering wheel.
The Parking Assist Active Acceler‐
Parking Assist Active Acceler‐
ate and Brake Observe Surroundingsate and Brake Observe Surroundings
message appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
X
Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
X
Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake at
all times. When backing up, drive at a speed
below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Oth-
Driving systems
177
Driving and parking
Z
erwise, Active Parking Assist will be can-
celed.
X
Stop as soon as Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
sounds the continuous warning tone, if not
before.
Maneuvering may be required in tight park-
ing spaces.
The Parking Assist Active Select DParking Assist Active Select D
Observe SurroundingsObserve Surroundings message appears in
the multifunction display.
X
Shift the transmission to position h while
the vehicle is stationary.
Active Parking Assist immediately steers in
the other direction.
The Parking Assist Active Acceler‐Parking Assist Active Acceler‐
ate and Brake Observe Surroundingsate and Brake Observe Surroundings
message appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
i
You will achieve the best results by waiting
for the steering procedure to complete
before pulling away.
X
Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all
times.
X
Stop as soon as Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
sounds the continuous warning tone, if not
before.
The Parking Assist Active Select RParking Assist Active Select R
Observe SurroundingsObserve Surroundings message appears in
the multifunction display.
As soon as the parking procedure is complete,
the Active Parking Assist FinishedActive Parking Assist Finished mes-
sage appears on the multifunction display and
you hear a tone. The vehicle is now parked.
Active Parking Assist no longer supports you
with steering interventions. When Active Park-
ing Assist is finished, you must steer again
yourself. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is still
available.
Parking tips:
R
The way your vehicle is positioned in the
parking space after parking is dependent on
various factors. These include the position
and shape of the vehicles parked in front
and behind it and the conditions of the loca-
tion. It may be the case that Active Parking
Assist guides you too far into a parking
space, or not far enough into it. In some
cases, it may also lead you across or onto
the curb. If necessary, cancel the parking
procedure with Active Parking Assist.
R
You can also preselect transmission position
h. The vehicle redirects and does not drive
as far into the parking space. Should the
transmission change take place too early,
the parking procedure is canceled. A sensi-
ble parking position can no longer be ach-
ieved from this position.
Exiting a parking space
In order that Active Parking Assist can support
you when exiting the parking space:
R
the border of the parking space must be
high enough at the front and the rear. A
curb is too small, for example.
R
the border of the parking space must not be
too wide. Your vehicle can be maneuvered
into a position at a maximum of 45° to the
starting position in the parking space.
R
a maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft
(1.0 m) must be available.
Active Parking Assist can only assist you with
exiting a parking space if you have parked the
vehicle parallel to the direction of travel using
Active Parking Assist.
X
Start the engine.
X
Release the electric parking brake.
X
Switch on the turn signal in the direction
you will drive out of the parking space.
X
Shift the transmission to position h or k.
The Start Parking Assist? Yes: OKStart Parking Assist? Yes: OK
No:No:% message appears in the multifunc-
tion display.
X
To cancel the procedure: press the %
button on the multifunction steering wheel
or pull away.
or
X
To exit a parking space using Active
Parking Assist: press the a button on
the multifunction steering wheel.
The Parking Assist Active Acceler‐
Parking Assist Active Acceler‐
ate and Brake Observe Surroundingsate and Brake Observe Surroundings
message appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
X
Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
X
Pull away, being ready to brake at all times.
Do not exceed a maximum speed of approx-
imately 6 mph (10 km/h) when exiting a
parking space. Otherwise, Active Parking
Assist will be canceled.
178
Driving systems
Driving and parking
X
Depending on the message or as required,
shift the transmission to position h or k
when the vehicle is stationary.
Active Parking Assist immediately steers in
the other direction. The Parking AssistParking Assist
Active Accelerate and BrakeActive Accelerate and Brake
Observe SurroundingsObserve Surroundings message appears
in the multifunction display.
i
You will achieve the best results by waiting
for the steering procedure to complete
before pulling away.
If you back up after activation, the steering
wheel is moved to the straight-ahead posi-
tion.
X
Drive forwards and reverse as prompted by
the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning
displays, several times if necessary.
Once you have exited the parking space com-
pletely, the steering wheel is moved to the
straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and
the Active Parking Assist Finished
Active Parking Assist Finished mes-
sage appears on the multifunction display. You
will then have to steer and merge into traffic
on your own. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is
still available. You can take over the steering
before the vehicle has exited the parking
space completely. This is useful, for example
when you recognize that it is already possible
to pull out of the parking space.
Canceling Active Parking Assist
You can cancel Active Parking Assist at any
time.
X
Stop the movement of the multifunction
steering wheel or steer yourself.
Active Parking Assist will be canceled at
once. The Active Parking Assist Can‐Active Parking Assist Can‐
celedceled message appears in the multifunction
display.
or
X
Press the "Parking Assist PARKTRONIC" but-
ton on the center console (Y page 174).
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is switched off
and Active Parking Assist is immediately
canceled. The Active Parking AssistActive Parking Assist
CanceledCanceled message appears in the multi-
function display.
Active Parking Assist is canceled automatically
if:
R
parking using Active Parking Assist is no
longer possible
R
you are driving faster than 6 mph (10 km/h)
R
a wheel spins, ESP
®
intervenes or fails. The
÷ ESP
®
warning lamp lights up in the
instrument cluster.
A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol
disappears and the Active ParkingActive Parking
Assist CanceledAssist Canceled message appears in the
multifunction display.
When Active Parking Assist is canceled, you
must always steer again yourself.
Reversing camera
General notes
Rear view camera : is an optical parking and
maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind
your vehicle with guide lines in the multimedia
system.
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a
mirror image, as in the rear view mirror.
i
The text shown in the multimedia system
display depends on the language setting.
The following are examples of rear view
camera displays in the multimedia system.
Important safety notes
The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a
replacement for your attention to your immedi-
ate surroundings. You are always responsible
for safe maneuvering and parking. Make sure
that there are no persons, animals or objects
in the maneuvering area when you are maneu-
vering or parking.
Driving systems
179
Driving and parking
Z
Under the following circumstances, the rear
view camera will not function, or will function
in a limited manner:
R
if the trunk lid is open
R
in heavy rain, snow or fog
R
at night or in very dark places
R
if the camera is exposed to very bright light
R
if the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED
lighting (the display may flicker)
R
if there is a sudden change in temperature,
e.g. when driving into a heated garage in
winter
R
if the camera lens is dirty or obstructed.
Observe the notes on cleaning
(Y page 275)
R
if the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this
case, have the camera position and setting
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
The field of vision and other functions of the
rear view camera may be restricted due to
additional accessories on the rear of the vehi-
cle (e.g. license plate holder, bicycle rack).
On vehicles with height-adjustable chassis,
leaving the standard height can result in inac-
curacies in the guide lines, depending on tech-
nical conditions.
i
The contrast of the display may be affec-
ted by the sudden presence of sunlight or
other light sources, e.g. when exiting a
garage. Pay particular attention in this situa-
tion.
i
If usability is severely restricted, e.g. due
to pixel errors, have the display repaired or
replaced.
Activating/deactivating the rear view
camera
X
To activate: make sure that the SmartKey
is in position 2 in the ignition lock.
X
Make sure that the Activation by R gearActivation by R gear
function is selected in the multimedia sys-
tem; see the Digital Operator's Manual.
X
Engage reverse gear.
The multimedia system shows the area
behind the vehicle with guide lines.
The image from the rear view camera is
available throughout the maneuvering proc-
ess.
To deactivate: the rear view camera deacti-
vates if you shift the transmission to position
j, or after driving forwards a short distance.
The inner segments of the warning indicator
are displayed in red if there is a complete sys-
tem failure. The indicator lamp in the
PARKTRONIC button lights up.
If the system fails at the rear of the vehicle:
R
the rear segments are shown in red when
backing up.
R
the rear segments are hidden when driving
forwards.
Displays in the multimedia system
The rear view camera may show a distorted
view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or
not at all. The rear view camera does not show
objects in the following positions:
R
very close to the rear bumper
R
under the rear bumper
R
in close range above the handle on the trunk
lid
!
Objects not at ground level may appear to
be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
R
the bumper of a parked vehicle
R
the drawbar of a trailer
R
the ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
R
the rear section of an HGV
R
a slanted post
Use the guidelines only for orientation.
Approach objects no further than the bot-
tom-most guideline.
:
Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear area
;
White guide line without steering input –
vehicle width including the exterior mirrors
(static)
180
Driving systems
Driving and parking
=
Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, at the cur-
rent steering wheel angle (dynamic)
?
Yellow lane marking the course the tires
will take at the current steering wheel
angle (dynamic)
A
Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear area
B
Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)
C
Bumper
D
Red guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear area
The guide lines are shown when the transmis-
sion is in position k.
The distance specifications only apply to
objects that are at ground level.
:
Front warning display
;
Additional measurement operational readi-
ness indicator for the Parking Package
with rear view camera
=
Rear warning display
Vehicles with the Parking Package with
rear view camera: when the Parking Package
with rear view camera is operational
(Y page 173), additional measurement opera-
tional readiness indicator ; appears in the
multimedia system. If the Parking Package
with rear warning displays are active or light
up, warning displays : and = are also active
or light up correspondingly in the multimedia
system.
"Reverse parking" function
Backing up straight into a parking space
without steering input
:
White guide line without steering input –
vehicle width including the exterior mirrors
(static)
;
Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, at the cur-
rent steering wheel angle (dynamic)
=
Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear area
?
Red guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear area
X
Make sure that the rear view camera is acti-
vated (Y page 180).
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
X
With the help of white guide line :, check
whether the vehicle will fit into the parking
space.
X
Using white guide line : as a guide, care-
fully back up until you reach the end posi-
tion.
Red guide line ? is then at the end of the
parking space. The vehicle is almost parallel
in the parking space.
Driving systems
181
Driving and parking
Z
Reverse perpendicular parking with
steering input
:
Parking space marking
;
Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, at the cur-
rent steering wheel angle (dynamic)
X
Drive past the parking space and bring the
vehicle to a standstill.
X
Make sure that the rear view camera is acti-
vated (Y page 180).
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
X
While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the park-
ing space until yellow guide line ; reaches
parking space marking :.
X
Maintain the steering input and reverse
carefully.
:
Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, at the cur-
rent steering wheel angle (dynamic)
X
Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in
front of the parking space.
The white lane should be as close to parallel
with the parking space marking as possible.
:
White guide line at the current steering
input
;
Parking space marking
X
Turn the steering wheel to the center posi-
tion while the vehicle is stationary.
:
Red guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear area
;
White guide line without steering input
=
End of parking space
X
Back up carefully until you have reached the
final position.
Red guide line : is then at end of parking
space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in
the parking space.
182
Driving systems
Driving and parking
180° view
:
Symbol for the 180° view function
;
Your vehicle
=
Warning displays for the Parking Package
with rear view camera
You can also use the rear view camera to
select a 180° view.
When the Parking Package with rear view cam-
era is operational (Y page 173), a symbol for
your own vehicle appears in the multimedia
system. If the Parking Package with rear view
camera warning displays are active, warning
displays = light up in the multimedia system
in yellow or red accordingly.
ATTENTION ASSIST
General notes
ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,
monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It
is active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 125 mph
(200 km/h) range. If ATTENTION ASSIST
detects typical indicators of fatigue or increas-
ing lapses in concentration on the part of the
driver, it suggests you take a break.
Important safety notes
ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the driver.
It might not always recognize fatigue or
increasing inattentiveness in time or fail to
recognize them at all. The system is not a sub-
stitute for a well-rested and attentive driver.
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is
restricted and warnings may be delayed or not
occur at all:
R
if the length of the journey is less than
approximately 30 minutes
R
if the road condition is poor, e.g. if the sur-
face is uneven or if there are potholes
R
if there is a strong side wind
R
if you have adopted a sporty driving style
with high cornering speeds or high rates of
acceleration
R
if you are predominantly driving slower than
37 mph (60 km/h) or faster than 125 mph
(200 km/h)
R
if you are driving with the Steering Assist of
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC activated
R
if the time has been set incorrectly
R
in active driving situations, such as when
you change lanes or change your speed
The attention level evaluation is deleted and
restarts when the journey is continued, if:
R
you switch off the engine
R
you take off your seat belt and open the
driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or
to take a break
Displaying the attention level
You can have current status information dis-
played in the assistance menu (Y page 197)
of the on-board computer.
X
Select the Assistance display for ATTEN-
TION ASSIST using the on-board computer
(Y page 198).
Driving systems
183
Driving and parking
Z
The following information is displayed:
R
the length of the journey since the last
break.
R
the attention level determined by ATTEN-
TION ASSIST, displayed in a bar display in
five levels from high to low.
R
if ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate
the attention level and cannot output a
warning, the System suspendedSystem suspended message
appears. The bar display then changes the
display, e.g. if you are driving at a speed
below 37 mph (60 km/h) or above 125 mph
(200 km/h).
Activating ATTENTION ASSIST
X
Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-
board computer (Y page 198).
The system determines the attention level of
the driver depending on the setting selec-
ted:
Standard selected: the sensitivity with which
the system determines the attention level is
set to normal.
Sensitive selected: the sensitivity is set
higher. The attention level detected by ATTEN-
TION ASSIST is adapted accordingly and the
driver is warned earlier.
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the
À symbol and OFF appear in the multifunc-
tion display in the assistance display when the
engine is running.
When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactiva-
ted, it is automatically reactivated after the
engine has been stopped. The sensitivity
selected corresponds to the last selection acti-
vated (standard/sensitive).
Warning in the multifunction display
If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration
are detected, a warning appears in the multi-
function display: Attention Assist: TakeAttention Assist: Take
a break!a break!
In addition to the message shown in the multi-
function display, you will then hear a warning
tone.
X
If necessary, take a break.
X
Confirm the message by pressing the a
button on the steering wheel.
On long journeys, take regular breaks in good
time to allow yourself to rest. If you do not
take a break, you will be warned again after
15 minutes at the earliest. The precondition
for this is that ATTENTION ASSIST still detects
typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lap-
ses in concentration.
Vehicles with COMAND: if a warning is
issued in the multifunction display, a service
station search is performed in COMAND. You
can select a service station and navigation to
this service station will then begin. This func-
tion can be activated and deactivated in
COMAND.
Active Driving Assistance package
General notes
The Active Driving Assistance package con-
sists of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
(Y page 156), Active Steering Assist, Active
Blind Spot Assist (Y page 184) and Active
Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 187).
Active Blind Spot Assist
General notes
Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on
either side of the vehicle that are not directly
visible to the driver with two lateral, rear-
facing radar sensors. A warning lamp lights up
in the exterior mirrors and draws your atten-
tion to vehicles detected in the monitored
area. If you then switch on the corresponding
turn signal to change lane, you will also
receive an optical and audible warning. If a risk
of lateral collision is detected, corrective brak-
ing may help you avoid a collision. Before a
course-correcting brake application, Active
Blind Spot Assist evaluates the space in the
direction of travel and at the sides of the vehi-
cle. For this, Active Blind Spot Assist uses the
forward-facing radar sensors.
Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a
speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
Important safety notes
Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and is
not a substitute for attentive driving.
184
Driving systems
Driving and parking
G
WARNING
Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to:
R
vehicles overtaken too closely on the side,
placing them in the blind spot area
R
vehicles which approach with a large
speed differential and overtake your vehi-
cle
As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei-
ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit-
uations. There is a risk of an accident.
Always observe the traffic conditions care-
fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
i
USA only: This device has been approved
by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System".
The radar sensor is intended for use in an
automotive radar system only. Removal,
tampering, or altering of the device will void
any warranties, and is not permitted by the
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any
non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.
i
Canada only: This device complies with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Removal, tampering, or altering of the
device will void any warranties, and is not
permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use
in any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.
Radar sensors
The radar sensors for Active Blind Spot Assist
are integrated in the rear bumper and in the
radiator trim. Make sure that the bumpers and
radiator trim are free from dirt, ice and slush.
The rear sensors must not be covered, for
example by cycle racks or overhanging cargo.
Following a severe impact or in the event of
damage to the bumpers, have the function of
the radar sensors checked at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop. Active Blind Spot Assist may
otherwise no longer work properly.
Monitoring area
G
WARNING
Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all
traffic situations and road users. There is a
risk of an accident.
Always make sure that there is sufficient
distance on the side for other traffic or
obstacles.
Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up
to 10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle and
directly next to your vehicle, as shown in the
diagram.
The detection of obstacles can be impaired in
the case of:
R
there is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
R
poor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or
spray
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
indicated.
Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrow
vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or
may only detect them too late.
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may
be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not
driving in the middle of their lane. This may be
the case if there are vehicles driving at the
inner edge of their lanes.
Driving systems
185
Driving and parking
Z
Due to the nature of the system:
R
warnings may be issued in error when driv-
ing close to crash barriers or similar solid
lane borders.
R
warnings may be interrupted when driving
alongside particularly long vehicles, e.g.
trucks, for a prolonged time.
Indicator and warning display
:
Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp
Active Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds
below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehi-
cles in the monitoring range are then not indi-
cated.
When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated,
indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights
up yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph
(30 km/h). At speeds above 20 mph
(30 km/h), the indicator lamp goes out and
Active Blind Spot Assist is operational.
If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring
range at speeds above approximately 20 mph
(30 km/h), warning lamp : on the corre-
sponding side lights up red. This warning
always occurs when a vehicle enters the moni-
toring range from behind or from the side.
When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only
occurs if the difference in speed is less than
7 mph (12 km/h).
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse
gear is engaged. In this event, Active Blind
Spot Assist is no longer active.
The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps
is adjusted automatically according to the
ambient light.
Visual and acoustic collision warning
If you switch on the turn signals to change
lanes and a vehicle is detected in the side
monitoring range, you receive a visual and
acoustic collision warning. You will then hear a
double warning tone and red warning lamp :
flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detected
vehicles are indicated by the flashing of red
warning lamp :. There are no further warning
tones.
Course-correcting brake application
If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a
lateral collision in the monitoring range, a
course-correcting brake application is carried
out. This is meant to assist you in avoiding a
collision.
G
WARNING
A course-correcting brake application can-
not always prevent a collision. There is a risk
of an accident.
Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,
especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns
you or makes a course-correcting brake
application. Always maintain a safe distance
at the sides.
If a course-correcting brake application
occurs, red warning lamp : flashes in the
exterior mirror and a dual warning tone
sounds. In addition, display ; underlining the
danger of a side collision appears in the multi-
function display.
In very rare cases, the system may make an
inappropriate brake application. A course-cor-
recting brake application may be interrupted
at any time, e.g. if you steer slightly in the
opposite direction or depress the accelerator
pedal more firmly.
The course-correcting brake application is
available in the speed range between 20 mph
(30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).
186
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Either no braking application, or a course-cor-
recting brake application adapted to the driv-
ing situation occurs if:
R
there are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash
barriers, located on both sides of your vehi-
cle.
R
a vehicle approaches you too closely at the
side.
R
you have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds.
R
you clearly brake or accelerate.
R
a driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
ESP
®
or PRE-SAFE
®
Brake.
R
ESP
®
is switched off.
R
a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is
detected.
Switching on Active Blind Spot Assist
X
Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist is
activated (Y page 199).
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock.
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors
light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds
and then turn yellow.
Active Lane Keeping Assist
General notes
Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area
in front of your vehicle by means of multifunc-
tion camera : at the top of the windshield.
Various areas to the front, rear and side of
your vehicle are also monitored with the aid of
the radar sensor system. Active Lane Keeping
Assist detects lane markings on the road and
can warn you before you leave your lane unin-
tentionally. If you do not react to the warning,
a lane-correcting application of the brakes can
bring the vehicle back into the original lane.
This function is available in a speed range
between 40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and
200 km/h).
For Active Lane Keeping Assist to assist you
when driving, the radar sensor system must be
operational.
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active
Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the
risk of accident nor override the laws of phys-
ics. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot take
into account road, weather or traffic condi-
tions. Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an
aid. You are responsible for the distance to the
vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking
in good time and for staying in your lane.
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continu-
ously keep your vehicle in its lane.
G
WARNING
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always
clearly detect lane markings.
Driving systems
187
Driving and parking
Z
In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist
can:
R
give an unnecessary warning and then
make a course-correcting brake applica-
tion
R
neither give a warning nor intervene
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and keep within the lane, espe-
cially if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts
you. Terminate the intervention in a non-crit-
ical driving situation.
The system may be impaired or may not func-
tion if:
R
there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi-
cient illumination of the road, or due to
snow, rain, fog or heavy spray
R
there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
the sun or reflection from other vehicles
(e.g. if the road surface is wet)
R
the windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged
or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the
vicinity of the camera
R
there are no lane markings, or several
unclear lane markings are present, e.g.
around construction sites
R
the lane markings are worn away, dark or
covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
R
the distance to the vehicle in front is too
short and thus the lane markings cannot be
detected
R
the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
branch off, cross one another or merge
R
the road is narrow and winding
R
there are highly variable shade conditions
on the roadway
R
no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane
and there are broken lane markings
Warning vibration in the steering wheel
A warning may be given if a front wheel passes
over a lane marking. You will then be warned
by means of a vibration through the steering
wheel lasting for up to 1.5 seconds.
In order that you are warned only when neces-
sary and in good time if you cross the lane
marking, the system detects certain condi-
tions and warns you accordingly.
The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
R
you approach the outer lane marking on a
bend
R
the road has very wide lanes, e.g. a freeway
R
the system detects solid lane markings
The warning vibration occurs later if:
R
the road has narrow lanes
R
you cut the corner on a bend
Lane-correcting brake application
G
WARNING
A lane-correcting brake application cannot
always bring the vehicle back into the origi-
nal lane. There is a risk of an accident.
Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,
especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist
warns you or makes a lane-correcting brake
application.
G
WARNING
Active Lane Keeping Assist only detects traf-
fic conditions or road users to a limited
extent. In very rare cases, the system may
make an inappropriate brake application,
e.g. after intentionally driving over a solid
lane marking. There is a risk of an accident.
An inappropriate brake application may be
interrupted at any time if you steer slightly
in the opposite direction. Always make sure
that there is sufficient distance on the side
for other traffic or obstacles.
In rare cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist
could detect broken line markings or special
structures on the road surface as solid lane
markings. An inappropriate brake application
can be interrupted at any time, for example if
you steer slightly in the opposite direction.
188
Driving systems
Driving and parking
If you leave your lane, under certain circum-
stances the vehicle will brake briefly on one
side. This is meant to assist you in bringing the
vehicle back to the original lane.
If a lane-correcting brake application occurs,
display : appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
A lane-correcting brake application can be
made after driving over a lane marking recog-
nized as being solid or broken. Before this, a
warning must have been issued by means of a
vibration through the steering wheel. In addi-
tion, a lane with lane markings on both sides
must have been detected.
In the case of a broken lane marking being
detected, a lane-correcting brake application
can only be made if a vehicle has been detec-
ted in the adjacent lane. The following vehicles
can have an influence on brake application:
oncoming traffic, vehicles that are overtaking
and vehicles that are driving parallel to your
vehicle.
i
A further lane-correcting brake application
can only occur after your vehicle has
returned to the original lane.
No lane-correcting brake application occurs if:
R
you clearly and actively steer, brake or
accelerate
R
you cut the corner on a sharp bend
R
you have switched on the turn signal
R
a driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
ESP
®
, PRE-SAFE
®
Brake or Active Blind Spot
Assist
R
you have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds or high rates of accel-
eration
R
ESP
®
is switched off
R
the transmission is not in position h
R
an obstacle has been detected in the lane in
which you are driving
R
when a loss of tire pressure or a defective
tire has been detected and displayed
There is a possibility that the Active Lane
Keeping Assist could misjudge the given traffic
situation. An inappropriate brake application
may be interrupted at any time if you:
R
steer slightly in the opposite direction
R
switch on the turn signal
R
clearly brake or accelerate
A lane-correcting brake application is interrup-
ted automatically if:
R
a driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
ESP
®
, PRE-SAFE
®
Brake or Active Blind Spot
Assist
R
lane markings are no longer detected
Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist
X
Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using
the on-board computer; to do so, select
Standard
Standard or AdaptiveAdaptive (Y page 199).
If you drive at speeds above 40 mph
(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
the lines in the assistance graphic display
are shown in green (Y page 198). Active
Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use.
When StandardStandard is selected,
No warning vibration occurs if:
R
you switch on the turn signals. In this
event, the warnings are suppressed for a
certain period of time.
R
a driving safety system intervenes, such
as ABS, BAS or ESP
®
.
When AdaptiveAdaptive is selected,
No warning vibration occurs if:
R
you switch on the turn signals. In this
event, the warnings are suppressed for a
certain period of time.
R
a driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
ABS, BAS or ESP
®
.
R
you accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
R
you brake hard.
R
you steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
obstacle or change lanes quickly.
R
you cut the corner on a sharp bend.
Driving systems
189
Driving and parking
Z
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the
vehicle when driving, you may be distracted
from the traffic situation. You could also
lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of
an accident.
Only operate this equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that
this is possible, park the vehicle paying
attention to traffic conditions and operate
the equipment when the vehicle is station-
ary.
You must observe the legal requirements for
the country in which you are currently driving
when operating the on-board computer.
G
WARNING
If the instrument cluster has failed or mal-
functioned, you may not recognize function
restrictions in systems relevant to safety.
The operating safety of your vehicle may be
impaired. There is a risk of an accident.
Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked
at a qualified specialist workshop immedi-
ately.
The on-board computer only shows messages
or warnings from certain systems in the multi-
function display. You should therefore make
sure your vehicle is operating safely at all
times.
If the operating safety of your vehicle is
impaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to do
so. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.
For an overview, see the instrument panel
illustration (Y page 33).
Displays and operation
Instrument cluster lighting
The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the
displays and the controls in the vehicle interior
can be adjusted using the brightness control
knob.
The brightness control knob is located on the
bottom left of the instrument cluster
(Y page 33).
X
Turn the brightness control knob clockwise
or counter-clockwise.
If you turn the light switch (Y page 109) to
the Ã, T or L position, the bright-
ness will depend upon the brightness of the
ambient light.
The light sensor in the instrument cluster
automatically controls the brightness of the
multifunction display. In daylight, the dis-
plays in the instrument cluster are not illu-
minated.
Speedometer with segments
The segments in the speedometer indicate
which speed range is available.
R
Cruise control activated (Y page 154):
The segments light up from the stored
speed to the maximum speed.
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC activated
(Y page 156):
One or two segments in the set speed range
light up.
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC detects a
vehicle in front moving more slowly than the
stored speed:
The segments between the speed of the
vehicle in front and the stored speed light
up.
Tachometer
!
Do not drive in the overrevving range, as
this could damage the engine.
The red band in the tachometer indicates the
engine's overrevving range.
The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the
engine when the red band is reached.
Outside temperature display
You should pay special attention to road con-
ditions when temperatures are around freezing
point.
190
Displays and operation
On-board computer and displays
Bear in mind that the outside temperature dis-
play indicates the temperature measured and
does not record the road temperature.
The outside temperature display is in the mul-
tifunction display (Y page 192).
A change in the outside temperature is shown
in the multifunction display after a delay.
Coolant temperature gage
G
WARNING
Opening the hood when the engine is over-
heated or when there is a fire in the engine
compartment could expose you to hot gases
or other service products. There is a risk of
injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department.
!
A display message is shown if the coolant
temperature is too high.
If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡
(120 †), do not continue driving. The
engine will otherwise be damaged.
The coolant temperature gage is in the instru-
ment cluster on the right-hand side
(Y page 33).
The H marking in the coolant temperature
gauge corresponds to a coolant temperature
of approximately 248 ‡ (120 †).
Under normal operating conditions and at the
correct coolant level, the coolant temperature
gauge may rise to the H marking.
Operating the on-board computer
Overview
:
Multifunction display
;
Right control panel
=
Left control panel
X
To activate the on-board computer: turn
the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition
lock.
You can control the multifunction display and
the settings in the on-board computer using
the buttons on the multifunction steering
wheel.
Left control panel
=
;
R
Calls up the menu and menu bar
9
:
Press briefly:
R
Scrolls in lists
R
Selects a submenu or function
R
In the AudioAudio menu: selects the
previous or next station, when
the preset list or station list is
active, or an audio track or video
scene
R
In the TelTel (telephone) menu:
switches to the phone book and
selects a name or telephone
number
Displays and operation
191
On-board computer and displays
Z
9
:
Press and hold:
R
In the Audio
Audio menu: selects a pre-
set list or a station list in the
desired frequency range, selects
an audio track or video scene
using rapid scrolling
R
In the TelTel (Telephone) menu:
starts rapid scrolling if the phone
book is open
a
R
Confirms the selection or display
message
R
In the TelTel (Telephone) menu:
switches to the telephone book
and starts dialing the selected
number
%
Press briefly:
R
Back
R
Switches off the Voice Control
System
R
Hides display messages or calls
up the last TripTrip menu function
used
R
Exits the telephone book/redial
memory
%
Press and hold:
R
Calls up the standard display in
the TripTrip menu
Right control panel
~
R
Rejects or ends a call
R
Exits the telephone book/redial
memory
6
R
Makes or accepts a call
R
Switches to the redial memory
W
X
R
Adjusts the volume
8
R
Mute
?
R
Switches on the Voice Control
System
Further information on the Voice Control Sys-
tem is available in the separate operating
instructions.
Multifunction display
:
Drive program (Y page 135)
;
Transmission position (Y page 135)
=
Text field
?
Menu bar
A
Time
B
Outside temperature or speed
(Y page 199)
Set the time using the multimedia system; see
the Digital Operator's Manual.
X
To display menu bar ?: press the =
or ; button on the steering wheel.
If you do not press the buttons any longer,
menu bar ? is faded out after a few sec-
onds.
Text field = shows the selected menu or
submenu and display messages.
Possible displays in the multifunction dis-
play:
R
Z Gearshift recommendation, when shifting
manually (Y page 143)
R
j Active Parking Assist (Y page 175)
R
CRUISECRUISE Cruise control (Y page 154)
R
_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist
(Y page 112)
R
è ECO start/stop function (Y page 129)
R
ë HOLD function (Y page 165)
R
a Active Steering Assist (Y page 156)
192
Displays and operation
On-board computer and displays
Menus and submenus
Menu overview
Using the = or ; button on the steering
wheel, open the menu bar.
Operating the on-board computer
(Y page 191).
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can
select the following menu:
R
TripTrip menu (Y page 193)
R
NaviNavi menu (navigation instructions)
(Y page 194)
R
AudioAudio menu (Y page 195)
R
TelTel menu (telephone) (Y page 196)
R
DriveAssistDriveAssist menu (assistance)
(Y page 197)
R
Serv.Serv. menu (Y page 199)
R
Sett.
Sett. menu (settings) (Y page 199)
R
AMGAMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
(Y page 202)
Trip menu
Standard display
X
Press and hold the % button on the
steering wheel until the TripTrip menu with trip
odometer : and odometer ; appears.
Trip computer "From Start" or "From
Reset"
:
Distance
;
Driving time
=
Average speed
?
Average fuel consumption
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Trip
Trip menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
From StartFrom Start or From ResetFrom Reset.
The values in the From StartFrom Start submenu are
calculated from the start of a journey whilst
the values in the From ResetFrom Reset submenu are
calculated from the last time the submenu was
reset (Y page 194).
In the following cases, the trip computer is
automatically reset From StartFrom Start:
R
the ignition has been switched off for more
than four hours.
R
999 hours have been exceeded.
R
9,999 miles have been exceeded.
When 9,999 hours or 99,999 miles have been
exceeded, the trip computer is automatically
reset From ResetFrom Reset.
ECO display
The ECO display is not available in Mercedes-
AMG vehicles.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
ECO DISPLAYECO DISPLAY.
If the ignition remains switched off for longer
than four hours, the ECO display will be auto-
matically reset.
For more information on the ECO display, see
(Y page 150).
Displaying the range and current fuel
consumption
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the menu only dis-
plays approximate range :.
Menus and submenus
193
On-board computer and displays
Z
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.
X
Press 9 or : to select the display
with approximate range : and current fuel
consumption ;.
Approximate range : that can be covered
is calculated according to your current driv-
ing style and the amount of fuel in the tank.
If there is only a small amount of fuel left in
the fuel tank, a vehicle being refueled C
appears instead of approximate range :.
Recuperation display = shows you if
energy has been recuperated from the
kinetic energy in overrun mode and saved in
the battery. Recuperation display =
depends on the engine installed and is
therefore not available in all vehicles.
Digital speedometer
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select the
digital speedometer.
A gearshift recommendation Z may also
appear in the display.
Observe the information on gearshift recom-
mendation when shifting manually
(Y page 143).
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: a gearshift recom-
mendation is shown in the status bar of the
multifunction display and not in the digital
speedometer display.
Resetting values
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select the
function that you wish to reset.
X
Press a to confirm your selection.
X
Press : to select YesYes and press a to
confirm.
You can reset the values of the following func-
tions:
R
Trip odometer
R
"From Start" trip computer
R
"From Reset" trip computer
R
ECO display
If you reset the values in the ECO display, the
values in the "From Start" trip computer are
also reset. If you reset the values in the "From
Start" trip computer, the values in the ECO dis-
play are also reset.
Navigation system menu
Displaying navigation instructions
In the NaviNavi menu, the multifunction display
shows navigation instructions.
Observe the additional information on naviga-
tion in the Digital Operator's Manual of the
multimedia system.
X
Switch on the multimedia system (see the
Digital Operator's Manual)
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the NaviNavi menu.
Route guidance not active
:
Direction of travel
;
Current road
Route guidance active
No change of direction announced
:
Distance to destination
;
Distance to the next change of direction
=
Current road
?
"Follow the road's course" symbol
194
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
Change of direction announced without
a lane recommendation
:
Road into which the change of direction
leads
;
Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display
=
Change-of-direction symbol
When a change of direction is announced, you
will see change-of-direction symbol = and
distance graphic ;. The distance indicator
shortens towards the top of the display as you
approach the point of the announced change
of direction.
Change of direction announced with a
lane recommendation
:
Road into which the change of direction
leads
;
Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display
=
Lanes not recommended
?
Recommended lane and new lane during a
change of direction
A
Change-of-direction symbol
On multilane roads, new lane recommenda-
tions can be displayed for the next change of
direction if the digital map supports this data.
During the change of direction, new lanes may
be added.
Lane not recommended =: you will not be
able to complete the next change of direction
if you stay in this lane.
Recommended lane and new lane during a
change of direction ?: in this lane you will be
able to complete the next two changes of
direction without changing lane.
Other status indicators of the naviga-
tion system
The navigation system displays additional
information and the vehicle status.
Possible displays:
R
New Route...New Route... or Calculating Route...Calculating Route...
A new route is calculated.
R
Road Not MappedRoad Not Mapped
The vehicle position is inside the area of the
digital map but the road is not recognized,
e.g. newly built streets, car parks or private
land.
R
No RouteNo Route
No route could be calculated to the selected
destination.
R
O
You have reached the destination or an
intermediate destination.
Audio menu
Selecting a radio station
:
Active station list
;
Station frequency with memory position
The multifunction display shows station ;
with station frequency or station name. The
preset position is only displayed along with
station ; if this has been stored.
X
Switch on the multimedia system and select
radio (see the Digital Operator's Manual).
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Audio
Audio menu.
Menus and submenus
195
On-board computer and displays
Z
X
To select a preset list or station list:
press and briefly hold the 9 or : but-
ton until the preset list or station list in the
desired frequency range is shown.
X
To select a station: briefly press 9
or :.
SIRIUS XM
®
satellite radio acts like a normal
radio.
For more information on radio operation, see
"Satellite radio" in the Digital Operator's Man-
ual.
Operating an audio player or media
You can play audio files from various audio
players or data media, depending on the
equipment installed in the vehicle.
X
Switch on the multimedia system and select
CD or MP3 mode (see the Digital Operator's
Manual).
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the AudioAudio menu.
X
To select the next/previous track: briefly
press the 9 or : button.
X
To select a track from the track list
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9
or : button until desired track :
appears.
If you press and hold the 9 or : but-
ton, the rapid scrolling speed is increased.
Not all audio players or media support this
function.
If track information is saved on the audio
player or media, the multifunction display
will show the number and title of the track.
Video DVD operation
X
Switch on the multimedia system and select
video DVD (see the Digital Operator's Man-
ual).
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the AudioAudio menu.
X
To select the next or previous scene:
briefly press the 9 or : button.
X
To select a scene from the scene list
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9
or : button until desired scene :
appears.
Telephone menu
Introduction
G
WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the
vehicle when driving, you may be distracted
from the traffic situation. You could also
lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of
an accident.
Only operate this equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that
this is possible, park the vehicle paying
attention to traffic conditions and operate
the equipment when the vehicle is station-
ary.
When telephoning, you must observe the legal
requirements for the country in which you are
currently driving.
X
Switch on the mobile phone (see the manu-
facturer’s operating instructions).
X
Switch on the multimedia system (see the
Digital Operator's Manual)
196
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
X
Establish a Bluetooth
®
connection to the
multimedia system (Y page 246).
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the TelTel menu.
You will see one of the following display mes-
sages in the multifunction display:
R
Phone READYPhone READY or the name of the network
provider: the mobile phone has found a net-
work and is ready to receive.
R
Phone No ServicePhone No Service: there is no network
available or the mobile phone is searching
for a network.
Accepting a call
If someone calls you when you are in the TelTel
menu, a display message appears in the multi-
function display.
You can accept a call at any time regardless of
the menu selected.
X
Press the 6 button on the steering wheel
to accept an incoming call.
Rejecting or ending a call
X
Press the ~ button on the steering wheel
to reject or end a call.
Selecting an entry in the phone book
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the TelTel menu.
X
Press the 9, : or a button to
switch to the phone book.
X
Authorize access to the phone book on the
phone.
X
Press : or 9 to select the names one
after the other.
or
X
To start rapid scrolling: press and hold
the : or 9 button for longer than one
second.
The names in the phone book are displayed
quickly one after the other.
Rapid scrolling stops when you release the
button or reach the end of the list.
X
If only one telephone number is stored
for a name: press the 6 or a button
to start dialing.
or
X
If there is more than one number for a
particular name: press the 6 or a
button to display the numbers.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select the
number you want to dial.
X
Press the 6 or a button to start dial-
ing.
or
X
To exit the telephone book: press the
~ or % button.
Redialing
The on-board computer saves the last names
or numbers dialed in the redial memory.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the TelTel menu.
X
Press the 6 button to switch to the
redial memory.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select the
desired name or number.
X
Press the 6 or a button to start dial-
ing.
or
X
To exit the redial memory: press the ~
or % button.
Assistance menu
Introduction
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, in the
DriveAssistDriveAssist menu, you have the following
options:
R
Displaying the assistance graphic
(Y page 198)
R
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: setting the vehicle
level (Y page 170)
R
Activating/deactivating Active Steering
Assist (Y page 198)
R
Activating/deactivating Active Brake Assist
(Y page 198)
R
Activating/deactivating Active Brake Assist
with cross-traffic function (Y page 198)
R
Activating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST
(Y page 198)
R
Activating/deactivating Active Blind Spot
Assist (Y page 199)
R
Activating/deactivating Active Lane Keeping
Assist (Y page 199)
Menus and submenus
197
On-board computer and displays
Z
Displaying the assistance graphic
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssist menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
Assist. GraphicAssist. Graphic.
X
Press a to confirm your selection.
The multifunction display shows the Dis-
tance Assist DISTRONIC distance display in
the assistance graphic display.
The assistance graphic shows you the status
of and/or information from other driving
systems or driving safety systems:
R
Distance Assist DISTRONIC (Y page 156)
R
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-
tion (Y page 70)
R
ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 183)
R
Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 187)
X
Press : to display the ATTEN-
TION ASSIST assessment.
Activating or deactivating Active
Steering Assist
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssist menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
Active Steering AssistActive Steering Assist.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
The current selection appears.
X
To activate/deactivate: press the a
button again.
When Active Steering Assist is activated, the
multifunction display displays the ActiveActive
Steering AssistSteering Assist OnOn message.
Further information on Active Steering Assist
(Y page 197).
Activating/deactivating Active Brake
Assist
You can use this function to activate or deacti-
vate Active Brake Assist.
You can use the function to activate or deacti-
vate Active Brake Assist or, on vehicles with
the Driving Assistance Plus package, to acti-
vate or deactivate Active Brake Assist with
cross-traffic function.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the DriveAssist
DriveAssist menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
Brake AssistBrake Assist.
X
Press a to confirm.
The current selection appears.
X
To activate/deactivate: press the a
button again.
When Active Brake Assist or Active Brake
Assist with cross-traffic function is deactiva-
ted, the æ symbol appears in the multi-
function display in the assistance graphic
display.
Further information on Active Brake Assist
(Y page 63).
Further information about Active Brake Assist
with cross-traffic function (Y page 70).
Setting ATTENTION ASSIST
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssist menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
Attention AssistAttention Assist.
X
Press a to confirm.
The current selection appears.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to set OffOff,
StandardStandard or SensitiveSensitive.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the
é symbol appears in the multifunction
display in the assistance graphics display.
Further information on ATTENTION ASSIST
(Y page 183).
198
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
Activating/deactivating Active Blind
Spot Assist
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the DriveAssist
DriveAssist menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
Blind Spot AssistBlind Spot Assist.
X
Press a to confirm your selection.
The current selection appears.
X
To activate/deactivate: press the a
button again.
Further information on Active Blind Spot Assist
(Y page 184).
Activating/deactivating Active Lane
Keeping Assist
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the DriveAssist
DriveAssist menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
Lane Keeping AssistLane Keeping Assist.
X
Press a to confirm your selection.
The current selection appears.
X
Press a again.
X
Press : or 9 to set OffOff, StandardStandard or
AdaptiveAdaptive.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
When Active Lane Keeping Assist is activa-
ted, the multifunction display shows the
lane markings as bright lines in the assis-
tance graphic.
Further information on Active Lane Keeping
Assist (Y page 187).
Service menu
Depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle, you have the following options in the
Serv.
Serv. menu:
R
Calling up display messages (Y page 205)
R
Checking the tire pressure electronically
(Y page 299)
R
Calling up the service due date
(Y page 270)
Settings menu
Introduction
Depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle, in the Sett.Sett. menu you have the fol-
lowing options:
R
Changing the instrument cluster settings
(Y page 199)
R
Changing the light settings (Y page 200)
R
Changing the vehicle settings (Y page 201)
R
Changing the convenience settings
(Y page 201)
R
Restoring the factory settings (Y page 202)
Instrument cluster
Selecting the distance unit
The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:
Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: func-
tion allows you to choose whether certain dis-
plays appear in kilometers or miles in the mul-
tifunction display.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Instrument ClusterInstrument Cluster submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: func-
tion.
The current setting kmkm or milesmiles appears.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
The selected unit of measurement for distance
applies to:
R
the digital speedometer in the TripTrip menu
R
the odometer and trip odometer
R
the trip computer
R
the current consumption and the range
R
navigation instructions in the NaviNavi menu
R
cruise control
R
DISTRONIC
R
ASSYST PLUS
Selecting permanent display
The Permanent Display:Permanent Display: function allows you
to choose whether the multifunction display
always shows the outside temperature or the
speed.
The speed display is inverse to the speedome-
ter.
Menus and submenus
199
On-board computer and displays
Z
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Instrument ClusterInstrument Cluster submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Permanent Display:
Permanent Display: function.
The current setting, Outside Temperature
Outside Temperature
or Speedometer [km/h]Speedometer [km/h] or SpeedometerSpeedometer
[mph][mph], appears.
X
To change the setting: press a again.
Lights
Setting the daytime running lamps
This function is not available in Canada.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
LightLight submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Daytime Running LightsDaytime Running Lights function.
If the Daytime Running LightsDaytime Running Lights function
has been switched on, the cone of light and
the W symbol in the multifunction display
are shown in orange.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
Further information on daytime running lamps
(Y page 109).
Setting the brightness of the ambient
lighting
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
LightLight submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Amb. Light +/-Amb. Light +/- function.
The current setting appears.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to adjust the
brightness to any level from OffOff to Level 5Level 5
(bright).
X
Press the a or % button to save the
setting.
Setting the ambient lighting color
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Sett.
Sett. menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
LightLight submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Amb. Light Col.Amb. Light Col. function.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to set the
color to SOLARSOLAR, SOLAR OrangeSOLAR Orange or SOLARSOLAR
RedRed.
X
Press the a or % button to save the
setting.
Activating/deactivating surround light-
ing and exterior lighting delayed switch-
off
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Sett.
Sett. menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
LightsLights submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press : or 9 to select the Sur‐Sur‐
round Lightinground Lighting function.
If the Surround LightingSurround Lighting function is acti-
vated, the multifunction display shows the
light cone and the area around the vehicle in
orange.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
Deactivating exterior lighting delayed switch-
off temporarily:
X
Before leaving the vehicle, turn the Smart-
Key to position u in the ignition lock.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock.
Exterior lighting delayed switch-off is deacti-
vated.
Exterior lighting delayed switch-off is reactiva-
ted the next time you start the engine.
If you have activated the Surround LightingSurround Lighting
function and you turn the light switch to Ã,
the following functions are activated when it is
dark:
R
surround lighting: the exterior lighting
remains lit for 40 seconds after unlocking
with the SmartKey. If you start the engine,
the surround lighting is switched off and
200
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
automatic headlamp mode is activated
(Y page 109).
R
exterior lighting delayed switch-off: the
exterior lighting remains lit for 60 seconds
after the engine is switched off. If you close
all the doors and the trunk lid, the exterior
lighting goes off after 15 seconds.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, when
the surround lighting and delayed switch-off
exterior lighting are on, the following light up:
R
parking lamps
R
low-beam headlamps
R
daytime running lamps
R
side marker lamps
R
surround lighting in the exterior mirrors
Activating/deactivating the interior
lighting delayed switch-off
If you activate the Interior LightingInterior Lighting
DelayDelay function, the interior lighting remains
on for 20 seconds after you remove the Smart-
Key from the ignition lock.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
LightLight submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Interior Lighting DelayInterior Lighting Delay function.
When the Interior Lighting DelayInterior Lighting Delay func-
tion is activated, the vehicle interior is dis-
played in orange in the multifunction dis-
play.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
Vehicle
Activating/deactivating the automatic
door locking mechanism
If you activate the Automatic Door LockAutomatic Door Lock
function, the vehicle is centrally locked above
a speed of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h).
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Vehicle
Vehicle submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Automatic Door Lock
Automatic Door Lock function.
When the Automatic Door LockAutomatic Door Lock function
is activated, the multifunction display shows
the left-hand vehicle door in orange.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
For further information on the automatic lock-
ing feature, see (Y page 81).
Activating/deactivating the acoustic
locking verification signal
If you switch on the Acoustic LockAcoustic Lock function,
an acoustic signal sounds when you lock the
vehicle.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
VehicleVehicle submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Acoustic LockAcoustic Lock function.
If the Acoustic LockAcoustic Lock function is activated,
the & symbol in the multifunction display
lights up orange.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
Comfort
Activating/deactivating the EASY-
ENTRY/EXIT feature
G
WARNING
When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts
the steering wheel, you and other vehicle
occupants – particularly children – could
become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-
ing adjustments, make sure that no one has
any body parts in the sweep of the steering
wheel.
If somebody becomes trapped:
R
press one of the memory function posi-
tion buttons, or
R
move the switch for steering wheel
adjustment in the opposite direction to
that in which the steering wheel is mov-
ing.
The adjustment process is stopped.
Menus and submenus
201
On-board computer and displays
Z
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
ConvenienceConvenience submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Using : or 9, select the EasyEasy
Entry/ExitEntry/Exit function.
If the Easy Entry/ExitEasy Entry/Exit function is activa-
ted, the multifunction display shows the
steering wheel in orange.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT
feature (Y page 103).
Switching the seat belt adjustment
on/off
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Sett.
Sett. menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
ConvenienceConvenience submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Belt AdjustmentBelt Adjustment function.
When the Belt AdjustmentBelt Adjustment function is
activated, the seat belt is displayed in
orange in the multifunction display.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
For further information on belt adjustment,
see (Y page 44).
Switching the fold-in mirrors when lock-
ing feature on/off
This function is only available when the vehicle
is equipped with the electrical fold-in function.
This function is only available in Canada.
When you activate the Auto. Mirror Fold‐Auto. Mirror Fold‐
inging function, the exterior mirrors are folded in
when the vehicle is locked.
If you have switched on the Auto. MirrorAuto. Mirror
Folding
Folding function and you fold in the exterior
mirrors using the button on the door
(Y page 105), they will not fold out automati-
cally. The exterior mirrors can then only be fol-
ded out using the button on the door.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Convenience
Convenience submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Auto. Mirror Folding
Auto. Mirror Folding function.
If the Auto. Mirror FoldingAuto. Mirror Folding function is
switched on, the multifunction display
shows the exterior mirror in orange.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
Restoring the factory settings
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Factory SettingFactory Setting submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
The Reset All Settings?Reset All Settings? function
appears.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select NoNo
or YesYes.
X
Press the a button to confirm the selec-
tion.
If you have selected YesYes and confirmed, the
multifunction display shows a confirmation
message.
For safety reasons, the Daytime Running
Daytime Running
LightsLights function in the LightsLights submenu is
only reset if the vehicle is stationary.
AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Warm-up
:
Digital speedometer
;
Gear indicator
=
Upshift indicator
?
Engine oil temperature
A
Coolant temperature
B
Transmission oil temperature
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the AMG
AMG menu.
Upshift indicator: upshift indicator UPUP =
indicates that the engine has reached the
overrevving range when in the manual drive
program.
202
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
Engine and transmission oil tempera-
ture: when the engine and transmission are
at normal operating temperature, oil tem-
perature ? and B are displayed in white in
the multifunction display.
If the multifunction display shows oil tem-
perature ? or B in blue, the engine or the
transmission are not yet at normal operating
temperature. Avoid driving at full engine out-
put during this time.
SETUP
:
Engine mode C
C, SS, S+S+ or MM
;
Suspension setting SPORTSPORT or COMFORTCOMFORT
=
Transmission position DD/MM
?
ESP
®
mode (On
On/OffOff)
SETUP displays the following information,
functions and settings:
R
the digital speedometer
R
the gear indicator
R
the engine mode
R
the suspension mode
R
the transmission position
R
the ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program)
mode
X
Press = or ; on the steering wheel
to select the AMGAMG menu.
X
Press 9 repeatedly until SETUP appears.
RACE TIMER
Displaying and starting RACE TIMER
The RACE TIMER is only intended for use on a
closed race circuit. Do not use the function on
public roads.
:
Lap
;
RACE TIMER
You can start the RACE TIMER when the
engine is running or if the SmartKey is in posi-
tion 2 in the ignition lock.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the AMGAMG menu.
X
Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
RACE TIMER appears.
X
To start: press the a button to start the
RACE TIMER.
Displaying the intermediate time
X
Press the = or ; button to select
Interm. TimeInterm. Time.
X
Press a to confirm.
The intermediate time appears for five sec-
onds.
Starting a new lap
:
RACE TIMER
;
Fastest lap time (best lap)
=
Lap
X
Press a to confirm New Lap
New Lap.
It is possible to store a maximum of sixteen
laps. The 16th lap can only be completed with
Finish Lap
Finish Lap.
Menus and submenus
203
On-board computer and displays
Z
Stopping the RACE TIMER
X
Press the % button on the steering
wheel.
X
Confirm Yes
Yes with a.
The RACE TIMER interrupts timing if you stop
the vehicle and turn the SmartKey to position
1 in the ignition lock. If you turn the Smart-
Key to position 3 and then press a to con-
firm StartStart, timing is continued.
Resetting the current lap
X
Stop the RACE TIMER.
X
Press the = or ; button to select
Reset Lap
Reset Lap.
X
Press a to reset the lap time to "0".
Deleting all laps
If you switch off the engine, the RACE TIMER is
reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are
deleted.
You cannot delete individual stored laps. If you
have stopped 16 laps, the current lap does not
have to be reset.
X
Reset the current lap.
X
Press a to confirm ResetReset.
Reset Race-Timer?Reset Race-Timer? appears in the multi-
function display.
X
Press the : button to select Yes
Yes and
press the a button to confirm.
All laps are deleted.
Overall statistics
:
RACETIMER overall evaluation
;
Total time driven
=
Average speed
?
Distance covered
A
Maximum speed
If you save at least one lap and then stop
RACETIMER, an overall evaluation is available.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the AMG
AMG menu.
X
Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
overall evaluation appears.
Lap statistics
:
Lap
;
Lap time
=
Average lap speed
?
Lap length
A
Top speed during lap
This function is only available if you have
stored at least two laps and have stopped the
RACETIMER.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the AMG
AMG menu.
X
Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
lap evaluation is shown.
Each lap is shown in a separate submenu.
The fastest lap is indicated by flashing sym-
bol :.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select a
different lap evaluation.
204
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Introduction
General notes
Display messages appear in the multifunction display.
Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Man-
ual and may therefore differ from the multifunction display.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this
Operator's Manual.
Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.
When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:
R
HOLD function (Y page 165)
R
Parking (Y page 146)
Hiding display messages
X
Press the a or % button on the steering wheel.
The multifunction display hides the display message.
High-priority display messages are shown in red in the multifunction display. Some high-priority
display messages cannot be hidden.
The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages
have been remedied.
Message memory
The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call
up the display messages:
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv.Serv. menu.
If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages2 Messages, for example.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages2 Messages.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages.
When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-priority
display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, the
corresponding display messages are also deleted.
Display messages
205
On-board computer and displays
Z
Safety systems
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
!÷
Currently Unavaila‐Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator'sble See Operator's
ManualManual
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) and ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Pro-
gram) are temporarily not available.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-
tion.
In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
Possible causes are:
R
Self-diagnosis is not yet complete
R
The on-board voltage may be insufficient
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-
ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-
ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
!÷
Inoperative SeeInoperative See
Operator's ManualOperator's Manual
ABS and ESP
®
are malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-
tion.
The $ (USA only) or J (Canada only), ÷, å and !
warning lamps in the instrument cluster also light up.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-
ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
206
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
÷
Currently Unavaila‐Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator'sble See Operator's
ManualManual
ESP
®
is temporarily unavailable.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-
tion.
In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instru-
ment cluster.
The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-
ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
÷
Inoperative See
Inoperative See
Operator's ManualOperator's Manual
ESP
®
is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-
tion.
In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instru-
ment cluster.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Display messages
207
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
T !
÷
Inoperative SeeInoperative See
Operator's ManualOperator's Manual
EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS and ESP
®
are mal-
functioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-
tion.
In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
lock if you perform a full brake application, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-
ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
F (USA
only) ! (Canada
only)
Turn On the Igni‐
Turn On the Igni‐
tion to Releasetion to Release
the Parking Brakethe Parking Brake
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights
up.
You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the igni-
tion was switched off.
X
SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.
X
KEYLESS-GO: switch on the ignition.
F (USA
only) ! (Canada
only)
Please ReleasePlease Release
Parking BrakeParking Brake
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp
flashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic
release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 147).
You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.
X
Release the electric parking brake manually.
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp
flashes and a warning tone sounds.
You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking
(Y page 147).
F (USA
only) ! (Canada
only)
Parking Brake SeeParking Brake See
Operator's ManualOperator's Manual
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To apply:
X
Switch the ignition off.
X
Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
208
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The yellow ! warning lamp and the red F (USA only) or !
(Canada only) indicator lamp light up.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To release:
X
Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X
Release the electric parking brake manually.
or
X
Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 147).
If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:
X
Do not drive on.
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp
flashes and the yellow ! warning lamp lights up.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To release:
X
Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X
Release the electric parking brake manually.
To apply:
X
Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X
Apply the electric parking brake manually.
If the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp
continues to flash:
X
Do not drive on.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 314).
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
X
Turn the front wheels towards the curb.
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
209
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only)
or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds
after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then
goes out or remains lit.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
X
Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X
Apply the electric parking brake.
If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake:
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake:
X
Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 147).
If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or
release the electric parking brake, the red F (USA only) or !
(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to
apply the electric parking brake manually.
X
Shift the transmission to position j, as the electric parking
brake is not applied automatically.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
F (USA
only) ! (Canada
only)
Parking Brake Inop‐Parking Brake Inop‐
erativeerative
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only)
or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds
after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then
goes out or remains lit.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of over-
voltage or undervoltage.
X
Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by
charging the battery or restarting the engine.
X
Apply or release the electric parking brake.
If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking
brake:
X
Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X
Apply or release the electric parking brake.
If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied:
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
210
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up and the red F (USA
only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
$ (USA only)
J (Canada only)
Check Brake Fluid
Check Brake Fluid
LevelLevel
There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
In addition, the $ (USA only) or J (Canada only) warning
lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
G
WARNING
The braking effect may be impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X
Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.
#
Check Brake Pad
Check Brake Pad
WearWear
The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
PRE-SAFE Inopera‐PRE-SAFE Inopera‐
tive See Opera‐tive See Opera‐
tor's Manualtor's Manual
Important functions of PRE-SAFE
®
have failed. All other occupant
safety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Active BrakeActive Brake
Assist FunctionsAssist Functions
Currently LimitedCurrently Limited
See Operator's Man‐See Operator's Man‐
ualual
Active Brake Assist is temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
R
the radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations
or other sources of electromagnetic radiation
R
the system is outside the operating temperature range
R
the on-board voltage is too low
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
Active Brake Assist is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Restart the engine.
Display messages
211
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Active BrakeActive Brake
Assist FunctionsAssist Functions
Limited See Opera‐Limited See Opera‐
tor's Manualtor's Manual
Active Brake Assist is unavailable due to a malfunction.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Active BrakeActive Brake
Assist FunctionsAssist Functions
Currently LimitedCurrently Limited
See Operator's Man‐See Operator's Man‐
ualual
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function or PRE‑SAFE
®
PLUS is
deactivated and temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
R
the system is outside the operating temperature range
R
the on-board voltage is too low
R
the radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations
or other sources of electromagnetic radiation
R
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: ESP
®
is deactivated
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function and PRE‑SAFE
®
PLUS
are functional again.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Restart the engine.
X
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: switch ESP
®
on again (Y page 68).
Active BrakeActive Brake
Assist FunctionsAssist Functions
Limited See Opera‐Limited See Opera‐
tor's Manualtor's Manual
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function or PRE‑SAFE
®
PLUS is
not available due to a malfunction.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
212
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Radar SensorsRadar Sensors
Dirty See Opera‐Dirty See Opera‐
tor's Manualtor's Manual
The radar sensor system is malfunctioning.
Possible causes are:
R
dirt on sensors
R
heavy rain or snow
R
when driving on inter-urban roads without traffic or infrastructure,
e.g. in desert-like areas
At least one driving system or driving safety system is malfunction-
ing or is temporarily unavailable:
R
Active Brake Assist
R
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
R
Active Steering Assist
R
Active Lane Keeping Assist
R
Active Blind Spot Assist
R
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS
If the radar sensor system in front is dirty, Active Blind Spot Assist
will not perform a course-correcting brake application.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving and
drive safety systems will be available again. The display message
disappears.
If the display message does not disappear:
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Clean all sensors (Y page 275).
X
Restart the engine.
The display message disappears.
A
Malfunction Ser‐Malfunction Ser‐
vice Requiredvice Required
The roll bars are faulty.
G
WARNING
The roll bars will then possibly not be extended in the event of an
accident.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Display messages
213
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
6
SRS MalfunctionSRS Malfunction
Service RequiredService Required
The restraint system is malfunctioning. The 6 warning lamp also
lights up in the instrument cluster.
G
WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-
gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Further information about the restraint system (Y page 41).
6
Front Left Malfunc‐Front Left Malfunc‐
tion Servicetion Service
RequiredRequired or FrontFront
Right MalfunctionRight Malfunction
Service RequiredService Required
The restraint system has malfunctioned at the front on the left or
right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus-
ter.
G
WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-
gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
6
Left Side CurtainLeft Side Curtain
Air Bag Malfunc‐Air Bag Malfunc‐
tion Servicetion Service
RequiredRequired or RightRight
Side Curtain AirSide Curtain Air
Bag MalfunctionBag Malfunction
Service RequiredService Required
There is a malfunction in the left-hand and/or right-hand head bag.
The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
G
WARNING
The left or right head bag may either be triggered unintentionally or,
in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
214
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Front-passengerFront-passenger
Air Bag DisabledAir Bag Disabled
See Operator's Man‐See Operator's Man‐
ualual
The front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee air bag
are disabled during the journey, although:
R
an adult
or
R
a person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passenger
seat
If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpret
the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.
G
WARNING
The front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee air bag
may not be triggered in the event of an accident.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Switch the ignition off.
X
Have the occupant on the front-passenger seat get out of the
vehicle.
X
Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X
Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center
console and the multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
R
a self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up
simultaneously for approximately six seconds.
R
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light
up and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp
is on, OCS has disabled the front-passenger front air bag and
front-passenger knee bag (Y page 48)
R
the Front-passenger Air Bag Enabled See Operator'sFront-passenger Air Bag Enabled See Operator's
ManualManual or Front-passenger Air Bag Disabled See Oper‐Front-passenger Air Bag Disabled See Oper‐
ator's Manualator's Manual display messages must not appear in the mul-
tifunction display
X
Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary sys-
tem checks have been completed.
X
Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi-
function display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be
occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indi-
cator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies
the occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating cor-
rectly.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Observe the additional information on OCS (Y page 48).
Display messages
215
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Front-passengerFront-passenger
Air Bag EnabledAir Bag Enabled
See Operator's Man‐See Operator's Man‐
ualual
The front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee air bag
are enabled during the journey, although:
R
a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system's
weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat
or
R
the front-passenger seat is unoccupied
The system may detect objects or forces applying additional weight
on the seat.
G
WARNING
The front-passenger front air bag and the front-passenger knee bag
may be deployed unintentionally.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Switch the ignition off.
X
Open the front-passenger door.
X
Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-
passenger seat.
X
Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the
weight.
The system might otherwise detect the additional weight and
interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is.
X
Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X
Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center
console and the multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
R
a self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up
simultaneously for approximately six seconds.
R
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light
up and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp
is on, OCS (Occupant Classification System) has disabled the
front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee air bag
(Y page 48)
R
the Front-passenger Air Bag Enabled See Operator'sFront-passenger Air Bag Enabled See Operator's
ManualManual or Front-passenger Air Bag Disabled See Oper‐Front-passenger Air Bag Disabled See Oper‐
ator's Manualator's Manual display messages must not appear in the mul-
tifunction display
X
Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary sys-
tem checks have been completed.
X
Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi-
function display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be
occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indi-
216
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
cator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies
the occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating cor-
rectly.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Observe the additional information on OCS (Y page 48).
Lights
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
b
Check Left Low
Check Left Low
BeamBeam (Example)
The corresponding bulb is faulty.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
or
X
Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 113).
LED light sources: the display message for the corresponding lamp
only appears when all the LEDs in the lamp have failed.
b
Active Headlamps
Active Headlamps
InoperativeInoperative
The active light function is faulty.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Malfunction See
Malfunction See
Operator's ManualOperator's Manual
The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Auto Lamp FunctionAuto Lamp Function
InoperativeInoperative
The light sensor is defective.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Switch Off Lights
Switch Off Lights
The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A warn-
ing tone also sounds.
X
Turn the light switch to position Ã.
Display messages
217
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Adaptive HighbeamAdaptive Highbeam
Assist CurrentlyAssist Currently
Unavailable SeeUnavailable See
Operator's ManualOperator's Manual
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inopera-
tive.
Possible causes are:
R
The windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
R
Visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
X
Clean the windshield.
If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, the
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now AvailableAdaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available message is dis-
played.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.
Adaptive HighbeamAdaptive Highbeam
Assist InoperativeAssist Inoperative
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Engine
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
?
Check Coolant
Check Coolant
Level See Opera‐Level See Opera‐
tor's Manualtor's Manual
The coolant level is too low.
!
Avoid longer journeys when there is insufficient coolant in the
engine cooling system. You could otherwise damage the engine.
X
Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so
(Y page 267).
X
If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the engine
coolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
?
The fan motor is defective.
X
If the coolant temperature gage is below the H marking
(Y page 191), drive on to the next qualified specialist workshop.
X
Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in
mountainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic.
218
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
?
Coolant Too HotCoolant Too Hot
Stop Vehicle TurnStop Vehicle Turn
Engine OffEngine Off
The coolant is too hot.
A warning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some
fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch
fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns
which can occur just by opening the hood.
There is a risk of injury.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down.
X
Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X
Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out
and the coolant temperature gage is below the H marking
(Y page 191). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
X
Pay attention to the coolant temperature gage, observing the
warning notes (Y page 267).
X
If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist
workshop immediately.
Under normal operating conditions and at the correct coolant level,
the coolant temperature gage may rise to the H marking
(Y page 191).
#
See Operator's Man‐See Operator's Man‐
ualual
The battery is not being charged.
A warning tone also sounds.
Possible causes are:
R
a defective alternator
R
a torn poly-V-belt
R
a malfunction in the electronics
!
Do not drive any further. Otherwise the engine may overheat.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
219
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Stop Vehicle SeeStop Vehicle See
Operator's ManualOperator's Manual
The battery is no longer being charged and the condition of charge
is too low.
A warning tone also sounds.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Observe the instructions in the # See Operator's ManualSee Operator's Manual
display message.
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
4
Check Engine OilCheck Engine Oil
At Next RefuelingAt Next Refueling
The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.
A warning tone also sounds.
!
Avoid longer journeys when there is insufficient engine oil. You
could otherwise damage the engine.
X
Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest
(Y page 266).
X
If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 266).
X
Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if you
need to add engine oil more often than usual.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from a quali-
fied specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://
bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
4
Check Engine OilCheck Engine Oil
Level (Add 1 quart)Level (Add 1 quart)
Mercedes-AMG vehicles:
The engine oil level is too low.
!
Avoid longer journeys when there is insufficient engine oil. You
could otherwise damage the engine.
X
Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest
(Y page 266).
X
If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 266).
X
Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if you
need to add engine oil more often than usual.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from a quali-
fied specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://
bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
4
Engine Oil LevelEngine Oil Level
Low Stop VehicleLow Stop Vehicle
Turn Engine OffTurn Engine Off
Mercedes-AMG vehicles:
The engine oil level is too low.
There is a risk of engine damage.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Check the engine oil level (Y page 266).
X
If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 266).
220
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
8
Fuel Level LowFuel Level Low
The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.
X
Refuel at the nearest gas station.
C
There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.
X
Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.
8
Gas Cap LooseGas Cap Loose
The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leak-
ing.
X
Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:
X
Close the fuel filler cap.
If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Driving systems
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
ABC MalfunctionABC Malfunction
The Active Body Control (ABC) function is restricted.
G
WARNING
The vehicle's suspension settings may be affected.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
ABC MalfunctionABC Malfunction
Stop VehicleStop Vehicle
The Active Body Control (ABC) vehicle level is too low.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
After a few seconds, the vehicle level is adjusted and the display
message disappears.
The vehicle is leaking oil.
The multifunction display continuously shows the display message.
G
WARNING
The vehicle's suspension settings may be affected.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service
immediately.
Display messages
221
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Active Body Control (ABC) is malfunctioning.
The multifunction display continuously shows the display message.
G
WARNING
The suspension settings are thus affected.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).
X
Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front fender
or the tires could be damaged if the steering movement is too
large.
X
Listen for scraping sounds.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
À
Attention Assist:Attention Assist:
Take a Break!Take a Break!
Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue
or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone
also sounds.
X
If necessary, take a break.
During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get
enough rest.
À
Attention AssistAttention Assist
InoperativeInoperative
ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Traffic SignTraffic Sign
Assist CurrentlyAssist Currently
Unavailable SeeUnavailable See
Operator's ManualOperator's Manual
Traffic Sign Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
R
the windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty
R
visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog
X
Clean the windshield.
If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the dis-
play message disappears.
Traffic Sign Assist is operational again.
Traffic SignTraffic Sign
Assist InoperativeAssist Inoperative
Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ë
OffOff
The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.
A warning tone also sounds.
X
Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 165).
222
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Active Lane Keep‐Active Lane Keep‐
ing Assist Cur‐ing Assist Cur‐
rently Unavailablerently Unavailable
See Operator's Man‐See Operator's Man‐
ualual
Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inopera-
tive.
Possible causes are:
R
the windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty
R
visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog
R
there have been no lane markings for an extended period
R
the lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt
or snow
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Clean the windshield.
Active Lane Keep‐Active Lane Keep‐
ing Assist Inopera‐ing Assist Inopera‐
tivetive
Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Blind SpotActive Blind Spot
Assist CurrentlyAssist Currently
Unavailable SeeUnavailable See
Operator's ManualOperator's Manual
Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
R
the radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature
range
R
the radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations
or other sources of electromagnetic radiation
The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Clean the sensors (Y page 275).
X
Restart the engine.
Active Blind SpotActive Blind Spot
Assist InoperativeAssist Inoperative
Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.
The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
223
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Active ParkingActive Parking
Assist CanceledAssist Canceled
The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been fas-
tened.
X
Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the
driver's door closed.
You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel
while steering intervention was active.
X
While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multi-
function steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.
The vehicle has started to skid and ESP
®
has intervened.
X
Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 175).
Active ParkingActive Parking
Assist InoperativeAssist Inoperative
You have just carried out a large number of turning or parking
maneuvers.
Active Parking Assist will become available again after approx-
imately ten minutes (Y page 175).
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Switch off and restart the engine.
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Parking Assist is malfunctioning.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Active ParkingActive Parking
Assist FinishedAssist Finished
The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.
The display message disappears automatically.
Active DistanceActive Distance
Assist OffAssist Off
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated (Y page 156).
If it was deactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds.
Active DistanceActive Distance
Assist Now Availa‐Assist Now Availa‐
bleble
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again after having
been temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate Active Dis-
tance Assist DISTRONIC (Y page 156).
224
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Active DistanceActive Distance
Assist CurrentlyAssist Currently
Unavailable SeeUnavailable See
Operator's ManualOperator's Manual
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily inoperative.
Active Steering Assist is also temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
R
the radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations
or other sources of electromagnetic radiation
R
the system is outside the operating temperature range
R
the on-board voltage is too low
A warning tone also sounds.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Restart the engine.
Active DistanceActive Distance
Assist InoperativeAssist Inoperative
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is faulty.
The following may have also failed:
R
Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
R
Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
R
Active Steering Assist
A warning tone also sounds.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Act. DistanceAct. Distance
Assist SuspendedAssist Suspended
You have depressed the accelerator pedal. Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.
X
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
Distance Assist --Distance Assist --
- mph- mph
A condition for activating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has not
been met.
X
Check the activation conditions for Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC (Y page 156).
Display messages
225
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Active SteeringActive Steering
Assist CurrentlyAssist Currently
Unavailable SeeUnavailable See
Operator's ManualOperator's Manual
Active Steering Assist is temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
R
the windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty
R
visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog
R
there have been no lane markings for an extended period
R
the lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt
or snow
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
Active Steering Assist is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Clean the windshield.
Active SteeringActive Steering
Assist InoperativeAssist Inoperative
Active Steering Assist is faulty.
However, the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC functions are still
available.
A warning tone also sounds.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Cruise Control OffCruise Control Off
Cruise control has been deactivated.
If a warning tone also sounds, cruise control has deactivated auto-
matically (Y page 154).
Cruise Control - -Cruise Control - -
- mph- mph
Cruise control cannot be activated, since not all of the activation
conditions have been met.
X
Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 154).
Cruise ControlCruise Control
InoperativeInoperative
Cruise control is malfunctioning.
A warning tone also sounds.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
226
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Tires
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Please CorrectPlease Correct
Tire PressureTire Pressure
The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire
pressure difference between the wheels is too great.
X
Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 299).
X
If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
X
Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 301).
Tire Pressure SoonTire Pressure Soon
The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The
wheel position is shown in the multifunction display.
A warning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:
R
they may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase
R
they may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
R
the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may
be greatly impaired
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat
tire (Y page 278).
X
Check the tire pressure (Y page 299).
X
If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
Warning Tire Mal‐Warning Tire Mal‐
functionfunction
The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The
wheel position is shown in the multifunction display.
G
WARNING
Driving with a flat tire poses a risk of the following hazards:
R
a flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle
R
you could lose control of the vehicle.
R
continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-
up and possibly a fire
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat
tire (Y page 278).
Display messages
227
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Tire Press. Moni‐Tire Press. Moni‐
tor Currentlytor Currently
UnavailableUnavailable
Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves,
no signals from the tire pressure sensors are detected. The tire
pressure monitor is temporarily malfunctioning.
X
Drive on.
The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the
problem has been resolved.
TirePress. Sen‐TirePress. Sen‐
sor(s) Missingsor(s) Missing
There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several
wheels. The pressure of the affected tire does not appear in the
multifunction display.
X
Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Tire Pressure Moni‐Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor Inoperative Notor Inoperative No
Wheel SensorsWheel Sensors
The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor.
The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.
X
Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.
The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving
for a few minutes.
Tire Press. Moni‐Tire Press. Moni‐
tor Inoperativetor Inoperative
The tire pressure monitor is faulty.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Vehicle
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Shift to 'P' orShift to 'P' or
'N' to Start Engine'N' to Start Engine
You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in
position k or h.
X
Shift the transmission to position j or i.
Apply Brake toApply Brake to
Shift from 'P'Shift from 'P'
You have attempted to shift the transmission to position h, k or
i without depressing the brake pedal.
X
Depress the brake pedal.
To Shift out of PTo Shift out of P
or N, Depressor N, Depress
Brake and SwitchBrake and Switch
on Engineon Engine
You have attempted to shift the transmission out of position j or
i into another transmission position with the engine switched off.
X
Depress the brake pedal.
X
Start the engine.
Driver's Door OpenDriver's Door Open
& Transmission Not& Transmission Not
in P Risk of Vehi‐in P Risk of Vehi‐
cle Rolling Awaycle Rolling Away
The driver's door is not fully closed and the transmission is in posi-
tion k, i or h.
A warning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
The vehicle may roll away.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
When parking the vehicle, shift the transmission to position j.
228
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Only Select ParkOnly Select Park
(P) When Vehicle(P) When Vehicle
is Stationaryis Stationary
The vehicle is moving.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
Apply Brake toApply Brake to
Select RSelect R
You have attempted to shift from position h to position k.
X
Depress the brake pedal.
X
Shift the transmission to position k.
Service RequiredService Required
Do Not Shift GearsDo Not Shift Gears
Visit DealerVisit Dealer
You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.
A warning tone also sounds.
If transmission position h is selected:
X
Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the trans-
mission from position h.
If position k, i or j is selected:
X
Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
Reversing Not Pos‐Reversing Not Pos‐
sible Servicesible Service
RequiredRequired
You can no longer shift to transmission position k due to a mal-
function.
Transmission positions j, i or h continue to be available.
A warning tone also sounds.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Transmission Mal‐Transmission Mal‐
function Stopfunction Stop
A malfunction has occurred in the mechanical transmission compo-
nents.
A warning tone also sounds. The transmission shifts automatically
to position i.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
Stop Vehicle LeaveStop Vehicle Leave
Engine RunningEngine Running
Wait TransmissionWait Transmission
CoolingCooling
The transmission has overheated. Pulling away can be temporarily
impaired or not possible.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X
Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
Auxiliary BatteryAuxiliary Battery
MalfunctionMalfunction
The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer
being charged.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop at the next opportunity.
X
Until then, always shift the transmission to position j before
you switch off the engine.
X
Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
Display messages
229
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
N
The trunk lid is open.
X
Close the trunk lid.
M
The hood is open.
G
WARNING
The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Close the hood.
C
At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.
X
Close all the doors.
Ð
Power Steering Mal‐
Power Steering Mal‐
function See Opera‐function See Opera‐
tor's Manualtor's Manual
The power steering is malfunctioning.
A warning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
You will need to use more force to steer.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
X
If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified
specialist workshop.
X
If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
J
Trunk PartitionTrunk Partition
OpenOpen
The trunk partition is open.
The trunk is loaded too high and the load is preventing automatic
closing of the trunk partition.
X
Stow the load such that the trunk partition can close unhindered
and is not pushed upwards.
X
Close the trunk partition (Y page 93).
Phone No ServicePhone No Service
Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver
range.
X
Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol
appears in the multifunction display.
K
Decrease SpeedDecrease Speed
You wanted to open the roof while the vehicle was in motion.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Open the roof (Y page 91).
230
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
K
Vario-Roof Lowering
Vario-Roof Lowering
The roof is not fully opened or closed. The hydraulics are depressur-
ized.
X
Fully open or close the roof (Y page 91).
K
Open/Close Vario-
Open/Close Vario-
Roof CompletelyRoof Completely
The roof is not locked.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Push or pull and hold the roof switch until the roof is fully open or
closed (Y page 91).
K
Start Engine See
Start Engine See
Operator's ManualOperator's Manual
The on-board voltage is too low.
X
Start the engine.
X
After approximately ten seconds, repeat the opening or closing
procedure (Y page 91).
The roof has been opened and closed several times in a row. The
roof drive has been switched off automatically for safety reasons.
You can open and close the roof again after approximately ten
minutes.
X
Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X
Repeat the opening or closing procedure (Y page 91).
Close Rear SideClose Rear Side
WindowsWindows
You leave the vehicle and at least one rear side window is open.
X
Close the side windows (Y page 88).
¥
Check Washer FluidCheck Washer Fluid
The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped
below the minimum.
X
Add washer fluid (Y page 268).
Wiper Malfunction‐Wiper Malfunction‐
inging
The windshield wipers are malfunctioning.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Hazard WarningHazard Warning
Flashers Malfunc‐Flashers Malfunc‐
tioningtioning
The hazard warning lamps are faulty.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
SmartKey
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Â
Key Does Not
Key Does Not
Belong to VehicleBelong to Vehicle
You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.
X
Use the correct SmartKey.
Â
Take Your Key fromTake Your Key from
IgnitionIgnition
The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.
X
Remove the SmartKey.
Display messages
231
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Â
Obtain a New KeyObtain a New Key
The SmartKey needs to be replaced.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Â
Replace Key BatteryReplace Key Battery
The SmartKey battery is discharged.
X
Change the battery (Y page 77).
Â
Don't Forget YourDon't Forget Your
KeyKey
The SmartKey is not in the ignition lock. You have opened the driv-
er's door with the engine switched off.
The multifunction display shows the display message a maximum of
60 seconds and is simply a reminder.
X
Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.
Â
Key Not DetectedKey Not Detected
(red display message)
The SmartKey is not in the vehicle.
A warning tone also sounds.
If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle cen-
trally or start the engine.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Locate the SmartKey.
X
Press a on the steering wheel to confirm the display mes-
sage.
Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves,
the SmartKey is not detected whilst the engine is running.
A warning tone also sounds.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and bring into key
mode.
Â
Key Not DetectedKey Not Detected
(white display message)
The SmartKey is currently undetected.
X
Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.
If the SmartKey still cannot be detected:
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the
desired position.
Â
Remove 'Start' But‐Remove 'Start' But‐
ton and Insert Keyton and Insert Key
The SmartKey is continually undetected.
KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A warn-
ing tone also sounds.
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the
desired position.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
232
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Warning and indicator lamps
General notes
Some systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Therefore, some indi-
cator and warning lamps may light up or flash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical. These
indicator and warning lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash after starting the
engine or whilst driving.
Safety
Seat belts
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
ü
N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for six sec-
onds.
The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten
their seat belts.
X
Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44).
ü
N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition,
a warning tone sounds for up to six seconds.
The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
X
Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44).
The warning tone ceases.
Warning and indicator lamps
233
On-board computer and displays
Z
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
ü
N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as
the driver's or the front-passenger door is closed.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
X
Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44).
The warning lamp goes out.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat.
X
Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure
place.
The warning lamp goes out.
ü
N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning
sounds.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle is
being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster
than 15 mph (25 km/h).
X
Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44).
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven faster
than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph
(25 km/h).
X
Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure
place.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.
234
Warning and indicator lamps
On-board computer and displays
Safety systems
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
$J
N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is
lit while the engine is running.
A warning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may
be affected.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to
road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
$J
N $ (USA only) or J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp
is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
The braking effect may be impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to
road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not correct the malfunction.
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
$
N USA only: the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is run-
ning. The multifunction display also shows a display message with the #
symbol.
The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Warning and indicator lamps
235
On-board computer and displays
Z
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
!
N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ABS (anti-lock braking system) is malfunctioning.
If there is an additional warning tone, the EBD (electronic brake force distribu-
tion) is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions lis-
ted above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you perform a full
brake application, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The brak-
ing distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
If the ABS control unit is defective, there is also a possibility that other systems,
such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be availa-
ble.
$J
֌
!
N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake warning lamp and the
yellow ESP
®
, ESP
®
OFF and ABS warning lamps are lit while the engine is run-
ning.
ABS and ESP
®
are malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions lis-
ted above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you perform a full
brake application, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The brak-
ing distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
236
Warning and indicator lamps
On-board computer and displays
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
÷
N The yellow ESP
®
warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.
ESP
®
or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or at
least one wheel has started to spin.
Cruise control or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated.
X
When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary.
X
Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.
X
Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
X
Do not deactivate ESP
®
.
In rare cases (Y page 68) it may be best to deactivate ESP
®
.
Observe the important safety notes on ESP
®
(Y page 66).
֌
N The yellow ESP
®
and ESP
®
OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is run-
ning.
ESP
®
is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions lis-
ted above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
å
N The yellow ESP
®
OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running or the
ECO start/stop function is activated.
ESP
®
is deactivated.
G
WARNING
If ESP
®
is switched off, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted, e.g. Active
Blind Spot Assist. The system does not perform course-correcting brake appli-
cations.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Reactivate ESP
®
.
In rare cases (Y page 68) it may be best to deactivate ESP
®
.
Observe the important safety notes on ESP
®
(Y page 66).
X
Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
If ESP
®
cannot be activated:
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Have ESP
®
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Warning and indicator lamps
237
On-board computer and displays
Z
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
M
N Mercedes-AMG vehicles only:
The yellow SPORT handling mode warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
SPORT handling mode is activated.
G
WARNING
When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehi-
cle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Only switch to SPORT handling mode in accordance with the conditions
described in the "Activating/deactivating ESP
®
" section (Y page 68).
F!
N F (USA only), ! (Canada only): the red indicator lamp for the electric
parking brake flashes or is lit and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electric
parking brake is lit.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
6
N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The restraint system is malfunctioning.
G
WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered uninten-
tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the restraint system
checked.
For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 41).
238
Warning and indicator lamps
On-board computer and displays
Engine
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
;
N The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
There may be a malfunction, for example:
R
in the engine management
R
in the fuel injection system
R
in the exhaust system
R
in the ignition system
R
in the fuel system
The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emer-
gency mode.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop as
soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the legal
requirements in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal reg-
ulations apply in the state in which you are currently driving.
8
N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.
X
Refuel at the nearest gas station.
8
N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.
In addition, the ; Check Engine warning lamp may light up.
The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
X
Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
X
If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap.
X
If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop.
?
N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the
coolant temperature gage is at the start of the scale.
The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gage is malfunctioning.
The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine
damage if the coolant temperature is too high.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying atten-
tion to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circum-
stances.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Warning and indicator lamps
239
On-board computer and displays
Z
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
?
N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.
The coolant level is too low.
If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked
or the electric engine radiator fan may be defective.
The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying atten-
tion to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine
has cooled down.
X
Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes
(Y page 267).
X
If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system
checked.
X
Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by
snow, slush or ice.
X
Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature gage is below the
H marking (Y page 191). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
X
Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X
Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous ter-
rain and stop-and-go traffic.
?
N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.
The coolant temperature gage has exceeded the H marking (Y page 191). The
airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too
low.
G
WARNING
The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.
Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which
may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can
occur just by opening the hood.
There is a risk of injury.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying atten-
tion to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine
has cooled down.
X
Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes
(Y page 267).
X
If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system
checked.
240
Warning and indicator lamps
On-board computer and displays
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
X
Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by
snow, slush or ice.
X
If the coolant temperature gage is below the H marking (Y page 191), drive
on to the next qualified specialist workshop.
X
Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous ter-
rain and stop-and-go traffic.
Driving systems
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
·
N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. A
warning tone also sounds.
You are approaching a vehicle, a pedestrian or a stationary obstacle in your line
of travel at too high a speed.
X
Be prepared to brake immediately.
X
Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take
evasive action.
Further information on Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (Y page 156).
Further information on Active Brake Assist (Y page 63).
Further information on Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
(Y page 70).
Warning and indicator lamps
241
On-board computer and displays
Z
Tires
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
h
N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is
lit.
The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the
tires.
G
WARNING
Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:
R
they may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase
R
they may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire
traction.
R
the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly
impaired
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers.
Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire
(Y page 278).
X
Check the tire pressure (Y page 299).
X
If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
h
N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction)
flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit.
The tire pressure monitor is faulty.
G
WARNING
The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
242
Warning and indicator lamps
On-board computer and displays
General notes
The multimedia system section in this Opera-
tor's Manual describes the basic principles for
operation. More information can be found in
the Digital Operator's Manual.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the
vehicle when driving, you may be distracted
from the traffic situation. You could also
lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of
an accident.
Only operate this equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that
this is possible, park the vehicle paying
attention to traffic conditions and operate
the equipment when the vehicle is station-
ary.
You must observe the legal requirements for
the country in which you are currently driving
when operating the multimedia system.
The multimedia system calculates the route to
the destination without taking the following
into account, for example:
R
traffic lights
R
stop and yield signs
R
parking or stopping restrictions
R
road narrowing
R
other road and traffic rules and regulations
The multimedia system may give incorrect nav-
igation recommendations if the actual street/
traffic situation does not correspond with the
digital map's data.
For example:
R
a diverted route
R
the road layout or the direction of a one-way
street has been changed
For this reason, you must always observe road
and traffic rules and regulations during your
journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations
always have priority over multimedia system
driving recommendations.
Navigation announcements are intended to
direct you while driving without diverting your
attention from the road and driving.
Please always use this feature instead of con-
sulting the map display for directions. Looking
at the icons or map display can distract you
from traffic conditions and driving, and
increase the risk of an accident.
This equipment complies with FCC radiation
exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled
equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency
(RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to
OET65.
This equipment has very low levels of RF
energy that is deemed to comply without maxi-
mum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE).
However, it is recommended to install it at a
distance of at least 8 inches (approx. 20 cm)
between the radiation source and a person's
body (not including limbs such as hands,
wrists, feet and legs).
G
WARNING
Modifications to electronic components,
their software as well as wiring can impair
their function and/or the function of other
networked components. In particular, sys-
tems relevant to safety could also be affec-
ted. As a result, these may no longer func-
tion as intended and/or jeopardize the oper-
ating safety of the vehicle. There is an
increased risk of an accident and injury.
Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-
tronic components or their software. You
should have all work to electrical and elec-
tronic equipment carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Function restrictions
For safety reasons, some functions are restric-
ted or unavailable while the vehicle is in
motion. You will notice this, for example,
because either you will not be able to select
certain menu items or a message will appear
to this effect.
Function restrictions
243
Multimedia system
Z
Operating system
Overview
General notes
!
Do not use the space in front of the dis-
play for storage. Objects placed here could
damage the display or impair its function.
Avoid any direct contact with the display
surface. Pressure on the display surface
may result in impairments to the display,
which could be irreversible.
Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair your
ability to read the display.
The display has an automatic temperature-
controlled switch-off feature. The brightness is
automatically reduced if the temperature is
too high. The display may temporarily switch
off completely.
Cleaning instructions
!
Do not touch the display. The display has a
very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a
risk of scratching. If you have to clean the
screen, however, use a mild cleaning agent
and a soft, lint-free cloth.
The display must be switched off and have
cooled down before you start cleaning. Do not
apply pressure to the display surface when
cleaning it, as this could cause irreversible
damage to the display.
Switching the multimedia system
on/off
X
Press the q control knob.
Adjusting the volume
X
Turn the q control knob.
The volume is adjusted:
R
for the currently selected media source
R
during traffic or navigation announcements
R
in hands-free mode during an active call
Switching the sound on or off
X
Press the 8 button on the control panel.
If the audio output is switched off, the sta-
tus line will show the 8 symbol. If you
switch the media source or set the volume,
the sound is automatically switched on.
i
Navigation announcements will be heard
even if the sound is muted.
Functions
The multimedia system has the following func-
tions:
R
Radio mode
R
Media mode with media search
R
Sound systems
R
Navigation system
R
Communication functions
R
SIRIUS Weather
R
Vehicle functions with system settings
R
Favorites functions
Controller
The controller in the center console lets you:
R
select menu items on the display
R
enter characters
R
select a destination on the map
R
save entries
The controller can be:
R
turned 3
R
slid left or right 1
R
slid forwards or back 4
R
slid diagonally 2
R
pressed briefly or pressed and held7
Back button
You can use the % button to exit a menu or
to call up the main menu of the current operat-
ing mode.
X
To exit the menu: briefly press the %
button.
The multimedia system changes to the next
higher menu level in the current operating
mode.
X
To call up the main menu: press the %
button for longer than two seconds.
The multimedia system changes to the main
menu of the current operating mode.
244
Operating system
Multimedia system
Favorites button
You can assign predefined functions using the
g favorites button and call them up by
pressing the button (Y page 245).
Favorites
Calling up and exiting favorites
X
To call up: press the g button on the
controller.
X
Select a favorite, e.g. VehicleVehicle.
The favorites are displayed.
X
To exit: press the g button again.
Adding favorites
Adding predefined favorites
X
Press the g button.
X
Slide 6 the controller.
X
Select ReassignReassign.
The categories are displayed.
X
Select a category.
The favorites are displayed.
X
Select a favorite.
X
To add the favorite to the desired position,
turn and press the controller.
If a favorite has already been added at this
position, it will be overwritten.
Adding your own favorites
You can add climate control as a favorite, for
example.
X
Select Vehicle
VehicleQVehicle SettingsVehicle Settings.
X
Press and hold the g button until the
favorites are displayed.
X
Add a favorite to the desired position.
If a favorite has already been added at this
position, it will be overwritten.
Navigation mode
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the
vehicle when driving, you may be distracted
from the traffic situation. You could also
lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of
an accident.
Only operate this equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that
this is possible, park the vehicle paying
attention to traffic conditions and operate
the equipment when the vehicle is station-
ary.
You must observe the legal requirements for
the country in which you are currently driving
when operating the navigation system.
General notes
Among other things, correct functioning of the
navigation system depends on GPS reception.
In certain situations, GPS reception may be
impaired, there may be interference or there
may be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels or
parking garages.
Further information can be found in the Digital
Operator's Manual.
Selecting a route type and route
options
Multimedia system:
X
Select NaviNaviQNavigationNavigation.
The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
tion.
X
Slide 6 the controller.
X
Select OptionsOptionsQRoute SettingsRoute Settings.
Notes for route types:
R
Eco RouteEco Route
R
Dynamic Traffic RouteDynamic Traffic Route
Traffic reports on the route for the route
guidance are taken into account (not availa-
ble in all countries).
R
Dynamic TRF. Route After RequestDynamic TRF. Route After Request
You can decide whether or not current traf-
fic reports should be included in the route
calculation (not available in all countries).
R
Calculate Alternative RoutesCalculate Alternative Routes
Different routes are being calculated. In
order to do so, instead of StartStart, select the
menu item ContinueContinue.
Operating system
245
Multimedia system
Z
X
To avoid/use route options: select
Avoid OptionsAvoid Options.
X
Select a route option.
Notes for route options:
R
Use Toll RoadsUse Toll Roads
The route calculation includes roads which
require you to pay a usage fee (toll).
R
Number of Occupants in the Vehicle:Number of Occupants in the Vehicle:
(only available in the USA)
Prerequisite: your vehicle meets the access
conditions for carpool lanes.
Carpool lanes will be included if the carpool
lanes option is activated.
Entering an address
Multimedia system:
X
Select NaviNaviQNavigationNavigation.
The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
tion.
X
Slide 6 the controller.
X
Select DestinationDestinationQAddress EntryAddress Entry.
Enter an address, e.g. as follows:
R
city or ZIP code, street, house number
R
state/province, city or ZIP code
R
city or ZIP code, center
R
street, city or ZIP code, intersection
X
Select CityCity.
The city in which the vehicle is currently
located (current vehicle position) is at the
top. Below this, you will see locations for
which route guidance has already been car-
ried out.
X
Enter the city.
The G symbol: the location is contained on
the digital map multiple times.
X
To switch to the list: slide 5 the control-
ler.
X
Select the location.
If available, the ZIP code is shown. If there
are different ZIP codes available for the
location, the corresponding digits are dis-
played with an XX.
X
Enter the street and house number.
The address is in the menu.
Further options for destination entry:
R
search for a keyword
The keyword search finds destinations using
fragments of words.
R
select the last destination
R
select a contact
R
select a POI
You can search for a POI by location, name
or telephone number.
R
select destination on the map
R
enter intermediate destination
You can map the route to the destination
yourself with up to four intermediate desti-
nations.
R
select destinations from Mercedes-Benz
Apps
R
select geo-coordinates
Calculating the route
Prerequisite: the address has been entered
and is in the menu.
X
Select StartStart or ContinueContinue.
The route is calculated with the selected
route type and the selected route options.
If route guidance has already been activa-
ted, a prompt will appear asking whether
you wish to end the current route guidance.
X
Select Cancel Active Route GuidanceCancel Active Route Guidance or
Set as Intermediate DestinationSet as Intermediate Destination.
Cancel Active Route GuidanceCancel Active Route Guidance cancels
the current route guidance and starts route
calculation to the new destination.
Set as Intermediate DestinationSet as Intermediate Destination adds
the new destination in addition to the exist-
ing destination and opens the intermediate
destinations list.
Connecting a mobile phone
(COMAND)
Requirements
For telephony via the Bluetooth
®
interface, you
require a Bluetooth
®
-capable mobile phone.
The mobile phone must support Hands-Free
Profile 1.0 or above.
Multimedia system:
X
Select VehicleVehicleQSystem Set‐System Set‐
tingstingsQActivate BluetoothActivate Bluetooth.
X
Activate Bluetooth
®
O.
246
Operating system
Multimedia system
Mobile phone:
X
Activate Bluetooth
®
and, if necessary, Blue-
tooth
®
visibility for other devices (see the
manufacturer's operating instructions).
The Bluetooth
®
device names for all of one
manufacturer's products might be identical. To
make it possible to clearly identify your mobile
phone, change the device name (see the man-
ufacturer's operating instructions).
If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone
Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message
Access Profile) Bluetooth
®
profiles, the follow-
ing information will be transmitted after you
connect:
R
Phone book
R
Call lists
R
Text messages and e-mail
i
Further information on suitable mobile
phones can be found at: http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
i
In the USA, you can get in touch with the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372).
In Canada, you can get in touch with the
Customer Relations Center on
1-800-387-0100.
Searching for and authorizing (con-
necting) a mobile phone
Before using your mobile phone with the multi-
media system for the first time, you will need
to search for the phone and then authorize
(connect) it. Depending on the mobile phone,
authorization either takes place by means of
Secure Simple Pairing or by entering a pass-
key. The multimedia system automatically
makes the procedure that is relevant for your
mobile phone available. The mobile phone is
always connected automatically after authori-
zation. Further information on using a mobile
phone with the multimedia system (see the
Digital Operator's Manual).
If the multimedia system does not detect your
mobile phone, this may be due to particular
security settings on your mobile phone (see
the manufacturer's operating instructions).
Only one mobile phone can be connected to
the multimedia system at any one time.
Searching for a mobile phone
Multimedia system:
X
Select Tel/
Tel/®QConn.Conn.
Device
DeviceQSearch for PhonesSearch for PhonesQStartStart
SearchSearch.
The available mobile phones are displayed.
Symbols in the device list
Sym-
bol
Explanation
Ï
New mobile phone found, not yet
authorized.
Ñ
Mobile phone is authorized, but is
not connected.
Connecting a mobile phone
Authorization using Secure Simple Pairing:
X
Select mobile phone.
A code is displayed in the multimedia sys-
tem and on the mobile phone.
X
If codes match: select YesYes on the multime-
dia system.
X
Confirm code on the mobile phone. Depend-
ing on the mobile phone used, confirm the
connection to the multimedia system and
for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth
®
profiles.
The prompt to confirm may take up to two
minutes to be displayed (see the manufac-
turer's operating instructions).
X
If the codes are different: select No
No on the
multimedia system.
The process is canceled.
Repeat authorization.
Authorization by entering a passkey (pass-
code):
X
Select the Bluetooth
®
name of the mobile
phone.
The input menu for the passkey is displayed.
X
Choose a one to sixteen-digit number com-
bination as a passkey.
X
Enter the passkey on the multimedia sys-
tem.
X
Press ¬ to confirm.
X
Enter and confirm the passkey on the
mobile phone. Depending on the mobile
phone used, confirm the connection to the
multimedia system and for the PBAP and
MAP Bluetooth
®
profiles. The prompt to
confirm may take up to two minutes to be
Operating system
247
Multimedia system
Z
displayed (see the manufacturer's operating
instructions).
Media mode
General notes
If you wish to play external media sources, the
appropriate media mode must already be
turned on. Further information on media mode
(see the Digital Operator's Manual).
The following external media sources can be
used:
R
Apple
®
devices (e.g. iPhone
®
)
R
USB devices (e.g. USB stick, MP3 player)
(Y page 248)
R
CD
R
DVD (COMAND)
R
SD cards
R
Via devices connected by Bluetooth
®
i
Information on single CD/DVD drive or
DVD changer (see the Digital Operator's
Manual).
Selecting using the device list
Multimedia system:
X
Select MediaMediaQDevicesDevices.
The available media sources will be shown.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
X
Select the media source.
Playable files are played.
Inserting/removing an SD card
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
SD cards are small parts. They can be swal-
lowed and cause choking. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Keep the SD card out of the reach of chil-
dren. If a SD card is swallowed, seek medi-
cal attention immediately.
!
If the SD card is no longer in use, you
should take it out and remove it from the
vehicle. High temperatures can damage the
card.
Inserting an SD card
The SD card slot is located on the control
panel.
X
Insert the SD card into the SD card slot until
the SD card engages. The side with the con-
tacts must face down.
Removing an SD card
X
Press the SD card.
The SD card is ejected.
X
Remove the SD card.
Connecting USB devices
X
Connect the USB device to the USB port.
There are two USB ports in the stowage
space under the armrest.
X
Select the media source (Y page 248).
248
Operating system
Multimedia system
Stowage areas
Stowage spaces
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If objects in the passenger compartment are
stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be
thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In
addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces
and mobile phone brackets cannot always
retain all objects they contain. There is a
risk of injury, particularly in the event of sud-
den braking or a sudden change in direction.
R
Always stow objects so that they cannot
be thrown around in such situations.
R
Always make sure that objects do not pro-
trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or
stowage nets.
R
Close the lockable stowage spaces before
starting a journey.
R
Always stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-
ted, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects
in the trunk.
Glove compartment
X
To open: pull handle : and open glove box
flap ;.
X
To close: fold glove box flap ; up until it
engages.
In the glove box, there are a coin holder, a
map holder and a pen holder.
i
The glove box can be ventilated
(Y page 123).
The glove box can be locked and unlocked
using the mechanical key.
X
To lock: insert the mechanical key into the
lock and turn it to position 2.
X
To unlock: insert the mechanical key into
the lock and turn it to position 1.
Stowage compartment/telephone
compartment under the armrest
X
To open: press button :.
Amrest ; folds out.
In the stowage compartment, there is a stow-
age tray.
i
Depending on the vehicle equipment, a
USB port and a Media Interface is installed
in the stowage compartment. A Media Inter-
face is a universal interface for mobile audio
equipment, e.g. for an iPod
®
or MP3 Player .
Stowage areas
249
Stowage and features
Z
Eyeglasses compartment
X
To open: press marking :.
Eyeglasses compartment ; opens.
Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment is
always closed while the vehicle is in motion.
Stowage compartment in the center
console
X
To open: press the trim element on
cover :.
X
To remove the rubber mat: grasp the tabs
on the rubber mat and pull up to remove.
X
To insert the rubber mat: press the rubber
mat into the housing.
X
To close: swing cover : downwards until it
engages.
You can remove the rubber mat from the stow-
age compartment to clean it. Clean with clear,
lukewarm water only.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, there
is a cup holder and an ashtray in the center
console stowage compartment.
Umbrella holder
Example: vehicle side, left
There are umbrella holders in the door stow-
age compartments on both sides of the vehi-
cle. One compact umbrella can be stowed per
side.
X
To remove: grab strap ; and pull umbrella
holder : out of the stowage compartment
in the direction of the arrow.
X
To insert: push umbrella holder : in the
opposite direction to the arrow, into the
stowage compartment until it engages.
You can remove the umbrella holder to clean
it. Clean with clear, lukewarm water only.
Stowage compartment in the rear cen-
ter console
X
To open: slide cover : in the direction of
the arrow.
On vehicles equipped with a bottle holder, the
bottle holder is located in the stowage com-
partment (Y page 253).
250
Stowage areas
Stowage and features
Stowage compartment in the rear
passenger compartment
Only the left side of the vehicle features a rear
stowage compartment.
X
Open the seat belt guide and remove the
seat belt (Y page 99).
X
Move the left-hand front seat forward
(Y page 100) and fold the seat backrest
forward.
X
To open: press release button ;.
Cover : folds up.
X
To close: fold down cover : and let it
engage.
X
Fold back the seat backrest of the left-hand
front seat and move the seat back
(Y page 100).
X
Insert the seat belt back into the seat belt
guide.
Stowage net
There is a stowage net : in the front-
passenger footwell.
Loading aid in the trunk
Raising/lowering the roof
G
WARNING
Body parts can become trapped when the
roof is being raised or lowered. There is a
risk of injury.
When raising or lowering the roof, make
sure that no parts of the body are in the
vicinity of moving parts. Press the switch
again if someone becomes trapped.
!
Only close the trunk once the roof is low-
ered completely. Otherwise, you could dam-
age the roof.
If you close the trunk lid before the roof is
lowered completely, the loading aid switch
lights up and a warning tone sounds.
To make it easier to load your luggage, you
can raise the stowed roof after you have
opened the trunk lid.
You can only raise roof ; when the trunk lid
is fully open.
X
To raise the roof: press switch :.
Roof ; is raised slightly and trunk partition
= moves to the open position. Switch :
lights up brightly.
X
To lower the roof: press switch :.
The trunk partition moves to the closed
position and roof ; lowers slightly.
Switch : lights up dimly.
Vehicles with trunk lid remote closing
feature: when the trunk lid is opened, the
loading aid raises automatically. It lowers
automatically when the trunk lid is closed.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO and HANDS-
FREE ACCESS: when the trunk lid is
Stowage areas
251
Stowage and features
Z
opened, the loading aid rises automatically.
When the roof is closed, the trunk partition
remains in the open position. The trunk par-
tition moves to the closed position automat-
ically when the roof is lowered.
Problems with the loading aid
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
It is no longer possible
to lower the stowed
roof in the trunk using
the loading aid.
You cannot close the trunk any more.
X
Call a qualified specialist workshop.
Stowage well under the trunk floor
X
To open: open trunk partition ;
(Y page 93).
X
Swing trunk floor = up using loop :.
The TIREFIT kit, tire-change tool kit, etc. is
located in the stowage compartment.
Features
Cup holder
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If objects in the passenger compartment are
stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be
thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In
addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces
and mobile phone brackets cannot always
retain all objects they contain. There is a
risk of injury, particularly in the event of sud-
den braking or a sudden change in direction.
R
Always stow objects so that they cannot
be thrown around in such situations.
R
Always make sure that objects do not pro-
trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or
stowage nets.
R
Close the lockable stowage spaces before
starting a journey.
R
Always stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-
ted, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects
in the trunk.
G
WARNING
The heating elements of the cup holder can
become very hot. You could burn yourself on
them.
There is a risk of injury.
Do not touch the hot heating elements of
the cup holder. Always make sure that chil-
dren cannot access the hot heating ele-
ments of the cup holder. Never leave chil-
dren unsupervised in the vehicle.
!
Only use the cup holders for containers of
the right size and which have lids. The
drinks could otherwise spill.
!
Do not expose drinks bottles in the cup
holder in the center console to continuous,
strong and direct sunlight. The passenger
compartment in the area of the center con-
sole can otherwise be damaged by the con-
centrated and reflected sunlight.
252
Features
Stowage and features
Cup holder in the center console
X
To open: open the stowage compartment
(Y page 250).
X
To remove the insert: slide catches :
inwards in the direction of the arrow.
X
Remove the cup holder insert upwards.
X
To re-install the insert: place the insert in
the stowage space.
X
Slide catches : outwards in the direction
of the arrow until they engage.
You can remove the cup holder's rubber mat
for cleaning. Clean with clear, lukewarm water
only.
Reducer ; can be removed. Large and small
containers can then be placed in the cup
holder.
X
To remove: grasp reducer ; and pull
upwards in the direction of the arrow.
X
To insert: insert reducer ; into the cup
holder in the opposite direction of the arrow
and press it down firmly.
Bottle holder
Observe the "Important safety notes" in the
"Stowage compartments" section
(Y page 249).
X
To open: open the stowage compartment
(Y page 250).
X
To remove the insert: slide catches :
inwards in the direction of the arrow.
X
Lift bottle holder insert ; up and remove.
X
To re-install the insert: place insert ; in
the stowage compartment.
X
Slide catches : outwards in the direction
of the arrow until they engage.
The bottle holder does not secure the bottles;
it merely prevents them from tipping over.
Sun visors
Overview
G
WARNING
If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is fol-
ded up when the vehicle is in motion, you
could be blinded by incident light. There is a
risk of an accident.
Always keep the mirror cover folded down
while driving.
:
Mirror light
;
Bracket
Features
253
Stowage and features
Z
=
Retaining strip, e.g. for a parking lot ticket
?
Vanity mirror
A
Mirror cover
Ashtray
X
To open: open stowage compartment :
(Y page 250).
X
To remove the insert: pull insert ; up in
the direction of the arrow, out of the cup
holder.
X
To re-install the insert: push insert ; on
the left-hand side into the cup holder.
i
Only re-install insert ; on the left-hand
side of the cup holder.
Cigarette lighter
G
WARNING
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot
heating element or the socket of the ciga-
rette lighter.
In addition, flammable materials can ignite
if:
R
the hot cigarette lighter falls
R
a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
objects, for example
There is a risk of fire and injury.
Always hold the cigarette lighter by the
knob. Always make sure that the cigarette
lighter is out of reach of children. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
Your attention must always be focused on the
traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette
lighter when road and traffic conditions per-
mit.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 126).
X
To open: open stowage compartment :
under the armrest (Y page 249).
X
Press in cigarette lighter ;.
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automati-
cally when the heating element is red-hot.
12 V sockets
General notes
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 126).
The sockets can be used for accessories with
a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessories
include such items as chargers for mobile
phones.
If you use the sockets for long periods when
the engine is switched off, the battery may dis-
charge.
i
An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-
board voltage does not drop too low. If the
on-board voltage is too low, the power to
the sockets is automatically cut. This
ensures that there is sufficient power to
start the engine.
254
Features
Stowage and features
Socket in the front-passenger footwell
X
Lift up the cover of socket :.
Socket in the trunk
X
Lift up the cover of socket :.
Mercedes me connect
General notes
A license agreement must be in place in order
to activate the Mercedes me connect service.
Make sure that your system is activated and
operational. To register, press the ï MB
Info call button. If any of the steps mentioned
are not carried out, the system may not be
activated.
If you have questions about the activation,
contact one of the following telephone hot-
lines:
R
USA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
R
Canada: Customer Service at
1-888-923-8367
Shortly after successfully registering with the
service, a user ID and password will be sent to
you by post.
USA only: you can use this password to log
onto the Mercedes me connect area under
"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
The system is available if:
R
it has been activated and is operational
R
the corresponding mobile phone network is
available for transmitting data to the Cus-
tomer Center
R
a service subscription is available
R
the starter battery is sufficiently charged
i Determining the location of the vehicle on
a map is only possible if:
R
GPS reception is available
R
the vehicle position can be forwarded to
the Customer Assistance Center
The Mercedes me connect system
To adjust the volume during a call, proceed as
follows:
X
Press the W or X button on the multi-
function steering wheel.
or
X
Use the volume controller of COMAND.
The system offers various services, e.g.:
R
Automatic and manual emergency call
R
Roadside Assistance call
R
MB Info call
USA only: you can find information and a
description of all available features under
"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
System self-test
After you have switched on the ignition, the
system carries out a self-diagnosis.
A malfunction in the system has been detec-
ted if one of the following occurs:
R
The indicator lamp in the SOS button does
not come on during the system self-test.
R
The indicator lamp in the F Roadside
Assistance button does not light up during
self-diagnosis of the system.
R
The indicator lamp in the ï MB Info call
button does not light up during self-diagno-
sis of the system.
Features
255
Stowage and features
Z
R
The indicator lamp in one or more of the fol-
lowing buttons continues to light up red
after the system self-diagnosis:
-
SOS button
-
F Roadside Assistance call button
-
ï MB Info call button
R
After the system self-diagnosis, the Inoper‐Inoper‐
ativeative or Service Not ActivatedService Not Activated mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above,
the system may not operate as expected. In
the event of an emergency, help will have to
be summoned by other means.
Have the system checked at the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Service Center or contact the
following service hotlines:
R
USA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
R
Canada: Customer Service at
1-888-923-8367
Emergency call
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,
even if you have pressed the SOS button in
an emergency if:
R
you see smoke inside or outside of the
vehicle, e.g. if there is a fire after an acci-
dent
R
the vehicle is on a dangerous section of
road
R
the vehicle is not visible or cannot easily
be seen by other road users, particularly
when dark or in poor visibility conditions
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Leave the vehicle immediately in this or sim-
ilar situations as soon as it is safe to do so.
Move to a safe location along with other
vehicle occupants. In such situations, secure
the vehicle in accordance with national regu-
lations, e. g. with a warning triangle.
A license agreement must be in place in order
to activate the Mercedes me connect service.
Make sure that your system is activated and
operational. To register, press the ï MB
Info call button. If any of the steps mentioned
are not carried out, the system may not be
activated.
If you have questions about the activation,
contact one of the following telephone hot-
lines:
R
USA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
R
Canada: Customer Service at
1-888-923-8367
General notes
An emergency call is dialed automatically if an
air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is trig-
gered.
i
You cannot end an automatically triggered
emergency call yourself.
An emergency call can also be initiated man-
ually.
As soon as the emergency call has been initi-
ated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button
flashes. The multifunction display shows the
Connecting Call
Connecting Call message.
The audio output is muted.
Once the connection has been made, the
Call ConnectedCall Connected message appears in the mul-
tifunction display.
All important information on the emergency is
transmitted, for example:
R
Current location of the vehicle (as deter-
mined by the GPS system)
R
Vehicle identification number
R
Information on the severity of the accident
Shortly after the emergency call has been initi-
ated, a voice connection is automatically
established between the Customer Assistance
Center and the vehicle occupants.
R
If the vehicle occupants are responsive, the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
attempts to get more information on the
emergency.
R
If there is no response from the vehicle
occupants, an ambulance is immediately
sent to the vehicle.
If no voice connection can be established to
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter, the system has been unable to initiate an
emergency call.
256
Features
Stowage and features
This can occur, for example, if the relevant
mobile phone network is not available. The
indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes con-
tinuously.
The Call FailedCall Failed message appears in the
multifunction display and must be confirmed.
In this case, summon assistance by other
means.
Making an emergency call
X
To initiate an emergency call manually:
press cover : briefly to open.
X
Press SOS button ; briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button ; flashes
until the emergency call is concluded.
X
Wait for a voice connection to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter.
X
After the emergency call, close cover :.
i
If the mobile phone network is unavailable,
Mercedes me connect is not able to make
an emergency call. If you leave the vehicle
immediately after pressing the SOS button,
you do not know if Mercedes me connect
has successfully made the emergency call.
In this case, always summon assistance by
other means.
Breakdown assistance call button
X
Press Roadside Assistance button :.
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center.
The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance
button : flashes while the call is active.
The multifunction display shows the Con‐Con‐
necting Callnecting Call message. The audio output
is muted.
If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐Call Con‐
nectednected message appears in the multifunction
display.
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception
are available, the system transfers data to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
for example:
R
Current location of the vehicle
R
Vehicle identification number
i
The COMAND display indicates that a call
is active. During the call, you can change to
the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI
button on COMAND, for example.
Voice output is not available.
A voice connection is established between the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
and the vehicle occupants.
From the remote malfunction diagnosis, the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
can ascertain the nature of the problem
(Y page 259).
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter either sends a qualified Mercedes-Benz
technician or makes arrangements for your
vehicle to be transported to the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Service Center.
You may be charged for services such as
repair work and/or towing.
Features
257
Stowage and features
Z
You can obtain further information from your
Mercedes me connect manual.
i The system has not been able to initiate a
Roadside Assistance call, if:
R
the indicator lamp for Roadside Assis-
tance call button : is flashing continu-
ously.
R
no voice connection to the Mercedes-
Benz Customer Assistance Center has
been established.
R
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone
network is not available, for example.
The Call FailedCall Failed message appears in the
multifunction display.
X
To end a call: press the ~ button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
or
X
Press the corresponding button for ending a
phone call on COMAND.
MB Info call button
X
Press MB Info call button :.
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center.
The indicator lamp in MB Info call button :
flashes while the connection is being made.
The multifunction display shows the Con‐Con‐
necting Callnecting Call message. The audio system
is muted.
If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐Call Con‐
nectednected message appears in the multifunction
display.
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception
are available, the system transfers data to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
for example:
R
Current location of the vehicle
R
Vehicle identification number
i
The COMAND display indicates that a call
is active. During the call, you can change to
the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI
button on COMAND, for example.
Voice output is not available.
A voice connection is established between the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
and the vehicle occupants.
You receive information about operating your
vehicle, about the nearest Mercedes-Benz Ser-
vice Center and about other products and
services from Mercedes-Benz.
USA only: you can find further information on
the Mercedes me connect system under "Own-
ers Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
i The system has not been able to initiate an
MB Info call, if:
R
the indicator lamp in MB Info call but-
ton : is flashing continuously.
R
no voice connection to the Mercedes-
Benz Customer Assistance Center was
established.
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone
network is not available, for example.
The Call FailedCall Failed message appears in the
multifunction display.
X
To end a call: press the ~ button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
or
X
Press the corresponding button for ending a
phone call on COMAND.
Call priority
When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside
Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency call
can still be initiated. In this case, an emer-
gency call will take priority and override all
other active calls.
The indicator lamp of the respective button
flashes until the call is ended.
An emergency call can only be terminated by
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter.
258
Features
Stowage and features
All other calls can be ended by pressing:
R
the ~ button on the multifunction steer-
ing wheel
R
or the corresponding COMAND button for
ending a telephone call
i
When a call is initiated, the audio system
is muted. The mobile phone is no longer
connected to COMAND. However, if you
want to use your mobile phone, do so only
when the vehicle is stationary and in a safe
location.
Vehicle Health Check
With the Vehicle Health Check, the Customer
Assistance Center can provide improved sup-
port for problems with your vehicle. During an
existing call, vehicle data is transferred to the
Customer Assistance Center. The customer
service representative can use the received
data to decide what kind of assistance is
required. You are then, for example, guided to
the nearest Mercedes-Benz Service Center or
a recovery vehicle is called.
If vehicle data needs to be transferred during
an MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call,
this is initiated by the Customer Assistance
Center. You will see the Roadside Assis‐Roadside Assis‐
tance Connectedtance Connected message in the COMAND
display. If the Vehicle Health Check can be
started, the Request for vehicle diagno‐
Request for vehicle diagno‐
sis received. Start vehicle diagno‐sis received. Start vehicle diagno‐
sis?sis? message appears in the display.
X
Confirm the message with YesYes.
X
When the Vehicle Diagnosis: PleaseVehicle Diagnosis: Please
start ignition.start ignition. message appears, turn
the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (Y page 126).
X
When the Please follow the instruc‐Please follow the instruc‐
tions received by phone and movetions received by phone and move
your vehicle to a safe positionyour vehicle to a safe position mes-
sage appears, follow the customer service
representative's instructions.
The message in the display disappears.
If you select CancelCancel the Vehicle Health
Check is canceled completely.
The vehicle operating state check begins.
You will see the Vehicle diagnosisVehicle diagnosis
activated.activated. message.
When the check is completed, the Send
Send
vehicle diagnostics data (Voice con‐vehicle diagnostics data (Voice con‐
nection may be interrupted duringnection may be interrupted during
data transfer)data transfer) message appears. The vehi-
cle data can now be sent to the Customer
Assistance Center.
X
Press OKOK to confirm the message.
The voice connection with the Customer
Assistance Center is terminated.
You will see the Vehicle Diagnosis:Vehicle Diagnosis:
Transferring data...Transferring data... message.
The vehicle data is sent to the Customer
Assistance Center.
Depending on what the customer service rep-
resentative agreed with you, the voice connec-
tion is re-established after the transfer is com-
plete. If necessary, you will be contacted at a
later time by another means, e.g. by e-mail or
phone.
Another function of the Vehicle Health Check
is the transfer of service data to the Customer
Assistance Center. If a service is overdue, the
COMAND display shows a message about vari-
ous special offers at your workshop.
USA only: this information can also be called
up under "Owners Online" at http://
www.mbusa.com.
Information on the data stored in the vehicle
(Y page 29).
Information on Roadside Assistance
(Y page 26).
Garage door opener
General notes
The HomeLink
®
garage door opener integrated
in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate
up to three different door and gate systems.
Use the integrated garage door opener only on
garage doors that:
R
have safety stop and reverse features and
R
meet current U.S. federal safety standards
Once programed, the integrated garage door
opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the
function of the garage door system's remote
control. Please also read the operating instruc-
tions for the garage door system.
When programming a garage door opener,
park the vehicle outside the garage. Do not
run the engine while programming.
Certain garage door drives are incompatible
with the integrated garage door opener. If you
have difficulty programing the integrated
Features
259
Stowage and features
Z
garage door opener, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Alternatively, you can call the following tele-
phone assistance services:
R
USA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
R
Canada: Customer Service at
1-800-387-0100
R
HomeLink
®
hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free of
charge)
More information on HomeLink
®
and/or com-
patible products is also available online at
http://www.homelink.com.
Notes on the declaration of conformity
(Y page 27).
USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4
Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When you operate or program the door with
the integrated garage door opener, persons
in the range of movement of the door may
become trapped or be struck by the door.
There is a risk of injury.
When using the integrated garage door
opener, always make sure that nobody is
within the range of movement of the door.
G
DANGER
Combustion engines emit poisonous
exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide.
Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to
health and can result in poisoning. There is a
risk of fatal injury. Therefore, never leave the
engine running an enclosed space without
adequate ventilation.
Programming
Programming the buttons
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"
(Y page 260).
Garage door remote control A is not included
with the integrated garage door opener.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 126).
X
Select one of buttons ; to ? to use to
control the garage door drive.
X
To start programming mode: press and
hold one of buttons ; to ? on the integra-
ted garage door opener.
The garage door opener is now in program-
ming mode. After a short time, indicator
lamp : lights up yellow.
Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon
as button ;, = or ? is stored for the first
time. If the selected button has already
been programed, indicator lamp : will only
light up yellow after ten seconds have
elapsed.
X
Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator
lamp : flashes yellow.
X
To program the remote control: point
garage door remote control A towards but-
tons ; to ? on the rear-view mirror at a
distance of 2 to 8 in (5 to 20 cm).
X
Press and hold button B on remote control
A until indicator lamp : lights up green.
When indicator lamp : lights up green:
programming is finished.
When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro-
gramming was successful. The next step is
to synchronize the rolling code
(Y page 261).
X
Release button B on remote control A for
the garage door drive system.
If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the
programing procedure for the corresponding
button on the rear-view mirror. When doing
so, vary the distance between remote con-
trol A and the rear-view mirror.
260
Features
Stowage and features
The required distance between remote con-
trol A and the integrated garage door
opener depends on the garage door drive
system. Several attempts might be neces-
sary. You should test every position for at
least 25 seconds before trying another posi-
tion.
Synchronizing the rolling code
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"
(Y page 260).
If the garage door system uses a rolling code,
you will also have to synchronize the garage
door system with the integrated garage door
opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this you
will need to use the programming button on
the door drive control panel. The programming
button may be located in different places
depending on the manufacturer. It is usually
located on the door drive unit on the garage
ceiling.
Familiarize yourself with the garage door drive
operating instructions, e.g. under "Program-
ming additional remote controls", before carry-
ing out the following steps.
Your vehicle must be within reach of the
garage door or gate opener drive. Make sure
that neither your vehicle nor any persons/
objects are present within the sweep of the
door or gate.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 126).
X
Get out of the vehicle.
X
Press the programming button on the door
drive unit.
Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiate
the next step.
X
Get into the vehicle.
X
Press previously programed button ;, =
or ? on the integrated garage door opener
repeatedly until the door closes.
The rolling code synchronization is then
complete.
Notes on programming the remote con-
trol
Canadian radio frequency laws require a
"break" (or interruption) of the transmission
signals after broadcasting for a few seconds.
Therefore, these signals may not last long
enough for the integrated garage door opener.
The signal is not recognized during program-
ming. Comparable with Canadian law, some
U.S. garage door openers also feature a
"break".
Proceed as follows:
R
if you live in Canada.
R
if you have difficulties programming the
garage door opener (regardless of where
you live) when following the programming
steps.
X
Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on
the integrated garage door opener.
After a short time, indicator lamp : lights
up yellow.
X
Release the button.
Indicator lamp : flashes yellow.
X
Press button B of garage door remote con-
trol A for two seconds, then release it for
two seconds.
X
Press button B again for two seconds.
X
Repeat this sequence on button B of
remote control A until indicator lamp :
lights up green.
When indicator lamp : lights up green:
programming is finished.
When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro-
gramming was successful. The next step is
to synchronize the rolling code.
X
Release button B of remote control A of
the garage door drive.
When indicator lamp : lights up red:
repeat the programming process for the cor-
responding button on the rear-view mirror.
When doing so, vary the distance between
remote control A and the rear-view mirror.
The required distance between remote con-
trol A and the integrated garage door
opener depends on the garage door drive
system. Several attempts might be neces-
sary. You should test every position for at
least 25 seconds before trying another posi-
tion.
Problems when programming
If you are experiencing problems programming
the integrated garage door opener on the rear-
view mirror, take note of the following instruc-
tions:
R
Check the transmitter frequency used by
garage door drive remote control A and
whether it is supported. The transmitter fre-
quency can usually be found on the back of
remote control A for the garage door drive.
Features
261
Stowage and features
Z
The integrated garage door opener is com-
patible with devices that have units which
operate in the frequency range of 280 to
433 MHz.
R
Replace the batteries in garage door remote
control A. This increases the likelihood that
garage door remote control A will transmit
a strong and precise signal to the integrated
garage door opener.
R
When programming, hold remote control A
at varying distances and angles from but-
tons ; to ? which you are programming.
Try various angles at a distance between
2and 8 inches (5to 20 cm) or at the same
angle but at varying distances.
R
If a further remote control A is available for
the same garage door drive, repeat the
same programming steps with this remote
control A. Before performing these steps,
make sure that new batteries have been
installed in garage door drive remote control
A.
R
Note that some remote controls only trans-
mit for a limited amount of time (the indica-
tor lamp on the remote control goes out).
Press button B on remote control A again
before transmission ends.
R
Align the antenna cable of the garage door
opener unit. This can improve signal recep-
tion/transmission.
Opening/closing the garage door
After it has been programmed, the integrated
garage door opener performs the function of
the garage door system remote control. Please
also read the operating instructions for the
garage door system.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 126).
X
Press either button ;, = or ? which you
have programmed to operate the garage
door.
Garage door system with a fixed code: indi-
cator lamp : lights up green.
Garage door system with a rolling code: indi-
cator lamp : flashes green.
The transmitter will transmit a signal as long
as the button is pressed. The transmission
is halted after a maximum of ten seconds
and indicator lamp : lights up yellow.
X
Press button ;, = or ? again if neces-
sary.
Clearing the memory
Make sure that you clear the memory of the
integrated garage door opener before selling
the vehicle.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 126).
X
Press and hold buttons ; and ?.
The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow
and then green.
X
Release buttons ; and ?.
The memory of the integrated garage door
opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.
Compass
Calling up the compass
Compass ; displays the compass direction in
which the vehicle is currently traveling: NN, NENE,
EE, SESE, SS, SWSW, WW or NWNW.
To receive a correct display in rear-view mir-
ror :, the compass must be calibrated and
the magnetic field zone set.
262
Features
Stowage and features
Setting the compass
North America zone map
South America zone map
X
Set your location using the zone maps.
X
Push a round pen into opening =
(Y page 262) for approximately three sec-
onds.
The zone currently selected appears in com-
pass display ; (Y page 262).
X
To select the zone: push a round pen into
opening = (Y page 262) until the desired
zone is selected.
If, after a few seconds, the display in com-
pass display ; (Y page 262) changes direc-
tion, the zone has been selected.
Calibrating the compass
X
Make sure that there is sufficient space for
you to drive in a circle without impeding
traffic.
In order to calibrate the compass correctly, do
the following:
R
calibrate the compass in the open and not in
the vicinity of steel structures or high-volt-
age transmission lines.
R
switch off electrical consumers such as the
climate control, windshield wipers or rear
window defroster.
R
close all doors and the trunk lid.
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Push a round pen into opening =
(Y page 262) for approximately six seconds,
until symbol C
C is shown in compass dis-
play ; (Y page 262).
X
Drive your vehicle in a full circle at approx-
imately 3 mph (5 km/h) to 6 mph
(10 km/h).
When the calibration has successfully been
completed, the current direction is shown in
compass display ; (Y page 262).
Floormats
G
WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict
the clearance around the pedals or block a
depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the oper-
ating and road safety of the vehicle. There is
a risk of an accident.
Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so
that they do not get into the driver's foot-
well. When using floormats or carpets, make
sure that they are properly secured so that
they do not slip or obstruct the pedals. Do
not place several floormats or carpets on
top of one another.
Features
263
Stowage and features
Z
X
Slide the seat back.
X
To install: place the floormat in the foot-
well.
X
Press studs : onto retainers ;.
X
To remove: pull the floormat off retain-
ers ;.
X
Remove the floormat.
264
Features
Stowage and features
Engine compartment
Hood
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If the hood is unlatched, it may open up
when the vehicle is in motion and block your
view. There is a risk of an accident.
Never unlatch the hood while driving. Before
every trip, ensure that the hood is locked.
G
WARNING
When opening and closing the hood, it may
suddenly fall into the closed position. There
is a risk of injury to persons within range of
movement of the hood.
Open and close the hood only when no one
is within its range of movement.
G
WARNING
Opening the hood when the engine is over-
heated or when there is a fire in the engine
compartment could expose you to hot gases
or other service products. There is a risk of
injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department.
G
WARNING
The engine compartment contains moving
components. Certain components, such as
the radiator fan, may continue to run or start
again suddenly when the ignition is off.
There is a risk of injury.
If you need to do any work inside the engine
compartment:
R
switch off the ignition
R
never reach into the area where there is a
risk of danger from moving components,
such as the fan rotation area
R
remove jewelry and watches
R
keep items of clothing and hair, for exam-
ple, away from moving parts
To ensure the flow of fresh air through the air
vents into the vehicle interior, please observe
the following notes: (Y page 122)
Opening the hood
G
WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very
hot. Working in the engine compartment
poses a risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down
and touch only the components described in
the following.
G
WARNING
When the hood is open and the windshield
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured
by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before opening the hood.
!
Make sure that the windshield wipers are
not folded away from the windshield. You
could otherwise damage the windshield wip-
ers or the hood.
X
Make sure that the windshield wipers are
turned off.
X
Pull release lever : on the hood.
The hood is released.
Engine compartment
265
Maintenance and care
Z
X
Reach into the gap, pull hood catch han-
dle ; up and lift hood :.
If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in
(40 cm), the hood is opened and held open
automatically by the gas-filled strut.
Closing the hood
X
Lower the hood and let it fall from a height
of approximately 8 in (20 cm).
X
Check that the hood has engaged properly.
If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not
properly engaged. Open it again and close it
with a little more force.
Engine oil
Notes on the oil level
Depending on your driving style, the vehicle
consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per
600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption
may be higher than this when the vehicle is
new or if you frequently drive at high engine
speeds.
Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may
be in a different location.
When checking the oil level:
R
park the vehicle on a level surface
R
the engine should be switched off for
approximately five minutes if the engine is
at normal operating temperature
R
if the engine is not at normal operating tem-
perature, e.g. if the engine was only started
briefly, wait about 30 minutes before carry-
ing out the measurement
Checking the oil level using the oil dip-
stick
G
WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very
hot. Working in the engine compartment
poses a risk of injury.
Only touch the following components descri-
bed.
If work is being carried out on public roads,
pay attention to the road and traffic conditions
and secure the area as appropriate.
Example
X
Pull out oil dipstick :.
X
Wipe off oil dipstick :.
X
Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide
tube as far as it will go, and take it out
again.
If the level is between MIN mark = and
MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct.
X
If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark =
or below, add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil.
Adding engine oil
G
WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very
hot. Working in the engine compartment
poses a risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down
and touch only the components described in
the following.
266
Engine compartment
Maintenance and care
G
WARNING
If engine oil comes into contact with hot
components in the engine compartment, it
may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next
to the filler neck. Let the engine cool down
and thoroughly clean the engine oil off the
components before starting the engine.
H
Environmental note
When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If
oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful
to the environment.
!
Use only engine oils and oil filters that are
approved for vehicles with a service system.
A list of the engine oils and oil filters that
have been tested and approved in accord-
ance with Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Service Products is available at any author-
ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The following cause engine failure or dam-
age to the exhaust system:
R
Use of engine oils and oil filters that have
not been expressly approved for the ser-
vice system
R
Replacement of engine oil and oil filter
after the replacement interval specified
by the service system has expired
R
Use of engine oil additives
!
Do not add too much oil. If the oil level is
above the "max" mark on the dipstick, too
much oil has been added. This can lead to
damage to the engine or the catalytic con-
verter. Have excess oil siphoned off.
Example: engine oil cap
X
Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove
it.
X
Add engine oil.
If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark
on the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter)
of engine oil.
X
Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn
clockwise.
Ensure that the cap locks into place
securely.
X
Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick
(Y page 266).
Further information on engine oil
(Y page 323).
Checking and adding other service
products
Checking coolant level
G
WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very
hot. Working in the engine compartment
poses a risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down
and touch only the components described in
the following.
G
WARNING
Opening the hood when the engine is over-
heated or when there is a fire in the engine
compartment could expose you to hot gases
or other service products. There is a risk of
injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department.
G
WARNING
The engine compartment contains moving
components. Certain components, such as
the radiator fan, may continue to run or start
again suddenly when the ignition is off.
There is a risk of injury.
Engine compartment
267
Maintenance and care
Z
If you need to do any work inside the engine
compartment:
R
switch off the ignition
R
never reach into the area where there is a
risk of danger from moving components,
such as the fan rotation area
R
remove jewelry and watches
R
keep items of clothing and hair, for exam-
ple, away from moving parts
G
WARNING
The cooling system is pressurized, particu-
larly when the motor is warm. If you open
the cap, you could be scalded if hot coolant
sprays out. There is a risk of injury.
Let the engine cool down before you open
the cap. Wear protective gloves and protec-
tive eyewear when opening. Open the cap
slowly to release pressure.
Example
X
Park the vehicle on a level surface.
Only check the coolant level when the vehi-
cle is on a level surface and the engine has
cooled down.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 126).
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the
Start/Stop button twice (Y page 126).
X
Check the coolant temperature gage in the
multifunction display.
The coolant temperature must be below
158 ‡ (70 †).
X
Turn the SmartKey to position u
(Y page 126) in the ignition lock.
X
Slowly turn cap ; half a turn counter-clock-
wise to allow excess pressure to escape.
X
Turn cap ; further counter-clockwise and
remove it.
If the coolant is at the level of marker bar
= in the filler neck when cold, there is
enough coolant in coolant expansion
tank :.
If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in
(1.5 cm) above marker bar = in the filler
neck when warm, there is enough coolant in
expansion tank :.
X
If necessary, add coolant that has been tes-
ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X
Replace cap ; and turn it clockwise as far
as it will go.
Further information on coolant (Y page 324).
Windshield washer system
G
WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very
hot. Working in the engine compartment
poses a risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down
and touch only the components described in
the following.
G
WARNING
If you open the hood when the drive system
has overheated or during a fire in the engine
compartment, you could come into contact
with hot gases or other escaping operating
fluids. There is a risk of burns.
Let the overheated components cool down
before opening the hood. In the event of a
fire in the engine compartment, keep the
hood closed and call the fire service.
G
WARNING
Windshield washer concentrate is highly
flammable. If windshield washer concentrate
gets onto hot components of the engine or
the exhaust system, it can ignite. There is a
risk of fire and injury.
268
Engine compartment
Maintenance and care
Make sure that windshield washer concen-
trate is not spilled in the vicinity of the filler
neck.
Example
X
To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab.
X
Add the premixed washer fluid.
X
To close: press cap : onto the filler neck
until it engages.
If the washer fluid level drops below the rec-
ommended minimum fluid level of 1 US qt
(1 liter), a message appears in the multifunc-
tion display prompting you to add washer fluid
(Y page 231).
Further information on windshield washer
fluid/antifreeze (Y page 325).
Overview of the engine compart-
ment
Example engine
:
Oil dipstick
;
Brake fluid reservoir
=
Engine oil cap
?
Coolant expansion tank
A
Washer fluid reservoir
ASSYST PLUS
Service display
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display indi-
cates the remaining time period or the remain-
ing distance to the next regular service due
date.
Information on the type of service and service
intervals (see the separate Maintenance Book-
let).
You can obtain further information from an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
i
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
does not show any information on the
engine oil level. Observe the notes on the
engine oil level (Y page 266).
The multifunction display shows a service dis-
play for a few seconds, e.g.:
R
Service A in .. DaysService A in .. Days
R
Service A DueService A Due
R
Service A Exceeded by .. DaysService A Exceeded by .. Days
Depending on the operating conditions of the
vehicle, the remaining time or distance until
the next service due date is displayed.
The letter AA or BB, possibly in connection with a
number or another letter, shows the type of
service. AA stands for a minor service and BB for
a major service.
You can obtain further information from an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Depending on how the vehicle is used, the
ASSYST PLUS service interval display may
reduce the service interval, e.g. in the follow-
ing situations:
X
the vehicle is primarily used to travel short
distances
X
if the engine is often left idling for long peri-
ods
X
if there are frequent cold start phases
Mercedes-Benz recommends you avoid such
operating conditions.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does
not take into account any periods of time dur-
ing which the battery is disconnected.
ASSYST PLUS
269
Maintenance and care
Z
Maintaining the time-dependent service sched-
ule:
X
Note down the service due date displayed in
the multifunction display before disconnect-
ing the battery.
or
X
After reconnecting the battery, subtract the
battery disconnection periods from the ser-
vice date shown on the display.
Hiding service displays
X
Press the a or % button on the steer-
ing wheel.
Showing service displays
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Press = or ; on the steering wheel
to select the Serv.Serv. menu.
X
Press 9 or : to select the ASSYSTASSYST
PLUSPLUS submenu and confirm by pressing the
a button.
The service due date appears in the multi-
function display.
Information about Service
Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service
interval display
!
If the ASSYST PLUS service interval dis-
play has been inadvertently reset, this set-
ting can be corrected at a qualified special-
ist workshop.
Have service work carried out as described
in the Maintenance Booklet. This may other-
wise lead to increased wear and damage to
the major assemblies or the vehicle.
A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an author-
ized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset the
ASSYST PLUS service interval display after the
service work has been carried out. You can
also obtain further information on mainte-
nance work, for example.
Special service requirements
The specified maintenance interval takes only
the normal operation of the vehicle into
account. Service work will need to be per-
formed more often if the vehicle is operated
under arduous conditions or increased loads.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display is
only an aid. The driver of the vehicle is respon-
sible for whether service work will need to be
performed more frequently than required as a
result of the actual operating conditions
and/or loads.
Examples of arduous operating conditions:
R
regular city driving with frequent intermedi-
ate stops
R
the vehicle is primarily used to travel short
distances
R
frequent use in mountainous terrain or on
poor road surfaces
R
the engine is often left idling for long peri-
ods
R
particularly dusty conditions, or if air-recir-
culation mode is frequently used
In these or similar operating conditions, have
the interior filter, air filter, engine oil and oil fil-
ter, for example, changed more frequently.
Under arduous operating conditions, the tires
must be checked more often. Further informa-
tion can be obtained at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Driving abroad
An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network
is also available in other countries. You can
obtain further information from any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Service Center.
Care
Notes on care
H
Environmental note
Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning
cloths in an environmentally responsible
manner.
!
When cleaning your car, do not use:
R
dry, coarse or hard cloths
R
abrasive cleaning agents
270
Care
Maintenance and care
R
solvents
R
cleaning agents containing solvents
Do not scrub.
Do not touch the surfaces and films with
hard objects, e.g. rings or ice scrapers. Oth-
erwise, you may scratch or damage the sur-
faces and films.
!
Do not park your vehicle for a long period
of time directly after cleaning, particularly
after cleaning the wheel rim with wheel
cleaner. Wheel cleaner can lead to the
increased corrosion of the brake discs and
pads. Therefore, drive for a few minutes
after cleaning. By heating up the brakes, the
brake discs and pads dry. The vehicle can
then be parked for a long period of time.
Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for
retaining the quality in the long term.
Use care products and cleaning agents recom-
mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Washing the vehicle and cleaning
the paintwork
Automatic car wash
G
WARNING
Braking efficiency is reduced after washing
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
After the vehicle has been washed, brake
carefully while paying attention to the traffic
conditions until full braking power is
restored.
!
When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func-
tion is activated, the vehicle brakes auto-
matically in certain situations.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in
the following or similar situations:
R
when towing the vehicle
R
in the car wash
!
It is preferable to use car washes with
adjustable high-pressure pre-cleaning that
corresponds to the specification for the
Cabriolet program. In car washes that use
high water pressures, there is a risk that a
small amount of water may leak into the
vehicle.
!
Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: if a
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is within the
detection range of the KEYLESS-GO
antenna, the following situations could lead
to the unintentional opening of the trunk lid:
R
using a car wash
R
using a power washer
Make sure that the SmartKey is at least
6.5 ft (2 m) away from the vehicle.
!
Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless
Automatic Car Wash as these use special
cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can
damage the paintwork or plastic parts.
If you have your vehicle cleaned in a high-
pressure automatic car wash, small
amounts of water may enter the vehicle.
!
Make sure that the automatic transmission
is in position N when washing your vehicle
in a tow-through car wash. The vehicle could
be damaged if the transmission is in another
position.
!
Make sure that:
R
the side windows and the roof are com-
pletely closed
R
the climate control blower is switched off
R
the windshield wiper switch is at position
0
The vehicle could otherwise be damaged.
You can clean the vehicle at an automatic car
wash from the very start.
Preferably clean the vehicle at automatic car
washes that use textile washing elements
without brushes. This prevents fine scratches
from forming on the paintwork and film.
If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before
cleaning it in an automatic car wash.
After using an automatic car wash, wipe off
wax from the windshield and the wiper blades.
This will prevent smears and reduce wiping
noises caused by residue on the windshield.
i
Vehicles with decorative film: select a
wash program without hot wax at the auto-
matic car wash.
Washing by hand
In some countries, washing by hand is only
allowed at specially equipped washing bays.
Care
271
Maintenance and care
Z
Observe the legal requirements in each coun-
try.
X
Do not use hot water and do not wash the
vehicle in direct sunlight.
X
Use a soft sponge to clean.
X
Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car
shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X
Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a
gentle jet of water.
X
Do not point the water jet directly towards
the air inlet or the edges of decorative foils.
X
Use plenty of water and rinse out the
sponge frequently.
X
Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry
thoroughly with a chamois.
X
Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the
paintwork or the decorative foils.
Carefully remove all deposits of road salt as
soon as possible when driving in winter.
Power washers
G
WARNING
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
blasters) can cause invisible exterior dam-
age to the tires or chassis components.
Components damaged in this way may fail
unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not use power washers with circular jet
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
tires or chassis components replaced imme-
diately.
!
Vehicles with decorative film: parts of your
vehicle are covered with decorative film.
Maintain a distance of at least 27.5 in
(70 cm) between the film-covered parts of
the vehicle and the nozzle of the power
washer.
Information about the correct distance is
available from the equipment manufacturer.
Move the power washer nozzle around when
cleaning your vehicle.
The water temperature of the power washer
must not exceed 140 ‡ (60 †).
!
Always maintain a distance of at least
12 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the
power washer nozzle. Information about the
correct distance is available from the equip-
ment manufacturer.
Move the power washer nozzle around when
cleaning your vehicle.
Do not aim directly at any of the following:
R
Tires
R
Door gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.
R
Electrical components
R
Battery
R
Plug-type couplings
R
Light bulbs
R
Seals
R
Trim elements
R
Ventilation slots
Damaged seals or electrical components
can lead to leaks or failures.
!
Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: if a
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is within the
detection range of the KEYLESS-GO
antenna, the following situations could lead
to the unintentional opening of the trunk lid:
R
using a car wash
R
using a power washer
Make sure that the SmartKey is at least
6.5 ft (2 m) away from the vehicle.
Cleaning the paintwork
!
Do not affix:
R
stickers
R
films
R
magnetic plates or similar items
to painted surfaces. You could otherwise
damage the paintwork.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected
by corrosion and damage caused by inade-
quate care cannot always be completely
repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
X
Remove dirt immediately, where possible,
while avoiding rubbing too hard.
X
Soak insect remains with insect remover
and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
X
Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off
the treated areas afterwards.
X
Remove tree resin, oils, fuels and greases by
rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petro-
leum ether or lighter fluid
X
Remove coolant and brake fluid with a moist
cloth and clear water.
272
Care
Maintenance and care
X
Use tar remover to remove tar stains.
X
Use silicone remover to remove wax.
If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint
surface, use the paint care products recom-
mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. This
is the case approximately every three to five
months, depending on the climate conditions
and the care product used.
If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if
the paint has become dull, the paint cleaner
recommended and approved by Mercedes-
Benz should be used.
Do not use these care products in the sun or
on the hood while the hood is hot.
X
Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB
Touch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage to
the paintwork quickly and provisionally.
Matte finish care
!
Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy
wheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine.
!
The following can give the paint a glossy
appearance and thus reduce the matt
effect:
R
Rubbing hard with unsuitable agents
R
Washing the vehicle in direct sunlight
!
Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polish-
ing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax,
for the purpose of paintwork care. These
products are only suitable for high-gloss sur-
faces. Their use on vehicles with matte
paintwork leads to considerable surface
damage or, more specifically, to shiny, spot-
ted areas.
Always have paintwork repairs carried out at
a qualified specialist workshop.
!
Only use automatic car washes which cor-
respond to the latest technological stand-
ards. Never use wash programs which finish
by treating the vehicle with hot wax.
Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clear
matte finish. This will help you to avoid dam-
age to the paintwork due to incorrect treat-
ment.
These notes also apply to light alloy wheels
with a clear matte finish.
i
Use only insect remover and car shampoo
from the range of recommended and
approved Mercedes-Benz care products.
Cleaning the decorative film
!
The following may have an effect on the
service life and color of decorative film:
R
sunlight
R
temperature, e.g. hot-air fan
R
weather conditions
R
stone impacts and dirt
R
chemical cleaning agents
R
greasy substances
!
Do not use any types of polish on matt
decorative film. Polishing surfaces covered
with film gives it a shiny finish.
!
Do not treat matt or structured decorative
film with wax. This may lead to marks that
cannot be removed.
Observe the notes in the section on the care
and treatment of matte paintwork
(Y page 273); these notes also apply to matte
decorative film.
To clean, use plenty of water and a mild clean-
ing agent without additional or abrasive prod-
ucts, e.g. a car shampoo approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
X
Dry vehicles covered with film using a soft,
absorbent cloth after every wash.
Water marks could otherwise form.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected
by corrosion and damage caused by inade-
quate care cannot always be completely
repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
X
Remove dirt immediately, where possible,
while avoiding rubbing too hard.
The decorative film may be irreparably dam-
aged.
X
Soak insect remains with insect remover
and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
X
Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off
the treated areas afterwards.
The cleaning product, Paint Cleaner, which has
been approved and recommended by
Mercedes-Benz, should be used when dirt has
penetrated the decorative film surface or the
decorative film has become dull.
The manufacturer can provide you with infor-
mation on special care and cleaning products.
Laminated surfaces may exhibit optical differ-
ences to surfaces which were not protected by
Care
273
Maintenance and care
Z
a decorative film when the decorative film is
removed.
i
Have work or repairs on decorative film
carried out at a qualified specialist work-
shop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
this purpose.
Cleaning the vehicle parts
Cleaning the wheels
G
WARNING
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
blasters) can cause invisible exterior dam-
age to the tires or chassis components.
Components damaged in this way may fail
unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not use power washers with circular jet
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
tires or chassis components replaced imme-
diately.
!
Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products
to remove brake dust. This could damage
wheel bolts and brake components.
!
Do not park your vehicle for a long period
of time directly after cleaning, particularly
after cleaning the wheel rim with wheel
cleaner. Wheel cleaner can lead to the
increased corrosion of the brake discs and
pads. Therefore, drive for a few minutes
after cleaning. By heating up the brakes, the
brake discs and pads dry. The vehicle can
then be parked for a long period of time.
Cleaning the windows
G
WARNING
You could become trapped by the wind-
shield wipers if they start moving while
cleaning the windshield or wiper blades.
There is a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before cleaning the windshield
or wiper blades.
!
Only fold the windshield wipers away from
the windshield when vertical. Otherwise, you
will damage the hood.
!
Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,
solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-
vents to clean the inside of the windows. Do
not touch the insides of the windows with
hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring.
There is otherwise a risk of damaging the
windows.
!
Clean the water drainage channels of the
windshield and the rear window at regular
intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals
and pollen may under certain circumstances
prevent water from draining away. This can
lead to corrosion damage and damage to
electronic components.
X
Clean the inside and outside of the windows
with a damp cloth and a cleaning product
that is recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning wiper blades
G
WARNING
If the windshield wipers are set in motion
while you are cleaning the windshield, you
can be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a
risk of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before cleaning the windshield.
!
Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, the
wiper blade could be damaged.
!
Do not clean wiper blades too often and
do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the
graphite coating could be damaged. This
could cause wiper noise.
!
Hold the wiper arm securely when folding
back. The windshield could be damaged if
the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
X
Fold the windshield wiper arms away from
the windshield.
X
Carefully clean the wiper blades with a
damp cloth.
X
Fold the windshield wiper arms back again
before switching on the ignition.
274
Care
Maintenance and care
Cleaning the exterior lighting
!
Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.
Caustic, irritant or otherwise unsuitable
cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could
scratch or damage the exterior lighting plas-
tic lenses.
X
Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior lights
with a wet sponge and a mild cleaning
agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or
cleaning cloths.
Cleaning the mirror turn signals
!
Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.
Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths could scratch or damage the plastic
lenses of the mirror turn signals.
X
Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn
signals in the exterior mirror housing using a
wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.
Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or with clean-
ing cloths.
Cleaning the sensors
!
If you clean the sensors with a power
washer, make sure that you keep a distance
of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehi-
cle and the power washer nozzle. Informa-
tion about the correct distance is available
from the equipment manufacturer.
X
Clean sensors : of the driving systems
with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.
Cleaning the reversing camera
!
Do not clean the camera lens and the area
around the rear view camera with a power
washer.
X
Use clean water and a soft cloth to clean
camera lens :.
Cleaning the exhaust pipe
G
WARNING
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can
become very hot. If you come into contact
with these parts of the vehicle, you could
burn yourself. There is a risk of burns.
Always be particularly careful and supervise
children closely around the exhaust pipe and
the exhaust pipe trims. Allow these compo-
nents to cool down before touching them.
!
Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-
based cleaning agents, such as bathroom
cleaner or wheel cleaner.
X
Clean the exhaust pipe with a chrome care
product tested and approved by Mercedes-
Benz.
Impurities combined with the effects of road
grit and corrosive environmental factors may
cause flash rust to form on the surface. You
can restore the original shine of the exhaust
pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in win-
ter and after washing.
Care
275
Maintenance and care
Z
Where will I find...?
Warning triangle
Removing the warning triangle
Warning triangle : is located in a bracket on
the inside of the trunk lid.
X
Open the trunk lid.
X
Press catches ; in the direction of the
bracket and open the bracket in the direc-
tion of the arrow.
X
Pull the retaining clip of warning triangle :
in the center of the bracket, outward.
X
Remove warning triangle : from the
bracket.
Setting up the warning triangle
X
Fold feet = down and out to the side.
X
Pull side reflectors ; upwards to form a tri-
angle and lock them at the top using upper
press-stud :.
First-aid kit
First-aid kit : is located in the stowage well
under the trunk floor.
X
Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 252).
X
Remove first-aid kit :.
Check the expiration date on the first-aid kit at
least once a year. Replace the contents if nec-
essary, and replace missing items.
Reflective safety jacket
Removing/replacing reflective safety
jackets
The reflective safety jackets are located in the
safety jacket compartments in the stowage
compartments of the front doors. There are
also safety jacket compartments in the stow-
age compartments of the rear doors, in which
reflective safety jackets can be stowed.
X
To remove: pull out safety jacket bag :
with the reflective safety jacket by the loop.
X
Open safety jacket bag : and pull out the
reflective safety jacket.
276
Where will I find...?
Breakdown assistance
X
To stow: fold the reflective safety jacket,
roll it up and stow it in safety jacket bag :.
X
Slide safety jacket bag : along the lower
edge of the armrest into the safety jacket
compartment. Meanwhile, ensure that the
loop hangs out well within reach.
i
Remove a new reflective safety jacket
from its packaging material before sliding it
into the safety jacket compartment. The
packaging material may otherwise cause it
to slip out or make removing it difficult.
Observe the legal requirements in each coun-
try.
Notes on the reflective safety jacket
:
Maximum number of washes
;
Maximum wash temperature
=
Do not bleach
?
Do not iron
A
Do not use a laundry dryer
B
Do not dry-clean
C
This is a class 2 vest
R
The reflective safety jackets meet the
requirements defined by the legal standard
only if:
-
the correct size is used and
-
the reflective safety jacket is correctly
fastened
R
Before use, ensure that the reflective safety
jacket is clean and intact. The special prop-
erties may otherwise be compromised.
R
The reflective safety jackets should be
stored in their original packaging in a dry
place away from sources of heat and light.
R
The maximum number of washes specified
is not the only factor influencing the life
span of the reflective safety jackets. Their
life span also depends on use, care, storage,
etc.
R
The reflective safety jackets should be dis-
posed of and replaced with new ones:
-
after 15 washes, and/or
-
if the reflective strips have become
scratched, and/or
-
if the backing material and/or reflective
strips have become soiled and cannot be
cleaned off, and/or
-
the reflective safety jacket's fluorescence
has faded, e.g. due to the effects of sun-
light
R
Dispose of the reflective safety jacket in an
environmentally responsible manner. To do
so, contact your local waste disposal com-
pany.
Vehicle tool kit
General notes
The towing eye is located in the trunk in a
bracket below the trunk lid lock.
If your vehicle is equipped with a TIREFIT kit, it
is located in the stowage space under the
trunk floor.
Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit
The TIREFIT kit is located in the stowage well
under the trunk floor (Y page 252).
:
Towing eye
;
Tire sealant filler bottle
=
Fuse allocation chart
?
Tire inflation compressor
A
Stowage tray opening
X
To remove towing eye : raise the opening
on stowage tray A.
X
Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 279).
Where will I find...?
277
Breakdown assistance
Tire-change tool kit
The tire-change tool kit can be found in the
stowage well under the trunk floor
(Y page 252).
:
Bag containing the tire-changing tools
Bag : with the tire-changing tools contains:
R
jack
R
lug wrench
R
alignment bolt
R
wheel chock
R
gloves
Depending on the equipment, tools required
for a wheel change, such as a jack or a lug
wrench, are not available in all vehicles. Tools
approved for your vehicle are available at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle
Your vehicle may be equipped with:
R
tires with run-flat characteristics
(MOExtended tires) (Y page 278)
Vehicle preparation is not necessary on
vehicles with MOExtended tires.
R
a TIREFIT kit (Y page 277)
Vehicles with the Mercedes-Benz emer-
gency call system: in the event of a flat tire,
you can contact the Mercedes-Benz emer-
gency call system customer center.
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.
It is therefore recommended that you addition-
ally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you
mount tires that do not feature run-flat charac-
teristics, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be
obtained from a qualified specialist workshop.
Information on changing and mounting wheels
(Y page 313).
X
Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground, as far away as possible from
traffic.
X
Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 146).
X
If possible, bring the front wheels into the
straight-ahead position.
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove
the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driv-
er's door.
The vehicle electronics are now in position
g. This is the same as the SmartKey having
been removed.
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the
Start/Stop button from the ignition lock
(Y page 126).
X
Make sure that the passengers are not
endangered as they do so. Make sure that
no one is near the danger area while a
wheel is being changed. Anyone who is not
directly assisting in the wheel change
should, for example, stand behind the bar-
rier.
X
Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traf-
fic conditions when doing so.
X
Close the driver's door.
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat
properties)
General notes
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat
characteristics), you can continue to drive your
vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure
in one or more tires. The affected tire must not
show any clearly visible damage.
You can recognize an MOExtended tire by the
MOExtended marking which appears on the
sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking
next to the tire size designation, the load-bear-
ing capacity and the speed index
(Y page 307).
MOExtended tires may only be used in con-
junction with an active tire pressure monitor.
278
Flat tire
Breakdown assistance
If a pressure loss warning message
appears in the multifunction display:
R
observe the instructions in the display mes-
sages (Y page 227)
R
check the tire for damage
R
if driving on, observe the following notes
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode
is approximately 50 miles (80 kilometers)
when the vehicle is partially laden and approx-
imately 19 miles (30 kilometers) when the
vehicle is fully laden.
In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis-
tance possible depends upon:
R
Vehicle speed
R
Road condition
R
Outside temperature
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode
may be reduced by extreme driving conditions
or maneuvers, or it can be increased through a
moderate style of driving.
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode
is counted from the moment the tire pressure
loss warning appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
You must not exceed a maximum design
speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
When replacing one or all tires, please observe
the following specifications for your vehicle's
tires:
R
Size
R
Type and
R
The "MOExtended" mark
If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced
with an MOExtended tire, a standard tire may
be used as a temporary measure. Make sure
that you use the proper size and type (summer
or winter tire).
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.
It is therefore recommended that you addition-
ally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you
mount tires that do not feature run-flat charac-
teristics, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit can be
obtained from a qualified specialist workshop,
for example.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When you drive in emergency mode, the
handling characteristics are impaired. e.g.
when cornering, when accelerating strongly
and when braking. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
Do not exceed the maximum specified
speed. Avoid any abrupt steering and driving
maneuvers as well as driving over obstacles
(curbs, pot holes, off-road). This applies, in
particular, to a loaded vehicle.
Stop driving in emergency mode if you
notice:
R
banging noise
R
vehicle vibration
R
smoke which smells like rubber
R
continuous ESP
®
intervention
R
cracks in the tire side walls
After driving in emergency mode, have the
rims checked by a qualified specialist work-
shop with regard to their further use. The
defective tire must be replaced in every
case.
TIREFIT kit
Important safety notes
TIREFIT is a tire sealant.
You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to
0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire
tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tempera-
tures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †).
G
WARNING
In the following situations, the tire sealant is
unable to provide sufficient breakdown
assistance, as it is unable to seal the tire
properly:
R
there are cuts or punctures in the tire
larger than those mentioned above.
R
the wheel rim is damaged.
R
you have driven at very low tire pressures
or on a flat tire.
Flat tire
279
Breakdown assistance
Z
There is a risk of an accident.
Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita-
tion. It must not come into contact with your
skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do
not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant
away from children. There is a risk of injury.
If you come into contact with the tire seal-
ant, observe the following:
R
Rinse off the tire sealant from your skin
immediately with water.
R
If the tire sealant comes into contact with
your eyes, immediately rinse them thor-
oughly with clean water.
R
If tire sealant is swallowed, immediately
rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink
plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,
and seek medical attention immediately.
R
Immediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with tire sealant.
R
If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medi-
cal attention immediately.
!
Do not operate the tire inflation compres-
sor for longer than eight minutes at a time
without a break. It may otherwise overheat.
The tire inflation compressor can be oper-
ated again once it has cooled down.
Comply with the manufacturer’s safety instruc-
tions on the sticker on the tire inflation com-
pressor.
Using the TIREFIT kit
X
Do not remove any foreign objects which
have penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or
nails.
X
Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accom-
panying TIREFIT sticker and the tire inflation
compressor from the stowage well under-
neath the trunk floor (Y page 277).
X
Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker to the
instrument cluster within the driver's field of
vision.
X
Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the
valve on the wheel with the defective tire.
X
Pull plug ? with the cable and hose A out
of the housing.
X
Screw hose A onto flange B of tire sealant
bottle :.
X
Place tire sealant bottle : head down into
recess ; of the tire inflation compressor.
280
Flat tire
Breakdown assistance
X
Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty
tire.
X
Screw filler hose D onto the valve.
X
Insert plug ? into the socket of the ciga-
rette lighter or into a 12 V power socket in
your vehicle.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 126).
X
Press on and off switch = on the tire infla-
tion compressor to I.
The tire inflation compressor is switched on.
The tire is inflated.
First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire.
The pressure can briefly rise to approx-
imately 500 kPa (5.0 bar/73 psi).
Do not switch off the tire inflation com-
pressor during this phase.
X
Let the tire inflation compressor run for a
maximum of five minutes. The tire should
then have attained a pressure of at least
180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi).
If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi)
has been attained after five minutes:
(Y page 281).
If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi)
has not been attained after five minutes:
(Y page 281).
If tire sealant has escaped, clean it off affected
areas as quickly as possible. It is preferable to
use clean water.
If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant,
have them cleaned with perchloroethylene at a
dry cleaner as soon as possible.
Tire pressure not reached
If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has
not been attained after five minutes:
X
Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
X
Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the
faulty tire.
Note that tire sealant may escape when you
unscrew the filler hose.
X
Very slowly drive forwards or reverse
approximately 30 ft (10 m).
X
Pump up the tire again.
After a maximum of five minutes the tire
pressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/
26 psi).
G
WARNING
If the required tire pressure is not reached
after the specified time, the tire is too badly
damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the
tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a
tire pressure that is too low can significantly
impair the vehicle's braking and driving
characteristics. There is a risk of accident.
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
Tire pressure reached
G
WARNING
A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant
impairs the vehicle's driving characteristics
and is not suitable for driving at higher
speeds. There is a risk of an accident.
Adapt your driving style accordingly and
drive carefully. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible speed for a tire sealed with tire
sealant.
The maximum permissible speed for a tire
sealed with tire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h).
The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must be
affixed to the instrument cluster in the driver's
field of vision.
!
Residue from the tire sealant may come
out of the filler hose after use. This could
cause stains.
Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic
bag which contained the TIREFIT kit.
Flat tire
281
Breakdown assistance
Z
H
Environmental note
Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed
of professionally, e.g. at a qualified special-
ist workshop.
If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi)
has been achieved after a maximum period of
ten minutes:
X
Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
X
Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the
faulty tire.
X
Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire
inflation compressor.
X
Pull away immediately.
X
Stop after driving for approximately ten
minutes and check the tire pressure with
the tire inflation compressor.
The tire pressure must now be at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
G
WARNING
If the required tire pressure is not reached
after driving for a short period, the tire is too
badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot
repair the tire in this instance. Damaged
tires and a tire pressure that is too low can
significantly impair the vehicle's braking and
driving characteristics. There is a risk of
accident.
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
i
In cases such as the one mentioned
above, contact an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
X
Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and
Loading Information placard on the driver's
side B-pillar or the tire pressure table in the
fuel filler flap for values.
X
To increase the tire pressure: switch on
the tire inflation compressor.
X
To reduce the tire pressure: depress pres-
sure release button E next to pressure
gage F.
X
When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew
the filler hose from the valve of the sealed
tire.
X
Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of
the sealed tire.
X
Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire
inflation compressor.
The filler hose remains attached to the tire
sealant bottle.
X
Drive to the nearest qualified specialist
workshop and have the tire changed there.
X
Have the tire sealant bottle replaced as
soon as possible at a qualified specialist
workshop.
X
Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every
four years at a qualified specialist workshop.
Battery (vehicle)
Important safety notes
Special tools and expert knowledge are
required when working on the battery, e.g.
removal and installation. You should therefore
have all work involving the battery carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery
can lead, for example, to a short circuit and
thus damage the vehicle electronics. This
can lead to function restrictions applying to
safety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting
system, the ABS (anti-lock braking system)
or the ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program).
282
Battery (vehicle)
Breakdown assistance
The operating safety of your vehicle may be
restricted.
You could lose control of the vehicle, for
example:
R
when braking
R
in the event of abrupt steering maneuvers
and/or when the vehicle's speed is not
adapted to the road conditions
There is a risk of an accident.
In the event of a short circuit or a similar
incident, contact a qualified specialist work-
shop immediately. Do not drive any further.
You should have all work involving the bat-
tery carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
For further information about ABS and ESP
®
,
see (Y page 60) and (Y page 65).
G
WARNING
Electrostatic build-up can lead to the crea-
tion of sparks, which could ignite the highly
explosive gases of a battery. There is a risk
of an explosion.
Before handling the battery, touch the vehi-
cle body to remove any existing electrostatic
build-up.
The highly flammable gas mixture forms when
charging the battery as well as when jump-
starting.
Always make sure that neither you nor the bat-
tery is electrostatically charged. A build-up of
electrostatic charge can be caused, for exam-
ple:
R
by wearing clothing made from synthetic
fibers
R
due to friction between clothing and seats
R
if you push or pull the battery across the
carpet or other synthetic materials
R
if you wipe the battery with a cloth
G
WARNING
During the charging process, a battery pro-
duces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs
or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can
ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
R
Make sure that the positive terminal of a
connected battery does not come into
contact with vehicle parts.
R
Never place metal objects or tools on a
battery.
R
It is important that you observe the
described order of the battery terminals
when connecting and disconnecting a bat-
tery.
R
When jump-starting, make sure that the
battery poles with identical polarity are
connected.
R
It is particularly important to observe the
described order when connecting and dis-
connecting the jumper cables.
R
Never connect or disconnect the battery
terminals while the engine is running.
G
WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of
injury.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do
not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean
over the battery. Keep children away from
batteries. Wash away battery acid immedi-
ately with plenty of clean water and seek
medical attention.
H
Environmental note
Batteries contain pollutants.
It is illegal to dispose of
them with the household
rubbish. They must be col-
lected separately and dis-
posed of in an environmen-
tally responsible recycling
system.
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally responsible
manner. Take discharged
batteries to a qualified spe-
cialist workshop or to a col-
lection point for used bat-
teries.
Battery (vehicle)
283
Breakdown assistance
Z
!
Have the battery regularly checked at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Comply with the service intervals in the
Maintenance Booklet, or contact a qualified
specialist workshop for more information.
!
Always have work on batteries carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop.
Should it, in exceptional circumstances, be
absolutely necessary to disconnect the 12-
volt battery yourself, please observe the fol-
lowing:
R
Secure the vehicle to prevent it from roll-
ing away.
R
Switch off the ignition.
R
Disconnect the negative terminal first and
then the positive terminal.
After the work has been done, install the
battery and replace the cover of the positive
terminal clamp firmly.
Comply with safety precautions and take pro-
tective measures when handling batteries.
Risk of explosion.
Fire, open flames and smoking are
prohibited when handling the bat-
tery. Avoid creating sparks.
Battery acid is caustic. Avoid con-
tact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Wear suitable protective clothing,
especially gloves, apron and face-
guard.
Rinse any acid spills immediately
with clear water. Contact a physi-
cian if necessary.
Wear eye protection.
Keep children away.
Observe this Operator's Manual.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use batteries which have
been tested and approved for your vehicle by
Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide
increased impact protection to prevent vehicle
occupants from suffering acid burns should
the battery be damaged in the event of an
accident.
In order for the battery to achieve the maxi-
mum possible service life, it must always be
sufficiently charged.
Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may
discharge over time if you do not use the vehi-
cle. In this case, have the battery disconnec-
ted at a qualified specialist workshop. You can
also charge the battery with a charger recom-
mended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a quali-
fied specialist workshop for further informa-
tion.
Have the battery condition of charge checked
more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly
for short trips or if you leave it standing idle
for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified spe-
cialist workshop if you wish to leave your vehi-
cle parked for a long period of time.
Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicle
and do not require any electrical consumers.
The vehicle will then use very little energy,
thus conserving battery power.
After an interruption to the power supply, e.g.
due to a discharged battery, you must reset
the clock (see the Digital Operator's Manual).
Charging the battery
G
WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive
gases can escape from the battery. There is
a risk of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Ensure there is suffi-
cient ventilation while charging and jump-
starting. Do not lean over a battery.
G
WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of
injury.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do
not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean
over the battery. Keep children away from
batteries. Wash away battery acid immedi-
284
Battery (vehicle)
Breakdown assistance
ately with plenty of clean water and seek
medical attention.
G
WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at tempera-
tures below freezing point. When jump-start-
ing the vehicle or charging the battery,
gases can escape from the battery. There is
a risk of an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before
charging it or jump-starting.
!
Only use battery chargers with a maximum
charging voltage of 14.8 V.
!
Only charge the battery using the jump-
starting connection point.
The jump-starting connection point is in the
engine compartment.
If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up
at low temperatures, it is very likely that the
discharged battery has frozen. In this case,
you may neither charge the battery nor jump-
start the vehicle. The service life of a thawed-
out battery may be shorter. The starting char-
acteristics can be impaired, particularly at low
temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Read the battery charger's operating instruc-
tions before charging the battery.
X
Open the hood.
X
Connect the battery charger to the positive
terminal and ground point in the same order
as when connecting the donor battery in the
jump-starting procedure (Y page 285).
Replacing the 12 V battery
Observe the notes on the 12 V battery
(Y page 282).
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
the 12 V battery replaced at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
If you want to replace the battery yourself,
observe the following notes:
R
Always replace a defective battery with a
battery which meets the specific require-
ments of the vehicle.
The vehicle is equipped with an AGM
(Absorbent Glass Mat) technology battery.
Full vehicle functionality is only guaranteed
with an AGM battery. For safety reasons,
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only
use batteries which have been tested and
approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-
Benz.
R
Use detachable parts such as breather
hoses, angled connecting pieces or terminal
covers from the battery which is to be
replaced.
R
Make sure that the vent hose is always con-
nected to the original opening on the bat-
tery side.
R
Install existing or supplied cell caps to pre-
vent gases or battery acid from escaping.
R
Make sure that the detachable parts are
connected again in the same way.
Jump-starting
For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point in the engine com-
partment, consisting of a positive terminal and a ground point.
G
WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the
battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of
clean water and seek medical attention.
Jump-starting
285
Breakdown assistance
Z
G
WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a
risk of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient
ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.
G
WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or
sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
R
Make sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with
vehicle parts.
R
Never place metal objects or tools on a battery.
R
It is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connect-
ing and disconnecting a battery.
R
When jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.
R
It is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnect-
ing the jumper cables.
R
Never connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.
G
WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the
vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explo-
sion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.
!
Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be
damaged by the non-combusted fuel.
If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the dis-
charged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither charge the battery nor jump-start the
vehicle. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The starting characteristics can
be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the
engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a donor battery using jumper cables.
Observe the following points:
R
The battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,
jump-start the vehicle using a donor battery or a jump-starting device.
R
You may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.
R
Do not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.
R
Only jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.
R
Only use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
R
If the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected
for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.
R
Make sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
286
Jump-starting
Breakdown assistance
Make sure that:
R
The jumper cables are not damaged.
R
Bare parts of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal parts while the
jumper cables are connected to the battery.
R
The jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is
running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.
X
Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
X
Make sure that the ignition is switched off. All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must
be off. When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position u in the ignition lock and
remove it (Y page 126).
X
Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.
X
Open the hood.
Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-
starting device.
X
Press cover : of positive terminal ; down (in the direction of the arrow) and turn it clock-
wise. To expose positive terminal ;, press cover : down further.
X
Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B using
the jumper cable, always begin with positive terminal ; on your own vehicle first.
X
Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
X
Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to ground point A of your vehicle using the
jumper cable, beginning with donor battery B first.
X
Start the engine.
X
Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.
X
First, remove the jumper cables from ground point A and negative terminal ?, then from
positive terminal ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your own
vehicle first.
X
After the jumper cable is removed, return cover : of positive terminal ; to the original posi-
tion. Positive terminal ; is covered up and thus insulated again.
X
Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.
Jump-starting
287
Breakdown assistance
Z
i
Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any quali-
fied specialist workshop.
Towing and tow-starting
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle
and its weight is greater than the permissi-
ble gross weight of your vehicle, the:
R
the towing eye could detach itself
R
the vehicle/trailer combination could roll-
over.
There is a risk of an accident.
When towing or tow-starting another vehi-
cle, its weight should not be greater than
the permissible gross weight of your vehicle.
Details on the permissible gross vehicle weight
of your vehicle can be found on the vehicle
identification plate (Y page 320).
!
When Active Brake Assist, Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC or the HOLD function is
activated, the vehicle brakes automatically
in certain situations.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
these systems in the following or similar sit-
uations:
R
when towing the vehicle
R
in the car wash
!
Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the
towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could be
damaged.
!
Do not use the towing eye for recovery,
this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt,
recover the vehicle with a crane.
!
When towing, pull away slowly and
smoothly. If the tractive power is too high,
the vehicles could be damaged.
!
Do not tow with sling-type equipment. This
could damage the vehicle.
!
When towing away vehicles with KEYLESS-
GO, use the key instead of the Start/Stop
button. The automatic transmission may
otherwise shift to position j when you
open the driver's or front-passenger door,
which could damage the transmission.
!
Make sure that the electric parking brake
is released. If the electric parking brake is
faulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop.
!
You may tow the vehicle for a maximum
distance of 30 miles (50 kilometers). A tow-
ing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h) must not be
exceeded.
For towing distances over 30 miles
(50 kilometers), the entire vehicle must be
raised and transported.
!
When you are tow-starting or towing
another vehicle, its weight must not exceed
the maximum permissible gross weight of
your vehicle.
It is better to have the vehicle transported
than to have it towed away.
The automatic transmission must be in posi-
tion i when the vehicle is being towed away.
The battery must be connected and charged.
Otherwise, you:
R
cannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in
the ignition lock
R
cannot shift the automatic transmission to
position i
Deactivate the automatic locking feature
before the vehicle is towed (Y page 201). You
could otherwise be locked out when pushing
or towing the vehicle.
Installing/removing the towing eye
Installing the towing eye
G
WARNING
The exhaust tail pipe may be very hot. There
is a risk of burns when removing the rear
cover.
Do not touch the exhaust pipe. Take particu-
lar care when removing the rear cover.
288
Towing and tow-starting
Breakdown assistance
The brackets for the screw-in towing eye are
located in the bumpers. They are at the front
and at the rear, behind the covers.
X
Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool
kit (Y page 277).
X
Front bumper: insert a finger into the
recess on the bottom edge of cover :.
X
Pull cover : out of the bumper towards you
in the direction of the arrow.
Cover : is attached to the opening with a
strap.
X
Rear bumper: press the mark on cover :
inwards in the direction of the arrow.
X
Remove cover : from the opening.
X
Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as
it will go and tighten it.
Removing the towing eye
X
Unscrew and remove the towing eye.
X
Front bumper: position cover : on the
opening in the bumper.
X
To close, press the lower section of
cover :.
X
Rear bumper: position cover : with the
tab on the opening in the bumper.
X
To close, press the lower section of
cover : until it engages.
X
Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit.
Towing a vehicle with both axles on
the ground
G
WARNING
You can no longer steer the vehicle if the
steering wheel lock has been engaged.
There is a risk of an accident.
Always switch off the ignition when towing
the vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar.
The automatic transmission shifts to position
j automatically when you open the driver's
or front-passenger door or when you remove
the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
In order to ensure that the automatic trans-
mission stays in position i when towing
away the vehicle, you must observe the follow-
ing points:
X
Switch on the hazard warning lamps
(Y page 111).
X
Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and
that the SmartKey is in position u in the
ignition lock.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock.
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the
SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button
(Y page 126).
X
Depress and hold the brake pedal.
X
Shift the transmission to position i.
X
Release the brake pedal.
X
Release the electric parking brake.
X
Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the
ignition lock.
In order to signal a change of direction when
towing the vehicle with the hazard warning
lamps switched on, use the combination
switch as usual. In this case, only the indicator
lamps for the direction of travel flash. When
you reset the combination switch, the hazard
warning flashers start flashing again.
It is important that you observe the safety
instructions when towing away your vehicle
(Y page 288).
Permitted towing methods
Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your
vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than
towing it away.
Towing and tow-starting
289
Breakdown assistance
Z
When towing away, use a towing rope or a
towing bar with both axles on the ground. Do
not use any tow bar systems.
Towing the vehicle with the rear axle
raised
!
The ignition must be switched off if you
are towing the vehicle with the rear axle
raised. Intervention by ESP
®
could other-
wise damage the brake system.
!
Vehicles with automatic transmission must
not be towed with the rear axle raised. The
vehicle/trailer combination may otherwise
swerve or even roll over.
Transporting the vehicle
Vehicles with automatic transmission
!
When the vehicle is loaded for transport,
the front and rear axles must be stationary
and on the same transportation vehicle.
Positioning over the connection point of the
transport vehicle is not permitted. The drive
train may otherwise be damaged.
All vehicles
!
You may only secure the vehicle by the
wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as
axle or steering components. Otherwise, the
vehicle could be damaged.
The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle
onto a trailer or transporter for transporting
purposes.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock.
X
Shift the transmission to position i.
As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:
X
Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by
applying the electric parking brake.
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position u in the igni-
tion lock and remove it.
X
Secure the vehicle.
Tow-starting (emergency engine
starting)
!
Vehicles with automatic transmission must
not be tow-started. You could otherwise
damage the automatic transmission.
You can find information on "Jump-starting" at
(Y page 285).
Fuses
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if
you replace it with a fuse with a higher
amperage, the electric cables could be over-
loaded. This could result in a fire. There is a
risk of an accident and injury.
Always replace faulty fuses with the speci-
fied new fuses having the correct amperage.
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of
the same rating, which you can recognize by
the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed
in the fuse allocation chart.
The fuse allocation chart is located in the vehi-
cle tool kit in the stowage compartment under
the trunk floor (Y page 277).
If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
cause traced and rectified at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
!
Only use fuses that have been approved
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have
the correct fuse rating for the system con-
290
Fuses
Breakdown assistance
cerned. Otherwise, components or systems
could be damaged.
!
Make sure that no moisture can enter the
fuse box when the cover is open.
!
When closing the cover, make sure that it
is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture
seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the
operation of the fuses.
The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down
faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-
nents on the circuit and their functions stop
operating.
Before changing a fuse
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Switch off all electrical consumers.
X
Make sure that the ignition is switched off
(Y page 126).
or
X
When using the SmartKey, turn the Smart-
Key to position u in the ignition lock and
remove it (Y page 126).
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 146).
All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
must be off.
The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:
R
Fuse box in the engine compartment on the
right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed
in the direction of travel
R
Dashboard fuse box
R
Fuse box in the rear compartment on the
right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed
in the direction of travel
Dashboard fuse box
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 290).
!
Do not use a pointed object such as a
screwdriver to open the cover in the dash-
board. You could damage the dashboard or
the cover.
X
Open the driver's door.
X
To open: pull cover : outwards in the
direction of the arrow and remove it.
X
To close: clip in cover : on the front of the
dashboard.
X
Fold cover : inwards until it engages.
Fuse box in the engine compartment
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 290).
G
WARNING
When the hood is open and the windshield
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured
by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before opening the hood.
X
Open the hood.
X
Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture
from the fuse box.
X
To open: open clamps ;.
X
Fold cover : of the fuse box up in the
direction of the arrow and remove it.
Fuses
291
Breakdown assistance
Z
X
To close: check whether the seal is seated
correctly in cover :.
X
Insert both openings = at the rear of
cover : into the brackets on the fuse box.
The brackets on the fuse box must be com-
pletely visible in the two openings = on the
fuse box.
X
Fold down cover :.
X
Hook clamps ; into the fuse box and
close.
X
Close the hood.
Fuse box in the rear passenger com-
partment
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 290).
The fuse box in the rear is located on the right-
hand side when viewed in the direction of travel.
X
To open: open the seat belt guide on the
right-hand seat and remove the seat belt
(Y page 99).
X
Move the right-hand seat as far forward as
possible (Y page 100).
X
Insert your fingers at the bottom of front
cover ; between the cover and floor cover-
ing.
X
Remove front cover ; by pulling it forward
in the direction of the arrow.
X
Lift off top cover : by pulling it in the direc-
tion of the arrow.
Fuses = are accessible through the two open-
ings in the top of the fuse box.
X
To close: insert the securing tags under-
neath top cover : in the recesses at the
top of the fuse box.
X
Fold down top cover : until it engages
audibly.
X
Insert the securing tags underneath top
cover ; in the recesses at the front of the
fuse box.
X
Push front cover ; towards the rear until it
engages audibly.
X
Move the right-hand seat backwards
(Y page 100).
X
Hook the seat belt into the seat belt guide
on the right-hand seat (Y page 99).
292
Fuses
Breakdown assistance
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you install wheels and tires with incorrect
dimensions, the service brake or wheel sus-
pension components may be damaged.
There is a risk of an accident.
Always replace wheels and tires with ones
that comply with the specifications of the
original part.
When replacing wheels, pay attention to the:
R
Designation
R
Model
When replacing tires, pay attention to the:
R
Designation
R
Manufacturer
R
Model
G
WARNING
A flat tire will severely affect the driving
characteristics as well as the steering and
braking of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Tires without run-flat characteristics:
R
Do not drive on with a flat tire.
R
Change the flat tire immediately with an
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel.
Alternatively, consult a qualified specialist
workshop.
Tires with run-flat characteristics:
R
Observe the information and warning
notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tires).
Accessories that are not approved for your
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being
used correctly can impair the operating safety.
Before purchasing and using non-approved
accessories, visit a qualified specialist work-
shop and ask about:
R
suitability
R
legal stipulations
R
factory recommendations
Further information regarding wheels and tires
can be found under "Wheel/tire combinations"
(Y page 318).
You can ask for information regarding permit-
ted wheel/tire combinations at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Information on tire pressure can be found:
R
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the B-pillar on the driver's side
(Y page 303)
R
in the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
(Y page 145)
R
in the "Tire pressure" section
Operation
Information on driving
Check the tire pressure when the vehicle is
heavily laden and adjust prior to a trip.
While driving, pay attention to vibrations,
noises and unusual handling characteristics,
e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that
the wheels or tires are damaged. If you sus-
pect that a tire is defective, reduce your speed
immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon as pos-
sible to check the wheels and tires for dam-
age. Hidden tire damage could also be causing
the unusual handling characteristics. If you
find no signs of damage, have the tires and
wheels checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
When parking your vehicle, make sure that the
tires do not get deformed by the curb or other
obstacles. If they cannot be avoided, drive
over obstacles such as curbs slowly and at an
obtuse angle. Otherwise, you may damage the
wheels or tires.
Regular checking of wheels and tires
G
WARNING
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-
sure loss. As a result, you could lose control
of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
Check the tires regularly for signs of dam-
age and replace any damaged tires immedi-
ately.
Operation
293
Wheels and tires
Z
Check wheels and tires for damage at least
once a month. Check wheels and tires after
driving off-road or on rough roads. Damaged
wheels can cause a loss of tire pressure. Pay
particular attention to damage such as:
R
cuts in the tires
R
punctures in the tires
R
tears in the tires
R
bulges on tires
R
deformation or severe corrosion on wheels
Regularly check the tire tread depth and the
condition of the tread across the whole width
of all tires (Y page 294). If necessary, turn the
front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the
inner side of the tire surface.
All wheels must have a valve cap to protect
the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not
mount anything onto the valve other than the
standard valve cap or other valve caps
approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
Do not use any other valve caps or systems,
e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems.
Regularly check the pressure of all the tires
particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire
pressure as necessary (Y page 296).
The service life of tires depends, among other
things, on the following factors:
R
Driving style
R
Tire pressure
R
Distance covered
Notes on tire tread
G
WARNING
If there is insufficient tire tread, the tire trac-
tion decreases. The tire tread is no longer
able to dissipate water. This increases the
risk of hydroplaning when the road surface
is wet, particularly when the vehicle's speed
is not adapted to the road conditions. There
is a risk of an accident.
When the tire pressure is too high or too
low, tires may wear differently at different
points on the tire tread. Therefore, regularly
check the tire tread depth and the condition
of the tread across the whole width of all
tires.
Minimum tire tread depth on:
R
Summer tires: â in (3 mm)
R
M+S tires: ã in (4 mm)
For safety reasons, have the tires replaced
before they reach the legally prescribed min-
imum tire tread depth.
Marking : shows where the bar indicator for
tread wear (arrow) is integrated into the tire
tread.
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire
tread. They are visible once a tread depth of
approximately á in (1.6 mm) has been
reached. If this is the case, the tire is so worn
that it must be replaced.
Selecting, mounting and replacing
tires
Tires and wheels
R
Only mount tires and wheels of the same
type and make.
Exception: it is permissible to mount a dif-
ferent type or make in the event of a flat
tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires
with run-flat characteristics)" section
(Y page 278).
R
Only mount tires of the correct size onto the
wheels.
R
Break in new tires at moderate speeds for
the first 60 miles (100 km). The new tires
only reach their full performance after this
distance.
294
Operation
Wheels and tires
R
Do not drive with tires which have too little
tread depth. This significantly reduces the
traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).
R
Replace the tires after six years at the lat-
est, regardless of wear.
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat
properties)
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat
characteristics), you can continue to drive your
vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure
in one or more tires.
MOExtended tires may only be used in con-
junction with an active tire pressure monitor
and only on wheels specifically tested by
Mercedes-Benz.
Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with a
flat tire (Y page 278).
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.
It is therefore recommended that you addition-
ally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you
mount tires that do not feature run-flat charac-
teristics, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit can be
obtained from a qualified specialist workshop.
Winter operation
General notes
Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified
specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"
section (Y page 313).
Driving with summer tires
At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summer
tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and
braking power. Change the tires on your vehi-
cle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very
cold temperatures could cause cracks to form,
thereby damaging the tires permanently.
Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility
for this type of damage.
G
WARNING
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-
sure loss. As a result, you could lose control
of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
Check the tires regularly for signs of dam-
age and replace any damaged tires immedi-
ately.
M+S tires
G
WARNING
M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than
ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in win-
ter and do not provide sufficient traction.
There is a risk of an accident.
M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã
in (4 mm) must be replaced immediately.
At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), use win-
ter tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire
are identified by the M+S marking.
Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake
symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide
the best possible grip in wintry road condi-
tions.
Only these tires will allow driving safety sys-
tems such as ABS and ESP
®
to function opti-
mally in winter. These tires have been devel-
oped specifically for driving in snow.
Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on
all wheels to maintain safe handling character-
istics.
Always observe the maximum permissible
speed specified for the M+S tires you have
mounted.
When you have mounted the M+S tires:
X
Check the tire pressures (Y page 299).
X
Restart the tire pressure monitor
(Y page 301).
Snow chains
G
WARNING
If snow chains are installed to the front
wheels, they may drag against the vehicle
body or chassis components. This could
cause damage to the vehicle or the tires.
There is a risk of an accident.
Winter operation
295
Wheels and tires
Z
To avoid hazardous situations:
R
never install snow chains to the front
wheels
R
always install snow chains in pairs to the
rear wheels.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use snow chains that
have been specially approved for your vehicle
by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding
standard of quality. For more information,
please contact a qualified specialist workshop.
If you intend to mount snow chains, please
bear the following points in mind:
R
Snow chains may not be mounted on all
wheel/tire combinations. Permissible
wheel-tire combinations (Y page 318).
R
Only use snow chains when driving on roads
completely covered by snow. Remove the
snow chains as soon as possible when you
come to a road that is not snow-covered.
R
Local regulations may restrict the use of
snow chains. Observe the appropriate regu-
lations if you wish to mount snow chains.
R
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 30 mph (50 km/h).
R
On vehicles with Active Body Control (ABC),
if snow chains have been installed, you must
drive at a raised vehicle level (Y page 168).
You may wish to deactivate ESP
®
when pulling
away with snow chains installed (Y page 66).
You can thereby allow the wheels to spin in a
controlled manner, achieving an increased
driving force (cutting action).
Tire pressure
Tire pressure specifications
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the
following risks:
R
the tires may burst, especially as the load
and vehicle speed increase.
R
the tires may wear excessively and/or
unevenly, which may greatly impair tire
traction.
R
the driving characteristics, as well as
steering and braking, may be greatly
impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures
and check the pressure of all the tires
including the spare wheel:
R
monthly, at least
R
if the load changes
R
before beginning a long journey
R
under different operating conditions, e.g.
off-road driving
If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
The data on the Tire and Loading Information
placard and tire pressure table shown here are
examples. Tire pressure specifications are
vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data
shown here. The tire pressure specifications
that are valid for your vehicle can be found on
the Tire and Loading Information placard and
tire pressure table on the vehicle.
General notes
The recommended tire pressures for the tires
mounted at the factory can be found on the
labels described here.
Further information on tire pressures can be
obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
296
Tire pressure
Wheels and tires
Tire and Loading Information placard
:
Recommended tire pressures
The Tire and Loading Information placard is on
the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 303).
The Tire and Loading Information placard con-
tains the recommended tire pressures for cold
tires. The recommended tire pressures are
valid for the maximum permissible load and up
to the maximum permissible vehicle speed.
Tire pressure table
The tire pressure table is on the inside of the
fuel filler flap. It shows the tire pressure for all
tires permitted at the factory for this vehicle;
see illustration (example).
The tire pressure table contains the recom-
mended pressures for cold tires for various
operating conditions, i.e. differing load and
speed conditions.
If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the fol-
lowing tire pressure information is only valid
for that tire size; see illustration (example).
The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully
laden" are defined in the table for different
numbers of occupants and amounts of lug-
gage. The actual number of seats may differ.
Some tire pressure tables show only the rim
diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18.
Rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be
found on the tire sidewall (Y page 307).
If the tire pressures have been set to the lower
values for lighter loads and/or lower road
speeds, the pressures should be reset to the
higher values:
R
if you want to drive with an increased load
and/or
R
if you want to drive at higher road speeds
The tire pressures for increased loads and/or
higher road speeds, shown in the tire pressure
table, may have a negative effect on driving
comfort.
If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this can
lead to an excessive build-up of heat and a
sudden loss of pressure.
For more information, contact a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Tire pressure
297
Wheels and tires
Z
Important notes on tire pressure
G
WARNING
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the
wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire
pressure that is too low may result in a tire
blow-out. There is a risk of an accident.
R
Check the tire for foreign objects.
R
Check whether the wheel is losing air or
the valve is leaking.
If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-
tact a qualified specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire
valves, the tire valves may be overloaded
and malfunction, which can cause tire pres-
sure loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire
pressure monitors keep the tire valve open.
This can also result in tire pressure loss.
There is a risk of an accident.
Only screw the standard valve cap or other
valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for
your vehicle onto the tire valve.
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the
tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire
does not permit any reliable conclusion about
the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped with
the electronic tire pressure monitor, the tire
pressure can be checked in the on-board com-
puter.
The tire temperature and pressure increase
when the vehicle is in motion. This is depend-
ent on the driving speed and the load.
Therefore, you should only correct tire pres-
sures when the tires are cold.
The tires are cold:
R
if the vehicle has been parked with the tires
out of direct sunlight for at least three hours
and
R
if the vehicle has not been driven further
than 1 mile (1.6 km)
The tire temperature changes depending on
the outside temperature, the vehicle speed
and the tire load. If the tire temperature
changes by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure
changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/
1.5 psi). Take this into account when checking
the pressure of warm tires. Only correct the
tire pressure if it is too low for the current
operating conditions. If you check the tire
pressure when the tires are warm, the result-
ing value will be higher than if the tires were
cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the tire
pressure to the value specified for cold tires.
The tire pressure would otherwise be too low.
Observe the recommended tire pressures for
cold tires:
R
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the B-pillar on the driver's side
R
in the tire pressure table on the inside of the
fuel filler flap
Underinflated or overinflated tires
Underinflated tires
G
WARNING
Tires with pressure that is too low can over-
heat and burst as a consequence. In addi-
tion, they also suffer from excessive and/or
irregular wear, which can severely impair the
braking properties and the driving character-
istics. There is a risk of an accident.
Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all
the tires, including the spare wheel.
Underinflated tires may:
R
overheat, leading to tire defects
R
adversely affect handling
R
wear excessively and/or unevenly
R
have an adverse effect on fuel consumption
Overinflated tires
G
WARNING
Tires with excessively high pressure can
burst because they are damaged more eas-
ily by road debris, potholes etc. In addition,
they also suffer from irregular wear, which
can severely impair the braking properties
and the driving characteristics. There is a
risk of an accident.
Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all
the tires, including the spare wheel.
298
Tire pressure
Wheels and tires
Overinflated tires may:
R
increase the braking distance
R
adversely affect handling
R
wear excessively and/or unevenly
R
have an adverse effect on ride comfort
R
be more susceptible to damage
Maximum tire pressures
:
Example: maximum permissible tire pres-
sure
Never exceed the maximum permissible tire
inflation pressure. Always observe the recom-
mended tire pressure for your vehicle when
adjusting the tire pressure (Y page 296).
i
The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-
cific and may deviate from the values in the
illustration.
Checking the tire pressures
Important safety notes
The tire pressure monitor does not warn you
of:
R
incorrectly set tire pressure
R
sudden loss of tire pressure, e.g. from a for-
eign object that has penetrated the tire
Observe the notes on tire pressure
(Y page 296).
Information on air pressure for the tires on
your vehicle can be found:
R
on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa-
tion placard on the B-pillar
R
on the tire pressure table in the fuel filler
flap
R
in the "Tire pressure" section
Checking tire pressures manually
To determine and set the correct tire pressure,
proceed as follows:
X
Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to
be checked.
X
Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto
the valve.
X
Read the tire pressure and compare it to the
recommended value on the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the tire pressure
table (Y page 296).
X
If the tire pressure is too low, increase the
tire pressure to the recommended value.
X
If the tire pressure is too high, release air.
To do so, press down the metal pin in the
valve, using the tip of a pen for example.
Then check the tire pressure again using the
tire pressure checker.
X
Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
X
Repeat these steps for the other tires.
Tire pressure monitor
General notes
If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehi-
cle's wheels have sensors that monitor the tire
pressures in all four tires. The tire pressure
monitor warns you if the pressure drops in one
or more of the tires. The tire pressure monitor
only functions if the corresponding sensors
are installed in all wheels.
Information on tire pressures is displayed in
the multifunction display. After a few minutes
of driving, the current tire pressure of each tire
is shown in the Serv.Serv. menu of the multifunc-
tion display.
Example: current tire pressure display
For information on the message display, refer
to the "Checking the tire pressure electroni-
cally" section (Y page 301).
Tire pressure
299
Wheels and tires
Z
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked at least once a month
when cold and inflated to the pressure rec-
ommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the Tire and Loading Information placard on
the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressure
label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If
your vehicle has tires of a different size than
the size indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the tire pressure
label, you should determine the proper tire
pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitor-
ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires are significantly underinflated. Accord-
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illu-
minates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-
inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle's han-
dling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substi-
tute for proper tire maintenance, and it is
the driver's responsibility to maintain cor-
rect tire pressure, even if underinflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination
of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
USA only:
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate if the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the
low tire pressure telltale. When the system
detects a malfunction, the warning lamp will
flash for approximately a minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will be repeated every time the
vehicle is started as long as the malfunction
exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illumina-
ted, the system may not be able to detect or
signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of rea-
sons, including the mounting of incompati-
ble replacement or alternate tires or wheels
on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing
one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle
to ensure that the replacement or alternate
tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue
to function properly.
It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire
pressure to that recommended for cold tires
which is suitable for the operating situation
(Y page 296). Note that the correct tire pres-
sure for the current operating situation must
first be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor.
If a substantial loss of pressure occurs, the
warning threshold for the warning message is
aligned to the taught-in reference values.
Restart the tire pressure monitor after adjust-
ing the pressure of the cold tires
(Y page 301). The current pressures are
saved as new reference values. As a result, a
warning message will appear if the tire pres-
sure drops significantly.
The tire pressure monitor does not warn you of
an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the
notes on the recommended tire pressure
(Y page 296).
The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn
you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the
tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the
event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the
vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid
abrupt steering movements.
The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warning
lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating
pressure loss or a malfunction. Whether the
warning lamp flashes or lights up indicates
whether a tire pressure is too low or the tire
pressure monitor is malfunctioning:
R
if the warning lamp is lit continuously, the
tire pressure on one or more tires is signifi-
cantly too low. The tire pressure monitor is
not malfunctioning.
R
if the warning lamp flashes for approx-
imately a minute and then remains lit con-
300
Tire pressure
Wheels and tires
stantly, the tire pressure monitor is malfunc-
tioning.
In addition to the warning lamp, a message
appears in the multifunction display. Observe
the information on display messages
(Y page 227).
It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunc-
tion of the tire pressure monitor to be indica-
ted. A malfunction will be indicated by the tire
pressure warning lamp flashing for approx-
imately one minute and then remaining lit.
When the malfunction has been rectified, the
tire pressure warning lamp goes out after a
few minutes of driving.
The tire pressure values indicated by the on-
board computer may differ from those meas-
ured at a gas station with a pressure gage. The
tire pressures shown by the on-board com-
puter refer to those measured at sea level. At
high altitudes, the tire pressure values indica-
ted by a pressure gage are higher than those
shown by the on-board computer. In this case,
do not reduce the tire pressures.
The operation of the tire pressure monitor can
be affected by interference from radio trans-
mitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones,
two-way radios) that may be being operated in
or near the vehicle.
Checking the tire pressure electroni-
cally
X
Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
2 (Y page 126) in the ignition lock.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Serv.Serv. menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
Tire PressureTire Pressure.
X
Press a.
The current tire pressure of each tire is
shown in the multifunction display.
If the vehicle has been parked for over
20 minutes, the Tire pressure will beTire pressure will be
displayed after driving a few minutesdisplayed after driving a few minutes
message appears.
After a teach-in process, the tire pressure
monitor automatically detects new wheels or
new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of
the tire pressure value to the individual wheels
is not possible, the Tire Pressure MonitorTire Pressure Monitor
ActiveActive display message is shown instead of
the tire pressure display. The tire pressures
are already being monitored.
Tire pressure monitor warning mes-
sages
The tire pressure monitor detects a pressure
loss in one or more tires:
R
If the tire pressure monitor detects a pres-
sure loss in one or more tires, a warning
message is shown in the multifunction dis-
play. The yellow tire pressure warning lamp
then lights up.
R
If the Please Correct Tire PressurePlease Correct Tire Pressure
message appears in the multifunction dis-
play, the tire pressure in at least one tire is
too low. The tire pressure must be corrected
when the opportunity arises.
R
If the Check TiresCheck Tires message appears in the
multifunction display, the tire pressure in at
least one tire has dropped significantly. The
tires must be checked.
R
If the Warning Tire MalfunctionWarning Tire Malfunction mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display,
the tire pressure in at least one tire has
dropped suddenly. The tires must be
checked.
Observe the instructions and safety notes in
the display messages in the "Tires" section
(Y page 227).
If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rota-
ted, the tire pressures may be displayed for
the wrong positions for a short time. This is
rectified after a few minutes of driving, and the
tire pressures are displayed for the correct
positions.
Restarting the tire pressure monitor
When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all
existing warning messages are deleted and the
warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the
currently set tire pressures as the reference
values for monitoring. In most cases, the tire
pressure monitor will automatically detect the
new reference values after you have changed
the tire pressure. However, you can also set
reference values manually as described here.
The tire pressure monitor then monitors the
new tire pressure values.
X
Set the tire pressure to the value recom-
mended for the corresponding driving situa-
tion on the Tire and Loading Information
placard on the driver's side B-pillar
(Y page 296).
Tire pressure
301
Wheels and tires
Z
Additional tire pressure values for different
loads can also be found on the tire pressure
table on the inside of the fuel filler flap
(Y page 296).
X
Make sure that the tire pressure is correct
on all four wheels.
X
Ensure that the SmartKey is in position 2
in the ignition lock.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Serv.Serv. menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
Tire PressureTire Pressure.
X
Press a.
The multifunction display shows the current
tire pressure for the individual tires or the
Tire pressure will be displayedTire pressure will be displayed
after driving a few minutesafter driving a few minutes message.
X
Press the : button.
The Use Current Pressures as NewUse Current Pressures as New
Reference ValuesReference Values message appears in the
multifunction display.
If you wish to confirm the restart:
X
Press a.
The Tire Press. Monitor RestartedTire Press. Monitor Restarted
message appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
After driving for a few minutes, the system
checks whether the current tire pressures
are within the specified range. The new tire
pressures are then accepted as reference
values and monitored.
If you wish to cancel the restart:
X
Press %.
The tire pressure values stored at the last
restart will continue to be monitored.
Radio type approval for the tire pres-
sure monitor
Country Radio type approval number
USA FCC ID: MRXMW2433A
FCCIC ID:MRXGG4 This device
complies with part 15 of the
FCC rules and with license
exempt RSS standards of Indus-
try Canada. Operation is subject
to the following conditions. (1)
This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2)
This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation. Le present
appareil est conforme d'indus-
trie Canada applicables aux
appareils radio exempts de
licence. L'exploitation est
authorisee aux deux conditions
suivantes. (1) L'appareil ne doit
pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) L'autisatuer de l'appareil
doit accepter tout brouillage
radioelectrique subi, meme si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en
compromettre le fonctionne-
ment. WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsi-
ble for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:"
before the radio certification
number only signifies Canada
technical specifications were
met.
FCC ID:MRXMC34MA4 This
device complies with part 15 of
the FCC rules and with license
exempt RSS standards of Indus-
try Canada. Operation is subject
to the following conditions. (1)
This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2)
This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation. Le present
appareil est conforme d'indus-
trie Canada applicables aux
appareils radio exempts de
302
Tire pressure
Wheels and tires
Country Radio type approval number
licence. L'exploitation est
authorisee aux deux conditions
suivantes. (1) L'appareil ne doit
pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) L'autisatuer de l'appareil
doit accepter tout brouillage
radioelectrique subi, meme si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en
compromettre le fonctionne-
ment. WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsi-
ble for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:"
before the radio certification
number only signifies Canada
technical specifications were
met.
Canada IC: 2546A-MW2433A
IC:2546A-GG4 This device com-
plies with part 15 of the FCC
rules and with license exempt
RSS standards of Industry Can-
ada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions. (1) This
device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference
received, including interference
that may cause undesired oper-
ation. Le present appareil est
conforme d'industrie Canada
applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploita-
tion est authorisee aux deux
conditions suivantes. (1) L'ap-
pareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et (2) L'autisatuer de
l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioelectrique subi,
meme si le brouillage est sus-
ceptible d'en compromettre le
fonctionnement. WARNING:
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority
to operate the equipment. The
term "IC:" before the radio cer-
tification number only signifies
Canada technical specifications
were met.
Country Radio type approval number
IC: 2546A-MC34MA4
Loading the vehicle
Instruction labels for tires and loads
G
WARNING
Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a
blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair
the steering and driving characteristics and
lead to brake failure. There is a risk of acci-
dent.
Observe the load rating of the tires. The load
rating must be at least half of the GAWR of
your vehicle. Never overload the tires by
exceeding the maximum load.
Two instruction labels on your vehicle show
the maximum possible load.
(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard
is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The
Tire and Loading Information placard
shows the maximum permissible number
of occupants and the maximum permissi-
ble vehicle load. It also contains details of
the tire sizes and corresponding pressures
for tires mounted at the factory.
(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the
B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle
identification plate informs you of the
gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up
of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occu-
pants, the fuel and the cargo. You can also
find information about the maximum gross
axle weight rating on the front and rear
axle.
The maximum gross axle weight rating is
the maximum weight that can be carried
by one axle (front or rear axle). Never
exceed the maximum load or the maxi-
mum gross axle weight rating for the front
or rear axle.
Loading the vehicle
303
Wheels and tires
Z
:
B-pillar, driver's side
Maximum permissible gross vehicle
weight rating
X
Specification for maximum gross vehicle
weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading
Information placard: "The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."
The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load
and luggage must not exceed the specified
value.
i
The specifications shown on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in the illustra-
tion are examples. The maximum permissi-
ble gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-
specific and may differ from that in the illus-
tration. You can find the valid maximum per-
missible gross vehicle weight rating for your
vehicle on the Tire and Loading Information
placard.
Number of seats
Maximum number of seats : indicates the
maximum number of occupants allowed to
travel in the vehicle. This information can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information
placard.
i
The specifications shown on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in the illustra-
tion are examples. The number of seats is
vehicle-specific and can differ from the
details shown. The number of seats in your
vehicle can be found on the Tire and Load-
ing Information placard.
Determining the correct load limit
Step-by-step instructions
The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575
pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor
Vehicle Safety Act of 1966".
X
Step 1: Locate the statement "The com-
bined weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your
vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information plac-
ard.
X
Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
X
Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX kilo-
grams or XXX lbs.
X
Step 4: The resulting figure equals the avail-
able amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount
equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150-lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
304
Loading the vehicle
Wheels and tires
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
X
Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehi-
cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in step 4.
Example: steps 1 to 3
The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total and cargo load capacities with
varying seating configurations and number and
size of occupants. The following examples use
a load limit of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for
illustration purposes only. Make sure you
are using the actual load limit for your vehicle
stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard (Y page 303).
The greater the combined weight of the occu-
pants, the lower the maximum luggage load.
Step 1
Example 1 Example 2
Combined max-
imum weight
of occupants
and cargo
(data from the
Tire and Load-
ing Informa-
tion placard)
1500 lbs
(680 kg)
1500 lbs
(680 kg)
Step 2
Example 1 Example 2
Number of peo-
ple in the vehi-
cle (driver and
occupants)
1 2
Weight of the
occupants
Occu-
pant 1:
175 lbs
(80 kg)
Occu-
pant 1:
175 lbs
(80 kg)
Occu-
pant 2:
195 lbs
(88 kg)
Gross weight
of all occu-
pants
175 lbs
(80 kg)
370 lbs
(168 kg)
Step 3
Example 1 Example 2
Permissible
load (maxi-
mum gross
vehicle weight
rating from
the Tire and
Loading Infor-
mation plac-
ard minus the
gross weight
of all occu-
pants)
1500 lbs
(680 kg) Ò
175 lbs
(80 kg) =
1325 lbs
(600 kg)
1500 lbs
(680 kg) Ò
370 lbs
(168 kg) =
1130 lbs
(512 kg)
Vehicle identification plate
Even if you have calculated the total cargo
carefully, you should still make sure that the
gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle
weight rating are not exceeded. Details can be
found on the vehicle identification plate on the
B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle
(Y page 303).
Permissible gross vehicle weight: the gross
weight of the vehicle, all passengers and the
load must not exceed the permissible gross
vehicle weight.
Loading the vehicle
305
Wheels and tires
Z
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maxi-
mum permissible weight that can be carried by
one axle (front or rear axle).
To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed
the maximum permissible values (gross vehi-
cle weight and maximum gross axle weight rat-
ing), have your loaded vehicle (including driver,
occupants and the load) weighed on a suitable
vehicle weighbridge.
All about wheels and tires
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-
ards
Overview of Tire Quality Grading
Standards
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are
U.S. government specifications. Their purpose
is to provide drivers with uniform reliable infor-
mation on tire performance data. Tire manu-
facturers have to grade tires using three per-
formance factors: : tread wear grade, ;
traction grade and = temperature grade.
These regulations do not apply to Canada.
Nevertheless, all tires sold in North America
are provided with the corresponding quality
grading markings on the sidewall of the tire.
Quality grades can be found, where applicable,
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
Example:
R
Treadwear grade: 200
R
Traction grade: AA
R
Temperature grade: A
All passenger car tires must conform to the
statutory safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
i
The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-
cific and may deviate from the values in the
illustration.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified U.S.
government course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half times as well
on the government test track as a tire graded
100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, how-
ever, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, ser-
vice practices and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction
G
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
!
Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage
to the drive train.
The traction grades – from highest to lowest –
are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as meas-
ured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and con-
crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy
road is always lower than on dry road surfa-
ces.
You should pay special attention to road con-
ditions when temperatures are around freezing
point.
Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum tread
depth of ã in (4 mm) on all four winter tires.
Observe the legally required minimum tire
tread depth (Y page 294). Winter tires can
reduce the braking distance on snow-covered
surfaces in comparison with summer tires. The
braking distance is still much further than on
306
All about wheels and tires
Wheels and tires
surfaces that are not icy or covered with snow.
Take appropriate care when driving.
Temperature
G
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
tion, or excessive loading, either separately
or in combination, can cause excessive heat
build-up and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds
to a level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B
and A represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Tire labeling
Overview
:
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard
(Y page 311)
;
DOT, Tire Identification Number
(Y page 310)
=
Maximum tire load (Y page 310)
?
Maximum tire pressure (Y page 299)
A
Manufacturer
B
Tire material (Y page 311)
C
Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity
and speed rating (Y page 307)
D
Load index (Y page 309)
E
Tire name
The markings described above are on the tire
in addition to the tire name (sales designation)
and the manufacturer's name.
i
Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-
ate from the data in the example.
Tire size designation, load-bearing
capacity and speed rating
G
WARNING
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-
city and the approved maximum speed
could lead to tire damage or the tire burst-
ing. There is a risk of accident.
Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model. Observe
All about wheels and tires
307
Wheels and tires
Z
the tire load rating and speed rating
required for your vehicle.
:
Tire width
;
Nominal aspect ratio in %
=
Tire code
?
Rim diameter
A
Load bearing index
B
Speed rating
General: depending on the manufacturer's
standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall
may not contain any letters or may contain
one letter that precedes the size description.
If there is no letter preceding the size descrip-
tion (as shown above): these are passenger
vehicle tires according to European manufac-
turing standards.
If "P" precedes the size description: these are
passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. man-
ufacturing standards.
If "LT" precedes the size description: these are
light truck tires according to U.S. manufactur-
ing standards.
If "T" precedes the size description: compact
emergency wheels with high tire pressure that
are only designed for temporary use in an
emergency.
Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal
tire width in millimeters.
Height-width ratio: aspect ratio ; is the size
ratio between the tire height and tire width
and is shown in percent. The aspect ratio is
calculated by dividing the tire width by the tire
height.
Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type.
"R" represents radial tires; "D" represents
diagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial
tires.
Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over
149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the
size description, depending on the manufac-
turer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).
Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diame-
ter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the
rim flange. The rim diameter is specified in
inches (in).
Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A is
a numerical code that specifies the maximum
load-bearing capacity of a tire.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit. The maximum permissible
load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on
the driver's side (Y page 303).
Example:
Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum
load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can
bear. For further information on the maximum
tire load in kilograms and lbs, see
(Y page 310).
For further information on the load bearing
index, see "Load index" (Y page 309).
Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the
approved maximum speed of the tire.
i
Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-
ate from the data in the example.
Regardless of the speed rating, always observe
the speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt
your driving style to the traffic conditions.
Summer
tires
Index Speed rating
Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
308
All about wheels and tires
Wheels and tires
Summer
tires
Index Speed rating
ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)
R
Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of
over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in
the size description, depending on the man-
ufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).
The service specification is made up of load-
bearing index A and speed rating B.
R
If the size description of your tire includes
"ZR" and there are no service specifications,
ask the tire manufacturer in order to find
out the maximum speed.
If a service specification is available, the
maximum speed is limited according to the
speed rating in the service specification.
Example: 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this exam-
ple, "97 Y" is the service specification. The
letter "Y" represents the speed rating. The
maximum speed of the tire is limited to
186 mph (300 km/h).
R
The size description for all tires with maxi-
mum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h)
must include "ZR", and the service specifi-
cation must be given in parentheses. Exam-
ple: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)"
indicates that the maximum speed of the
tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the
tire manufacturer about the maximum
speed.
All-
weather
tires
and win-
ter tires
Index Speed rating
Q M+S
1
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
T M+S
1
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H M+S
1
up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V M+S
1
up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
i
Not all tires with the M+S marking provide
the driving characteristics of winter tires. In
addition to the M+S marking, winter tires
also have the i snowflake symbol on the
tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfill the
requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers
Association (RMA) and the Rubber Associa-
tion of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire trac-
tion on snow. They have been especially
developed for driving on snow.
An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehi-
cle from exceeding the following speeds:
R
130 mph (210 km/h):
-
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles)
R
155 mph (250 km/h):
-
Mercedes-AMG SL 63
-
Mercedes-AMG SL 65
R
186 mph (300 km/h):
-
Mercedes-AMG SL 63 (Performance Pack-
age)
-
Mercedes-AMG SL 65 increased maxi-
mum speed
The speed rating of tires mounted at the fac-
tory may be higher than the maximum speed
that the electronic speed limiter permits.
Make sure that your tires have the required
speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The
required speed rating for your vehicle can be
found in the "tires" section (Y page 318).
Further information about reading tire data
can be obtained from any qualified specialist
workshop.
Load index
In addition to the load-bearing index, load
index : may also be imprinted on the side-
1
Or M+S i for winter tires.
All about wheels and tires
309
Wheels and tires
Z
wall of the tire. You will find this after the let-
ter that identifies the speed rating
(Y page 307).
R
If no specification is given: no text (as in the
example above), represents a standard load
(SL) tire
R
XL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced
tire
R
Light Load: represents a light load tire
R
C, D, E: represents a load range that
depends on the maximum load that the tire
can carry at a certain pressure
i
Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-
ate from the data in the example.
Maximum load rating
Maximum tire load : is the maximum permis-
sible weight for which the tire is approved.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit. The maximum permissible
load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on
the driver's side (Y page 303).
i
The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-
cific and may deviate from the values in the
illustration.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
US tire regulations stipulate that every tire
manufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN
in or on the sidewall of each tire produced.
The TIN is a unique identification number. The
TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retread-
ers to inform purchasers of recalls and other
safety-relevant matters. It makes it possible
for the purchaser to easily identify the affected
tires.
The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifica-
tion code ;, tire size =, tire type code ?
and manufacturing date A.
DOT (Department of Transportation): tire
symbol : marks that the tire complies with
the requirements of the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
Manufacturer identification code: manufac-
turer identification code ; provides details on
the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code
with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code
with four symbols.
For further information about retreaded tires,
see (Y page 318).
Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size.
Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used
by the manufacturer as a code to describe
specific characteristics of the tire.
Date of manufacture: date of manufacture
A provides information about the age of a
tire. The first and second positions represent
the week of manufacture, starting with "01"
for the first calendar week. Positions three and
four represent the year of manufacture. For
example, a tire that is marked "3214" was
manufactured in week 32 in 2014.
i
Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-
ate from the data in the example.
310
All about wheels and tires
Wheels and tires
Tire characteristics
This information describes the type of tire cord
and the number of layers in sidewall : and
under tire tread ;.
i
Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-
ate from the data in the example.
Definition of terms for tires and load-
ing
Tire ply composition and material used
Describes the number of plies or the number
of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire
tread and sidewall. These are made of steel,
nylon, polyester and other materials.
Bar
Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds
per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa)
are the equivalent of 1 bar.
DOT (Department of Transportation)
DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of
the U S Department of Transportation.
Normal occupant weight
The number of occupants for which the vehicle
is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms
(150 lbs).
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
A uniform standard to grade the quality of tires
with regards to tread quality, tire traction and
temperature characteristics. The quality grad-
ing assessment is made by the manufacturer
following specifications from the U.S. govern-
ment. The ratings are molded into the sidewall
of the tire.
Recommended tire pressures
The recommended tire pressure applies to the
tires mounted at the factory.
The Tire and Loading Information placard con-
tains the recommended tire pressures for cold
tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maxi-
mum permissible vehicle speed.
The tire pressure table contains the recom-
mended pressures for cold tires for various
operating conditions, i.e. differing load and
speed conditions.
Increased vehicle weight due to optional
equipment
The combined weight of all standard and
optional equipment available for the vehicle,
regardless of whether it is actually installed on
the vehicle or not.
Rim
This is the part of the wheel on which the tire
is mounted.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight
rating. The actual load on an axle must never
exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross
axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle
identification plate on the B-pillar on the driv-
er's side.
Speed rating
The speed rating is part of the tire identifica-
tion. It specifies the speed range for which the
tire is approved.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
The gross vehicle weight includes the weight
of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare
wheel, accessories installed, occupants, lug-
gage and the drawbar noseweight, if applica-
ble. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed
the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as speci-
fied on the vehicle identification plate on the
B-pillar on the driver's side.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross
weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of
the vehicle including all accessories, occu-
pants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar nose-
weight, if applicable). The gross vehicle weight
rating is specified on the vehicle identification
plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side.
All about wheels and tires
311
Wheels and tires
Z
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The maximum weight is the sum of:
R
the curb weight of the vehicle
R
the weight of the accessories
R
the load limit
R
the weight of the factory installed optional
equipment
Kilopascal (kPa)
Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre-
sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure
is bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent
of 1 bar.
Load index
In addition to the load-bearing index, the load
index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of
the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capa-
city more precisely.
Curb weight
The weight of a vehicle with standard equip-
ment including the maximum capacity of fuel,
oil and coolant. It also includes the air-condi-
tioning system and optional equipment if these
are installed in the vehicle, but does not
include passengers or luggage.
Maximum load rating
The maximum load rating is the maximum per-
missible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a
tire is approved.
Maximum permissible tire pressure
Maximum permissible tire pressure for one
tire.
Maximum load on one tire
Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated
by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle
by two.
PSI (pounds per square inch)
A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.
Aspect ratio
Relationship between tire height and tire width
in percent.
Tire pressure
This is pressure inside the tire applying an out-
ward force to each square inch of the tire's
surface. The tire pressure is specified in
pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal
(kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only
be corrected when the tires are cold.
Cold tire pressure
The tires are cold:
R
if the vehicle has been parked with the tires
out of direct sunlight for at least three hours
and
R
if the vehicle has not been driven further
than 1 mile (1.6 km)
Tread
The part of the tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Bead
The tire bead ensures that the tire sits
securely on the wheel. There are several steel
wires in the bead to prevent the tire from com-
ing loose from the wheel rim.
Sidewall
The part of the tire between the tread and the
bead.
Weight of optional extras
The combined weight of those optional extras
that weigh more than the replaced standard
parts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). These
optional extras, such as high-performance
brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-per-
formance battery, are not included in the curb
weight and the weight of the accessories.
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
This is a unique identifier which can be used
by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for
example for a product recall, and thus identify
the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the
manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire
type code and the manufacturing date.
Load bearing index
The load bearing index (also load index) is a
code that contains the maximum load bearing
capacity of a tire.
Traction
Traction is the result of friction between the
tires and the road surface.
312
All about wheels and tires
Wheels and tires
Treadwear indicators
Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distrib-
uted over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level
with the bars, the wear limit of á in (1.6 mm)
has been reached.
Occupant distribution
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at
their designated seating positions.
Total load limit
Nominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg
(150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats in
the vehicle.
Changing a wheel
Flat tire
The "Breakdown assistance" section
(Y page 278) contains information and notes
on how to deal with a flat tire. Information on
driving with MOExtended tires in the event of a
flat tire can be found under "MOExtended tires
(tires with run-flat characteristics"
(Y page 278).
Rotating the wheels
G
WARNING
Rotating the front and rear wheels if the
wheels or tires have different dimensions
may severely impair the driving characteris-
tics. The service brake or wheel suspension
components may also be damaged. There is
a risk of an accident.
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the
wheels and tires are of the same dimen-
sions.
!
On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure
monitor, electronic components are located
in the wheel.
Tire-mounting tools should not be used near
the valve. This could damage the electronic
components.
Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Always pay attention to the instructions and
safety notes when changing a wheel
(Y page 313).
The wear patterns on the front and rear tires
differ, depending on the operating conditions.
Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern
has formed on the tires. Front tires typically
wear more on the shoulder and rear tires in
the center.
On vehicles that have the same size front and
rear wheels, you can rotate the wheels accord-
ing to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's
warranty book in your vehicle documents. If no
warranty book is available, the tires should be
rotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to
10,000 km). Depending on tire wear, this may
be required earlier. Do not change the direc-
tion of wheel rotation.
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and
the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel
is rotated. Check the tire pressure and reacti-
vate the tire pressure monitor if necessary.
Direction of rotation
Tires with a specified direction of rotation have
additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of
hydroplaning. These advantages can only be
gained if the tires are installed corresponding
to the direction of rotation.
An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates
its correct direction of rotation.
Storing wheels
Store wheels that are not being used in a cool,
dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tires
from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.
Mounting a wheel
Preparing the vehicle
X
Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground.
X
Unload the vehicle. The jack can only be
used when the vehicle is unladen.
X
Apply the electric parking brake manually.
X
Bring the front wheels into the straight-
ahead position.
Changing a wheel
313
Wheels and tires
Z
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove
the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driv-
er's door.
The vehicle electronics now have status 0.
This is the same as the SmartKey having
been removed.
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the
Start/Stop button from the ignition lock
(Y page 126).
X
If included in the vehicle equipment, remove
the tire-change tool kit from the vehicle.
X
Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.
Securing the vehicle to prevent it from
rolling away
If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock,
it can be found in the tire-change tool kit
(Y page 277).
The folding wheel chock is an additional safety
measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling
away, for example when changing a wheel.
X
Fold both plates upwards :.
X
Fold out lower plate ;.
X
Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into
the openings in base plate =.
X
Place chocks or other suitable items under
the front and rear of the wheel that is diago-
nally opposite the wheel you wish to
change.
Raising the vehicle
G
WARNING
If you do not position the jack correctly at
the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle,
the jack could tip over with the vehicle
raised. There is a risk of injury.
Only position the jack at the appropriate
jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the
jack must be positioned vertically, directly
under the jacking point of the vehicle.
!
Only position the jack at the appropriate
jacking point of the vehicle. Otherwise, you
could damage the vehicle.
Observe the following when raising the vehi-
cle:
R
To raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-
specific jack that has been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incor-
rectly, the jack could tip over with the vehi-
cle raised.
R
The jack is designed only to raise and hold
the vehicle for a short time while a wheel
is being changed. It must not be used for
performing maintenance work under the
vehicle.
R
Avoid changing the wheel on uphill and
downhill slopes.
R
Before raising the vehicle, secure it from
rolling away by applying the parking brake
and inserting wheel chocks. Do not disen-
gage the parking brake while the vehicle is
raised.
314
Changing a wheel
Wheels and tires
R
The jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large,
flat, load-bearing underlay must be used. On
a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must
be used, e.g. rubber mats.
R
Do not use wooden blocks or similar objects
as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will
not be able to achieve its load-bearing capa-
city due to the restricted height.
R
Make sure that the distance between the
underside of the tires and the ground does
not exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).
R
Never place your hands and feet under the
raised vehicle.
R
Do not lie under the vehicle.
R
Do not start the engine when the vehicle is
raised.
R
Do not open or close a door or the trunk lid
when the vehicle is raised.
R
Make sure that no persons are present in
the vehicle when the vehicle is raised.
Vehicles with alloy wheels and hub caps:
the wheel bolts are covered by a hub cap.
Before you can unscrew the wheel bolts, you
must remove the hub cap. Two different var-
iants can be installed.
X
To remove: take socket ; and lug wrench
= from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 277).
X
Position socket ; on hub cap :.
X
Position lug wrench = on socket ;.
X
Using lug wrench =, turn hub cap : coun-
ter-clockwise and remove it.
X
To install: before installing, check hub
cap : and the wheel area for soiling and
clean if necessary.
X
Put hub cap : in position and turn until it is
in the right position.
X
Position socket ; on hub cap :.
X
Attach lug wrench = to socket ; and
tighten hub cap :.
The tightening torque must be
18 lb-ft (25 Nm).
i
Note that the hub cap should be tight-
ened to the specified torque of 18 lb-ft
(25 Nm). Mercedes-Benz recommends that
you have the hub cap installed at a qualified
specialist workshop.
X
Using lug wrench =, loosen the bolts on
the wheel you wish to change by about one
full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com-
pletely.
The jacking points are located just behind the
front wheel housings and just in front of the
rear wheel housings (arrows).
Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles with
AMG equipment: to protect the vehicle body,
the vehicle has covers installed next to the
jacking points on the outer sills.
Changing a wheel
315
Wheels and tires
Z
X
Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles
with AMG equipment: fold cover ?
upwards.
X
Position jack B at jacking point A.
X
Make sure the foot of the jack is directly
beneath the jacking point.
X
Turn crank C clockwise until jack B sits
completely on jacking point A. The base of
the jack must lie evenly on the ground.
X
Turn crank C until the tire is raised a maxi-
mum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.
Removing a wheel
!
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: during removal
and repositioning of the wheel, the wheel
rim can strike the ceramic-brake disc and
damage it. Therefore, you should proceed
carefully and get a second person assist to
you. Alternatively, you can use a second
alignment bolt.
!
Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a
dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub
threads could otherwise be damaged when
you screw them in.
X
Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com-
pletely.
X
Screw alignment bolt : into the thread
instead of the wheel bolt.
X
Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.
X
Remove the wheel.
Mounting a new wheel
G
WARNING
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged
wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the
wheel bolts to come loose. As a result, you
could lose a wheel while driving. There is a
risk of accident.
Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event
of damage to the threads, contact a quali-
fied specialist workshop immediately. Have
the damaged wheel bolts or hub threads
replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.
316
Changing a wheel
Wheels and tires
G
WARNING
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip
over. There is a risk of injury.
Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is on the ground.
Always pay attention to the instructions and
safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section
(Y page 313).
Only use wheel bolts that have been designed
for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-
sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
only use wheel bolts which have been
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the
respective wheel.
!
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: during removal
and repositioning of the wheel, the wheel
rim can strike the ceramic-brake disc and
damage it. Therefore, you should proceed
carefully and get a second person assist to
you. Alternatively, you can use a second
alignment bolt.
!
To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold
the wheel securely against the wheel hub
while screwing in the first wheel bolt.
X
Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact sur-
faces.
X
Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the
alignment bolt and push it on.
X
Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-
tight.
X
Unscrew the alignment bolt.
X
Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-
tight.
Lowering the vehicle
G
WARNING
The wheels could come loose if the wheel
bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the
prescribed tightening torque. There is a risk
of an accident.
Ensure that the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
are tightened to the prescribed tightening
torque.
If you are not sure, do not move the vehicle.
Contact a qualified specialist workshop and
have the tightening torque checked immedi-
ately.
X
Turn the crank of the jack counter-clockwise
until the vehicle is once again standing
firmly on the ground.
X
Place the jack to one side.
X
Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a cross-
wise pattern in the sequence indicated (:
to A). The specified tightening torque is
96 lb-ft (130 Nm).
X
Turn the jack back to its initial position.
X
Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle
tools in the trunk again.
X
Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles
with AMG equipment: insert the cover into
the outer sill.
X
Check the tire pressure of the newly moun-
ted wheel and adjust it if necessary.
Observe the recommended tire pressure
(Y page 296).
Vehicles with a tire pressure control sys-
tem: all installed wheels must be equipped
with functioning sensors.
When you are driving with the emergency
spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure moni-
Changing a wheel
317
Wheels and tires
Z
tor cannot function reliably. Only restart the
tire pressure monitor when the defective
wheel has been replaced with a new wheel.
All mounted wheels must be equipped with
functioning sensors for the tire pressure moni-
tor.
Wheel and tire combinations
You can ask for information regarding permit-
ted wheel/tire combinations at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
!
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use tires and wheels
which have been approved by Mercedes-
Benz specifically for your vehicle.
These tires have been specially adapted for
use with the control systems, such as ABS
or ESP
®
, and are marked as follows:
R
MO = Mercedes-Benz Original
R
MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)
R
MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-
tain AMG tires)
Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires may
only be used on wheels that have been spe-
cifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Only use tires, wheels or accessories tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain
characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise
emissions or fuel consumption, may other-
wise be adversely affected. In addition,
when driving with a load, tire dimension var-
iations could cause the tires to come into
contact with the bodywork and axle compo-
nents. This could result in damage to the
tires or the vehicle.
Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for dam-
age resulting from the use of tires, wheels
or accessories other than those tested and
approved.
Information on tires, wheels and approved
combinations can be obtained from any
qualified specialist workshop.
!
Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec-
ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previ-
ous damage cannot always be detected on
retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benz
cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded
tires are mounted. Do not mount used tires
if you have no information about their previ-
ous usage.
The recommended pressures for various oper-
ating conditions can be found:
R
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the B-pillar on the driver's side
R
in the tire pressure table on the fuel filler
flap
Observe the notes on recommended tire pres-
sures under various operating conditions
(Y page 296).
Check tire pressures regularly, and only when
the tires are cold. Comply with the mainte-
nance recommendations of the tire manufac-
turer in the vehicle document wallet.
Notes on the vehicle equipment – always
equip the vehicle:
R
with tires of the same size on a given axle
(left and right)
R
with the same type of tires at a given time
(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended
tires)
Exception: it is permissible to mount a dif-
ferent type or make in the event of a flat
tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires
with run-flat characteristics)" section
(Y page 278).
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.
It is therefore recommended that you addition-
ally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you
mount tires that do not feature run-flat charac-
teristics, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be
obtained from a qualified specialist workshop.
318
Wheel and tire combinations
Wheels and tires
Information regarding technical data
i
The data stated here specifically refers to
a vehicle with standard equipment. Consult
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the
data for all vehicle variants and trim levels.
Vehicle electronics
Tampering with the engine electron-
ics
!
Have the engine electronics and associ-
ated parts, such as control units, sensors,
actuating components or electric cables
serviced only at a qualified specialist work-
shop. Vehicle components may otherwise
wear more quickly and the vehicle's operat-
ing permit may be invalidated.
Installing two-way radios and mobile
phones (RF transmitters)
G
WARNING
The electromagnetic radiation from two-way
radios can interfere with the vehicle elec-
tronics if two-way radios are manipulated or
retrofitted incorrectly. This could jeopardize
the operating safety of the vehicle. There is
a risk of an accident.
You should have all work on electrical and
electronic components carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
If you incorrectly operate two-way radios in
the vehicle, the electromagnetic radiation
may interfere with the vehicle electronics,
for example if:
R
the two-way radio is not connected to an
exterior antenna
R
the exterior antenna is not correctly
mounted or is not low-reflection
This could jeopardize the operating safety of
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Have the low-reflection exterior antenna
installed at a qualified specialist workshop.
Always connect two-way radios to the low-
reflection exterior antenna when operating
in the vehicle.
!
The operating permit may be invalidated if
the instructions for installation and use of
two-way radios are not observed.
In particular, the following requirements
must be complied with:
R
only approved wavebands may be used
R
observe the maximum permissible output
in these wavebands
R
only approved antenna positions may be
used
Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation
may cause damage to your health and the
health of others. Using an exterior antenna
takes into account current scientific discus-
sions relating to the possible health hazards
that may result from electromagnetic fields.
The following antenna positions may be used if
RF transmitters have been properly installed:
Approved antenna positions
:
Rear fenders
i
On the rear fenders, it is recommended to
install the antenna on the side of the vehicle
closest to the center of the road.
Use the Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609
when retrofitting RF transmitters (Road Vehi-
cles - EMC guidelines for installation of after-
market radio frequency transmitting equip-
ment). Observe the legal requirements for
accessory parts.
If your vehicle has installations for two-way
radio equipment, use the power supply or
antenna connections intended for use with the
Vehicle electronics
319
Technical data
Z
basic wiring. Be sure to observe the manufac-
turer's Supplement when installing.
Deviations with respect to frequency bands,
maximum transmission outputs or antenna
positions must be approved by Mercedes-
Benz.
The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at
the base of the antenna must not exceed the
following values:
Frequency band Maximum
transmission
output
Short wave
3 - 54 MHz
100 W
4 m waveband
74 - 88 MHz
30 W
2 m waveband
144 - 174 MHz
50 W
Trunked radio system/
Tetra
380 - 460 MHz
10 W
70 cm waveband
400 - 460 MHz
35 W
Mobile communications
(2G/3G/4G)
10 W
The following can be used in the vehicle with-
out restrictions:
R
RF transmitters with a maximum transmis-
sion output of up to 100 mW
R
RF transmitters with transmitter frequencies
in the 380 - 410 MHz waveband and a maxi-
mum transmission output of up to 2 W
(trunked radio/Tetra)
R
Mobile phones (2G/3G/4G)
There is no restriction for antenna positions on
the outside of the vehicle for the following fre-
quency bands:
R
Trunked radio system/Tetra
R
70 cm waveband
R
2G/3G/4G
Identification plates
Vehicle identification plate with
vehicle identification number (VIN)
X
Open the driver's door.
You will see vehicle identification plate :.
Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only)
:
VIN
;
Vehicle model
Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada
only)
:
VIN
;
Paint code
i
The data shown on the vehicle identifica-
tion plate is used only as an example. This
320
Identification plates
Technical data
data is different for every vehicle and can
deviate from the data shown here. You can
find the data applicable to your vehicle on
the vehicle identification plate.
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
X
Move the front-passenger seat as far back
as possible.
X
Fold up floor covering : in front of the
front-passenger seat.
You will see VIN ;.
The VIN can also be found in the following
locations:
R
on the lower edge of the windshield
(Y page 321)
R
on the vehicle identification plate
(Y page 320)
Engine number
:
Emission control information plate, includ-
ing the certification of both federal and
Californian emissions standards
;
Engine number (stamped into the crank-
case)
=
VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)
Service products and filling capaci-
ties
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Service products may be poisonous and haz-
ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
Comply with instructions on the use, storage
and disposal of service products on the
labels of the respective original containers.
Always store service products sealed in their
original containers. Always keep service
products out of the reach of children.
H
Environmental note
Dispose of service products in an environ-
mentally responsible manner.
Service products include the following:
R
Fuels
R
Lubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)
R
Coolant
R
Brake fluid
R
Windshield washer fluid
R
Climate control system refrigerant
Comply with all valid regulations with respect
to handling, storing, and disposing of service
fluids.
Components and service products must
match. You should therefore only use products
that have been tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Information about tested and approved prod-
ucts can be obtained from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
You can identify service products approved by
Mercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions
on the container:
R
MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
R
MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)
Other designations or recommendations indi-
cate a level of quality or a specification in
accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g.
MB 229.51). They have not necessarily been
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Service products and filling capacities
321
Technical data
Z
Other identifications, for example:
R
0 W-30
R
5 W-30
R
5 W-40
Fuel
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. Improper handling
of fuel creates a risk of fire and explosion.
Avoid fire, open flames, smoking and creat-
ing sparks under all circumstances. Switch
off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary
heating before refueling.
G
WARNING
Fuels are toxic and harmful to health. There
is a risk of injury.
You must avoid fuels coming into contact
with skin, eyes and clothes or being swal-
lowed.
Do not inhale the fuel vapors. Keep children
away from fuels.
Keep doors and windows closed during the
refueling process.
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
observe the following points:
R
Immediately rinse the fuel off your skin
with soap and water.
R
If you get fuel into your eyes, immediately
rinse your eyes throughly with clean
water. Seek medical attention immedi-
ately.
R
Seek medical attention immediately if fuel
has been swallowed. Do not induce vomit-
ing.
R
Immediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with fuel.
Tank capacity
Model Total capa-
city
All models
19.8 US gal
(75.0 l)
Model Of which
reserve
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles
Approx.
3.7 US gal
(14.0 l)
All other models
Approx.
2.4 US gal
(9.0 l)
Gasoline
Fuel grade
!
Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
gasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni-
tion if you accidentally refuel with the wrong
fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel
system. Even small amounts of the wrong
fuel could result in damage to the fuel sys-
tem and the engine. Notify a qualified spe-
cialist workshop and have the fuel tank and
fuel lines drained completely.
!
Only refuel using unleaded premium grade
gasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON.
i
E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.
Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You can
refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel.
!
Only use the fuel recommended. Operating
the vehicle with other fuels can lead to dam-
age to the fuel system, engine and exhaust
system.
!
Do not use the following:
R
Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol
R
E100 (100% ethanol)
R
Gasoline with methanol
R
M100 (100% methanol)
R
Gasoline with metalliferous additives
R
Diesel
Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recom-
mended for your vehicle.
322
Service products and filling capacities
Technical data
!
To ensure the longevity and full perform-
ance of the engine, only premium-grade
unleaded gasoline must be used.
If standard unleaded gasoline is unavailable
and you have to refuel with unleaded gaso-
line of a lower grade, observe the following
precautions:
R
Only fill the fuel tank to half full with regu-
lar unleaded gasoline and fill the rest with
premium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon
as possible.
R
Do not drive at the maximum speed.
R
Avoid sudden acceleration and engine
speeds over 3,000 rpm.
You will usually find information about the fuel
grade on the fuel pump. If you cannot find the
label on the fuel pump, ask the gas station
staff.
i
For further information, consult a qualified
specialist workshop or visit
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
As a temporary measure, if the recommended
fuel is not available, you may also use regular
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of
87 AKI/91 RON. This may reduce engine per-
formance and increase fuel consumption.
Avoid driving at full throttle and sudden accel-
eration. Never refuel using gasoline with a
lower AKI.
i
The fuels you can use in your vehicle may
differ from the information in the Operator's
Manual depending on the country. The fuels
that have been approved for your vehicle
can be found on the instruction label on the
inside of the fuel filler flap.
Information on refueling (Y page 145).
Additives in gasoline
!
Operating the engine with fuel additives
added later can lead to engine failure. Do
not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does
not include additives for the removal and
prevention of residue buildup. gasoline must
only be mixed with additives recommended
by Mercedes-Benz. Comply with the instruc-
tions for use on the product label. More
information about recommended additives
can be obtained from any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
branded fuels that have additives.
The fuel quality available in some countries
may not be sufficient. Residue could build up
in the fuel injection system as a result. In such
cases, and in consultation with an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, the fuel may be mixed
with the cleaning additive recommended by
Mercedes-Benz. You must observe the notes
and mixing ratios specified on the container.
Engine oil
General notes
!
Do not use engine oil or an oil filter with
specifications deviating from those
expressly required for the prescribed service
intervals. Do not change the engine oil or oil
filter in order to set replacement intervals
longer than those prescribed. This could
otherwise cause damage to the engine or
exhaust gas aftertreatment.
Follow the instructions on the service inter-
val display for changing the engine oil. This
could otherwise cause damage to the
engine or exhaust gas aftertreatment.
When handling engine oil, observe the impor-
tant safety notes on service products
(Y page 321).
The engine oils are matched to the perform-
ance of Mercedes-Benz engines and service
intervals. You should therefore only use engine
oils and oil filters that are approved for vehi-
cles with maintenance systems.
For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,
consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Or visit the website
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
The table shows which engine oils have been
approved for your vehicle.
Service products and filling capacities
323
Technical data
Z
Model MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval
All models
229.5
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles: use only
SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils.
i
MB approval is indicated on the oil con-
tainers.
Filling capacities
The following values refer to an oil change
including the oil filter.
Missing values were not available at time of
going to print.
Model Capacity
SL 450
6.9 US qt (6.5 l)
SL 550
8.5 US qt (8.0 l)
Mercedes-AMG
SL 63
8.9 US qt (8.5 l)
Additives
!
Do not use any additives in the engine oil.
This could damage the engine.
Brake fluid
G
WARNING
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture
from the air. This lowers the boiling point of
the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the
brake fluid is too low, vapor pockets may
form in the brake system when the brakes
are applied hard. This would impair braking
efficiency. There is a risk of an accident.
You should have the brake fluid renewed at
the specified intervals.
When handling brake fluid, observe the impor-
tant safety notes on service products
(Y page 321).
The brake fluid change intervals can be found
in the Maintenance Booklet.
Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-
Benz in accordance with MB-Freigabe or MB-
Approval 331.0.
Information about approved brake fluid can be
obtained at any qualified specialist workshop
or on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
i
Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a
qualified specialist workshop and the
replacement confirmed in the Maintenance
Booklet.
Coolant
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot
components in the engine compartment, it
may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Let the engine cool down before you add
antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not
spilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughly
clean the antifreeze from components
before starting the engine.
!
Only add coolant that has been premixed
with the desired antifreeze protection. You
could otherwise damage the engine.
You can find additional notes on the coolant
in the following places:
R
in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Service Products, MB BeVo 310.1
-
on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com
-
on the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app
R
a qualified specialized workshop
!
Always use a suitable coolant mixture,
even in countries where high temperatures
prevail.
Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not
sufficiently protected from corrosion and
overheating.
i
Have the coolant regularly replaced at a
qualified specialist workshop and the
replacement confirmed in the Maintenance
Booklet.
Comply with the important safety notes for
service products when handling coolant
(Y page 321).
324
Service products and filling capacities
Technical data
The coolant is a mixture of water and anti-
freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It is responsible for
the following:
R
anti-corrosion protection
R
antifreeze protection
R
raising the boiling point
If the coolant has antifreeze protection down
to -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the cool-
ant during operation is approximately 266 ‡
(130 †).
The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentra-
tion in the engine cooling system should:
R
be at least 50%. This will protect the engine
cooling system against freezing down to
approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).
R
not exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down
to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat will not
be dissipated as effectively.
If the vehicle has lost coolant, add equal
amounts of water and antifreeze/corrosion
inhibitor.
Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/
corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordance
with MB Specifications for Service Products
310.1.
i
When the vehicle is first delivered, it is fil-
led with a coolant mixture that ensures ade-
quate antifreeze and anti-corrosion protec-
tion.
i
The coolant is checked with every mainte-
nance interval at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Filling capacities
Missing values were not available at time of
going to print.
Model Capacity
SL 450
Approx. 10.8 US qt
(10.2 l)
SL 550
Approx. 12.5 US qt
(11.8 l)
Mercedes‑AMG
SL 63
Mercedes‑AMG
SL 65
Approx. 10.5 US qt
(10 l)
Windshield washer system
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Windshield washer concentrate is highly
flammable. If windshield washer concentrate
gets onto hot components of the engine or
the exhaust system, it can ignite. There is a
risk of fire and injury.
Make sure that windshield washer concen-
trate is not spilled in the vicinity of the filler
neck.
!
Only use washer fluid which is suitable for
lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB Win-
terFit. Unsuitable washer fluid may damage
the lamp lenses of the headlamps.
!
Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit
washer fluid should be mixed together. The
spray nozzles may otherwise become
blocked.
Do not use distilled or de-ionized water. Other-
wise, the level sensor may give a false reading.
When handling washer fluid, observe the
important safety notes on service products
(Y page 321).
At temperatures above freezing:
X
Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture
of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g.
MB SummerFit.
X
Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts
water.
At temperatures below freezing:
X
Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture
of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit.
For the correct mixing ratio refer to the
information on the antifreeze reservoir.
i
Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB Sum-
merFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid
all year round.
Service products and filling capacities
325
Technical data
Z
Climate control system refrigerant
Important safety notes
The climate control system of your vehicle is
filled with refrigerant R‑134a.
The instruction label regarding the refrigerant
type used can be found on the radiator cross
member.
!
Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAG
oil approved by Mercedes-Benz may be
used. The approved PAG oil may not be
mixed with any other PAG oil that is not
approved for R-134a refrigerant. Otherwise,
the climate control system may be dam-
aged.
Service work, such as refilling with refrigerant
or replacing component parts, may only be
carried out by a qualified specialist workshop.
All applicable regulations, as well as SAE
standard J639, must be adhered to.
Always have work on the climate control sys-
tem carried out at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Refrigerant instruction label
Example: refrigerant instruction label
:
Symbol
;
Refrigerant filling capacity
=
Applicable standards
?
PAG oil part number
A
Type of refrigerant
Symbols : advise you about:
R
Possible dangers
R
Having service work carried out at a quali-
fied specialist workshop
Filling capacities
Model Refrigerant
All models
19.4 ± 0.4 oz
(550 ± 10 g)
Model PAG oil
All models
4.2 oz
(120 g)
Vehicle data
General notes
Please note that for the specified vehicle data:
R
the heights specified may vary as a result of
-
tires
-
load
-
condition of the suspension
-
optional equipment
R
optional equipment reduces the maximum
payload
Dimensions and weights
Model
:: Opening height
Mercedes‑AMG
vehicles
75.6 in - 76.1 in
(1920 mm -
1934 mm)
All other models
75.7 in (1923 mm)
326
Vehicle data
Technical data
Missing values were not available at time of
going to print.
Mercedes‑AMG
vehicles
Vehicle length
182.7 in (4640 mm)
Vehicle length
when opening/clos-
ing the roof
Vehicle width
including exterior
mirrors
82.6 in (2099 mm)
Vehicle height
51.2 in - 51.5 in
(1300 mm -
1308 mm)
Vehicle height
when opening/clos-
ing the roof
66.1 in - 66.6 in
(1679 mm -
1691 mm)
Wheelbase
101.7 in (2584 mm)
Turning radius
All other models
Vehicle length,
SL 450
182.3 in (4631 mm)
Vehicle length,
SL 550
182.3 in (4631 mm)
Vehicle length
when opening/clos-
ing the roof, SL 450
188.5 in (4787 mm)
Vehicle length
when opening/clos-
ing the roof, SL 550
188.5 in (4787 mm)
Vehicle width
including exterior
mirrors
82.6 in (2099 mm)
Vehicle height
51.8 in (1315 mm)
Vehicle height
when opening/clos-
ing the roof
66.8 in (1696 mm)
Wheelbase
101.8 in (2585 mm)
Turning radius
36.2 ft (11.04 m)
Vehicle data
327
Technical data
Z
328
